Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 390

Page 1 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Module 010 Civil 3D interface


The segments in this module use files found within the zip file linked to in the first section. If you want to do the
exercises in the same file as the instructor, do the following:
Download the zip file to your computer.
Extract the zip file to a local location. C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-trianing is a suggested loctation.
After extraction, there should be a folder called "010-exercise-files". The exercise files are located here.
The file used in a section will be in italics at the beginning of the section (e.g. Intro.dwg )
Open the file prior to the exercise to follow along with the instructor.

010.010 Introduction

Section updated:

9/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Example files
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/010/010-exercise-files.zip
21:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-010-001.mp4

010.010.001

Workspaces = tool arrangement and configuration


Workspace named Civil 3D
Can configure workspace for task-related needs
Workspace components:
Welcome Screen
Application Menu Browser
Quick Access Toolbar
Ribbon
Toolbars
Welcome Screen
Short tutorial videos
Step-by-Step Tutorials (like exercises)
Whats New Listing
Application Menu Browser
General File Functions
New, Open, Save, Save As, Export, Publish, Print, Drawing Utilities, and Close
Command Search
Recently Opened Files or Currently Open Files List
Quick Access Toolbar
Typical program commands
New, Open, Save, Plot, Undo/redo
Can add your own commands.
Add More Commands
Right-click icon Add to Quick Access Toolbar
Show Menu Bar
Ribbon
Tabs
Panels
Panel Pull-Downs
Thumb-tack will hold open the pull-down
Panel Options
Some icons have pull-down menus
Viewing Levels: Open, Minimized, and Tabs Only
Toolbars
Held icons prior to ribbon
Transparent Commands only one open by default
Can open any old toolbar
Command Line
For typed versions of commands
Palette can be docked at the top or the bottom of screen
Palette can be moved to another screen
Status Bar
Icons..
Function Key Alternatives

Page 2 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Drawing Scale
Always draw at 1 = 1
Drawing Scale controls size of text
And space between section views in array

010.020 Toolspace

Section updated:

9/1/2012

34:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-020-001.mp4

010.020.001

123456789_2.dwg
Toolspace tabs
Prospector
Settings
Survey
Toolbox
Preview Window
Active Drawing View/MasterView
Drawing Objects Access
Points, Point Groups, Point Clouds, Surfaces, Alignments (Profiles and Sections), Sites (Grading and Parcels),
Catchments, Pipe Networks (including Interference objects), Corridors, Assemblies, Intersections, and View
Frame Groups
Data Shortcuts
Surfaces, Alignments (and Profiles), Pipe Networks, View Frame Groups
Managing Objects
Right-click on object names for Properties or Edit Current Style
Styles for each object
Object styles, label styles, table styles, commands
Other settings, criteria or rules
Setting default styles
Right-click on object collection name (header)
Edit Feature Settings
Drawing Settings and Object Defaults
Commands
Macros for creation settings
Overall Drawing Settings
Right-click on drawing name
Units and Zone (coordinates)
Transformation (coordinates)
Object Layer defaults
Abbreviations (for labels)
Ambient Settings (drawing settings)
Survey Database Access
External to any drawing
Survey Databases (per project)
Equipment Database
Survey equipment data to aid analysis
Figure Prefix Database
Point codes that have linework
Manages the linework style, layer
Linework Code Sets
Field codes that start linework
Toolbox - Extra Functionality
Report Manager
Subscription Advantage Packs and Extensions
Autodesk Labs tools
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 3 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

To access tools
Right-click and choose Execute

010.030 Ribbon overview

Section updated:

9/1/2012

Section updated:

9/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

20:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-030-001.mp4

010.030.001

AliProf4thAve.dwg
Tabs for grouping of command panels
Panels for grouping of similar command icons
Icons for starting commands
Panel Pull-downs for less frequently used commands
Minimize Arrow icon
Minimize to Panel Buttons
Minimize to Panel Tiles
Minimize to Tabs
Show Full Ribbon
Home, Insert, Annotate, Modify, Analyze, View, Output, Manage, Vault
Help Express Tools Online Add-Ins
Context Ribbons
Specific to selected object

010.040 Layer Control


19:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-040-001.mp4

010.040.001

AliProf4thAve.dwg
Layers manage entities
Unlimited layers and names
Control color, linetype, lineweight, line thickness, plot/no plot, on/off
On/off versus freeze/thaw-both make layers invisible
Off still computes the graphics
Freeze does not compute the graphics
Civil 3D styles use of layers
Object has a layer
Objects components can have individual layers
Different styles could have different component layers
Object layer assignment
Settings tab, right-click on drawing name, Object Layer tab
WisDOT templates have layer standards set
Anything assigned 0 layer is new since 2010
These are default layers, could be changed at object creation
Modifiers for creating unique layers for new objects
None, the object does not create a unique layer
Prefix, a unique layer with name and Value field at beginning
Suffix, a unique layer with name and Value field at end
Asterisk holds place of objects name
Object Styles in the Display tab
List of objects components
Each component has a layer option

Page 4 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Component layers set to 0 allow objects layer to control


Layers for Labels
In Label Style General tab
Drawing Settings set default
Could be set differently than its object

010.050 Inquiry Tools

Section updated:

9/1/2012

Section updated:

9/1/2012

Section updated:

9/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

1:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-050-001.mp4

010.050.001

For reporting data from Civil 3D objects


Analyze tab, Inquiry panel
Fill in a field or two to report data
Types of Inquiries:
Point
Surface
Alignment
Profile and Profile View
Section and Section View
Corridor Sections

010.060 Layout Tabs


19:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-060-001.mp4

010.060.001

123456789_2.dwg
For plotting to scale
Layout tabs include:
The printable area of the paper
Titleblock information
Viewport(s) to display portions of modelspace
Turning on layout tabs
Right-click on model button
Choose Display
Viewports
When viewport is selected, viewport scale pop-up menu is available
Regen after changing the scale
As many viewports as you need
Can be any shape that you need
Paperspace
Titleblock
Dimensions and labels (ACAD labels)

010.070 Rotate View


7:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-070-001.mp4

010.070.001

123456789_3.dwg
Leaves paper, rotates model
More efficient use of paper
Free Orbit in layout viewport, outside orbit ring (maintains XY plane)
DVIEW/Twist to rotate view
Plan Production tools do this automatically

Page 5 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


010.080 Common and useful command lines

Section updated:

9/1/2012

Section updated:

9/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

29:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-080-001.mp4

010.080.001

123456789_2.dwg
All commands have a typed alternative
Some typed commands are quicker than switching ribbon tabs
This is not a comprehensive list just some helpful ones
All commands have a typed alternative
Some typed commands are quicker than switching ribbon tabs
This is not a comprehensive list just some helpful ones
<ESC>
<SPACEBAR> = Enter
<F1> = Opens Help to topic you are working with
<F2> = Expands command line to a window
<F3> = OSNAPS toggle
<SHIFT> + Right-Click Temporary OSNAP Overrides
<SHIFT> + <spacebar> = selection cycling
<CTRL> + Left-click select for some labels
<CTRL> + 9 = toggles Command Line palette
<CTRL> + 3 = toggles tool palettes
Z <ENTER> E <ENTER> = Zoom Extent (Fit View)
Z <ENTER> <ENTER> = real-time zooming
P <ENTER> = Pan
<DELETE> = Erase
PL for polyline
PE for polyline edit
DI for Distance command (slightly different than ribbon version)
FILEDIA, setting should = 1
CMDDIA, setting, should =1
GEOMARKERVISIBLITY = 0
OSNAPZ = if 1 then snaps to 3D objects (x/y/z)
if 0 then snaps to X/Y but ignores elevation z
OPTIONS = opens OPTIONS dialog box

010.090 Basic mouse operations


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/125/125-030-proj-dataset1.zip
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/125/125-030-proj-dataset2.zip
12:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-090-001.mp4

010.090.001

123456789_2.dwg
Three-button wheel mouse
Left-click = select
Right-click = context menus
Wheel operation
Roll forward/backward = zoom in/out
Click wheel = pan
Double-click wheel = zoom extents

Page 6 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Keyboard + Mouse clicks
<SHIFT> Right-click = Temporary OSNAPS menu
Hold <SHIFT> wheel-button = Orbit
<CTRL> + Left-click for some objects allows individual label editing
<SHIFT> + left-click = remove from selection set
MBUTTONPAN
= 1, pan
= 0, Temporary OSNAP menu
Right-click customization
In OPTIONS, User Preference tab, Right-click Customization button
Context sensitive
Repeat Last command

010.100 Steering wheel control

Section updated:

9/1/2012

Section updated:

9/1/2012

Section updated:

9/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

5:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-100-001.mp4

010.100.001

123456789_2.dwg
Navigation controls that follow your cursor
Sections of the wheel do different tasks
Zoom, pan, orbit, center
Open through the Navigation Bar
Different sized steering wheels depending on your preference
Set pivot point for orbits

010.110 Viewports
10:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-110-001.mp4

010.110.001

123456789_3.dwg
Divide screen into real-time windows
Individual zoom and pan control
Objects in different areas can be seen together (in context)
Configuring the screen
Corridor Section Editor is automated configuration
Manual configuration, View tab, Viewport panel, Set Viewports
In-canvas controls, minus sign

010.120 View styles


7:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-120-001.mp4

010.120.001

View Styles.dwg
Controls how objects are viewed in viewports
Can help provide visual perspective of objects
Can make visual analysis easier
Object Styles can affect how visual styles represent them
2D Wireframe
Realistic
Conceptual
2D and 3D Hidden
3D Wireframe
Sketchy, Shades of Gray, Shaded, et al

Page 7 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


010.130 Select similar

Section updated:

9/1/2012

Section updated:

9/1/2012

Section updated:

9/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

4:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-130-001.mp4

010.130.001

123456789_4.dwg
Selection set across entire drawing
Speeds up selection so there is less panning
You can remove from selection by <shift> left-click
Left-click select an object
Right-click, Select Similar
<SHIFT> + left click to remove anything from set

010.140 Managing saved views


8:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-140-001.mp4

010.140.001

123456789_2.dwg
Name and save predetermined views
Preset Views, Top, Left, Right, Isometric views
Users can create their own views in Model and Layouts
Some view settings can be recalled
Create and recall views:
View Tab, Views panel, list of views
in canvas controls, Manage Views

010.150 Xreference
21:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-150-001.mp4

010.150.001

123456789_2.dwg will be used in this segment but do not open it.


For bringing drawings behind design drawings
Reduces design drawing size
Overlays DWG files
Underlays DGN files
Attaches Images
Can be Unloaded or Detached
Binding brings the XREF into the current file
Reference fading control in Insert tab, Reference Panel pull-down
You can
label Civil 3D objects
sample data for sections
draft in relation to those referenced files
snap to Xrefd drawing entities
add data from references into design drawing if needed
Bind, for the entire file
NCOPY, for individual entities (not Civil 3D objects)
Insert tab, References panel, Attach
(or type XREF)
Identify file type to attach
DWG, DGN, PDF, Image

Page 8 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Attachment dialog
Location, Rotation, Scale (similar to a block)
Path Type: Relative path
Attachment versus Overlay

010.160 Data shortcuts

Section updated:

9/1/2012

15:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-160-001.mp4

010.160.001

Existing Surface.dwg
Overview
Provides selective object data for use in other files
Surfaces, alignments/profiles/pipe networks
Files must be attached to a project
Object geometry is in one file, can be referenced into many other files. Allows for different styles to be applied
to the same object in different references.
References can be used simultaneously
Control/distribution of geometry held in XML file
Data Shortcut Folder Relationship
Working Folder = Path where projects are stored (level above project folders)
Project Folder = in working folder path where project files are stored
_shortcut folder = inside Project folder, where actual data shortcuts reside
The data is in XML format
DO NOT go in here this is for Civil 3D to access/manage
If a project is moved, these locations are relative.
Data Shortcut Process
Right-click on Data Shortcuts
Set Working Folder
Right-click on Data Shortcuts
New (or Set) Project Folder
Right-click on Data Shortcuts
Create Data Shortcuts
Now that project path and folder are established, this step is repeated throughout project.

010.170 Xreference vs Data Shortcut concepts

Section updated:

9/1/2012

10:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-170-001.mp4

010.170.001

Both tools for referencing data in different ways. Data Shortcuts are more Civil 3D specific. XREFs are generally more
AutoCAD entities.
Civil 3D Objects will Xref and are usable
Data shortcuts
When you need data from surface, alignment, profile or pipes
View Frames for plan and profile sheets
When object interaction is needed
XREFS
Background information
Just for labeling, but not for interaction with other objects
Data shortcuts
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 9 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Alignment (for sample line creation)
XREFS
Everything else, especially the corridor

010.180 Starting a new file

Section updated:

9/1/2012

11:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-180-001.mp4

010.180.001

All new files start with a template (.DWT) file


DWT brings settings into new drawings
Similar to seed files
AutoCAD settings like text styles, linestyles, etc.
Civil 3D specific object and label styles
WisDOT provides two templates for new drawings
Wisdot12.dwt
Wisdot12-etopog.dwt
Use the New command
Application Menu Browser
Browser starts at DWT location
Browse and choose the appropriate template
Save the new DWG in location and with name
QNEW command
In Quick Access Toolbar
Begins file with default template
Default Template is set at Options Files Template Settings Default Template File Name for QNEW

010.190 Status Bar

Section updated:

9/1/2012

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

17:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-190-001.mp4

010.190.001

Status Bar
Icons..
Function Key Alternatives
Right-Click Settings
Status Bar Keys:
Constraints (CTRL-Shift-I)
Snap/Grid (<F9>)
Ortho Snap (<F8>)
Polar Track (<F10>)
OSNAP (<F3>)
3D OSNAP (<F4>)
Object Snap Tracking (<F11>)
Status Bar Keys:
Dynamic UCS (<F6>)
Dynamic Input (<F12>)
Lineweight
Transparency
Quick Properties (Ctrl+Shift+P)
Selection Cycling (Ctrl+W)

010.200 Basic tips


5:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-200-001.mp4

010.200.001

Borrowing a Civil 3D license

7:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-200-002.mp4

010.200.002

Adding a folder link to civil 3d folder locations

Page 10 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Module 020 Setting up a WisDOT project


020.010 WisDOT standards - Civil 3D project

Section updated:

7/1/2010

WisDOT Project Folder Structure


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/180/proj-fldr-struct.pdf
WisDOT Multi PS&E Project Folder
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/180/proj-fldr-struct-multi-pse.pdf
WisDOT Civil 3D Naming Conventions
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/180/c3d-naming-conv.pdf
5:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/020/020-010-001.mp4

020.010.001

WisDOT has established standards for workflows to maximize the ability to share data across many people
involved with a project
WisDOT Civil 3D projects will consist of MANY Civil 3D Drawing files. Managing them is imperative! Sharing data
seamlessly across the Project as well as with multiple Designers is a must.
To do this, WisDOT standards outline use of :
Standard Project Folder structure and locations
Standard Drawing File names
Standard Civil 3D Object names
Civil 3D objects are shared across the multiple Drawing files using:
Data Shortcuts
XReferences
Civil 3D projects are a collection of the input files, working drawing files, and data shortcuts used to manage all the
Civil 3D data associated with a project.
WisDOT standard Civil 3D Project Template that contains the standard folder structure. This Project Template is
placed in a unique Project ID folder on your Local Area Network. The unique eight character project ID is
numerical.
Project Template - Folder Structure contains the following folders
\_shortcuts DO NOT edit files in this folder. Data Shortcuts are automatically created when you create Data
Shortcuts in Civil 3D
\BaseData this folder is home to input files as well as your topographic mapping, existing surfaces, and ortho
photos. Subfolders include
Imagery; Mapping; Other; Survey
\Design this folder is home to your Design Data. Subfolders include
AliProf; Corridors; Edgelines; Quantities; Surfaces;ViewFrameGroups
\RW this folder is home to Right of Way type files and data
\SheetsOther this folder is home to Sheets other than Plan, Plan Profile, Right of Way or Cross Section
\SheetsPlan this folder is home to Plan, Plan/Profile and Cross Section type Sheets
Drawing (DWG) File names and locations are discussed as we step through the WisDOT vBook Modules
DWG file names are suggested and are somewhat flexible. The intent is so another person can look at your Civil
3D project and tell what a DWG file contains by looking at its name. Project Folder structure is not flexible. Any
suggested changes should be given to Methods Development to include in future project template updates (with
Standard Files)
All of the topics discussed in this Module are elaborated on in great detail as you go on in the vBook content. It is
very important that you follow the suggested workflow to accomplish tasks. Things like how you store a curve for
an Alignment can be done several ways with little or no effect on the overall product. How you setup and manage
your Projects data is something all together different. Consciously not using suggested file, and object/data
management can be a cause for a headache when it comes to putting everything together in the end. Remember,
our workflows are not always the most efficient ways to accomplish a task, but a great amount of thought went into
developing workflows so everything fits together. Please talk with Methods Development staff before you modify
workflows
If you have any questions about WisDOT vBooks, standards, workflows, etc, feel free to contact
WisDOT Methods Development support.cae@dot.wi.gov

020.020 Exercise DS0100 - Create Civil 3D project

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

2:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/020/020-020-001.mp4

Page 11 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


020.020.001

Exercise DS100 Create Project


Sample Project: N:\pds\c3d\12345678 (Training data at C:\WisDOT\Design\c3d\12345678)
Note: Project data is on the N drive at the above location, training data is kept on the C drive as shown in training
documentation. The remainder of this document will be using WisDOT training data and the
associated training project folder locations. Both project data and training data have identical folder structure inside
the ProjectID folder.
1:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/020/020-020-002.mp4

020.020.002

Set the Project Working Folder


ToolspaceProspectorRight-click Data Shortcuts
Click Set Working Folder
Select C:\WisDOT\Design\c3d folder (actual projects would use N:\pds\c3d for WisDOT staff)
Press OK button

1:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/020/020-020-003.mp4

020.020.003

Create a New Shortcuts Folder


Manage Ribbon...New Shortcuts Folder
Key in Project ID Name 12345678
Check Use Project Template
Select C:\Civil 3D Project Templates\WisDOTProjectTemplate folder
Press OK
The New Shortcuts folder creates the project ID folder and populates its standard subfolders. It also
prepares Civil 3D to store our project data shortcuts later.

Module 030 AutoCAD Fundamentals


The segments in this module use files found within the zip file linked to in the first section. If you want to do the
exercises in the same file as the instructor, do the following:
Download the zip file to your computer.
Extract the zip file to a local location. C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-training is a suggested loctation.
After extraction, there should be a folder called "030-exercise-files". The exercise files are located here.
The file used in a section will be in italics at the beginning of the section (e.g. Intro.dwg )
Open the file prior to the exercise to follow along with the instructor.

030.010 AutoCAD Basics

Section updated:

10/1/2012

AutoCAD Fundamentals exercise files


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/030/030-exercise-files.zip
15:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-010-001.mp4

030.010.001

Intro1.dwg
This fast-paced class is intended for existing CAD users who wish to get more out of their current AutoCAD or are
migrating to AutoCAD 2012 from Microstation. All of the topics have been chosen to ease the transition to Civil 3D
2012 from Microstation, BricsCAD or a version of AutoCAD prior to 2009.
You should be working in the Civil 3D workspace.

Before You Begin:


Make sure you have any mouse with a scroll wheel.
You have a working knowledge of Windows.
You know how to browse for files.
You know what a save icon looks like.
You know what an undo icon looks like.
You have used Microsoft Word or a similar word processing program.
You are working with AutoCAD from within the Civil 3D interface.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 12 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Workspaces

A workspace controls how and what you see on your screen. It tracks the contents of your Quick Access
Toolbar and if you have rearranged the tabs on your ribbon.
To work with ONLY base-AutoCAD tools, you can change your active Workspace to 2D Drafting and
Annotation. To work with a mix of Civil 3D and AutoCAD tools, use the Civil 3D Workspace.

Base AutoCAD Tools on the Civil 3D Home tab

Base AutoCAD Tools on the AutoCAD Home tab

MicroStation terminology vs AutoCAD terminology

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 13 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Things that exist in AutoCAD, but not Microstation


A Save button. AutoCAD behaves more like other Windows programs with its save functionality.
Paperspace and modelspace. Microstation uses the concept of sheet models to do what
AutoCAD does in layout mode.
Polar tracking at specific angles.
Undo for multiple actions.
Things that exist in Microstation, but not AutoCAD
Stream line string.
View attributes from Microstation would be equivalent to a mix of options from the Options dialog
box and settings found on the status bar of AutoCAD.
Monitor awareness for multiple views.
How Does AutoCAD relate to Civil 3D?

General Interface Intro


When you open up Civil 3D 2012, you will see many buttons, tools and icons.
The tools that you will use in the course of reading this document are:
The drawing area
Command line
Ribbon tabs
Ribbon panels
Toolpalettes
Model and Layout Tabs
Application Menu
Application Menu
The application menu replaces what many people remember as the File menu from pre-ribbon days.
When you first open the Application Menu you will see a list of the most recently used drawings.
At the Top of the Application menu is a command search to help you locate tools.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 14 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Quick Access Toolbar


This handy toolbar is available regardless of what tab is active. Later in this class you will be
customizing it to make it even more useful.

Ribbons
The ribbon interface may be new to you. Ribbons consist of tabs and panels. The ribbon allows for
more tools to be on the screen at once than the outdated toolbars and menu-type interface. The ribbon
uses tabs and panels to group together tools you will need for certain tasks.
Tabs
The tabs across the top, (Home, Insert, Annotate, Modify, Analyze, View, Output, Manage, and
Express Tools) represent different categories of tools. Each tab gives you a logical grouping of tools.
The main tab you will be working with is the Home tab.
When a tab is active, you will see the tools split into more specific categories in panels.
Panels
Panels bring specific types of commands together.
For example, lets look at the Draw Panel.
At the top of the panel are the more common tools. This panel can be expanded, as indicated by the
black dropdown arrow.

Click the black arrow to expand the panel. We see quite a few more tools.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 15 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Click the thumbtack icon in the lower left of the panel to keep the expanded view.

You may notice that some of the buttons are split into a command and a dropdown.
The dropdown button gives you multiple ways to execute a command. In the example shown here,
there are multiple ways to determine the size and location of a circle.

Command Line
The command line is how you and AutoCAD communicate to each other. When the command line
reads Command it is waiting for your next instruction or selection.
Get in the habit of looking at your command line frequently! Many AutoCAD and Civil 3D commands
heavily rely on this input.
As you start typing, AutoCAD will assist you in locating the command you are after. This is referred to as
AutoComplete.

Status Bar
Just below your command line is the Status Bar. When a status bar icon is shaded blue, it means that
the feature is turned on.
From Left to Right here is a listing of what each icon represents.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 16 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

InfoCenter
InfoCenter is an AutoCAD-specific web browser built into your screen. To search the online help,
Autodesk discussion groups or any of your favorite blogs, type the search item into InfoCenter and click
the binoculars icon.
The Communication center icon will check online to verify that you are using the most up-to-date version
of your software and inform you of any service packs.
This is also the toolbar where you can go directly to Help.
Viewport Controls
You will see the viewport contols in your model tab as well as when you are working in modelspace
using the viewports. This gives you a shortcut to display options, view directions, and visual styles.
For AutoCAD beginners, it is reccomended that you hide this tool. You will see where to change the
display of this element later in this chapter.
View Cube
The View Cube allows you to quickly change your view direction while keeping your eyes oriented with a
box.
By clicking on any part of the box you are taken to the correspnding view dierection in CAD.
While this is a very handy tool in 3D drafting, it has limited applications in 2D.
Navigation Bar
You will do the vast majority of panning and zooming with your mouse, however in the cases where you
need one of the navigation tools not provided by the mouse, the Navigation bar is available.
The most important command you will get to from the Navigation bar is the Zoom Window command.
To access the zoom extents tool, click the flyout in the zoom areas.
User Coordinate System (UCS) Icon
When you are working in coordinates near 0,0 the UCS icon will appear on the screen at 0,0. When you
are working far away from 0,0, the UCS icon will appear in the lower-left corner of the screen.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 17 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

For the duration of this class, be sure that your UCS icon appears with Y straight up and X pointing East.
Relocating or rotating the UCS is for advanced CAD users only.
Model and Layout tabs
The model tab is where you will do the vast majority of your drafting. The layout tabs are where you will
prepare your project for printing.
You will dive deeper into wotking with the layout tabs when you get into printing.
Dynamic Input
Dynamic input is on by default and is a very helpful tool. Information seen near your cursor is identical
to what you will see on the command line.
As you type, you will get the AutoComplete just as you do in the command line.
Whenever a command has multiple options, you will see the key-in version on the command line or you
can use your mouse to select from the dynamic input menu.

6:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-010-002.mp4

030.010.002

Intro1.dwg
Getting to Drawings
The first thing you will need to understand is how to open drawings. The best way to open an existing project is to
use the open icon from the Quick Access toolbar.
When you click Open, AutoCAD will take you to the most recently used directory. If this is your first time opening
up a drawing in AutoCAD it will take you to the Documents folder.
Be sure that the Files of type is set to DWG when opening a drawing. If this is showing another file type, you may
have clicked the wrong icon.
To access a recently used drawing, use the application menu. A shortcut listing of your 9 most recent files will be
listed immediately upon clicking the application menu icon. Depending on your version of AutioCAD, this may be a
big red A or a C for Civil..
As you open files, the oldest ones will drop off as new ones are added. You can force these items to stay on the
list by using the pushpin icon.

Starting New Drawings


What is a template?
A template is the starting point for new drawings. A template is a file that ends with a DWT extension. These
templates contain pre-defined standards for your drawings.
There are two ways to create new drawings. The new icon in the Quick Access toolbar is slightly different than the
New you will find under the application menu.
The New icon from the Quick access toolbar is Quick New or QNEW. If you are internal to WisDOT this should be
set up as WisDOT12.dwt.
The Application menu > New will always ask for a template.
General Navigation
Panning and Zooming
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 18 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Most of your panning and zooming will be done with your mouses wheel.
Roll the wheel forward to zoom in to an object.
Roll the wheel towards you to zoom out.
For zooming with the wheel, the location of your cursor is where AutoCAD centers the screen.
Press and hold the middle mouse wheel to pan the screen.
Double-click the middle mouse wheel to zoom extents.

Undo
The Undo command can now process multiple Undos at once. Click on the black drop-down arrow to the right of
the undo icon for a list of the actions that can be undone. Simply drag the cursor to pick the batch you wish to
undo.
View Cube
Located in the upper-right corner of the screen, the Viewcube allows for easy navigation in 3D environments. It is a
great way to keep an eye on the orientation of the drawing. You will see the Viewcube in Object Viewer and
modelspace viewports by default. It is common to turn off the Viewcube in 2D views.
By clicking on a portion of the box, you can quickly jump to isometric views. The home icon will take you back to
the Home view, which is SW isometric by default. Right-click on the Viewcube to reset the home view to the view
of your choice. Most people use the plan view, with north as up as their home view.

Viewport Controls
Viewport controls are another shortcut that can be used to control the display of your screen. Microstation has
similar tools in the View Control toolbar. In AutoCAD, these are a series of menus that allow fast changes to what
you are seeing on screen.
The [-] menu is where you can change how many model viewports are showing at once. This is also where you can
choose to turn the Viewcube off.
The [Top] menu will change to display the view you are in. This is an additional option for controlling the direction
you are viewing your drawing.
The [2D Wireframe] menu also changes depending on what Visual Style you are in. Visual Styles control how 3D
objects re displayed. In most cases while you are designing in Civil 3D, you will be working in the 2D Wireframe
visual style.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 19 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Exercise: Overview of AutoCAD 2012


In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by locating key elements of the AutoCAD drawing
screen.
Be sure you are able to identify the screen components in AutoCAD before moving on to the next exercises.
1. Open the drawing called Intro1.dwg Drawing contains a surface, a pipe and structures, an alignment, a
profile view and a 3D car (can you find it?).
2. Locate the Application Menu.
3. Locate the Quick Access toolbar.
4. Locate and Switch to the Annotate tab.
5. Locate the Block Panel
The Block panel is located on the Insert tab.
6. Click the lower left corner of the view cube.
You are taken to a SW Isometric view of the drawing.
7. Use the Viewport control to change the visual style to Conceptual.
The CAD objects should appear filled in.
8. Experiment with viewing the drawing from different aspects using the view cube.
9. Try some of the other visual styles to get a feel for what each one does.
10. When you are done, click Top. The viewcube may reveal that the image is upside down.
11. Use the arrows to spin the drawing so that N is pointed upward.
Change the visual style back to 2D wireframe. When you have completed this step, the drawing should appear as
it did when you first entered it.
10:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-010-003.mp4

030.010.003

Intro2.dwg
Selecting Things
It may sound simple, but knowing how to select objects efficiently in AutoCAD will make using Civil 3D much
easier.
The first thing you need to know is that if you are not actively in a command, AutoCAD is in a selection
mode.
After you are done with a command, the tool you are using is no longer active and you are back at a Command:
prompt in the AutoCAD command line.
This is very different for users who may be used to software that keeps you in a command until you switch tools
(such as Microstation).
All of the techniques discussed in this section will work outside of a command or at the Select Objects: prompt
when you start working with commands.
When you are not in a command, and you click on an object, you will see blue squares at key points. These blue
squares are called grips. If you click a grip, you can move or adjust the object.
If you are in a command, such as move, you will not see grips but you will see objects become dashed.

Window Selection
To select multiple items at once, use a selection window. Click on the screen where you have no CAD
objects and a selection window is started. Drag across your screen and you will see a temporary
rectangle forming.
The direction that you drag your selection window makes a difference. Dragging left to right across your
screen will give you a blue field with a solid line around it.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 20 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Only objects that are completely inside the blue area will become selected. Items that are partially in,
but cross the solid line are not selected.
Dragging right to left across your screen will give you a green field with a dashed line around it. Objects
inside the green area and anything touching the dashed line will become selected. Items that are
partially inside will also become selected.

Selection Cycling
Items that are drawn first tend to get covered up by items that are drawn after them. In AutoCAD this is
called Display Order. We will discuss display order later in this section.
A new addition to CAD is the selection cycling status bar icon. With this option turned on, you will be
prompted to pick an item from a list of choices.
Selecting, and then Right-clicking
It is important to get comfortable with using the right-click button on your mouse; in Civil 3D, rightclicking is very important.
Outside of a command, if you have an item or group of items selected, right-clicking will give you a list
of options that are specific to the item(s).
A very handy tool to know is the Select Similar command.
Select similar will look for objects of the same type on the same layer, and select them all in one shot.
Deleting Things
There are two main ways to erase objects in AutoCAD.
1. The easiest way is to select the objects you wish to remove, and then press the delete key.
2. If you want AutoCAD to prompt you to select Objects: use the erase command from the
modify toolbar.
Display Order
If you draw something in AutoCAD, and then draw another thing on top of the first thing, the second
thing will obscure the first thing where they overlap.
This becomes especially important when working with Civil 3D objects because you will frequently have
two objects in the same location of the XY plane.
Regardless of actual elevation, objects drawn on top of each other (i.e. they share the same XY space)
will take precedence over the items drawn before them. For instance, if cycle for selection isnt working,
use the Display order commands to get to the objects you want.
Select the object you wish to work with. Right-click and select display order.
Bring to Front takes the selected object and puts it in front of other objects that intersect it.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 21 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Send to Back pushes the selected object behind all the others that it intersects.
Bring Above Object moves the selected entity on top an object you select.
Send under Object moves the selected entity behind the object you select.
Display order has no effect on actual elevation. It just impacts graphic display.
Exercise: Selection Practice
In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by selecting objects.
1. Open the drawing called Intro2.dwg
This drawing contains a number of elements that you will use to practice selecting objects.
There is purposely some junk items for practice deleting things.

2. Use a left- to right crossing window to select the three green polylines closest to station 0+00 in
the drawing.
Note that this type of selection window only captures objects that are completely inside of the
box.
3. Press ESC to de-select the objects.
4. In the same location, use a Right-to-left crossing window to select objects.
This time, many more objects become selected.
5. Press ESC to de-select the objects.
6. Click on any one of the blocks representing a tree.
7. Right-click and pick Select Similar.
All of the trees become selected, as long as they are:
On the same layer
Have the same block name.
8. Press ESC to de-select the objects.
You should not have any items selected.
9. In the same area of interest, select one of the white/black lines.
10. Right-click and pick select similar.
11. Press DELETE on your keyboard.
Depending on which line you originally selected, your result may vary. Some of the lines are
actually polylines and some are segments of large radius arcs.
Pressing the delete key on your keyboard will remove the items you had selected.
12. Select one of the small circles in the area of interest and one of the remaining lines.
Both objects are selected.
13. Right-click and pick select Similar.
All the circles and like lines will become selected.
14. From the Home tab, Modify panel, click the Erase icon.
The selected objects are deleted.
15. Repeat the previous steps to delete the remaining extraneous objects.
The drawing should appear cleaner.
16. Turn on the Cycle for Selection status bar icon.
Cycle for Selection is now on.
17. Click one of the ROW lines.
Cycle for selection window reveals that there are multiple objects hiding under the ROW lines.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 22 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


18. Highlight the arc from the selection dialog.
19. Press DELETE on your keyboard.
20. Turn off Cycle for Selection.
The Selection dialog will not automatically appear.
21. Save and close the drawing. End of exercise.

030.020 Starting to Draw

Section updated:

10/1/2012

13:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-020-001.mp4

030.020.001

Dynamic Input.dwg
Introduction
Before you can truly understand the AutoCAD coordinate system and units, it will help to know several drawing
tools.
You will be working with the Line tool and Rectangle tool, both of which are located on the Home tab > Draw panel.
You will need to click the line tool fly-out and select Create Line. Notice there are many surveyor and civil-friendly
ways to define your lines.
As you move your cursor around, you will see the dynamic input display your current coordinate. When you first
start the line command, the first click establishes the start point of the line.
After you commit the first endpoint to the drawing, the dynamic input cursor changes slightly. The tool now shows
your distance and angle away from the previous click location.
The second click establishes the second point on the line and so on.
When you want to exit the Line tool, press enter on your keyboard.

Dynamic Input and Coordinates


AutoCAD operates in a traditional XY coordinate system with the origin at 0,0.
With dynamic input turned on it is easy to draw lines at specific locations with desired length.
Using Dynamic input, you can type in desired coordinates for the start of a line. Typing 4,5 will indicate to CAD that
you wish to start the line 4 units from 0 in the X direction and 5 units from 0 in the Y direction. We call this type of
measurement from 0 an absolute coordinate.
The start of any geometry (i.e circles, rectangles, lines, etc.) is always absolute.
For the second click, you can specify a relative coordinate. Because dynamic input is turned on, you would type in
3,4 for the example above (not 7,9). The comma tells CAD that the information you are giving it is a change in the
X and Y coordinate. Dynamic input ensures that the input is relative to the last location we clicked.
With dynamic input ON in the status bar, only the first click in drawing is absolute. All other input is relative. With
dynamic input OFF in the status bar all input is absolute.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 23 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Dynamic Input and Angles


Dynamic input also affects how angles are interpreted by AutoCAD.
With dynamic input ON, the direction an angle goes (clockwise vs counter-clockwise) depends on where your
cursor is relative to 0 degrees.
With dynamic input OFF, all positive angles are measured counter-clockwise from 0 degrees.
You can press F12 on your keyboard to toggle Dynamic Input on/off.
In most cases, you want dynamic input turned on. That way you can specify lengths and angles using the tab key
on your keyboard.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 24 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Exercise: Dynamic Input


In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by drawing objects with dynamic input on and
with dynamic input off.
If you make any mistakes, use Undo in the command line to go back a step.
Be sure you understand the difference between coordinate entry with and without this status bar tool.
1. Open the drawing called Dynamic Input.dwg
This drawing contains some labels to help you understand where you are in space.
2. Verify that dynamic input is ON.
3. Start the rectangle tool.
The tool tip and the command line will prompt you Specify First Point
4. Type in 5,5 then press ENTER.
You have set down the first corner of the rectangle and you are prompted to specify the other corner.
5. Type in 3,2 then press ENTER.
A 3x2 rectangle has been created in your drawing.
6. Turn dynamic input off.
7. Start the rectangle tool.
As before, you are prompted for the first point.
8. Type in 5,5 then press ENTER.
You have set down the first corner of the rectangle in the same location as the first rectangle.
9. Type in 3,2 then press ENTER.
This time, instead of creating a rectangle of the same size as the previous steps, it has created a rectangle
where the second corner went to the overall location 3,2.
With dynamic input on, you created a rectangle with dimensions 3,2.
With dynamic input off the second rectangle went to the coordinate 3,2.
10. Turn dynamic input back on. (You can press F12 on your keyboard to toggle Dynamic Input on/off)
11. Start the line tool.
You are prompted to specify the first point.
12. Type in 10,8 then press ENTER on the keyboard.
The endpoint of the line is placed at 10, 8 and you are prompted to specify the next point.
13. With your mouse slightly below the horizontal guideline, type 5 TAB 65 and press ENTER.
You now have a line that is 5 units long 65 degrees down from due East.
14. You are still in the line tool and prompted to select the next point.
15. With your mouse slightly above the horizontal guideline, type 5 TAB 65 and press ENTER.
The result should be a line 5 units long 65 degrees counter-clockwise from due East.
16. Press ESC. The command is complete.
17. Double-click your middle mouse wheel.
This will Zoom to the extents of the drawing.
Save and close the drawing. End of Exercise.
18:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-020-002.mp4

030.020.002

DrawTools1.dwg
Drawing Lines, Polylines and 3D polylines
The differences between lines, polylines and 3D polylines are significant to the Civil 3D world. All of these
commands are located on the Home tab...Draw panel
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 25 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Lines
An AutoCAD line is any two points in space.
A line can have differing elevations at each end.
The differing elevations may be a result of snapping to nodes of different elevation.
Be aware that a chain of single lines will not join if they have a Delta Z value other than 0.
Also, if you convert a line to a polyline, check the resulting polyline elevation. The result may be unexpected,
as polylines can only be at one elevation.

Polylines
You may not realize it, but you have already been working with polylines. The rectangles you used in the previous
section are just a special case of a polyline. The term Polyline refers to a 2D polyline. A 2d polyline is a chain of
line segments and/or arcs at the same elevation.
A polyline can be at an elevation, but every vertex is at the same elevation.
When you start the polyline command, if you happen to snap to something at an elevation, the rest of your line will
all be at the same elevation.

3D Polylines
A 3D polyline is also a chain of line segments, but it cannot contain arcs. Each vertex of a 3D polyline can be at
different elevations.
You can edit each vertex independently through the properties.

When you get into Feature Lines in Civil 3D, there are much slicker ways to set elevations.

Other general tidbits about lines:


Avoid Splines. Do not use these! You may receive a drawing from someone who thought splines
looked pretty when they drew contours in base AutoCAD.
In this situation use SPLINEDIT command to convert splines to polylines.
If you want to join individual segments together and they are at the same elevation and do not
have gaps at the endpoint, use the Join command from the Modify panel.
If you have individual line segments that do not touch perfectly and wish to convert them to a
polyline use the PEDIT command.
1. Start the PEDIT command.
2. Type M for Multiple.
3. When you are prompted to convert objects to polylines, hit enter for yes.
4. Type J for join. (Then enter)
5. If there are gaps between the lines, type a fuzz distance that will force the lines to close.
6. The command line will report how many segments were joined. If fewer segments were
joined than you expected there are two possible causes:
The lines are at differing elevations. (Use the FLATTEN command to fix)
The fuzz distance is not large enough to close the gaps.
If you have objects that you wish to smoosh down to zero elevation, use the FLATTEN command.
FLATTEN pushes 3D polylines, polylines and lines down to elevation 0. When asked if youd like to
remove hidden lines, Yes will convert the object to a 2D polyline, and will remove any vertices that are
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 26 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

not visible in plan view. If you dont wish to change the object type, use NO when asked to remove
hidden lines.
Circles
Drawing Circles is one of the most fundamental aspects of working in AutoCAD.
If you go directly for the main circle icon, you will get the most simple version of the tool.
Simply click or type in the coordinates of the radius point, then Key-in or click to set the radius distance.
Many variations of the circle command exist, depending on how you wish to fit the circle into your
project.
Arcs
Like circles, the arc tool has many variations, depending on what info you are given ahead of time.
AutoCAD creates arcs in a counterclockwise fashion - keep this in mind as you draw.
Working with arcs is one of the few places where it can be advantageous to turn off dynamic input. F12
key on your keyboard will toggle on or off dynamic input on the fly.
Civil 3D users have additional arc tools that do not exist in base-AutoCAD.
The end result of these tools is still an AutoCAD arc, but users often find that these fit a civil drafting
scenario more than the traditional AutoCAD arc tools.
Exercise: Starting to Draw
As you draw, you will be given coordinates, lengths and angles with which to draw your objects. All the
keying-in may seem cumbersome - but it is good practice. In the next segment, you will learn some
tools that will eliminate the need for so much typing.
1. Open the drawing called DrawTools1.dwg
In case you are wondering: Yes - theres a much easier way to accomplish the following drawing task.
However, I want you to get the feel for the Dynamic input and getting used to looking at either the
command line or the tooltips for feedback.
2. Turn your Dynamic Input on in the status bar.
3. Start the polyline command.
4. When prompted for the start point, Key-in 500,500 ENTER.
5. When prompted for the next point on the line, Key-in 100 TAB 0 ENTER.
6. Hit the down arrow on your keyboard and select Arc. (Alternately, you can type in A and press
ENTER)
7. Key-in 40 TAB 45. Because you have dynamic input on, pay attention to the location of your
cursor when you Key-in the 45 angle.
Hint: If you goof, you can always type U for UNDO at the command line. Using Undo from within
a command will only undo one step. If you press escape and press the main undo, you will
remove the entire polyline and will need to start over.
8. Hit the down arrow on your keyboard and select Line. (Alternately, you can type in L and press
ENTER)
9. Make sure your cursor is below the last point you drew dynamic input is on. Key-in 100 TAB 90
ENTER.
10. Press ESC when done. Your drawing will resemble the following image
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 27 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


11. Start the default circle command again.
12. Key-in: 750,600 ENTER as the center point of the circle.
13. Key-in a radius of 15 and press ENTER.
The house in the drawing now has a swimming pool.
Your next task will be to add curves within the intersection by experimenting with various arc
creation tools.
14. Start the Start-Center-End arc command.

15. Zoom into the NW quadrant of the intersection. Because base-AutoCAD arcs always want to go
counter clockwise use the endpoint object snap (the green square thing) to select the first point as
shown below.
16. You are now prompted for the center of the arc. Use the endpoint snap again to select where
the two grey construction lines come together at a 90 degree angle
17. You are now prompted for the endpoint of the arc, click where the curve should end, at the
endpoint of the vertical line. The first arc is now complete.
18. Click the arc tool again, but this time, choose Start, Center Angle.
19. Click the vertical line in the SE quadrant to start the arc.
20. Click the center as the intersection of the construction lines.
21. Type in 90 ENTER as the included angle.
The completed arc will look like the following image.
22. Use the arc tool of your choosing to complete the SE quadrant.
End of Exercise.

030.030 Object Snaps

Section updated:

10/1/2012

11:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-030-001.mp4

030.030.001

oSnaps.dwg
Object Snaps enable you to quickly select exact geometric points on existing entities without having to know the
exact coordinates of those points.
Use object snaps to draw more precisely. You can make sure that object truly touch or are drawn the way you
intended.
The most common object snaps youll use are endpoint, midpoint, center, node and intersection.
If you right-click on the OSNAP icon at the bottom of your screen youll see a list of the available snaps.
The object snaps highlighted in blue are referred to as Running snaps. All running snaps are active when the
object snap icon is turned on in the command line.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 28 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Most Common Running Object Snaps


Endpoint - Endpoint grabs the ends or vertices of any type of line or arc.
Midpoint - Midpoint grabs the halfway point between two vertices of any line or arc.
Center - Center grabs the radius point of any circle, ellipse or arc. To use this, you hover your cursor over the
object.
Insert - Insert snaps to the insertion point of blocks or text.
Intersection - For two objects at the same elevation, intersection picks the point where they cross. (If the objects
are at different elevations, use Apparent Intersection)
Node - Snaps to the insertion point of an AutoCAD point or Civil 3D survey point.
When using right-click to access the running snaps, you can only make one change at a time. After one click, the
menu disappears back into the status bar.
To make several changes at once you can right-click on the object snaps icon and go to Settings.

Object Snap Settings


In the settings box you can check the snaps you want as your active running snaps.
A cleared checkbox means that the object snap will not be on during drawing commands if your object snap button
is on.

Later in this chapter you will examine working with object snaps that we are leaving unchecked here.

Object Snap Tips


If you want your object snaps to ignore the elevation of the object you are picking, type OSNAPZ
at the command line. Set this variable to 1.
Be patient when using object snaps on complex objects. Sometimes it takes a moment for the
object snaps to sort out all the data you have on your screen. Pause your cursor where you expect
the object snap to appear and it will pop up.
Be aware of your zoom level when running object snaps. OSNAPS work even when the object you
are snapping to is off-screen. For example, the closest endpoint of a line may be outside of your
screens view. When you click, the line you are drawing will jump to that off-screen spot.
You can turn object snaps on/off on the fly by using the F3 key.
If AutoCAD doesnt seem to be grabbing the correct objects, use the TAB key to force the object
snap to jump to the next nearest location.
Exercise: Basic Object Snaps
1. Open the drawing oSnaps.dwg
In the SE portion of the drawing there is a grid and some lines that you will use to experiment
with the object snaps that you learned in this section.
2. Set your running object snaps to:
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 29 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


1. Endpoint
2. Midpoint
3. Center
4. Node
5. Intersection
3. Start the line command and snap to the end point of the long parcel as shown.
4. Next, use the intersection object snap to snap to the grid lines as shown.
5. Use the Node osnap to locate the Autocad point representing the property corner.
6. Use the midpoint of the right-most vertical grid line to place the next point.
7. Lastly, use object snaps to connect back to the nearest parcel, as shown.
8. Use the center object snap to create a line through the centers of all three circles.
End of exercise. Save the drawing.

23:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-030-002.mp4

030.030.002

oSnaps.dwg
Some of the most useful object snaps are ones that are generally not used as running object snaps. The snaps you
will use in this section are usually accessed through object snap overrides.
Object snap overrides are object snaps that are only active for one click. AutoCAD filters out all other object snaps
until you complete the action.
Object snaps commonly used with Osnap Overrides
Mid Between Two Points
This is more of a snap tool than a true object snap. Mid Between Two points leverages your running snaps to find
a midpoint where there is no object. For example, in the image to the left, a circle was drawn exactly halfway
between the end points of the lines. Using the Mid Between Two points option eliminates the need to draw a
temporary construction line for this purpose.
Quadrant
Quadrant object snap will help you find the 3 oclock, 6oclock, 9 oclock and 12 oclock positions on any circle or
arc.
Tangent
The tangent snap helps you find the point where a line touches, but does not pass through, a circle or an arc. If
you are drawing the line from an arc to another point, you will initially see the deferred tangent symbol. Deferred
tangent means that AutoCAD needs more information from you to find the final location of the line.
Perpendicular
If you need to draw perpendicular to a non-standard angle, the perpendicular object snap will come in handy.
Note: There is a parallel object snap but it tends to be cumbersome to use. Later in this class, we will use the
offset command, which does a better job creating parallel lines.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 30 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Node
Some users find the node Snap helpful if working with AutoCAD points. Many blocks contain AutoCAD points so
the node snap may be useful when snapping to a point of interest that is not handled by other snaps.
Nearest
Nearest is a catch-all object snap that selects any point on an object. Be careful, as the nearest snap has no
regard for maintaining regular angles.
How to Access Object Snap Overrides
To access these snaps you must be in the middle of a drawing command. Press the SHIFT key on your keyboard.
If you hold the shift key for a moment you will notice a symbol pop up indicating it is ok to continue.
At that point right-click your mouse to show the object snap override menu.
Select the object snap that you want active for the proceeding click. The object snap you choose will only be
active, and all other object snaps will be temporarily disabled for one click.
Why Use Object Snap Overrides
Many people ask, Why not just turn on all the object snaps as running snaps? Some object snaps interfere with
other snaps. For example, a quadrant snap may be very close to a tangent location on a circle. By accessing
these as overrides, it is easier to pinpoint the location you are after.
Additionally, by only keeping your most frequently used object snaps as running snaps and using the object snap
overrides for more exotic snaps, you will decrease the amount of clutter on your screen.
There is a lot to pay attention to while you are drafting and more information on screen isnt always better.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 31 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Exercise: Using Object Snap Overrides


In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by completing the drawing.
You will use object snap overrides to access the following:
Mid Between Two points
Node
Tangent
Perpendicular
1. Keep working in (or open) oSnaps.dwg (You do not need to have completed the previous exercise before
continuing.
This drawing contains some cad elements that you will be working off of. You will work the tangents first
ang go back to complete the arcs afterward. Verify that your object snaps are turned on. The object
snaps are on and should be set as they were before from the previous exercise. In particular, make sure
midpoint running snap is turned on. While doing this lesson, you may wish to turn off polar tracking.
Once you get more comfortable with object snap overrides you can keep this on. The extra information on
your screen resulting from polar tracking may be distracting to new users.
2. Start the line command.
3. Hold down Shift and right click your mouse.
4. Select Mid Between 2 Points.
5. Use the endpoints of the west-most property lines to find the mid-point between these locations.
The first line of the exercise is started halfway between the two lots.
6. Start the line command again; use the Node snap to select the node representing the first point of the road.
7. Repeat step 6 to connect to the second point on the alignment.
8. Next, use Shift + right click to turn on the tangent snap.
9. Snap to the tangent of the first circle, as shown.
10. Press Escape when complete.
11. Start the line command again.
12. Use the tangent snap to create a line tangent to the west circle and tangent to the east circle. Click when
you see the deferred tangent glyph appear.
13. Press escape when complete.
14. Start the line command one last time and use the tangent snap from the east circle, and the Perpendicular
snap to the vertical line as shown.
You will see these as deferred until the step is complete. This indicates that CAD is still looking for more
information before it can compute the final location.
Once the tangents are complete, the next step will have you create curves using the arc command that is
specific to Civil 3D. You will work west to east along the tangents you just created.
15. From the draw panel, select the curves tool.
16. Select Create Curves between two lines. Working west to east, select the first line as prompted, then the
second line.
17. Press enter to confirm that you will enter a radius as the next entry.
18. When prompted for a radius, key-in 850 and press enter.
19. Repeat the previous steps for the second missing arc.
20. The radius for that arc is 1000.
Save the drawing.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 32 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


030.040 Polar Tracking & Object Snap Tracking

Section updated:

10/1/2012

8:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-040-001.mp4

030.040.001

Polar Tracking.dwg
Polar tracking allows you to draw or move an object in a specific direction without using ortho mode or angular
key-ins at the command line. When the option is highlighted on the status bar, you will automatically get polar
tracking lines at 90 intervals.
If you see the tracking line with your cursor, you can simply type the distance at the command line, then enter.
Without polar tracking turned on, you would need to use the tedious notation of @20<90 to denote a distance of
20 at 90.
How to Use Polar Tracking
Whenever you see the polar tracking line on the screen, you can simply enter a numeric distance, then enter (or
spacebar) on your keyboard to enter a distance.
In other words, you do not need to enter 10 TAB 90 to make a 10 unit line going due north. With polar tracking on
you can just key-in 10 ENTER.
If your mouse is too far away from the polar tracking position, the dashed line will disappear. Typing in an angle,
as you did previously will always override polar tracking.
Never rely on the display angle to set your angles. The number displayed on the tool tip round to the nearest whole
angle. The 75 you see here could be anything from 74.5 to 75.4.
To set the polar tracking angle to a value other than 90 degrees, right click the polar tracking icon and select from
the frequently used angles.
Exercise: Polar Tracking at 90 degrees
In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by drawing using the polar tracking feature.
Use 0,0 as the starting point. The dimensions are shown for guidance purposes only. (You will learn how to create
dimensions later in this course.)
Feel free to attempt this exercise without reading the step-by step directions. If you need more guidance, the stepby-step directions will help you finish the exercise.
1. Open the drawing called Polar Tracking.dwg
This simple drawing will allow you to practice using polar tracking drawing tool.
The only thing in this drawing is the start here leader.
2. Verify that your Polar tracking tool is turned on in the status bar.
3. Start the Line command.
4. For the start point, key in 0,0.
The line should start exactly at the arrowhead of the Start here arrow.
5. Drag your mouse straight up.
6. With the polar tracking line displayed, key in 6 ENTER
The first vertical line is formed.
7. Push your mouse left to get a polar tracking line at 180.
8. Key in 1.5 ENTER
The horizontal line forming the top of the beam guard is formed.
9. Slide your mouse to the down so that the polar tracking line forms at 90 south
10. Key in 1.5 ENTER
The third line is formed.
11. Slide your mouse right.
12. Key in 1 ENTER
13. Slide your mouse down.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 33 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

14. Key in 4.5 ENTER


15. Type C with your keyboard to close the line.
16. If you were able to draw the shape without stopping the line command, the C will close the shape where
you started. If you needed to press escape and re-start the line tool, the close will take you back to the
location where you started back up.
If this is the case, try the exercise again.
17. Save and close the drawing.
End of Exercise.
6:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-040-002.mp4

030.040.002

PolarTracking2.dwg
Polar tracking is extremely useful even if it were always left at 90 angles. However, polar tracking can be used at
any angle you need.
To change the active polar tracking angle, right-click on the polar tracking icon. The angles seen in the immediate
listing are all multiples of 360 and are referred to as increment angles. Increment angles will show up everywhere
the multiple occurs. For instance, if we set the increment angle to 22.5, you will see a polar tracking angle at 0,
22.5, 45, 67.5, 90, 112.5, 135, and so on.
If you need an angle that is not listed in the increment angle list, you will need to go to the polar tracking settings.
Additional Angles
To add an additional angle, place a checkmark next to the Additional Angles box in the Polar Tracking Settings.
Click New to add the angle of your choice.
Additional angles only once around the clock unlike increment angles. For example, if you set your additional
angle to 35 you will only see angle 35. If you wish to see 35, 70, 105 and so on, you would need to add them as
well.
Additional Settings
The Object Snap Tracking Settings and Polar Angle Measurement are usually left as default.
Object Snap Tracking is a tool we will discuss in the next chapter. The control here determines how polar tracking
related to Object snap tracking.
Polar Angle Measurement determines how polar tracking relates to the last object you drew while a command is
active.
Consider the following example where a line is drawn at 10 from due East (0).
With the setting changed to Relative to last segment, the increment angle kicks in 45 from the original 10,
resulting in an overall angle of 55. The need for this option depends on your situation, but is not needed in most
day-to-day drafting.
Exercise: Polar Tracking at Additional Angles
In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by drawing by changing the increment angle as
part of the polar tracking feature.
You will draw the arrow, using the Start here arrowhead as the starting point. The dimensions are shown for
guidance purposes only. (You will learn how to create dimensions later in this course.)
Feel free to attempt this exercise without reading the step-by step directions. If you need more guidance, the stepby-step directions will help you finish the exercise.
Hint: You will need to set your increment angle to 30
1. Open the drawing called PolarTracking2.dwg
This simple drawing will allow you to practice using polar tracking drawing tool. The only thing in this
drawing is the start here leader.
2. Set the Increment angle to 30.
3. Start the polyline command. Key in 10,0 for the start point.
The line is started at the same spot as the start here label.
4. Pull your mouse to the left of where it currently sits.
You will see a polar tracking line automatically appear at 0.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 34 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

5. Key in 2 ENTER.
The first line of the arrow is created.
6. Push your mouse up to get a tracking line at 90.
7. Type in 10 ENTER
8. To draw the point of the arrowhead, position the polar tracking so that the angle you see is 120.
9. Save the Drawing. End of exercise.
9:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-040-003.mp4

030.040.003

oSnap-Track.dwg
Object snap tracking
Many functions in AutoCAD 2012 exist to eliminate the need for unnecessary construction lines. In most cases, if
you dont need to plot it, you dont need to draw it.
The Object Snap tracking tool is a perfect example of a tool that will help you draft more efficiently and accurately
without the need for construction lines.
To work with object snap tracking, both object snaps and the object snap tracking status bar icons must be active.
Polar tracking is also helpful when using object snap tracking - as the two can work together.
Say you are working with these perpendicular lines and would like to complete the formation of a rectangle using
the line command.
You start the line command and use the traditional endpoint snap to start the line. To place the other endpoint of
the line (without knowing the measurement ahead of time) object snap tracking is a huge help.
As shown in the image to the left, to activate object snap tracking, you will sweep your cursor (without clicking)
until the location you want to line up with is picked up by your object snaps.
As you move your cursor away, a tracking line will form.
If you move your cursor too far away, the tracking line will hide, but you will see a tiny plus (+) sign left behind.
If you do not see the plus sign, try again. If you accidentally sweep over the same point twice, it will clear the
tracking point.
As you move your cursor down, eventually AutoCAD will show you where the polar tracking line and object tracking
line intersect. As long as you see the tracking lines, a click will place the endpoint exactly where these two
temporary tracking lines intersect.
It takes a little bit of practice to get the hang of object snap tracking, but I guarantee this is a tool that you will use
over and over throughout your drafting day.
Lets take a look at another example.
Working with a rectangle, say you wish to draw a circle exactly in the center.
Start the circle command, but do not click. Sweep your cursor against the first midpoint to activate the tracking
point.
Sweep your cursor up to the second tracking point - still no clicking yet.
Notice the blip left behind by the first sweep to the midpoint - that means AutoCAD is still tracking that location for
us.
As you pull your cursor toward where the approximate location should be for the center of the rectangle, the
tracking lines will appear and help you locate your position.
Notice how the snap tracking lights up the midpoints of both the lines you are working off of.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 35 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

NOW you can click and place the circle at the location you were aiming for. You can turn off object snap tracking
by pressing the F11 key.
Exercise: Object Snap Tracking
In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by completing the drawing as shown.
Remember orthographic projections from manual drafting? This example forces you to use object snap tracking by
leveraging the projection lines as a guide to locating the missing geometry.
You will need polar tracking on and set to 90 degrees.
You will need object snaps on
Intersection
Endpoint
midpoint
You will need object snap tracking on.
1. Open the drawing called oSnap-Track.dwg
Drawing contains some cad elements that you will be working off of. The geometry in green represents a
manhole. The grey lines are construction lines that will help you draw. You will need to produce the side
view of the manhole using object snap tracking.
2. Start the rectangle command.
To find the first point of the rectangle, use the endpoint of the existing lines and the endpoint of the
projection lines.
3. To find the second corner of the rectangle, use the projection lines.
4. Do not click until you see the crossing guidelines on the screen.
The result should be a single rectangle that lines up perfectly with the side below it and the projection
lines.
5. Start the circle command.
6. Use polar tracking from the middle of the new reactangle and the middle of the small rectangle on the right
to find the center of the circle. Click to start the circle.
7. To find the diameter of the circle, use object snap tracking from the top of the small rectangle.
Save and close the drawing. End of exercise.

030.050 Working with Grips

Section updated:

10/1/2012

15:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-050-001.mp4

030.050.001

Grips.dwg
Using Grips to Modify Objects
Selecting an object without a command active will result in CAD displaying grips on the object.
Grips are a quick and easy way to modify any AutoCAD object.
When a grip is clicked, it turns red to indicate it is active, or hot.
A hot grip can be used to relocate an endpoint, as shown in the illustration.

Grips and Lines


On a regular line (as opposed to a polyline) the center square grip will relocate the line without changing its
geometry.
Notice that the dynamic input is chowing the change in length resulting from the stretching of the line.
You can use the tab key to change to the overall length field if you wish to key-in the final value of the line.

Grips and Circles


Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 36 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


On a circle, the center grip will relocate the object without changing the radius value.
Clicking on one of the grips along the edge will result in stretching the radius.

In this case, the dynamic input shows the overall radius of the circle. Use tab to change to the radius change field.

Grips and Polylines


On a polyline, the midpoint of each segment has a rectangular grip. The rectangular grip will move the entire
segment of the polyline
Polylines also have a new feature called dynamic grip menus. As you pause your cursor over a grip, you will see
several functional options. Clicking on one of the verticies will give you options to: Stretch vertex, Add vertex or
remove vertex. This is by far the easiest way to add or remove a vertex from a polyline!
Clicking on one of the center grips will give you slightly different options. You can stretch the entire side, ad a
vertex or convert the line to an arc.

Grips and Blocks


Clicking the grip on a block will allow you to move the block without needing any additional commands. Simply
click the grip to pick it up and click a second location to put it down.
To make copies of a block, hold down control as you click the grip. Keep the control key held until you click a
second time. If you continue to hold down the control key, you can make copies in a grid formation. If you let go of
control, you will be in a free-form copy mode until you press ESC.

Exercise: Working with Grips


In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by modifying shapes and drawing lines using
grips. There are several groupings of objects you will work with.
You will need the following object snaps:
Endpoint
Center
node
1. Open the drawing called Grips.dwg
2.
3. Verify that your object snaps and polar tracking are both turned on.
Both of these icons will appear highlighted in blue at in the status bar.
Right-click on the polar tracking icon in the status bar.
In polar tracking settings, change the increment angle to 90.
Turn off the additional angles by clearing the checkbox.
3. Zoom to the part of the drawing near the intersection of STH 16 and Dickason Blvd.
Here there are some construction lines to help you place objects using grips.
4. Select the planter block to the south of the intersection. Move it into place using the center of one of the
construction circles as a guide.
5. Once the first planter is in place, hold down Control on your keyboard and click the grip from the first
planter.
6. Use the control-click to make copies of the planter at each corner of the intersection.
7. Press Escape when complete.
8. Click the grip in the NW corner of the median at the south of the intersection.
9. Use polar tracking and object snap tracking to relocate the grip point so that the resulting median is squared
off.
10. Use the rectangular grips dynamic menu to convert the top of the median to an arc.
11. Use the node object snap to place the arc in the correct position. In the SW part of the intersection is a
line.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 37 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


12. Change its overall length to 150 by:
Clicking the grip on the left end of the object.
Press TAB on your keyboard.
Key-in a length of 150.
Save the drawing. End of exercise.

030.060 Modify Commands

Section updated:

10/1/2012

11:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-060-001.mp4

030.060.001

MOVE-COPY-ROTATE.dwg
Introduction to Modify Commands
In this chapter you will learn about Move, Copy and Rotate, the three most common Modify tools you will
encounter. As you work through the example, ask yourself the following questions as you work:
What items are selected when I start the command? How does this affect the behavior of the tool?

Move
Example Workflow: Move
1. Hit ESC several times to ensure you are out of any other commands. This will also ensure that you do not
have any objects selected.
2. Click the Move command.
3.
4. You are prompted to Select Objects:
5.
6. Use a crossing window to select the objects you wish to move.
7.
8. Right-click to move on to the next step.
9.
10. The command line now reads:
Specify base point or [Displacement] <Displacement>:
1. The base point is referring to the location you are moving the objects from.
2. The second point is where you are moving the objects to.
When the second click is complete, the command is finished.
When you finish working with an AutoCAD command, you are taken back to a command line prompt. When you
see the word Command: at the prompt you know you are in a selection mode.
If you want to restart a command again right away, right-click and select Repeat
If an object (or several objects) are already selected at the time you start the command, it will skip past the option
to Select Objects. For example, if I had the suitcase objects selected at the time I clicked Move, it would jump me
to step 6.
Copy
Example Workflow: Copy
1. Click the Copy command.
2. You are prompted to Select Objects:
3. Use a crossing window to select the objects you wish to move.
4. Right-click to move on to the next step.
5. The command line now reads:
Specify base point or [Displacement] <Displacement>:
1. The base point is referring to the location you are moving the objects from.
2. The second point is where the duplicate object will appear.
6. Your command line now says:
Specify second point or [Exit/Undo] <Exit>:
You can keep making copies of your objects.
7. Hit enter when you are done making copies.

Rotate
Example Workflow: Rotate
1. With no objects selected, click the Rotate tool.
2. The command line now asks: Select Objects:
3. Select the object or objects you wish to rotate.
4. Right-click when you are done selecting entities to rotate.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 38 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

5. You are now asked: Specify base point: Use object snaps to select the base point.
6. You are now asked to Specify a rotation angle. The default options allow you to type in a rotation angle or
graphically select the rotation angle. If you type in a rotation angle, hit enter to finish the command.
By default, AutoCAD considers due East = 0.
When we get into AutoCAD there are more options for specifying angles (such as bearing), so if the angle defaults
in AutoCAD bug you, dont worry!
Exercise: Move/Copy/Rotate
You will use what you have learned to edit the following drawing.
You will use Move, Copy and Rotate to place pavement markings in the configuration shown here.
Use the cyan points as your placement guide.
If you feel confident enough to try the exercise without step-by-step instructions, Go for it!
It will be helpful to have your Node object snap on.
1. Open the Drawing MOVE-COPY-ROTATE.DWG .
2. Remember that you can turn on/off polar tracking with F10. You can turn on/off object snap tracking using
F11. You can turn on/off object snaps using F3. You will leverage all three of these tools as you move, copy
and rotate.
3. Start the move command. Select the pavement marking arrows using the midpoint of the bottom of the
arrow as the Base Point.
4. Snap to the south most Node in the S approach to the intersection.
5. Start the copy command. Copy the pavement marking arrows by clicking at the midpoint of the bottom (as
you did before).
6. Place a copy of the arrows at each node as shown here:
7. Note each quadrant of the intersection has a point representing the location of the pavement marking
arrows.
8. Start the rotate command. Start with the arrows at the east approach. Use the node (or the midpoint of the
bottom of the arrows - as these two points should coincide) as the basepoint.
9. Specify a rotation of 90. The arrows will then be pointed the same direction.
10. Continue moving, copying and rotating until the pavement marking placement on the intersection is
completed.
11. When moving the Crosswalk and stop bar, line up the bottom corner of the stopbar with the node closer to
the intersection.
Save and close the drawing. End of exercise.
19:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-060-002.mp4

030.060.002

Polyline edits.dwg
More Modify Commands
In this chapter:
Join
Polyline Edit
Explode
Once you locate these commands on the Modify Panel, the only learning curve working with the tools is getting
used to the order in which you do your clicking and picking.
Keep an eye on the command line to help steer you in the right direction.
As you will see in the first example, you can pick objects before initiating the command or wait until AutoCAD asks
you to Select Objects.

Turning Lines into Polylines (and Vice Versa)


Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 39 of 390

If you have drawn many line segments that touch perfectly, you can use the Join command directly from the Modify
pull-down.
To use Join:
1. Select the lines and arcs you want to combine into a polyline.
2. Click the Join command.
OR
1. Click the Join command.
2. Select the objects you wish to join.
3. Press enter to complete the command.
If the lines were not drawn using object snaps, there may be very tiny gaps between the segments. If this is the
case, you will need to use the Polyline edit command to join your line.
Using Polyline Edit to Join:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Click the polyline edit command.


At the command line, type M for multiple. Press enter.
Select the objects you wish to join. Hit enter.
If prompted to convert Lines arc and splines to polylines, press Enter to accept the default of Yes.
Type J for Join and press enter (OR select Join from the dynamic input menu.
You are then prompted for a Fuzz Distance.
Enter a distance that you know will be larger than any gaps between entities you want to join.
Press enter.

The command line will report to you how many segments were added to the polyline. If fewer segments were
added than you expected, try the process again with a larger fuzz distance.

Explode
There are some situations where you want to break apart an AutoCAD object into components that make it up. For
example, you may wish to turn a polyline into several line segments. You may wish to turn a block into regular
lines. To break down an object into smaller parts explode can be used.
Use Explode with caution. Using explode on a objects in Civil 3D will remove the intelligent information behind it,
leaving you with just the graphical representation.

Erase
We briefly discussed the Erase command earlier in this course. There are two main ways to erase objects in
AutoCAD.
1. The easiest way is to select the objects you wish to remove, and then press the delete key.
2. If you want AutoCAD to prompt you to select Objects: use the erase command from the modify toolbar.

Distance Inquiry
Distance Inquiry is not a modify command but it will be used in the upcoming example to check your work.
It is handy to know the distance between two spots. I like the DI command to get a quick measure of the line or
space Im interested.
Type DI at the command line for a quick one-off measurement.
As you see here, you will get the overall angular distance as well as the X, Y and Z distances.
You will use distance inquiry in the exercise to ensure that the fuzz distance you specify in the PEDT-Join
command is large enough to plug the gaps in the polylines.

Exercise: PEDIT/Join/Explode/Erase
You will use what you have learned to edit the following drawing. You will use explode, Join and Polyline edit to
make the modifications. If you successfully complete this exercise you can use it in the next one.
1. Open the drawing Polyline edits.dwg .
This drawing contains several shapes that appear to be closed. Upon closer inspection you will see that
the elements are not joined.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015

Page 40 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Without being in a command, move your cursor over the drawing. You will notice that more elements
light up than you might expect. This is because the entire drawing is a block.
2. With the block selected, click Explode
Now as you mouse over the items, they behave as separate line segments.
3. Select all the line segments that make up Building1. Click Join. The command line will report that 19
lines have now been converted to 2 polylines.
4. Use join again to join the remaining segments.
On selecting, all of building 1 will be a single polyline, open on one segment.
5. Double click the polyline. Select close from the polyline edit options.
6. Press escape.
The building polyline is now closed.
7. Zoom into building2. Select all the objects (including the protrusion on the right side).
8. Try the Join command on this line.
9. It will report that 1 line was discarded from the selection set.
10. With NO object selected, start the PEDIT command from the Modify panel.
11. Use M to start the Multiple option.
12. Select the polyline and the discarded line from the previous steps.
13. Select the JOIN option.
14. For Fuzz Distance, enter 1 foot.
15. The last line is now part of the polyline. You are still in the polyline edit command. Select close.
16. Building2 footprint is now complete.
17. Repeat these techniques to join the polylines for Building3. At the end of the process, Building 3 will be a
closed, continuous polyline as shown.
Save the drawing.
16:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-060-003.mp4

030.060.003

Offset-Array.dwg, Scale-Stretch.dwg
Even More Modify Commands
In this chapter you will be learning how to modify the new object you create.
In this chapter:
Offset
Mirror
Scale
Stretch
Trim/Extend
Break
Fillet
Chamfer

Offset
Example Workflow: Offset
1. With no objects selected, click the Offset tool.
2.
3. The command line now reads:
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 41 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Specify offset distance or [Through/Erase/Layer] <3.0000>:
Type in the distance you wish to offset the line or polyline.
3. The command line now reads:
Select object to offset or [Exit/Undo] <Exit>:
Click on the object you wish to offset.
4. Now your command line says:
Specify point on side to offset or [Exit/Multiple/Undo] <Exit>:
5. Click on the side you wish to offset.
At this point you should see the new object you created.
6. The command remains active until you hit enter.

The offset command adjusts the geometry of the line to get a consistent distance between the original and offset
line. This means that arcs will have different radii in the offset object.

Mirror
The mirror command is a special version of the copy command that flips objects over an imaginary mirror line.
Select Objects first or after the Mirror command is started.
You will be prompted to select two points that form an imaginary mirror line. This mirror line determines the angle
and distance away from the original the flipped copy is made.
Polar tracking and the mirror command are frequently used together.
One of the options in the mirror command is to Erase Source objects. The default is N for No. If you choose to key
in Y for yes, the original will be deleted. This option is a convenient way to flip objects without duplicating them.

Exercise: Offset and Array


1. Open the Drawing Offset-Array.dwg.
2.
3. Zoom into the intersection of STH 16 and STH 73. The back of curb is already drawn in the NE quadrant.
You will use the offset command to create flowline and flange lines.
4.
5. Start the offset command. Set the offset distance to 0.5. (Note the foot symbol is not needed.)
6.
7. Select the back of curb line and press enter.
8.
9. Click in CAD anywhere to the left or below the line. The first offset is created.
10.
11. Press escape.
12.
13. Start the offset command again and specify an offset distance of 2.
8. Select the flowline, and then click in cad anywhere to the south or west of it.
9. To the west of the site, locate the square that represents the gridline. This is a 100 x 100 square.
10. Select the square, then click Array.
11. Press enter to indicate rectangular.
12. Press enter to indicate Count.
For the number of rows, type in 6 then press enter.
For the number of columns, type in 14 then press enter.
13. Press enter again to indicate spacing.
For the distance between rows, type in 100, then press enter.
For the distance between columns, type in 100 and press enter.
14. Press enter one last time to complete the array.
15. Select the array and experiment with the different grips.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 42 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


16. Save the drawing. End of exercise.

Stretch
The Stretch command and polar tracking are frequently used together.
Start the Stretch command by clicking the Stretch icon from the Home tab > Modify panel
When you are prompted to select objects, it is important to pay attention to the window you create.
You must use a right-to-left crossing window when working with Stretch.
Items that are completely inside the crossing window will move. Items that cross the dashed selection boundary
will act like rubber-bands. These are the objects that stretch when you proceed with the command.
Do not use a right-to-left crossing window.
Like all of the modify commands, after selecting objects you are prompted for a base point.
The base point on the stretch command can be anywhere on the object. The location of the base point will not
affect the outcome of the command. Rather, the base point is used as a start point when specifying a stretch
distance.
Using polar tracking, you can manually stretch the item and click to complete the command.
You can also key-in a stretch distance. If you do not use polar tracking the result is a skewed geometry.
Scale
The scale command is used to resize items uniformly. You will find the scale command with the rest of the modify
commands on the home tab.
Start the scale command and select objects or have objects selected ahead of time and click the scale icon. (Like
all the modify commands, if you have an item selected to begin with, the command will skip the step to Select
objects.)
You are prompted to specify a base point. In the case of scale, the base point acts as an anchor. This base point
will stay put, while the rest of the object grows or shrinks around it. After the base point is set, you will want to
key-in your scale value.
Moving your cursor will increase or decrease the size, however, the distance away from your base point is taken as
a scale factor, which can be confusing.
You should always key-in your scale factor. A scale factor greater than 1 will increase the size of the item. A
scale factor less than 1 will result in a smaller item.
Scale factors in use with the Scale command are always positive numbers.

Exercise: Scale/Stretch
You will use the scale and stretch commands to fix the drawing that follows.
1. Open the drawing Scale-stretch.dwg Zoom into the area in the NW of the site shown here.
2.
3. Start the stretch command.
4.
5. Start a R to L crossing window to select objects.
6.
7. Press enter when complete.
8.
9. Select a base point and stretch the building 8 to the east. Use polar tracking to keep the building
straight.
10.
11. Select the center tree.
12.
13. Start the scale command.
14.
15. Click the center of the tree for the base point. Specify a scale of 0.5. Press enter.
16.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 43 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


17. Click the right tree. Scale it up using a scale factor of 1.3.
18.
19. Select the flared end section. Rotate it 90 counter -clockwise.
20.
21. Move the block so that the right edge lines up with the right edge of the pipe as shown here.
12. Start the scale command.
13. For the base point, click the right corner of the FES.
14. When prompted for a scale factor, type in R for reference. Press enter.

15. When prompted for a reference length, click the two points representing the current width of the block.
16. For the new length, click the opposite side of the pipe.
The result should be that the block fits perfectly at the end of the pipe.
17. Save the drawing. End of exercise.

12:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-060-004.mp4

030.060.004

Trim.dwg
Trim and Extend
Trim and Extend are frequently discussed together because they are two sides of the same proverbial coin. The
two commands behave in a very similar manner.
When working with the trim command, you can switch to extend mode by pressing the shift key on your keyboard.
These commands are both found on the Modify panel of the home tab. When you first start the command you are
asked to select objects for a cutting edge (boundary edge for extend). However, I recommend pressing enter on
your keyboard to take the option to Select All.
By using the <Select All> option you simplify the trim/extend process.

Break
Break and Break at Point are the same command. In the case of Break at Point, the icon chooses the command
line options for you.
You will probably find that the break at point version of the command is more useful and easier to control.
When working with the Break version of the command (the default version) the first click specifies the object and
the location of the gap that will be formed in the object.
The problem with this, however, is that object snaps do not engage and therefore, the exact location of the gap is
difficult to control.
To overcome this, you could use the First Point option.
The break at point version of the command automatically picks the first point for you and forces the first point to
be the same as the second point. The result is a single break in the line. No gap is formed.

Exercise: Trim/Extend/Break
First you will experiment with some junk lines to get the feel for the options in the Trim/Extend and Break
commands.
When you feel confident with the new tools, use them to Trim both intersections in the drawing.
1. Open the drawing Trim.dwg
To get a feel for the Trim command (and to review the offset command) zoom to the two lines in the SE
corner of the drawing. These dont represent any physical objects, they are just here for practice.
2. Start the Offset command. Specify an offset distance of 40 feet. Press Enter.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 44 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

3. Select the line that is more horizontal.


4. Type in M for multiple.
5. Start clicking south of the line until you have a good number of lines to play with, as shown.
6. Repeat the offset process with the mostly vertical line. Use an offset distance of 40 feet and use the
Multiple option to save time.
7. Start the Trim command.
8. When prompted to select objects as a cutting edge, press ENTER to select all.
9. Start clicking around to get the feel for the trim command.
10. Try the F for Fence option to get a feel for that as well.
11. Hold down SHIFT on your keyboard and start clicking. This will convert Trim to EXTEND mode.
12. Press Escape and try the same techniques with the Extend command.
Once you feel you are confident with the trim and extend commands, erase the mess you made in the
right side of the drawing. Its time to focus on the real project.
13. Use the Trim command to clean up the lines in the intersections.
Do not modify the (yellow) centerlines.
14. When youve completed the exercise, the intersection will look like the image here.
15. Save the drawing. This will come in handy for the fillet and chamfer commands.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 45 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Fillet/Chamfer
Fillet and chamfer have many similarities. In both commands, if you start with a polyline, the result will remain a
polyline. If you start with line segments, the result will be separate segments. Both need information before they
will appear to work.
Fillet
Pronounced fill it not fill eh, the fillet command is the most common method for creating arcs between lines.
The first thing you do is set the radius value. If you forget this step, the default radius is 0 and nothing will happen.
The command line will tell you what the current fillet radius value is. AutoCAD will remember the last used value.
Key-in R and Enter OR pick radius from the dynamic input menu.
Chamfer
Like fillet, chamfer needs information given to it before it will proceed as expected. You need to specify two
distances or a distance and an angle to complete the command.

Exercise: Fillet/ Chamfer

1. Keep working in the drawing form the previous exercise or open up Fillet-chamfer.dwg
2. Start the Fillet command. Type in R for Radius. Press enter.
3. Specify a radius of 30 feet. Press enter.
4. Fillet all the orange curb lines to 30 feet at the Dickason intersection.
5. Use a fillet radius of 35 at the STH 73 intersection.
6. Use the Chamfer command to create sight lines.
7. For the intersection with Dickason, use a chamfer distance of 15 feet . (Note: the foot symbol is not
needed. )
8. For the Intersection with STH 73, use a chamfer distance of 20 feet.
9. At the end of the process ,both intersections will be filleted and chamfered with the radii and distances
specified.
10. Save the drawing. End of Exercise.

030.070 Layers

Section updated:

10/1/2012

18:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-070-001.mp4

030.070.001

Layers.dwg
Introduction
Creating different types of objects on their own layer is the best way to keep your drawings organized and
manageable. In the exercises you have worked with up to this point, the layers have been created for you. In this
chapter you will start to work with layers.
In this chapter:
Current layer vs Object Layer
Creating New Layers
Working with Layer States (Freeze/Thaw, On/Off, Lock/Unlock)
Working With Layers
Everything you draw should go on a layer. No exceptions! The good news is that once you get Civil 3D involved, it
will push things to the correct layer.
Layers are key to AutoCAD in keeping your drawing well organized.
They are especially valuable when it comes to printing because you can freeze items you dont wish to display on a
plot.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 46 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

When you start a drawing tool and start drawing, that line is being created on the current layer. You can tell what
layer is current by looking at the layer dropdown on the Home tab...Layers panel.
To switch which layer is current, make sure nothing is selected in the drawing and click on the dropdown arrow and
select the layer you want.
Important Layer Notes
When an object is selected, its layer is displayed in the layer dropdown.
To change and objects layer:
Select the object whose layer you wish to change
Go to the layer dropdown on the Home tab > layers panel
Pick the new layer.
A great command to know is the Layer Previous command. If you want to get back to the layer state you were in
last, hit this and it will take you back. For example, say you accidentally hit thaw all layers in a viewport. Layer
previous will restore the layers.
Finished projects should have nothing on layer zero.
Do not use the Defpoints layer. It doesnt plot, and is used by AutoCAD as a placeholder for dimensions.
Creating a New Layer
To create a new layer:
1. Click the Layer Properties Manager Button.
2.
3. Inside layer properties manager, click the new layer button .
4.
5. Type in the layers name and hit enter to continue.
6.
7. You may wish to make the new layer current by double clicking on it in the layer manager.
Layer Properties manager can be closed or kept open like any other Tool Palette. (See Working with Tool Palettes
for more information)

Layer Properties
Note: Modelspace and viewport concepts are discussed in depth in a later section.
Layer Tools
There are quite a few tools in the layer panel. The following list is a rundown of the most frequently used tools on
this panel.

Exercise: Layer Basics


In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by working with frequently used layer tools.
You will only be doing a little drawing. Most of this is practice using the layer tools. Many of the results are
observational. That is, I want you to do them and think about the result you obtained. Make sure you understand
why certain things are happening.
In steps 14-20 you will use differing tools to understand the difference between Frozen and Off.
1. Open the drawing called Layers.dwg.
Drawing contains some cad elements that you will be working off of.
2. On the Home tab > Layers panel, click the icon to launch the layer properties manager.
3. Notice that the layer P_PATH_SYDEWUK is intentionally spelled incorrectly.
4. Use a slow double-click to edit the text of the layer name.
5. Rename the layer to P_PATH_SIDEWALK
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 47 of 390

6. From the layer properties manager, click the new layer icon.
A new layer is created. If you had P_PATH_SIDEWALK highlighted at the time you clicked the New icon,
the layers properties will be identical.
7. Name the new layer P_NOTES.
8. Press enter to complete the naming process before proceeding.
9. Click the square in the Color Column.
You are prompted to select color using the Select color dialog.
10. Click the RED square, then click OK.
11. Repeat steps 5-7 to create a second new layer called P_CRDR.
12. Press enter and set the color of the new layer to Green.
13. Close the layer property manager by clicking the X in top of the dialog.
The side of the layer manager that has the X may vary depending on where the dialog box is sitting on
your screen.
14. From the layers panel fly-out, click Thaw All layers.
All of the Frozen layers are now visible.
15. Press Escape to ensure no objects are selected.
16. Click the Make Object Layer current button.
17. Click the red loop at the pedestrian bridge in the SE portion of the site.
18. P_STRUCT is now the current layer.
19. In the layers flyout, turn OFF the option for Locked and Faded layers When you have successfully turned
this off the slider bar will not be selectable and the icon is no longer blue.
20. Click Layer isolate
You are prompted to select objects.
21. Click on one of the pavement marking lines at the park & ride in the NE portion of the site. Then press
enter.
Only the pavement markings are visible in the drawing. Also note that the layer 0 is current. This is telling
us that the pavement markings are actually on layer 0. We will fix this in a later step!
22. Open the layer properties manager and make note of what is going on with the layers.
23. Close the layer properties manager when complete.
What you should observe is that the layer isolate command utilizes the Off command rather than the
freeze option for hiding layers.
24. Double-click your middle mouse wheel to Zoom extents.
Notice that even though layers are off (such as RAB_SB_TURN_Left, and P_WAL) zoom is treating them
like they are still there.
25. Click Layer unisolate.
The drawing goes back to how it was prior to using the layer isolate command.
26. Turn on the layer RAB_SB_TURN_Left
27. Use the layer pull-down to make the current layer 0.
28. Click on the Layer Freeze command from the Layer Panel.
You are prompted to select objects on layers to be frozen.
Click several objects to freeze as many layers as you can.
Make sure to select the green circle in the far right side of the drawing.
29. Just for fun click on the one of the pavement marking lines.
What happens? The only items visible should be the pavement markings
You will not be able to freeze this layer because you should have made it current in a previous step.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 48 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

30. Again, double-click your middle mouse wheel to zoom extents. This time the interchange fills the drawing
area with little room to spare.
31. Click Layer Previous until all of the layers are visible again.
32. What happens if you click Layer previous twice?
The first click should take you the layer state before you used the freeze command. Clicking it twice will
take you back to the isolated layer state.
33. Again, use Layer Isolate to isolate the pavement markings layer, as you did preiously.
34. Use a large selection window to select all of the visible objects. All of the pavement markings should be
selected.
35. Use the layer pulldown to change the layer of the spokes to P_PM
36. Press Escape when complete. Because the layer you are moving the items to is off, you will receive a
message that the items are on a layer that is off.
37. Click Close.
38. Click Layer Un-isolate again.
39. Verify that all the layers are on and thawed.
Save the drawing. End of exercise.
8:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-070-002.mp4

030.070.002

Layers2.dwg
Layer Walk
Several commands that will help you manage the often numerous layers I the layer walk command and creating
layer states. These commands go hand-in-hand because layer states can be made from the Layer Walk
command.
The layer walk command is located in the Layers panel flyout.
When you first enter the layer walk command, the layers that are visible in the drawing will be highlighted in blue. If
the layer is Off or Frozen it will not be highlighted.
Use the Control + click and Shift click commands to select various combinations of visible layers. The graphic will
update instantly to reveal what is on the layers you have chosen.
Keep Restore on exit checked. Instead of changing the layers directly from this dialog box, we will save a layer
state.
When a combination of layers is active that might be useful to you repeatedly in the process of design, you can
save the layer combination as a Layer State.

Layer States
When you get into Civil 3D, youll see that every element goes to its own layer. This means that a Civil 3D project
can easily have several hundred layers. For example, the WisDOT base template contains over 700 layers - thats
before you draw your first line!
To help manage the layers (and your sanity) use Layer States. Lets say youve been working in modelspace
freezing things, thawing things, maybe locking things and you think to yourself, Gee this is a good point I might
want to get back to quickly. Create a new layer state!
Give the new state a name and click OK.
Now you can easily get back to that layer situation by hitting the dropdown again and setting your desired state
current.
This also works inside viewports. So if youve got a pretty state youd like to plot, double click inside the viewport
and set the layer state you want current.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 49 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


A Layer State is a snapshot in time of your layer situation that you can easily retrieve as you are drafting.
Layer states track on/off, freeze/thaw and locked/unlock status of the layers.
Right-click anywhere in the Layer Walk dialog to access this tool.
Give the layer state a name that best describes the layers you have selected.

Back in the Layer panel, you will see the layer states listed in the pull-down. To restore a layer state, simply select
the saved state and the drawing will switch.
At any time you can create a layer state using the New Layer State button found in this pull down.

Exercise: Layer Walk & Layer States


In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by working with the Layer Walk Command and
Layer States. This is practice using the layer tools, and does not require drawing. Many of the results are
observational. That is, I want you to do them and think about the result you obtained. Make sure you understand
why certain things are happening.
1. Open Layers2.dwg Drawing contains some cad elements that you will be working with.
2. Open the layer manager to observe the layer names.
layer naming.

This drawing is an excellent example of WisDOT

3. Close the layer manager.


4. Use your middle mouse wheel to Zoom Extents.
Make sure you can see the entire interchange on your screen.
5. Start the Layer Walk command.
The layer walk dialog opens with all the layers highlighted. This indicates that all the layers are on and
thawed.
6. Right-click anywhere in the Layer Walk dialog and select Save Layer State
7. Save the layer state as All On and Thawed.
8. Click OK.
9. Remain in the Layer Walk command.
10. Select the layer E-ALI. There are no visible objects on this layer.
11. Use the Arrow Keys on your keyboard to move down the listing.
As you work through the listing you will see the objects on the layers.
12. Hold down your control key and select the layers:
E_RDWY
E_RDWY_Gravel
E_WTR
Multiple layers will become selected as long as you keep the control key pressed.
13. Right-click in the Layer walk dialog and select Save Layer State
14. Save the New Layer State as Edgelines.
15. Click OK. Note that you are not allowed to use commas or slashes in the name of the layer state but
ampersands are ok.
16. Close the layer walk dialog. The drawing should be the same as when you first opened the drawing.
17. From the layer panel, try out your new layer state by picking it from the pull-down
18. From the layer panel, switch to the All on and Thawed Layer state. The drawing should reflect the layers in
this state.
Save the drawing End of Exercise.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 50 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

11:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-070-003.mp4

030.070.003

Layers3.dwg
Layer Filters
Layer filters help you narrow down what layers are shown in the layer properties listing.
The layer filters do not actually change what layers are visible. However, you can use Shfit + click, Ctrl + click or
Ctrl+A to select layers from the listing and perform action on them.
Find a Layer
To quickly locate a layer without using a layer filter, use the search field in the upper right corner of the layer
properties manager.
The asterisk acts as a wildcard to make your search more general. For example, here you see the search for all
layers containing the word text in the name.
This search is not case-sensitive.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 51 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Layer Settings
The wrench icon in the layer properties manager will take you to layer settings.
In the exercise for this section, you will examine the results of changing the Layer Isolate settings.
You will also see the pros and cons of having the Dialog Settings Apply layer filter to toolbar selected.

Exercise: Even More Layer Tools


1. Open the File Layers 3.dwg.
2.
3. Go the Home tab > Layers panel, and select the main layer properties manger button.
4.
5. Along the left hand side of the layer properties manager, highlight Alignment.
Notice that now you only see layers in the listing that pertain to proposed alignments.
4. Along the left hand side of the layer properties manager, highlight Corridor.
Notice that now you only see layers in the listing that pertain to proposed corridor design.
5. Hold your shift key and select the first layer in the listing [which should be P_CRDR]
6. Continue holding down shift and select the last layer in the lisintg [which should be P_RDWY_Subg_ShldPt]
All of the layers should now be selected.
7. Click the lock icon. All of the layers will lock together.
8. Click the lock icon again to unlock all of the corridor layers.
9. Now place a checkbox next to Invert Filter.
1. You now see all layers, except the Corridor layers.
2. Clear the checkbox.
10. In the upper right corner of the layers property dialog box, key-in *TEXT*.
1. There should be 5 layers that contain the letters TEXT.
2. Clear the search by clicking the X that is in the same field as the search.
11. Click the wrench icon on the right side of the layer properties manger.
1. Set the radio button to Lock and Fade option for Isolate Layer settings.
2. Click OK.
3. Move your layer properties manager aside or close it temporarily.
10. Click the Layer Isolate command from the Home tab > Layers panel. Click one of the blue grid lines in the
drawing.
11. In the layers panel flyout, turn on the option for Locked layer fading. Set the slider bar to approximately
50%.
1. Locked layers should appear to dim
2. Layers are visible, but not able to be modified.
3. Mouse around and observe the lock icon that floats near your cursor as you mouse around.
12. Click the Layer Unisolate button. All layers will go back to their previous state.
13. Return to the layer properties manager and click the wrench icon again.
14. In the Isolate Layer settings, set the radio button to Off.
1. Set the radio button for VP freeze.
2. Click OK.
15. Move or close the layer properties manager again.
16. Click the layer isolate command.
17. Click one of the blue grid lines again.
1. Now, all you see are the grid lines.
2. Click Layer Unisolate.
18. Return to the layer properties manager and click the wrench icon yet again. Make sure that Apply Layer
Filter to Layer Toolbar is checked ON.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 52 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

19. Set the current layer filter to Erosion control.


1. In the main CAD window, click the pulldown for the layers.
2. You should only see the current layer plus the layers from the filter.
20. Return to the layer properties manager and click the wrench icon yet again.
21. Clear the checkbox for the Apply Layer Filter to Layer Toolbar option.
1. Click OK
2. Observe that you can now see all lyers regardless of the current layer filter.
22. Right-click on the layer pulldown from the Layers panel.
1. Select Add to Quick access toolbar.
23. End of exercise.

030.080 Properties

Section updated:

10/1/2012

9:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-080-001.mp4

030.080.001

Properties2.dwg
Properties
The properties tool palette is a great tool to know. The properties palette allows you to see information about a
selected object and make modifications.
From the previous section, you know that selecting an object, and then right-clicking it is a way to view commands
associated with an object. Properties is one of the items you can access this way.
You can also access the properties palette by clicking the Properties icon from the Home tab > Palettes panel from
the ribbon.
At the top of the properties palette, you will see the type of object you have selected. You can change many things
about an object right from here, such as the layer and elevation.
If you have multiple objects selected, you will see the number of items in parenthesis at the top of the properties
panel. Click on the dropdown to see the breakdown of the types of objects.
If you wish to make changes using the properties palette-, you will need to click into the area you want to change to
wake up the cell. Any properties that cannot be changed here will appear slightly grayed out.
Exercise: Working with the Properties Palette
This drawing has several things wrong with it which you will correct using Properties.
1. Open the file Properties2.dwg
2. Open the Properties Pallet by Going to the Home tab > Properties.
An empty properties pallet shows with No Selection at the top.
3. Select one of the grid lines ,right-click and pick Select Similar.
All grid lines become selected. In the Properties dialog, notice that the color of the lines is not ByLayer as
it should be. Also, the Layer is 0.
4. Set the Color to ByLayer.
5. Change the Layer to E_MAP_Gridlines
6. Select one of the Tree blocks, then right-click and pick Select Similar.
7. Use the Properties to change
Color to ByLayer.
Layer to E_LAND_Vegetation
X and Y Scales to 1
8. Press Escape when complete.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 53 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Save and close the drawing. End of exercise.

6:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-080-002.mp4

030.080.002

Properties2.dwg
Quick Select
Quick select is a selection tool that goes above and beyond the capabilities of the Select Similar command.
You can access the Quick Select tool at any time by right-clicking. It does not matter if you have items selected
ahead of time.
Select similar looks at object type and layer only. In the case of blocks, select similar uses the block name and
layer to locate similar items. Using Quick select can filter your drawing for specific information, based on any
property of the object.
Using quick select requires you to specify where you are searching, what you are searching for, what properties to
look at and how to identify the items you want.
It helps to say the search out loud to check if you have the correct criteria set.
You can also look for all items of a particular type. In the Operator field, you will always have the option to Select
All. This will pick all items of the object type you choose, regardless of layer or any other parameters.
If you have items selected ahead of time, the Apply to: option will read Current Selection. You can use the dropdown to switch to entire drawing or remain on Current selection to narrow down your previous search results.

Exercise: Quick Select


In this exercise, you will use the Quick Select dialog to search for items. Then you will use the properties dialog
that you learned in the previous section to edit the properties of the items.
1. Open the file Properties3.dwg This drawing contains numerous layers, objects and text items.
2. Be sure your properties palette is visible.
3. From the upper-right corner of the properties palette, click Quick Select
4. Use the Quick select dialog to search the entire drawing for any objects on the Level 18 layer.
5. Set the options as shown.
6. Click OK You will have 20 items selected.
7. Change the color from *VARIES* to ByLayer.
8. Press escape when complete. Escape will clear the selection.
9. Start Quick Select again.
10. This time, create a search for all blocks named A-SPRINKLER.
11. Click OK. There are 7 instances of A-SPRINKLER in this drawing.
12. DO NOT press escape.
13. Launch the Quick select command again and search the entire drawing for blocks named A-STONE.
14. Put a checkmark next to Append to current selection set.
15. Click OK.
16. There should be 10 blocks total selected as a result of the quick selections.
Save and Close the Drawing. End of exercise.

030.090 Text & Annotation

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

20:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-090-001.mp4

Page 54 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


030.090.001

The best method for creating text in AutoCAD is to use the MTEXT command. This is found under
Annotate...Text...Multiline Text
Starting Text
Click an imaginary rectangle object to approximate the location of the text box. Once the text is placed you will see
the CAD interface change.
The Text Editor is a contextual tab that you will only see when creating or editing MTEXT. It behaves much like
Microsoft word in terms of formatting and typing in text. Any font and font size can be used in this editor.
The text in the graphic also has similarities to word processing. You can change the width of the page by using
the diamond shape on the right end of the toolbar.
Additionally, misspelled words will appear with a red underline - but only while the text is actively being edited.
Once the text editor is closed, this line will not appear.
Once you have completed working with text, click the Close Text editor button.

Editing & Formatting Text


If you wish to add to text, fix a spelling error or wish to re-enter the text editor for any reason, simply double-click
the piece of text to edit it.
MTEXTs insertion point is controlled by the justification. By default this is set to Top Left, but it is common to need
to change this in order to make text align the way you wish.
It is possible to highlight individual words and change the formatting as needed. This works very similar to a word
processor.

Importing Text
You can import two main types of files directly into AutoCAD:
RTF (rich text format)
TXT (plain text)
When it comes to working with existing Microsoft word documents, the easiest thing to do is use Copy and Paste.
Most formatting from Word, such s bold, underline and italic, will translate to AutoCAD. The only formatting that
will not translate to AutoCAD is strikethrough text.
Converting TEXT to MTEXT
When a CAD file is translated from Microstation to AutoCAD, the text does not translate as multiline text. The text
comes over as single-line text (or what some older AutoCAD people might call DTEXT). This type of text is more
difficult to format, as it does not use the contextual tab to control it.
You will want to convert plain text to mtext, using a tool found on the express tools tab.

Exercise: Working with Text

1. Open the file Text1.dwg.

This file should open in paperspace on a layout called 11x17. Verify that the
current layer is P_RW_TEXT.
2. From the Annotate tab, Text panel, set the current text style to 100.
3. Click Multiline Text button.
4. Use the rectangle on the left side of the drawing to guide you as you create the two corners of the text box.
5. Type in the text, NOTES: and press enter. Notice that enter in this case does not exit the text editor.
6 From the Text Editor contextual tab, click the Tools flyout and click Import Text.
7. Browse to the location of your training files and locate EASEMENT TEXT.TXT. Double click this file to
import it into AutoCAD.
8. Still in the text editor, highlight the text TEMPORARY LIMITED EASEMENT (TLE) and click the B for bold in
the Text Editor.
9. Repeat this step to make the text PERMANENT LIMITED EASEMENT (PLE) bold.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 55 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

10. Close the text editor.


11. Switch to the Express Tools tab.
12. From the Text panel, click Convert to MTEXT.
13. Select all the lines of text under (Airport Road to Southwest Road) near the top of the sheet, starting with
the line that says, To properly establish, lay out
14. The text should now be converted to MTEXT and can be formatted as you see fit.
Save the drawing. End of Exercise.
20:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-090-002.mp4

030.090.002

Annotation Scale
An annotative object automatically resizes based on the intended plot scale. The annotation scale only affects
objects that have the annotative attribute turned on.
The following base AutoCAD object types can be annotative:
Text
Dimensions
Multileaders
Hatch patterns
Blocks
Linetypes
In the case of text, dimensions and multileaders, the annotative behavior is determined as part of the objects style.
In the case of a hatch pattern, the annotative behavior can be turned on as you place the hatch. For blocks
annotative behavior is turned on in the block definition. For all of the above object types, you can also set the
behavior after the fact in the Properties palette.
Linetypes are a little different. Whether or not a line changes with annotation scale depends on an overall drawing
setting called MSLTSCALE. This drawing variable will affect all lines/polylines/circles etc. in the drawing. Key-in
MSLTSCALE at the command line. The default of 0 means that lines will not change per annotation scale. Setting
this to 1 will force lines to update with annotation scale.
You can tell an object has annotative behavior tied to it if you move your cursor over it and see the annotative
object symbol pop up next to your cursor.

Annotative Text
In this module, we will focus on annotative text. Whenever annotative text displays a height, you will see two
values. The Paper text height is the plotted size. The Model text height is the paper text height multiplied by the
annotative scale.
Each object will have a list of scales associated with it. For instance, select a piece of annotative text and rightclick. You will see Annotative Object Scale...Add Delete Scales.
You will then see a listing of the scales at which the object is intended to plot. For scales in the list, the text will
resize accordingly. For all other scales, the text can be hidden.

Why Learn About Annotative Objects?


For base AutoCAD objects such as blocks and text, you have a choice as to whether or not that object will change
with the annotation scale.
When you get into Civil 3D, text placed automatically, such as station labels or spot elevations, are always
annotative. (You do not have choice.)
The annotative scale does not affect the size that you draft design objects. For instance, a 10 fence is still a 10
fence.
This automatic resizing serves several purposes:
You never have to type in the same bit of text more than once.
You do not need to separate text of different heights by layer
You dont need to specify a text height in your text style thus eliminating the need for styles that use the
same font but have different text heights.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 56 of 390

Modelspace: Annotation Scale


You will see the current annotation scale and some related options in the lower right corner of your screen. To
change annotation scale, click the black arrow next to the current scale and pick from the list.
The buttons to the right of the current scale are very helpful. For new users, you will want to have these both
turned on. You can tell they are on when the symbols next to each icon is yellow rather than blue.
Annotation Visibility: Show annotative objects for all scales. This tells AutoCAD, Show me annotative stuff
regardless of annotation scale."
Automatically add scales to annotative objects when annotation scale changes.
We can also relocate text for a current scale by simply clicking on the grip and dragging the text to a new location.
This will prevent our text from overlapping objects when it changes size.

Paperspace: Viewport Scale


When we get to paperspace and set specific scales for viewports, the whole thing starts to come together. For
instance, if I am plotting a subdivision plan at 1=50 I would want to see street names and lot numbers. However,
if I am plotting a project overview at 1=200 all that detailed text would just get messy. I could use annotation
scales to tell CAD to hide the owner addresses at 1=200 by removing the scale from the list. Omitting the detail
text for this scale makes for a much neater drawing.
Exercise: Introduction to Annotation Scaling
1. Open the file Anno-Text.dwg.
When you open this drawing you will be on a layout tab called Viewport Examples 34x22.
2. Verify that your annotation settings match the following image when you are on the layout tab:
Annotation Visibility should be Off.
Automatically Add scales should be off
Each rectangle represents a Viewport. Viewports are a window into the model and are used to show
design objects on your paper. Viewports are critical in setting the scale for your project.
You may notice that the road names appear in the 1IN=50FT viewport but not in the other viewports. The
layer state is the same in all viewports. It is the annotative text behavior which is causing the difference in
the display. Synchronize
If the text appeared in the 1IN=400FT viewport, it would be too tiny to read.
3. Double-click inside the viewport labeled 1IN=50FT.
4. Click the text U.S.H. 14. Right-click and click Select Similar.
5. With the road names selected, right-click again and select Annotative Object Scale > Add/Delete Scales.
6. Set the radio button at the bottom to List Scales common to all selected objects only.
7. Click Add
8. Add 1IN=200FT and 1=10 to the list and click OK.
You should now see the text in multiple viewports.
9. Switch to the model tab.
The annotation scale in the model tab is 1IN=50FT.
10. Make sure the Annotation settings are set as shown here.
Annotation Visibility should be On.
Automatically Add scales should be On
11. Click the annotation scale in the lower-right of the screen. Change the annotation scale to 1=400.
12. The street names appear MUCH larger relative to the rest of the objects.
13. Experiment with the text by setting the annotation scale to various settings.
14. Check back on the layout tab.
Because the Automatically Add scales setting was turned on, 1=400 was automatically added to the
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 57 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


scale list.

Note that the text in each viewport is the same height. Whenever you see text height for an annotative
object, it is always referring to the height plotted.
Save and close the drawing. End of Exercise.
16:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-090-003.mp4

030.090.003

Text3.dwg
Text Styles
You have already been using text styles in this class, but you will go more in depth.
When making a new text style, making it annotative is very easy.
Just turn on the Annotative check box under size.
Leave the paper text height zero if you wish to use this style in a dimension. By default, the text height is
0.2 plotted.
You can change this default using the TEXTSIZE system variable.
If you do set a height in the style, the TEXTSIZE variable is ignored.

Exercise: Create Text Styles


You will create several text styles and review placing text in the drawing
.
1. Open the drawing Text3.dwg On the annotate tab, text panel, select the small arrow to open the text style
dialog.
Click New.
Name the new style ROAD NAMES
Click OK.
2. Change the font to Times New Roman
Place a checkmark next to Annotative
Set the width factor to 1.2
Click Apply
3. Close the Text Style dialog.
4. Verify that ROAD NAMES is the current text style.
5. Double-click the viewport to activate modelspace.
Type in TEXTSIZE at the command line.
Change the active text height to 0.25.
Press enter when complete.
6. Start the Multiline Text command and place the textbox anywhere in the modelspace of the viewport.
7. Key-in TEST ROAD NAME TEXT
8. Click outside the text box to complete.
9. Open the text style dialog again.
10. Click New.
Name the new style GENERAL NOTES
Click OK.
The new text style appears with the same attributes as the ROAD NAMES style. That is because
AutoCAD uses the active style as a starting point.
11. Change the font to Arial.
Uncheck the annotative option.
Change the Width factor to 0.9.
Click Apply.
12. Click close when complete.
Double-click outside the viewport to get back into paperspace mode.
13. Start the multiline text tool and draw your text box near the other bit of text.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 58 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

14. Key-in GENERAL NOTES EXAMPLE TEXT


Double-click inside the viewport to activate modelspace.
Unlock the viewport.
Change the viewport scale to 1=100
15. Use the techniques you learned in previously to reposition the text on the screen.
16. Re-lock the viewport.
Save and close the drawing. End of exercise.
13:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-090-004.mp4

030.090.004

Multileaders1.dwg
Multileaders
Multileaders are a leader with either text or a block as its end. You can choose any type of arrowhead for a leader.
You will find this command on the annotate tab.
Here you see multiple types of leaders including ones with multiple leader lines.
Multileaders can be comprised of straight lines or splines.
The text component can be text on its own or a block.
Leaders are intelligent and will prevent the leaders from crossing attached text.
Exercise: Placing Multileaders
1. In this exercise you will work in modelspace from the layout tab to place multileaders.
2.
3. Open the drawing MULTILEADERS1.dwg
4.
5. On the Annotate tab > Leaders Panel, set the current style to HEX.
4. Change the current layer to P_MISC_TXT.
5. Start the leader tool by clicking Multileader.
6. Use the node object snap to place the arrowhead on the sign to the right of the Dickason intersection. The
blue marker is there as a guide. The first click sets the arrowhead location.
7. Click a second time to place the landing location.
8. You are prompted to Enter a Tag Number.
9. Type in 1 and press enter. The multi leader will now be complete.
10. Repeat the previous steps to add a multileader at the sign just north of the intersection.
Use the HEX multileader style
Number the sign 2.
11. Change the active multileader style to TEXT ONLY.
12. Click to place the arrowhead at one of the nodes on the end of the magenta line as shown below.
13. Click to place the landing to the upper right.
14. Type in SAWCUT in the text box.
15. Click Close Text Editor to complete the leader.
16. Click the Add Leader button from the Leaders Panel.
17. Click the newly created SAWCUT multileader to indicate which multileader you are adding on to.
18. Click the opposite side of the street to place the arrowhead of the second leader.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 59 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

19. Press enter to complete the command.


20. Click the small arrow icon on the Leaders panel to enter the Multileader Style Manager.
21. Click New
22. Name the new style Circle and click Continue
On the Leader format tab, set the arrowhead symbol to Integral.
On the Content tab, change the Multileader type to Block.
Change the source block to Circle.
Click OK.
23. Click close to close the multileader style manger.
24. Set the current multileader style to Circle if it is not already.
25. Click Multileader.
26. Click to place the end of the leader at the node near the inlet.
Click a second time to set the landing location.
Type in 55 when prompted for the TAGNUMBER.
27. Add a second circle multileader to the symbol in the middle of the road, south of the intersection. Number
this one 56.
Save the drawing. End of exercise.
14:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-090-005.mp4

030.090.005

Dimension1.dwg, Dimension2.dwg
Dimensions
In this chapter you will be learning how to modify the new object you create.
Dimensioning is the process of adding measurement annotation to a drawing.
You can create dimensions for a variety of object types in many orientations. The basic types of dimensioning are
Linear
Radial (radius, diameter and jogged)
Angular
Ordinate
Arc Length
Linear dimensions can be horizontal, vertical, aligned, rotated, baseline, or continued (chained). Dimensions have
several distinct elements: dimension text, dimension lines, arrowheads, and extension lines.
Dimension text is a text string that usually indicates the measurement value. The text can also include
prefixes, suffixes, and tolerances.
A dimension line indicates the direction and extent of a dimension. For angular dimensions, the dimension
line is an arc.
Arrowheads, also called symbols of termination, are displayed at each end of the dimension line. You can
specify different sizes and shapes for arrowheads or tick marks.
Extension lines, also called projection lines or witness lines, extend from the feature to the dimension line.
A center mark is a small cross that marks the center of a circle or arc.
Centerlines are broken lines that mark the center of a circle or arc.

Exercise: Placing Dimensions


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Open DIMENSIONS1.dwg
Set the current layer to P_DRN_TEXT
Set the current dimension style to Plan_Bearing
Set the annotation scale to 1IN:10FT
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 60 of 390

5. On the Annotate tab, click the linear Dimension tool.


6. Create a dimension along the top of the manhole.
The first two clicks establish the distance, the third click will place the text and complete the dimension. It
does not matter which end of the line you click first. If your screen looks different from the image below,
check your settings for layer, dimension style and annotation scale.
7. Add another linear dimension along the left side of the manhole. Be sure to place the dimension line far
enough away so that it does not overlap the protrusion.
8. Start the Aligned dimension tool. Add a dimension along the angled edge of the manhole.
9. Start the radius dimension tool.
10. Click the large circle near the middle of the manhole. At the end of these steps, your drawing should look
like the following image.
11. Save the drawing. End of exercise.

Dimension Styles
A dimension style is a named collection of dimension settings that controls the appearance of dimensions, such as
arrowhead style, text location, and lateral tolerances.
You create dimension styles to specify the format of dimensions quickly, and to ensure that dimensions conform to
industry or project standards.
When you create a dimension, it uses the settings of the current dimension style
If you change a setting in a dimension style, all dimensions in a drawing that use the style update
automatically
You can create dimension substyles that, for specified types of dimensions, deviate from the current
dimension style
If necessary, you can override a dimension style temporarily

Exercise: Dimension Style Basics


You will create and modify a dimension style.
1. Open the file DIMENSIONS2.dwg. This drawing contains an example do-dad whose sole purpose is to give
you a feel for adding and modifying dimensions. You will create a dimension style and use it to dimension this
object.
2. Open the dimension styles dialog by clicking the arrow icon at the bottom of the dimensions panel.
3. Click New.
4. Name the new style EXAMPLE DIMS
5. Place a checkmark next to Annotative
6. Click Continue
7. Switch to the Symbols and Arrows tab.
8. Change the arrowhead type to Closed Blank.
9. Change the Arrowhead size to 0.2.
10. Switch to the Text tab.
11. Change the text style to 200.
12. Switch to the Primary units tab.
13. Change the display precision to 0.0
14. Click OK.
15. If you receive a message indicating that setting a new style current will discard overrides, click OK.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 61 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

16. Close the dimension style manager.


17. Verify that the current style has changed to EXAMPLE DIMS.
18. Set the current layer to P_MISC_TXT
19. Add a linear dimension to the top step of the do-dad.
20. Change the annotation scale to 1IN:20FT
21. Click the Continue command from the Dimensions panel.
22. When prompted to select the continued dimension, click the linear dimension you created previously.
23. Click the second step, then the third step to add new dimensions.
24. Press escape when complete.
25. Add an angular dimension along the bottom of the part.
26. Add an arc length dimension along the curved piece.
27. Enter the dimension style manager by clicking the small arrow.
28. With EXAMPLE DIMS selected, click Modify.
29. On the symbols and arrows tab, change all of the arrowhead types to Right angle.
30. Click OK to exit the style.
31. Click close to exit the dimension style manager.
32. All of the dimensions in the project will have updated to reflect the style change.
Save and close the drawing. End of exercise.

030.100 Blocks

Section updated:

10/1/2012

15:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-100-001.mp4

030.100.001

Block Basics
A block is a group of AutoCAD objects that have been tied together. A block can be used like a rubber stamp
you can have the same items over and over in the same drawing without having to recreate them.
Every block has a main base point. The base point appears as a grip when you select the block.
First you will learn to utilize existing blocks.

Methods for Inserting blocks


Here are the most common ways to work with existing blocks:
Insert a block from a tool palette
Insert a block that already exists in the drawing
Insert a block that comes from an external DWG.
Inserting from a Toolpalette
To open up the toolpalette, click the icon
When you are using civil 3D, the first set of tools you will see on the tool palette are special roadway creation tools.
The tool palette initially will not display blocks. To access some of the blocks available to you, right-click on the
edge of the tool palette.
Select Civil Multiview Blocks.
Once you have switched palette groups, the set of tabs along the side of the palette will change.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 62 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

The tabs represent different groupings of tools. This tool palette contains blocks that are useful to Civil 3D users.
Click on the Landscape tab.
Click the Detail tree 01.
To place a block in the drawing, click it from the palette and then place it in the drawing. The base point of the
block will automatically attach to your cursor. The first click places the base point of the block wherever you click
in the graphic. The second click establishes the rotation of the block. After you are done setting the rotation, you
are back at a Command prompt.
You may encounter blocks with the lightning bolt symbol shown in the tool palette. These are a special type of
block called dynamic blocks.

Insert Command
Inserting a Block Using the Insert Command
If you dont have blocks set up on a tool palette, you can use the more traditional Insert Block command.

Existing Block
If a block has already been inserted into the drawing or is defined in the template, you can easily insert it using the
insert block command.
From the Insert tab, go to the block panel and select Insert.
Click the dropdown to see the blocks available to you.
Select the block you wish to work with.
Set your Insertion point, scale and rotation options.
Click OK.
Browsing for Blocks
A block is just a special case of a DWG file. In fact, any DWG file can be used as a block.
When you get to the insert dialog box, click the Browse button and navigate to the folder where the DWG is saved.
Set the insertion, scale and rotation options.
Click OK.
Once the block has been pulled in from an outside file, it is no longer necessary to browse out for it again. It will
now show up in the list of blocks available in the drawing.

Block Insertion Settings


So, you noticed those checkboxes on the insert block settings. The insertion point refers to where the block base
point is going to end up when you place it in your drawing. The scale refers to how large the block will come in; as
compared to the size the block was defined. You always want Uniform Scale checked on. Rotation specifies the
angle at which the block will come in. This rotation angle is similar to the rotation angle used in the Rotate
command.
The block unit is AutoCAD reporting to you if it is doing any unit conversion. For instance, if the block you have
browsed for has been created in inches, AutoCAD will show the conversion that is automatically happening.
Explode should remain unchecked. You can always explode the block after it has already been inserted.

Exercise: Inserting Blocks


1. Open the file Blocks1.dwg
2. Set your current layer is E_LAND_VEGETATION
3. If it is not already open, open the tool palette from the Home tab > Palettes panel (or press CTRL+3).
4. Right-click on the edge of the toolpalette and select Civil Multiview blocks.
5. Switch to the landscape tab.
6. Locate Detail Tree 01 from the palette. Click the detail tree and then click again to place it in the drawing
near the driveway entrance (do not drag and drop).
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 63 of 390

7. Click to confirm any rotation angle of your choosing.


In this case, the block does not take on the layer color because of the way it was created. We will go into
detail about the correct procedure for creating blocks in the next exercise.
8. Switch to the insert tab of the ribbon.
9. From the Block panel, click Insert.
10. From the Block Name pull-down, select DTRE. This block is already part of the drawing.
For Insertion point, place a checkmark next to Specify on screen.
Clear the check marks for both scale and rotation.
11. Click OK and place the block near the driveway entrance. In this case the tree appears green because it
was defined correctly when it was created.
12. Change the current layer to E_LTG. This is the layer for existing lighting.
13. Start the insert command again and set the block name to LPOL. This block should already be part of the
block listing.
14. Place the block near the trees you placed earlier. Use the same settings for Insertion point, scale and
rotation as you did for the tree.
15. Set the current layer to 0.
16. Start the insert command again. This time click Browse. Select the block called Mystery Structure.dwg.
17. Clear the checkbox for Insertion point. We want the building to come in at its original coordinates.
18. Click OK.
Save the drawing. End of exercise.
17:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-100-002.mp4

030.100.002

Blocks2.dwg
Creating Blocks
You learned in the chapter on layers, that 0 is not used for general drafting. The 0 layer acts as a placeholder for
the inner geometry of blocks. In other words, blocks should be created on layer 0.
When the completed blocks are ready to use, they will be inserted with the correct layer current.
When you draw objects you wish to convert to a block, you will find the Create block icon on the Insert tab of the
ribbon, on the Block panel. When you create a block in this manner you are creating a local block.
Give your block a name and select the base point using the pick point icon.
Use Select objects to make sure you have the correct items selected. Generally people want to use the
Convert to Block option.
Verify the units, whether or not the item is to be annotative and click OK.
If you wish to export your block to an external drawing (i.e. turn it into a global block) you can do so by typing W at
the command line. The write block command will allow you to pick an existing block from the drawing (as shown
here) or you can export items from your drawing as a block while maintaining them as non-blocks locally. In many
cases, you will be using this command to push an existing block to its own DWG file as shown here.
The most common mistake when writing blocks is forgetting to set the destination path. The default path is the My
Documents folder. Dont lose your blocks!

Editing Blocks
For many blocks, simply double-clicking on the block you wish to edit is the most efficient way to get into the Block
Editor. After you double-click on a block, the Edit Block Definition appears and you can verify which block you want
to edit.
However, in some cases you will encounter blocks that contain attributes, such as the WisDOT titleblocks. When
you double click a block that contains attributes, the block editor does not appear. Instead you are taken to a spot
where you can edit attributes. In cases where double-clicking does not take you to the block editor, you can use
the block editor button from the ribbon.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015

Page 64 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Once inside the block editor, you will notice that your workspace has automatically changed. The background will
be a gray color, helping you to visually identify that you are no longer in a regular drawing area. You will also see a
green context tab with block-specific tools in it. Dont worry, you can still change tabs and use more familiar draw
and modify commands from the home tab.
When you are done working in the block editor, you will want to save the block.
Notice that you can also save the block with a different name if you wish. Using save as will not change the original
block, but it will create an additional block that contains the changes you made.

Exercise: Create a Block


In this exercise you will create a block from scratch using the tools you have learned. You will also modify an
existing block.
You may want to review the following topics, as they will be used in this exercise:
Drawing Circles & lines
Offset
Object snaps
1. Open the file Blocks2.dwg or continue working in the drawing from the previous exercise. This is the same
drawing you left off with from the previous exercise.
2. Set the current layer to 0.
3. Using skills you used in the previous chapters, draw the following object (shown here with dimensions for
illustration sake). You may draw this item anywhere in the drawing area.
4. Click Create Block
5. The Block Definition dialog appears.
6. For the name, type in SECTION CORNER
7. For the base point, click Pick Point.
8. Use object snaps and tracking to locate and click the center of the symbol. As soon as you click, you are
instantly taken back to the block definition dialog.
9. Click Select Objects
10. Select all the lines that comprise the section corner symbol.
11. Set the Radio button to Delete.
12. Set all other options as shown here and click OK.
The block is created, but the original objects have been deleted from the drawing.
13. Set the current layer to P_RW_SectionCorner
Click insert
Set the name of the block to be placed as SECTION CORNER
Verify that Specify on-screen option is checked and click ok.
14. Place the section corner in the western corner of the parking lot.
15. Click Insert.
Browse for the block named CAUTION
Verify that Specify on-screen is checked for the insertion point.
Click OK
16. Place the block anywhere in the drawing and select it. Notice that the insertion point is not in a logical
position. This is one of the items we will correct in the next steps.
17. Click Block Editor
18. Click OK to verify that you wish to edit the CAUTION block. You are taken to the block editor.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 65 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


19. On the status bar, turn off Dynamic input.
Switch to the Home tab and select move.
When prompted to select objects, select all the objects that form the caution symbol.
Press enter to continue.
When prompted for the base-point, select the center of the circle inside the word caution.
20. When prompted for the second point, key-in 0,0.

21. Press enter.


Because we had dynamic input off for that maneuver, the move command should have relocated the
symbol to 0,0 in the block editor. 0,0 in the block editor is where the insertion point resides.
22. You can tell if you were successful if the UCS icon is in the center of the symbol.
23. Delete the circle on the T of the word Caution.
Switch back to the green block editor tab.
Click Save Block.
24. Click Close Block editor.
25. Select the block. Back in the main drawing area, you will see that the grip aligns with the base point in a
logical location.
Save and close the drawing. End of exercise.

030.110 Plotting Basics

Section updated:

10/1/2012

9:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-110-001.mp4

030.110.001

Plotting1.dwg
Printing Basics
At the bottom-left of your screen you should see several tabs. The Model tab is where all of your drafting and the
majority of your labeling should go. The layout tabs represent pieces of paper and act as a dynamic print preview.
If you do not see your layout tabs:
It is recommended that you have your layout and model tabs displayed. If you dont see them, do the following:
Right-click the Model button and select Display Layout and Model Tabs
All formal printing will happen from the layout tabs. The only time you would print from the Model tab is if you are
just creating a check and are not concerned about scale or a titleblock.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 66 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Printing Terminology
Annotation scale - the scale that drives the size of annotative text/blocks/etc on the model tab. This does not
affect the size of the final plot, nor does it carry over to the viewports.
Layout - acts as a working print preview-like view. This shows how your design, title block and the paper relate
to each other. In some cases you will see this referred to as a sheet.
Modelspace - the location where your main design is drafted. When you are on the main model tab, you are
always in modelspace. You can be in modelspace from a layout tab if you have a viewport active. Modelspace
measurements will always be in feet.
Paperspace - the drafting mode when you are directly working on the paper. You can tell you are in
paperspace when you see triangular USC icon. Paperspace always shows units in inches (not feet).
Printing - sending a single layout to a printer or to a file such as PDF.
Plotting - same as printing. These terms are used interchangeably throughout the software and this document.
Publishing - sending multiple layouts to a printer (or PDF file) at once. Publishing can be done through the
Sheetset Manager or through the publish command.
Sheetset manager - a saved list of layouts that go together. Primarily this is for printing purposes, but it is also
used to fill out pre-defined fields in the titleblock.
Viewport - a window into your design as seen from one of the layout tabs. Viewports are used to set the
desired plot scale of the project.
Viewport scale - the plotted scale assigned to the viewport.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 67 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Paperspace and Modelspace


Working with Paperspace and Modelspace can be a funky concept for people who have never used AutoCAD
before. The tabs on the bottom of the drawing area will switch you between main Modelspace and the layout tabs.

The Model Tab (the Real Modelspace)


The model tab is where you will do the vast majority of drafting, design and annotation. You may not delete,
rename or move the layout tab from its position. You will work in real-life scale; a 24 wide road will be 24 wide.
The annotation scale you see while you are working in Modelspace affects the size of text placed by AutoCAD or
annotative text placed by AutoCAD. While you are in the model tab, this scale is determined by drafters
preference. Because you will do all your plotting out of paperspace, the scale doesnt affect anything at all other
than your ability to see it!

Layout Paperspace
The layout tabs are there for you as you get ready to print your project. Switch to the layout tab you wish to work
with by clicking on the name of the tab at the bottom of your drawing screen. Once you have switched to the
layout, you will see the following: The big white square represents the size and orientation of the piece of paper
you would like to print. We will discuss setting the paper size in the next unit.
The dashed line represents the printable bounds, or the limit as far as how close to the edge of the paper you
printer can print. The distance between this dashed line and the edge of paper is usually determined by the printer
you are sending your design to. The viewport is a window into your design.
The triangular Paperspace UCS icon is a sign to us that we are in paperspace. Any drawing we do when the
triangular icon is showing will only be on our current layout. We are not affecting Modelspace as long as you see
this symbol or the MODEL button at the bottom on the screen. Any zooming in and out just zooms the paper itself,
and does not affect the final print of the drawing. Paperspace is where you will draw your title block, add north
arrows and add text related to the date, project location etc.

Layout- Modelspace
If you double-click inside the viewport you are activating a viewport.
Youll notice that the UCS icon changes and the viewport outline gets heavier. You are now in Modelspace. We
can now work inside the viewport. Any drawing we do at this point affects the main model. If we zoom and pan in
this state, you are changing the scale and location of the Modelspace view. It is a GREAT idea to lock the viewport
once you have gotten your view in the right place and at the desired scale. With the viewport active, set the scale
by using the scale list in the status bar.
When the viewport is locked, you can still draw in Modelspace and manipulate layers, you just cant pan or
zoom.To get back to paperspace, double-click outside the viewport or click the button in your status bar.
11:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-110-002.mp4

030.110.002

Plotting1.dwg
Exercise: Getting the Feel for Paperspace & Modelspace
In this exercise, you will get comfortable working with layout tabs, paperspace and modelspace.
1. Open the drawing Plotting1.dwg.
2.
3. Switch to layout view Layout 1 34x22.
4.
5. Right-click on Layout 1 Layout 1 34x22 and select New Layout.
4. Switch to the new layout.
Double click the tab for the layout and rename it to My New Layout. The text will not be bold when you
have completed the rename.
Select the edge of the viewport in the center of the page and Delete it. (You will learn about setting the
Paper size in an upcoming exercise.)
5. Switch back to Layout 1 34x22.
Click the gray rectangle on its edge. This is the viewport
Click the lock icon in the lower right corner of the screen so that it turns yellow. The viewport is now
unlocked.
Change the viewport scale to 1IN:100FT.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 68 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Click the lock icon again. You have just changed the viewport scale.
At the command line, type in REA to regenerate the view and update the special text that labels the
viewport scale.
6. Hold down the control key on your keyboard and drag the Layout 1 34x22 tab to the right. You will see a
layout symbol with a plus sign appear.
7. Release the cursor and the control key to form the copy.
8. Make the new layout current by clicking the tab.
Double click it to edit the name.
Rename the tab to Broadhead Intersection.
9. Drag the tab so that it is to the right of My New Layout.
Keep an eye on the black arrow to help you find the location of the tab.
10. Right-click and Delete the Layout2 34x22 tab. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
11. Switch to the Example tab.
12. Verify that the current layer is PLT_Sheet_Border
13. On the Insert tab...Block panel of the ribbon, click Insert. The block SHT42-C3D12 is already defined in the
listing of available blocks.
Hint: Start typing the name of the block to jump in the listing.
Uncheck all options for Specify on screen
Click OK.
The block should drop in but is too small.
14. Start the Scale command that you used in the Modify chapter.
Use the lower-left most corner of the titleblock as the basepoint.
Use a scale factor of 2.
The block should now line up perfectly with the sheet.
15. Click Insert again. This time select the Graphic Scale that is in the listing.
Place a checkmark next to Specify on screen for the insertion point.
Set all other options as shown below.
16. Repeat the block insertion one last time and insert the block called North3.
Save the Drawing, End of exercise.
13:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-110-003.mp4

030.110.003

Plotting1.dwg
Exercise: Creating and Scaling Viewports
In this exercise, you will create viewports and set them to the desired plot scale.
You will use the dynamic block that was placed in the previous exercise to show the correct scale on the bar scale.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Open the drawing Plotting2.dwg or continue working in the previous drawing.


Set the current layer to PLT_Viewport
Verify that you are on the Example layout tab.
On the Layout Tools Contextual Tab, Viewports panel, click Rectangular.

5. Use the title block with object snaps to set the first corner of the title block. Click this first corner.
6. Click the second corner using object snaps.
7. The modelspace image will appear in the viewport.
8. Double click your cursor inside the viewport.
You have switched to modelspace through the viewport.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 69 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


9. Set the viewport scale to 1IN=200FT

10. Use the pan command to center the view.


If you accidentally roll your mouse wheel, it will cause the viewport scale to slip. If this happens, simply reselect 1IN=200FT from the annotation scale list.
11. Next to the viewport scale listing, verify that the scale is still 1IN=200FT and click the lock icon.
The lock icon turns blue and you are no longer able to pan or zoom the viewport.
12. Switch back to paperspace by double-clicking outside of the thick viewport border or by clicking the Model
button at the bottom right of the screen.
13. Select the bar scale at the bottom of the screen.
14. Click the visibility grip and pick 1=200 from the listing.
15. Right-click on the Example Tab and select Move or Copy.
16. In the Move or Copy dialog box, highlight (move to end)
17. Place a checkmark next to Create a Copy and click OK.
18. Switch to the Example (2) tab and unlock the viewport.
19. Set the Viewport a scale to 1IN:50FT. Lock the viewport again.
20. Use the Layer Freeze command to freeze the layers that contain the vegetation.
These objects are only frozen in this viewport.
End of exercise. Save and close the drawing.
13:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-110-004.mp4

030.110.004

Plotting3.dwg
Page Setup
You will frequently use the same size piece of paper - usually 11x17. You will also frequently need the same
settings for multiple layouts. In the next few steps, you will create a Named Page Setup and apply it to multiple
layouts.
Page Setup Manager
Right-click on the tab you are working with.
Create New Page Setup
Select Page Setup Manager
In the Page Setup Manager, click NEW
In the New Page Setup dialog box you are creating the name for your printing settings.
I recommend having the name reflect:
The name of the printer
The paper size
What type of color the print out will be
Click OK.
Setting the Printer
First, set your printer to the correct device. All printers that you are attached to will show up in this list, as well
as some options for printing to a file (such as PDF).
In most cases, you should print to PDF first. This eliminates any problems sending the output directly to the
printer.
Paper Size
Next, set your paper size. The list of sizes comes from the printer. In the case of a PDF, there is no physical
limit of roll width. Any size can be used from PDF. Whenever possible, use the WisDOT specific paper sizes.
These are set up to have the correct margin location and sizes to fit the WisDOT title blocks correctly.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 70 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Plot Area, Scale & Offset


The what to plot option should always read Layout.
Leave the plot offset at X: 0.000 inch, Y: 0.000 inch.
Plot scale should be 1=1. Remember we set the viewport to an appropriate scale, so the scaling is taken
care of already.
The only time this should be 1 inch = 2 units is when you are forcing a D-size sheet (34x22) to plot as a B-size
sheet (17x11).
Plot Style Table
The Plot Style table needs to be set to reflect how you want to handle colors from the drawing.
Want full-color, what-you-see-is-what-you-get in your print? Use wisdot-color.stb
Want some colors to be dark gray, some black, some lighter gray? Use wisdot-gshade.stb
Objects on layers starting with E for existing will plot gray.
Objects on all other layers, such as P for proposed or PLT for plot will plot black.
Want all black lines? Use wisdot-black.stb
Leave the rest of the settings as-is and click OK.
Apply Page Setup to a Layout
Now click Set Current.
In the background you will see the paper size change to the size you set in the last step.
You will also see that the name of your page setup appears in parenthesis next to the name of your active
Layout.
Close the Page Setup Manager.
Re-using the Page Setup
The beautiful thing about this is that we can recycle the Page Setup you created. Odds are good that another
layout will go to the same plotter, have the page size and same color settings.
Switch to the layout you wish to change.
Right-click on the layout tab and pick Page Setup Manager.
Highlight the page setup.
Click Set Current.
You just saved yourself the trouble of redoing those settings for each layout.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 71 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Exercise: Page Setup


In this first activity you will create several page setups and apply them to a layout tab. Named page setups help
organize drawings and can be placed in a template file so they dont have to be created over and over.
1. Open the file Plotting3.dwg.
You must switch to this file as several new layouts have been created for you..
2. Right-click on any of the layout tabs and select New Layout.
3. Switch to the new layout tab.
The layout tab is completely empty, except for the viewport.
You should be able to identify the paper and the dashed line that represents the outer plotting extents.
4. Right-click on the layout tab and select Page Setup manager.
5. Inside the Page Setup manager, click New.
6. You are prompted to name your new page setup.
7. Name the page setup 11x17 PDF WisDOT Color.
This page setup name reflects the key components of the named page setup you are about to create.
8. Inside the main page setup area, set the printer to WisDOT PDF.pc3.
9. Set the paper size to WisDOT (17x11 Inches) L (this will be at the top of the paper size listing.)
10. Set the plot style table to wisdot-color.stb
This plot style table is going to generate a color PDF. If we were plotting to a color printer, you would see
the colors that you have specified on screen as the colors that will be printed on the finished paper.
11. Your Page Setup should resemble the image shown here.
Place a checkmark next to Display Plot Styles
What to plot should be set to Layout
Plot offsets for both X and Y should be 0.
The scale will be 1:1
Leave all other settings as default.
Click OK when complete.
12. Back in the Page Setup manager, click set current.
13. Remain in the Page Setup manager.
Notice that the new page setup is listed next to the layout name.
14. You should notice that the paper size has changed and that the plot extents are slightly different.
15. Click New again and make a new page setup named : 22x34 PDF WisDOT Gray with the following
settings:
Plotter WisDOT PDF.pc3
Paper size WisDOT (34x22 Inches) L
Plot style table WisDOT-gshade.stb
Place a checkmark next to Display Plot Styles
Leave all other settings as default
16. Click OK when complete.
17. Click set current. You should notice more changes in the background
18. Highlight 11x17 PDF WisDOT Color (the page setup you created previously).
19. Click Set Current.
You should notice a difference in the size of the paper.
Experiment by exiting the page setup manager, changing tabs and setting a different plot style current.
Save the drawing. End of exercise.
11:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-110-005.mp4

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 72 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


030.110.005

Printing and Publishing


We are going to keep this printing thing as simple as possible. In the future, you may want to get acquainted with
the Publish option, which allows you to print multiple pages in one shot. In this document, Im going easy on you.
It is near to the end of the document and you are probably tired of reading all this stuff anyway.
Click the Application Menu and click Print.
(No need to dive into the other options on the right.)
You will see the print settings you created previously. Always use the Preview button before you print.
When you click Preview, you will see EXACTLY what will come out of the printer. If there is a problem here, you
can correct it before you commit it to paper. If you like what you see, click print. If you need to go back and adjust
something, click close print preview.

Exercise:Printing & Publishing


In this exercise you will use print preview to view the design before you print. You will use the Plot to PDF option.
1. Open the drawing Plotting4.dwg. Even if you completed the previous exercises, there are a few things added
to this drawing.
2.
3. Switch to the Scott Street tab.
4.
5. Right-click and select plot.
6.
7. Notice that all the plot settings are completed ahead of time because of the named plot setup we created in
the previous exercise.
8.
9. Click Preview.
10.
11. Click close on the preview using the circle - X icon.
You are back at the plot dialog box.
7. Click OK inside the plot dialog.
8. Save the output file to the class file folder.
9. When plot and publish job complete bubble appears, browse to the PDF file and double click it to open.
(Depending on the version of your Adobe reader, it may pop up automatically)
10. Examine the file and experiment with turning layers on and off.
11. Close Adobe reader when complete.
12. Switch to the Site overview tab.
13. Use your shift key to select all the layouts from Site Overview to HWY KP.
14. Right-click and select Publish Selected Layouts.
15. In the Publish dialog box click Publish Options.
16. Verify that the default location where the PDF will be stored is your Documents folder. (You may change
this path to be whatever you wish by clicking the ellipsis icon.)
17. Verify that the Type is Multi-sheet file and Layer information is included.
18. Click OK.
19. Click OK in the publish dialog.
20. Click close when AutoCAD reminds you that your publish job is processing in the background.
21. Watch the animated plot icon to verify that the job is processing.
22. When the plot and publish job is complete, dismiss the bubble by clicking the X.
23. Browse to location of the PDF to examine the result.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 73 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

24. Switch through the multiple pages to examine each page.


25. Close the PDF when youve had enough.
Save and close the drawing. End of exercise.

030.120 XREFS

Section updated:

10/1/2012

16:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-120-001.mp4

030.120.001

XREF.dwg

Intro to External References


External references are a way of viewing another drawing as a backdrop for your current drawing. You
can measure, snap to and work with layers of the items in the referenced drawing.
External Reference (XREF) Terminology
Attachment The building (file) is part of the file. It will follow the drawing where ever it goes.
Attach links referenced drawing to the current drawing; any changes to the referenced drawing are
displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded.
Overlay The building (file) is only for show. It will not follow the drawing. By overlaying an xref,
you can see how your drawing relates to the drawings of other groups without changing your drawing
by attaching an xref.
Full Path Committed relationship between drawing file and xreference. Its a long path and must
be maintained. The drawing file looks first at the network server for the xref.
Relative Path Casual relationship between drawing file and xreference. Its a short path and
easier to maintain. The drawing file looks first in the same folder for the xref.
Unload Makes xref invisible but holds its place.
Reload Makes xref visible or is used to update the xreference.
Detach Completely removes link between the drawing file and xref.
Why Use XREFs
There are several reasons why you would want to use XREFs:
Prevents your current drawing from getting too big.
Allows other people to work in the XREFd drawing while you are working in the current drawing.
Gives you access to some Civil 3D data in the XREFd drawing.
Working with XREFs
Before you attach a drawing as an XREF, save your current drawing.
To attach another drawing, go to the Insert tab > Reference panel and click Attach.
Make sure your Files of Type is set to DWG. It is possible to attach other types of files, but were
sticking to the basics in this document.
Overlay vs Attachment
Use Overlay for General Drafting
In most cases, you should try to use the Overlay option.
Funny though it seems at first, this setting doesnt actually effect the drawing you are currently
working in. It does affect any downstream drawings that might have your current drawing XREFd
in.
In the case of an overlay, you only get one level of references. (Microstation users will know this as
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 74 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


a nest depth set to zero).

In other words, if X is referenced into Y as an overlay, and then Y is later referenced into Z, X does
not come along for the ride. When Im working in Z, Ill just see Y attached. Overlay is preferable
because it is less confusing and avoids the dreaded circular reference.

Use Attach When Preparing to Create P&P Sheets


If you are preparing a drawing as your base for pan and profile sheets, you will want to use the Attach
option. When you XREF drawings that contain attachments, those attachments come along for the ride.
The reason this is advantageous for P&P sheeets is that the automated Civil 3D tool to create P&P
sheets will automatically create new drawings and XREF in the design elements that you want. If you
used overlay in this situation, your plan objects would not carry over.

Set the Path type to Relative path.


Click OK.
If your current drawing and the XREF drawing are in the same coordinate system, keep the scale,
insertion point and rotation at the default values.
The XREF layers now appear in the Layer Properties manager and can be frozen & thawed individually
just like any other layer.
Exercise: XREFs
1. Open the drawing XREF.dwg
2. Go to the Insert tab > Reference Panel and click Attach.
3. At the bottom of the Select Reference File dialog, change the Files of Type to DWG.
4. Browse to the file CONTOURS.dwg and click Open.
5. In the Attach External Reference file dialog box, clear all checkmarks for Scale, Insertion Point
and Rotation.
6. Set the path type to Relative path.
7. Set the reference type to Overlay.
8. Click OK.
9. Save the drawing, but keep it open for some experimenting.
10. Start a new drawing based on the WisDOT12.dwt template.
11. Save the drawing as Test.dwg in the same folder as the rest of the files for this exercise.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 75 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

12. Go to Insert > Reference > Attach again.


13. Attach XREF.dwg to the current drawing.
14. Use the same settings for Relative path and overlay.
15. Click OK.
16. Open the External Reference Manager by clicking the small arrow on the Reference panel (or by
entering XREF on the command line).
17. Click the button to switch to Tree View.
Notice that Contours did not show up in the graphic or the XREF manager. That is because it
was referenced to XREF as an overlay.
18. Switch back to XREF.dwg by using Quick View drawings.
1. Click the Quick View Drawings icon at the bottom of the screen.
2. Click the thumbnail for XREF that appears.
3. Click the X in the small toolbar if the thumbnails do not disappear automatically.
19. If you closed the XREF manager, open it again.
20. Highlight the Contours drawing.
21. At the bottom of the XREF manager, change the Type to Attach.
22. Save the drawing.
23. Use Quick View Drawings to switch back to TEST.dwg.
24. After a moment you should be prompted to reload the xref. (If you do not get this prompt, be
sure you saved the other drawing.
25. Click the link to Reload XREF.
26. In the XREF manager, you will now see Contours appear under XREF.
27. Hide the Contours drawing by right-clicking on it in the External reference manager and select
Unload.
28. Save the drawings and close. End of Exercise.

030.130 Basic interface modifications

Section updated:

10/1/2012

16:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-130-001.mp4

030.130.001

Workspaces
When you are working in AutoCAD the display of your tabs, ribbons and Quick access toolbar are controlled by a
named Workspace. The workspace that you are working in currently is most likely the Civil 3D default.
If you have modified the position of your tabs and/or panels you can save your workspace changes to your own
named workspace.
After changes are made, you can click Save Current As.. to create a custom named workspace.
Give your Workspace a name and click Save

Quick Access Toolbar


The quick Access Toolbar is a component of the Workspace that is very east to modify.
Any icon can be added or removed from the Quick access toolbar by right-clicking and selecting Add to Quick
Access Toolbar.
Frequently Added Items to the QAT Include:
Layer Pull-down
Properties
Create Viewport
Layer Manager
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 76 of 390

Tool palette
Tile Vertically
Layer Freeze
Exercise: Quick Access Toolbar
In this exercise, you will add useful tools to the quick access toolbar. It is highly recommended that you go through
this and add the recommended tools to the QAT.
1. Open any drawing (or click QNEW). No drawing will take place in this file. It doesnt matter what drawing
you have open for this example, as long as you have a drawing active, you will have access to the dialog
boxes needed to make the changes.
2.
3. Right-click on the Workspaces pull-down in the Quick Access Toolbar and select Remove From Quick
Acces toolbar.
4.
5. On the home tab...Layers panel right-click on the layers pulldown.
4. Select Add to Quick Access Toolbar.
5. At the command line, key-in CUI
6. After a moment the CUI editor will appear.
7. In the upper-left side, locate Quick Access Toolbars > Quickaccess toolbar 1 and layer combo control.
8. Highlight Layer combo control.
9. In the right hand side, change the Maximum width to 300.
10. Change the Minumum width to 250.
11. Click OK to finish the task and close the CUI editor. After a moment the Layer pull-down in the Quick
access toolbar will become longer.
12. On the Home tab, right click on Properties and select Add to Quick Access toolbar.
13. Right-click on Toolpalettes and select Add to Quick Acces toolbar. You can add as little or as much to the
Quick Access toolbar as you wish.
14. Click on the workspace icon at the far bottom of the AutoCAD window.
15. Select Save Current As
16. You are prompted to name the workspace.
17. Name the workspace My Workspace and click Save.
18. Close AutoCAD Civil 3D. This ensures that the changes you made to the interface are truly saved.
19. Open AutoCAD Civil 3D again (it does not matter what drawing you have up). The changes you made to
the quick access toolbar will still be available.
20. End of Exercise.
Options
When you first open AutoCAD, the background is not a true black, but more of a dark chalkboard color. If you are
familiar with older versions of AutoCAD, you may also notice that object snap symbols are now green rather than
yellow. These colors are simply a matter of personal preference and can be easily modified in the Options Dialog.
You can access AutoCAD Options from many places. From the Application menu, go to Options.
Also, if you are not in an active command, right-click anywhere to access the options dialog.
On the Display tab you will see many options that are available to change. The most common option to change
from here is the color display.
Once inside the Drawing Window Colors area, you can change many things. However the default is the color of
the main background.
The Display tab is also where you can change the Cross hair size as a percentage of the screen. The default is
5%, but many people choose to increase this for better visibility.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 77 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


The Open and Save tab is another frequently modified tab.
Many users prefer to place a checkmark next to Display Full path in title.
Do not turn off your automatic save.
The settings shown here are recommended.
The 3D Modeling tab is another location where users like to make changes.

If you are primarily working in 2D, you may not need the viewcube and can remove it by unchecking it as shown.
If you would like to remove the viewport controls from your views, you can uncheck the Display the Viewport
Control checkbox.
AutoCAD saves these settings to the local users machine registry. That is, if another user logs into a computer
that has custom settings in the Options, the second user will not see the changes.
These options can be exported out to a Profile file if needed.

Exercise: AutoCAD Options


You can change your background color to whatever you want. Black, white or even magenta (although this is just
shown here as a joke).
1. It does not matter what drawing you are in, as these settings are saved to the registry of the computer.
2. From the Application menu, choose Options The Options Dialog opens.
3. Go to the Display tab
4. Click the Colors button
5. Set your background color to whatever color you wish. Most people choose black.
6. Click Apply & close when complete.
7. On the Display tab, set the cross hair size to 20
8. Switch to the Open and Save Tab
9. Place a checkmark next to Display full path in title
10. Switch to the 3D Modeling tab
11. Clear the checkmark next to 2D Wireframe visual style.
12. Click OK
13. Exit AutoCAD and restart it. It is on exit that the Options gets saved to the AutoCAD portion of the
Windows registry.
End of exercise.

Module 040 Points


The segments in this module use files found within the zip file linked to in the first section. If you want to do the
exercises in the same file as the instructor, do the following:
Download the zip file to your computer.
Extract the zip file to a local location. C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-training is a suggested loctation.
After extraction, there should be a folder called "040-exercise-files". The exercise files are located here.
The file used in a section will be in italics at the beginning of the section (e.g. Intro.dwg )
Open the file prior to the exercise to follow along with the instructor.

040.010 Civil 3D point basics

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Point exercise files


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/040/040-exercise-files.zip
11:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-010-001.mp4

040.010.001

Bridge Survey.dwg
Point basics
What is a point?
Civil 3D object that represents a location
Frequently collected from a field survey / GPS
or imported from CAiCE
or generated by hand
Has X,Y and (usually) Z coordinates
Civil 3D Points vs AutoCAD Points
Civil 3D Points
Are used frequently in Civil 3D
Are intelligent objects
Have description and number

Page 78 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Can be organized by point group
Can have differing symbols depending on description
Work with Description Keys
Can have styles applied
AutoCAD Points
Used infrequently
Are base AutoCAD objects
Have no distinctive characteristics
Can be organized by layer
All AutoCAD points will have the same symbol

Definitions
Description Key Set: A listing of field codes, styles and layers. When a point is imported/created Civil 3D
checks to see if there is a code matching the point description. If so, the point will take on the properties from
the Description Key Set
Point Group: A listing of points that have something in common. For example, all Electrical Utility shots or all
shots brought in from the same point file. Point groups are used to organize points and control display
Anatomy of a Point
Marker- Blocks/Symbols representing location of said shot
Text-Point number, Elevation, Description
Editing Points
Editing Markers with grips
Multifunctional grip menu
Editing Labels with grips
Multifunctional grip menu

040.020 Points in Prospector

Section updated:

10/1/2012

11:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-020-001.mp4

040.020.001

Bridge Survey.dwg
Accessing all the Points in a file
Toolspace...Prospector tab...Points...Rt. Click...Edit Points
Edit Points Table in Panorama
Accessing specific points
Toolspace...Prospector tab...Point Groups...Specific Point Group Name...Rt. Click...Edit Points
Group Locking vs Point Locking
Lock Points will prevent you from moving or editing points graphically or through the Panorama
Lock refers to the group. If a group is locked, additional points cannot be added to the group. It also prevents
the group from being deleted
Zoom to Points
Pan to Points

040.030 Point groups

Section updated:

10/1/2012

11:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-030-001.mp4

040.030.001

Point_Groups.dwg
Point Group: A listing of points that have something in common. For example, all Electrical Utility shots or all shots
brought in from the same point file
Another way to think of it: Point Groups act as a Filter. Filter points in and/or out to specify which points will be
part of the group.
Point groups are helpful when
Building a surface, but want to EXCLUDE certain shots
(inverts, top of hydrant, tree stumps)
Changing the elevation of a specific range of points.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 79 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


(raise all shots by 0.25 for example)
Changing how certain points appear in the drawing.
Isolating all the roadway CL shots
Finding out how many trees are in the R/W
Working with soil boring data
Create Point Groups
ToolspaceProspector...Point Groups...Rt. Click Select New
Point Groups Properties
Tabs
Information
Include Exclude
Overrides
Point List

040.040 Point groups & styles

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Section updated:

10/1/2012

12:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-040-001.mp4

040.040.001

Point_Groups2.dwg
Point Group Listing
Toolspace...Point Groups...Rt. Click Properties
Point Styles
Marker Styles
Label Styles
Description Keys

040.050 Point creation tools


23:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-050-001.mp4

040.050.001

Point Placement Practice.dwg


Creating Manual Points
Home Tab...Create Ground Data...Points pull down...Point Creation Tools...Create Points Toolbar opens
Point Creation Settings
Chevron Icon to open Point Parameters
Default Layer- Used if Description key is not found
Points Creation- Setting Prompt for Descriptions to Automatic will force Civil 3D to use the default
Description from these settings
Command Icons and Pulldowns
Miscellaneous
Intersection
Alignment
Surface
Interpolation
Slope
Note: Not all Point Commands Pick up Elevation

040.060 Converting points from AutoCAD points

Section updated:

10/1/2012

6:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-060-001.mp4

040.060.001

Existing_TOPO.dwg
Creating Points
Home Tab...Create Ground Data panel...Points pull down...Point Creation Tools...Create Points Toolbar opens
Expand Points Creation
Prompt For Descriptions = None
Prompt For Elevations = Automatic

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 80 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Manual Points Pulldown
Convert AutoCAD Points
Select By Crossing window
Export Points to File
Prospector>Points Groups>All Points>Rt Click Export Points
Select Format (PNEZD)
Select Destination file
Uncheck all boxes
Click OK

040.080 Importing points from a file

Section updated:

10/1/2012

14:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-080-001.mp4

040.080.001

The most common formats for text files:


PNEZD (Comma Delimited)
PNEZD (Space Delimited)
Point Number, Northing, Easting, Elevation Z, Description. These may end with TXT, PNT, CSV, ASC,
NEZ, PRN
Start with new template
Open...Browse to Templates- USWI File folder...wisdot12-etopog.dwt...open...Save as (new project
name)
Consultants can download the WisDOT templates and other content from:
ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/civil3d-2012-win7-64/
Import Points
Insert Tab...Points from File icon ...Import Points Dialog Box
Add file by browsing to folder
Select format (PNEZD)
Place Checkmark in Add Points to Point Group (create point group on the fly)
Click ok (zoom extents if points are not shown)
Prospector...Point Groups...Update
Point Group...Rt. Click...Apply Description Keys
Important notes:
If you are working with a PNT file that has already been converted from an SRV the format is:
PENZ (Comma Delimited)
Point Number, Easting, Northing, Elevation Z
Start with new template
Open...Browse to Templates- USWI File folder...wisdot12-etopog.dwt...open...Save as (new project
name)

040.090 Editing points

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

6:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-090-001.mp4

040.090.001

Bridge Survey2.dwg
Locked Points will not allow editing
Grip Editing
Hot Grips
Grip Menu
Edit Elevations
Prospector...Point Group...Rt. Click Edit Points
Select All...Rt click Datum
Raise or lower all points
Renumber points

040.100 Transparent commands for points


7:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-100-001.mp4

Page 81 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


040.100.001

Point Number Transparent Command (TC)


Activate Polyline commandClick by Point Number TC...Enter point numbers
Point Object TC
Activate Polyline commandSelect by Point Object TC...click on point objects

040.110 Points from alignments

Section updated:

10/1/2012

12:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-110-001.mp4

040.110.001

Points from Alignment.dwg

Point Creation Tools


First open te point creation tools.
1. Go to Home > Crete Design panel > Points Menu > Point Creation tools.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Expand the toolbar by clicking the chevron on the far right.


Expand the Points creation category.
Set Prompt for point names to None.
Change Prompt for point descriptions to Automatic - Object.

6. From the Alignment menu on the points toolbar, choose At Geometry Points.
7. Select the alignment.
8. When prompted to pick a profile, keep te default of None and click OK. (Choosing a profile would add
elevation to the points).
9. Click enter to confirm the start station of 0+00.
10. Click enter again to confirm the end station of 9+73.95.
11. Press ESC to complete the command,
You now have points, but they are not displayed with descriptions.
12. In Prospector, right-click point groups and select New.
13. On the information tab, name the new point group Alignment Points.
1. Set the Point Style to P Ali Proposed Reference Line
2. Set the Label style to Point Name Full Desc 45
14. On the Include Tab, place a checkmark next to With raw descriptions matching.
15. Type EXAMPLE* in the field as shown.
16. On the Overrides tab, place a checkmark next to Style and Point Label Style.
17. Click OK.
18. Right-click the new point group and select Edit points. Verify that all of the intended points re part of the
group.
19. Save the drawing
20. Right-click the point group and select Export points.
1. Use the format PNEZD (Comma Delimited).
2. Browse to a location on your computer (such as the project folder) to save the resulting file.
3. Click OK.
End of Exercise.

040.120 WisDOT standards points

Section updated:

7/1/2010

6:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-120-001.mp4

040.120.001

Civil 3D Points
The points created by AutoCAD Civil 3D are called Coordinate Geometry (COGO) points, which are very different
from AutoCAD point nodes. AutoCAD point nodes have only coordinate data (XYZ values) associated with them.
However, COGO points, in addition to coordinate data, have a variety of properties associated with them, including
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 82 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

point number, point name, raw (field) description, and full (expanded) description. Unlike AutoCAD point nodes,
which exist in a single drawing, COGO points can be stored in a project outside a drawing and referenced by
multiple users. In AutoCAD Civil 3D, the term point refers to a COGO point, not to an AutoCAD point node (from
Civil 3D 2010 Help)
Civil 3D Point properties
Number integer, required, unique
Name anything, not required, unique
Northing, Easting, Elevation
Raw Description
Full Description
Civil 3D Points are displayed in the Points Collection from the Prospector Tab of the Toolspace

Point Groups provide a method of working with subsets of Points


Point Groups
Assign Style and Label Style
Turn on or Turn off display with _noDisplay style
Add Point Groups to a Surface
Export to File(s)
Point Group properties
Name
Style
Label Style
Description Key
Query to include or exclude Points in a Point Group by Number, Elevations, Name, Descriptions (widlcards
allowed)
Description Key Sets can be used to control the Style, Label Style, Layer, etc of points that you create or import.
We are not using Description Key Sets at this time.
Where are Civil 3D Points used?
Defining surfaces
Control points
RW points
Locations of Topographic Features
Assist in Locating Alignment Geometry (Civil 3D points are not a part of the Alignment)
Labels for things such as Pavement Grades
Other types of points in Civil 3D
AutoCAD points not intelligent, but have attribution and coordinates.
Corridor Points
Basic building blocks of Corridor and Corridor Surface, but are not Civil 3D points
Can be stored as Civil 3D points
Survey Points - points in the Survey Database that can be loaded to DWG file at any time. WisDOT does not
use at this time.
Points as they relate to CAiCE
CAiCE Points = Civil 3D Points
CAiCE Point Feature Code = Civil 3D Point Group Style
CAiCE Point Labels = Civil 3D Point Group Label Style
Things that are different than CAiCE
Alignments, Feature Lines do not use Civil 3D points and are not dynamically linked to points

Wisconsin DOT Drawing File Names and File Management


Points are most commonly created or read into the DWG files they are used in. There are no specific Points
Drawing Files at this time
Topographics DWG files will be Xreferenced into working DWG files. Points will display as needed, but they are
not Civil 3D points in the source DWG file. They can be read into the Source DWG file using Xreference and
Promote.
Points Files can be shared multiple ways. One method is LandXML. Civil 3D supports read and write of several
different ASCII Point formats
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 83 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Wisconsin DOT Standards


WisDOT12 drawing template (WisDOT12.DWT) contains:
Point styles
Label Styles
Command Settings for Point creation
Layers and symbology for Points
Point Object naming
Name s are not necessary. Civil 3D assigns unique Number to points
Point Group naming
WisDOT standard DWT template only has AllPoints Point Group
Name them what they if you create them
Wisconsin DOT Sharing the Points
For anyone who has access to the Civil 3D Project ID folder, Alignments will be shared using References to Data
Shortcuts
If sharing Alignments with outside organizations or across projects Alignments can be saved to LandXML files
and shared

2:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-120-002.mp4

040.120.002

Points Need to Know!!!


Different types of Points
Importing Points from Files
Creating Points from Create Point Toolbar
Transparent Commands
Point Groups
Standard DWT has limited Point Groups
Contact Methods Development when additional standard Point Groups should be added to Drawing
Template
Points Projected to Profile View
If you have any questions about WisDOT vBooks, standards, workflows, etc, feel free to contact
support.cae@dot.wi.gov

6:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-120-003.mp4

040.120.003

Discussion and examples on points and point groups

9:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-120-004.mp4

040.120.004

Points Custom content


Importing Points from a File
LandXML
PENZD
Saving Points to a File
LandXML
PENZD
Storing Points
Create a Pavement Grades Drawing
Data Reference Alignments and Surfaces
Create Points Along Alignments assign a known description and show how Description key sets are used
to assign Style, Label Style and Layer
Create a couple of Points using Transparent Commands
Create a Pavement Grades Point Group
Show Display

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 84 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Module 045 Survey


The segments in this module use files found within the zip file linked to in the first section. If you want to do the
exercises in the same file as the instructor, do the following:
Download the zip file to your computer.
Extract the zip file to a local location. C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-training is a suggested loctation.
After extraction, there should be a folder called "045-exercise-files". The exercise files are located here.
The file used in a section will be in italics at the beginning of the section (e.g. Intro.dwg )
Open the file prior to the exercise to follow along with the instructor.
A visual layout of the data workflow for survey and mapping files going into Civil 3D can be found here:
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/wisdot-c3d14-survey-data-flow.pdf

045.005 Create topo file from mapping

Section updated:

4/13/2015

2:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-005-001.mp4

045.005.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-005-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create the topo file from mapping data
In the Menu Browser select the New command.
From the new file dialog select the wisdot14-etopog.dwt template file.
In the Menu Browser select the Save As command.
Browse to the 12345678/BaseData folder and name the file Topo-Ex.dwg.
In the toolspace, Settings tab, right-click the name of the file (at the top).
Choose Edit Drawing Settings.
In the Units and Zone tab:
Set the coordinate zone category to USA, Wisconsin.
Set the coordinate zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
In the Quick Access Toolbar click the Save button.

0:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-005-002.mp4

045.005.002

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-005-002-proj-dataset.zip
Insert the mapping data into the topo file
In the Insert tab of the ribbon, Block panel, select the Insert command icon.
In the Insert dialog click the Browse button.
Browse to the 12345678/BaseData/Mapping folder and choose M12345678.dwg.
Click Open.
Make sure the Insert Point is set to 0,0,0 (NOT Specify On-screen).
Make sure the Scale is set to 1 (NOT Specify On-screen).
Make sure the Rotation is set to Angle 0 (NOT Specify On-screen).
Select/checkmark the Explode option.
Click OK.

045.010 Survey database fundamentals

Section updated:

3/1/2013

Survey exercise files


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-exercise-files.zip
2:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-010-001.mp4

045.010.001

Survey database fundamentals


Series of files external to any drawing
Multiple survey jobs can be stored in a single survey database.
A survey database can only have one projection assignment.
There should be one survey database per project with the exception of multiple projections.
Survey data must be inserted into a DWG to see it in Civil 3D.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 85 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

By default data inserted into a DWG is locked and can only be edited if the source survey database is
open for editing.
Survey databases must be created in Civil 3D, but can only be deleted in Windows.
3:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-010-002.mp4

045.010.002

Survey object data types


Survey point: Virtually identical to Civil 3D point. In the survey database, points have a Description (feature
code) that is translated to layer and style information in the DWG.
Survey figure: Very similar to Civil 3D feature line. It is a 3D linear object but it does support curve
definitions. Survey figures do not have Description (feature code). Layer and style information can be set
from the figure prefix. Survey figures have their own definition in the DWG.
Network: A traverse. It contains all associated known control points, known directions, setups, and
observations. Networks have their own definition in the DWG.
Additional survey database objects: Groups can be built for all of the above objects. Survey databases also
have Import Events that track how data came into the survey database.

4:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-010-003.mp4

045.010.003

Survey user settings


These settings are accessible from the top left button on the Toolbox tab.
WisDOT custom files must be installed prior to changing these settings. If WisDOT settings are not seen in
Survey User Settings dialog box, import WisDOT user settings.
Important Survey user settings
Survey Database Defaults
Survey Database Settings WisDOT_Survey Database Settings
Extended properties definition - WisDOT_Survey Extended Properties
Linework Processing Defaults
Current linework code set - WisDOT
Import Defaults
Default figure site - Field Survey
Survey interface in Civil 3D
Toolspace Survey tab
Survey databases have a working folder. This can be changed, but only the survey databases in the active
working folder can be seen.
Equipment databases: Only needed for working with networks.
Figure prefix database: Use database starting with WisDOT.
Linework code set: Use code set starting with WisDOT.

045.015 Create survey databases and queries

Section updated:

4/13/2015

3:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-015-001.mp4

045.015.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-015-001-proj-dataset.zip
Copy the master survey database and rename it
Using Windows Explore, browse to C:\wisdot\stnd folder and find the SD-WisDOT-Template folder (master
database).
In the left side of that Windows Explore window, browse to the project 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder.
Right-click on the SD-WisDOT-Template folder from the right side and choose Copy.
In the left side of the window right-click on the 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder and choose Paste.
On the left side left click on the 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder which now holds the SD-WisDOT-Template
database folder.
Left click on the name on the folder (currently SD-WisDOT-Template) and rename it to be SD-12345678.
Assign settings to the survey database
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click the Survey Databases area and choose Set Working Folder.
Browse to the project 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder.
Click OK.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, under the Survey Databases area, right-click on the SD-12345678.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 86 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Choose Open for Edit.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, under the Survey Databases area, right-click on the SD-12345678.
Choose Edit Survey Database Settings.
In the Coordinate Zone field click the ellipsis button.
Set the coordinate zone category to USA, Wisconsin.
Set the coordinate zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK twice.
2:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-015-002.mp4

045.015.002

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-015-002-proj-dataset.zip
Create the survey database directly in Civil 3D
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on the Survey Databases area.
Choose Set Working Folder.
Browse to the 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder. Click OK.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on the Survey Databases area.
Choose New Local Survey Database.
In the New Local Survey Database dialog type the name SD-12345678 and click OK.

Assign settings to the survey database


In the Toolspace, Survey tab, under the Survey Databases area, right-click on the SD-12345678.
Choose Edit Survey Database Settings.
In the Coordinate Zone field click the ellipsis button.
Set the coordinate zone category to USA, Wisconsin.
Set the coordinate zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
2:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-015-003.mp4

045.015.003

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-015-003-proj-dataset.zip
Import the survey query QML files
This process is for if you built the survey database from scratch, or if you discover that one or more of the standard
survey queries are not in your survey database.
Import the survey queries
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on the survey database name SD-12345678 and choose Open for Edit.
Expand the SD-12345678 database.
Right-click on the Survey Queries area.
Choose Import
Browse to C:\wisdot\stnd\SD-WisDOT-Templatecool.
Select the first query you need, then, <CTRL> select the survey queries that you need to add.

045.020 Import PAC/LandXML into survey database

Section updated:

4/13/2015

Translating the PAC file is only necessary if you have not received the LandXML file. If you have received the
LandXML file proceed to the next section Import the LandXML File Into the Survey Database.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

2:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-020-001.mp4

045.020.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-020-001-proj-dataset.zip
Translate a PAC file to a LandXML file

Page 87 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

In the Toolspace select the Toolbox tab.


Expand the WisDOT Toolbox.
Expand the Survey File Conversion.
Right-click on SDMS PAC, CTL Translator and choose Execute.
Browse to the 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder.
Select the 12345678-wo1.pac file.
Click Open.
In the Convert File dialog browse to12345678/BaseData/Survey to place the LandXML file, and click OK.
In the Convert SDMS Point Files to LandXML Files dialog, confirm the file selection by clicking OK.

3:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-020-002.mp4

045.020.002

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-020-002-proj-dataset.zip
Import the LandXML file into the survey database
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click the Survey Databases area and choose Set Working Folder.
Browse to the project 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder.
Click OK.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, under the Survey Databases area, right-click on the SD-12345678.
Choose Open for Edit. In the Home ribbon tab, Create Ground Data panel, Select Import Survey Data.
Select the SD-12345678 database. Click Next.
In the Specify Data Source change the Data Source Type to LandXML File.
In the Selected File click the folder icon to browse to the file.
Browse to 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder and select 12345678-wo01.XML. Click Open.
In the Import Survey Data dialog select Next.

Set the import settings


In the Import Settings page:
Set the Current Figure Prefix Database to WisDOT14-Etopog
Set Process Linework During Import to YES.
Current Linework Code Set to WisDOT-14.
Set Insert Network Object to NO.
Set Insert Figure Objects to NO.
Set Insert Survey Points to NO.
Set Display Tolerance Errors to NO.
Under LandXML Data:
Make sure all of the items are check marked.
For the Coordinate Zone field, click the ellipsis button (three dot button).
Set the Coordinate Zone Category to USA, Wisconsin
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 88 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Set the Coordinate Zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
Click the Finish button.
2:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-020-003.mp4

045.020.003

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-020-003-proj-dataset.zip
Import the LandXML file into the survey database
In the Home ribbon tab, Create Ground Data panel, Select Import Survey Data.
Select the SD-12345678 database. Click Next.
In the Specify Data Source change the Data Source Type to LandXML File.
In the Selected File click the folder icon to browse to the file.
Browse to 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder and select 12345678-wo02.XML. Click Open.
In the Import Survey Data dialog select Next.

Set the import settings


In the Import Settings page:
Set the Current Figure Prefix Database to WisDOT14-Etopog
Set Process Linework During Import to YES.
Current Linework Code Set to WisDOT-14.
Set Insert Network Object to NO.
Set Insert Figure Objects to NO.
Set Insert Survey Points to NO.
Set Display Tolerance Errors to NO.
Under LandXML Data:
Make sure all of the items are check marked.
For the Coordinate Zone field, click the ellipsis button (three dot button).
Set the Coordinate Zone Category to USA, Wisconsin
Set the Coordinate Zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
Click the Finish button.

045.030 Set up to edit/add survey figures

Section updated:

4/13/2015

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

2:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-030-001.mp4

045.030.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-030-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create a survey editing DWG
In the Menu Browser select the New command.
From the new file dialog select the wisdot14-etopog.dwt template file.

Page 89 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


In the Menu Browser select the Save As command.
Browse to the 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder and name the file SurveyEdits.dwg.
In the toolspace, Settings tab, right-click the name of the file (at the top).
Choose Edit Drawing Settings.
In the Units and Zone tab:
Set the coordinate zone category to USA, Wisconsin.
Set the coordinate zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
In the Quick Access Toolbar click the Save button.
3:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-030-002.mp4

045.030.002

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-030-002-proj-dataset.zip
Import a survey query to edit survey data
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand Survey Databases.
Right-click on SD-12345678 and choose Open for Edit.
Expand Survey Queries
Drag and drop the following queries into the Survey Edits.dwg:
UtilityFigures1
UtilityFigures2
UtilityPoints1
In the Survey Queries area right-click on UtilityPoints2 and choose Insert into File.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, right-click on Point Groups and choose Update.
In the lower right of the status bar change the drawing scale to 1 IN:40 FT.
Remove a survey query from a file
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand the SD-12345678 database, and expand the Survey Queries area.
Drag the Centerlines query into the Survey Edits.dwg.
In the SD-12345678 database, Survey Queries, right-click on the Centerlines query and choose Remove from
Drawing.
Zoom Extents and save the drawing.

045.040 Editing survey figures

Section updated:

4/13/2015

5:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-040-001.mp4

045.040.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-040-001-proj-dataset.zip
Editing survey figures by adding and deleting points
Delete points from the figure
In the transparent command toolbar on the right side of the drafting area, select the Zoom to Point icon.
Type 4240,4252 (no spaces between numbers and comma).
Left-click on the figure between those two points.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 90 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

In the green context ribbon select Survey Figure Properties.


At the bottom of the Figure Properties dialog select point number 4252.
In the middle bar of the Figure Properties dialog click on the red X icon to delete this point from the figure.
Click OK.

Adding points to the figure


In the transparent command toolbar on the right side of the drafting area, select the Zoom to Point icon.
Type 4240,4251,4234 (no spaces between numbers and comma).
Left-click on the figure between points 4240 and 4234.
In the green context ribbon select Survey Figure Properties.
At the bottom of the Figure Properties dialog select the point number 4240.
In the middle bar of the Figure Properties dialog click on the Insert Vertex Before icon.
In the new point entry type 4251.
Click OK.

3:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-040-002.mp4

045.040.002

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-040-002-proj-dataset.zip
Editing survey figures by changing the relation to points
Changing the order of points
In the transparent command toolbar on the right side of the drafting area, select the Zoom to Point icon.
Type 4234,4251 (no spaces between numbers and comma).
Left-click on the figure between points 4240, 4251 and 4234.
In the green context ribbon select Survey Figure Properties.
Near the bottom of the Figure Properties dialog select point number 4251.
In the middle bar of the Figure Properties dialog click on the Move the Selected Item Down icon.
Click OK.

Changing the points that define a figure


In the transparent command toolbar on the right side of the drafting area, select the Zoom to Point icon.
Type 4240,4252 (no spaces between numbers and comma).
Left-click on the figure between points 4240 and 4251.
In the green context ribbon select Survey Figure Properties.
At the bottom of the Figure Properties dialog select point number 4251.
Type in 4252.
Click OK.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 91 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

045.050 Creating survey figures

Section updated:

4/13/2015

3:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-050-001.mp4

045.050.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-050-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create a survey figure point-to-point
In the transparent command toolbar on the right side of the drafting area, select the Zoom to Point icon.
Type 4254,4219 (no spaces between numbers and comma).
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand SD-12345678, right-click on Figures.
Choose Modify Figure Begin New Figure.
Enter the figure name of OH and click <ENTER>.
Use the Snap to Point osnap option from the osnap toolbar.
Snap to the point marker for point number 4219.
Select P for Point.
For the next point in the figure line:
Type P for the Point option.
Type the point number 4254.
Click <ENTER>.
End the figure creation method by typing DO for done.

Insert the new figure(s) to the drawing file


Creating figures in the database add them only to the database, not the drawing file. If you need the
figure in the drawing file you need to insert them. Adding all of the figures will only insert the new or edited
figures.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand SD-12345678 database.
Drag the Figures area into the drawing file.
3:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-050-002.mp4

045.050.002

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-050-002-proj-dataset.zip
Create a survey figure interactively
In the transparent command toolbar on the right side of the drafting area, select the Zoom to Point icon.
Type 4311,4312,4294 (no spaces between numbers and comma).
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on Figures. Choose Create Figure Interactively.
Name the Figure OH. Click OK.
Select the PPOL points graphically from 4311 to 4312 to 4294 (near the south of the project).
In the Figure Properties dialog click OK.

Insert the new figure(s) to the drawing file


Creating figures in the database add them only to the database, not the drawing file. If you need the
figure in the drawing file you need to insert them. Adding all of the figures will only insert the new or edited
figures.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 92 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand SD-12345678 database.


In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on Figures and choose Insert into Drawing.
5:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-050-003.mp4

045.050.003

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-050-003-proj-dataset.zip
Create survey figure from object
In the transparent command toolbar on the right side of the drafting area, select the Zoom to Point
icon.
Type 4295,4296 (no spaces between numbers and comma).
In the Home ribbon, Draw panel choose the Polyline tool.
In the Transparent Command toolbar on the right of the screen, choose the Point Object tool.
Select the PPOL points graphically from 4295 to 4296 (near the south of the project).
Click <ESC> twice to end the transparent command and the PLINE tool.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on Figures and choose Create Figure from Object.
Select the polyline that you just created.
Change the name to OH.
Make sure the Current Figure Prefix Database is set to WisDOT14-Etopog.
Make sure the Associate Survey Points to Vertices option is set to YES.
Click OK.
Click the <ENTER> button on the keyboard to end the command.
Select the polyline and delete it.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on Figures and choose Insert into Drawing.
Zoom to the figure you just created and left click on it to select it.
From the green context ribbon select Survey Figure Properties.
In the Figure Properties click the Convert Figure to Chain and Edit Vertices.
Click Convert the Survey Figure.
Check the elevations of the two points.
Click OK.

045.060 Verfiy DWG and SDB match

Section updated:

4/13/2015

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

4:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-060-001.mp4

045.060.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-060-001-proj-dataset.zip
Verify the DWG and SDB match
To verify survey database and drawing file match reinsert SDB into file
Open the SurveyEdits.dwg file
Click Save to save your drawing file.

Page 93 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand the SD-12345678 database.
Select on Figures and drag that area into the file.
Select on Points and drag that area into the file.
(This does not duplicate points or lines, but replaces them with the most up-to-date objects.)
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, right-click on the Point Group area header.
Choose Update.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, scroll down to the Survey and expand it, and expand Figures.
Scroll through the list of figures to make sure no error flags have appeared.
If there are error flags right-click on the Figures area header and choose Update from Survey Data.
Save the file.

045.070 Replicate/copy SDB to PDS C3D project

Section updated:

4/13/2015

3:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-070-001.mp4

045.070.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-070-001-proj-dataset.zip
Replicate the SDB to the PDS C3D project
Right-click the Windows Start button and choose Open a Windows Explorer.
In the path field at the top type in this address (you can copy it from this document and paste it into that field):
C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\ApplicationPlugins\B1_WisDOTModules.bundle\Contents\Windows\2014
Double-click the ReplicateSurveyDB.exe file.
For the Source Survey Project Path, click the ellipsis button to the right.
Browse to the N:\tss\survey\c3d\SD-12345678 OR C:\wisdot\survey\c3d\SD-12345678. Click OK.
For the Destination Design Project Folder click the ellipsis button on the right.
Browse to the N:\PDS\C3D\12345678\BaseData\Survey folder.
Click the Replicate Database button.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on Survey Databases.
Choose Set Working Folder.
Browse to N:\PDS\C3D\12345678\BaseData\Survey folder
In the Replicate Survey Database dialog click Exit.

3:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-070-002.mp4

045.070.002

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-070-002-proj-dataset.zip
Replicate the SDB to the users local drive
Right-click the Windows Start button and choose Open a Windows Explorer.
In the path field at the top type in this address (you can copy it from this document and paste it into that field):
C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\ApplicationPlugins\B1_WisDOTModules.bundle\Contents\Windows\2014
Double-click the ReplicateSurveyDB.exe file.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 94 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


For the Source Survey Project Path, click the ellipsis button to the right.
Browse to the N:\ \PDS\C3D\12345678\BaseData\Survey folder.
Click OK.
For the Destination Design Project Folder click the ellipsis button on the right.
Browse to C:\wisdot\survey\c3d. Click OK.
Click the Replicate Database button.
Click Exit.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on Survey Databases.
Choose Set Working Folder.
Browse to C:\wisdot\survey\c3d folder where you will find the replicated SD-12345678.

045.080 Create/update topo file from field survey

Section updated:

4/13/2015

2:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-080-001.mp4

045.080.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-080-001-proj-dataset.zip
Insert the Topo queries into the topo file
In the Quick Access toolbar choose Open and browse to open the 12345678/BaseData/Topo-Ex.dwg file.
In the Survey tab, right-click the SD-12345678 database and choose Open for Edit.
In the Survey tab, expand the SD-12345678 database, expand Survey Queries.
Drag the following queries into the topo file:
TopoFigures1, TopoFigures2, TopoPoints1, TopoPoints2, and TopoPoints3.
In the Quick Access toolbar click the Save icon.

3:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-080-002.mp4

045.080.002

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-080-002-proj-dataset.zip
Delete mapping data if needed
In the Quick Access toolbar select Open and browse to open the 12345678/BaseData/Topo-Ex.dwg
file.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand the SD-12345678, and expand the Survey Queries.
Right-click on Topo Figure 1 survey query and choose Zoom to.
Under the SD-12345678 select on the Figures area.
In the preview window of the Toolspace scroll down to the HEDG24 figure.
Click on the HEDG24 figure name to highlight the figure in the file.
Select the duplicate line in the file, make sure you have the mapping data block selected.
In the Home tab of the ribbon, Modify panel select on the Explode icon.
Select the duplicated line and notice that the green context ribbon does not indicate a survey figure and the layer
manager changes to the layer that the line to be deleted is on.
Delete this duplicated item.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 95 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


045.090 Create utility file from field survey

Section updated:

4/13/2015

2:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-090-001.mp4

045.090.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-090-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create the utility file
In the Menu Browser select the New command.
From the new file dialog select the wisdot14-etopog.dwt template file.
In the Menu Browser select the Save As command.
Browse to the 12345678/BaseData folder and save this new file as Uti-Ex.dwg.
In the toolspace, Settings tab, right-click the name of the file (at the top).
Choose Edit Drawing Settings.
In the Units and Zone tab:.
Set the coordinate zone category to USA, Wisconsin.
Set the coordinate zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.

Insert utility queries


Add the utility point and linework queries to the file
In the Survey tab, expand the SD-12345678 database, expand Survey Queries.
Drag the following queries into the utility file:
UtilityFigures1, UtilityFigures2, UtilityPoints1, and UtilityPoints2.
In the Quick Access toolbar click the Save icon.
3:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-090-002.mp4

045.090.002

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-090-001-proj-dataset.zip
Clean up the utility linework
In the lower right of the drawing area, select the drawing scale menu and chose 1 IN:40 FT
For the utility feature lines that have special linetypes (those represented with letters) check to make sure the letter
in the linetype is not upside down.
When you find a linetype that is upside down, select on that feature line.
In the green context ribbon toggle open the Edit Geometry panel.
In the Edit Geometry Panel select the upper right icon, Reverse. This will reverse the direction of the
feature line so the letters appear correctly.
Continue selecting feature lines and reversing them as needed. This works on one feature line at a time.
Set the utility point labels
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, right-click the Point Group header and choose Updates.
In the toolspace, Prospector, Expand the Point Groups.
Right-click the Survey User Defined point group. Choose Properties.
In the Survey User-Defined properties dialog, Information tab, change the Point Label Style to _No
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 96 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Display.
Click OK.

045.100 Updating/merging SDB from other SDBs

Section updated:

4/13/2015

2:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-100-001.mp4

045.100.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-100-001-proj-dataset.zip
Export the SDB to a LandXML file
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on SD-12345678 and choose Open for Edit.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on SD-12345678 and choose Export Survey LandXML.
Browse to the project 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder and click Save.
Confirm the coordinate zone is set to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
** NOTE ** This process can also be performed with an import event. When this is done, the edits done in the
survey database are exported. The import event is just used as the selection set.

3:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-100-002.mp4

045.100.002

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-100-002-proj-dataset.zip
Import the LandXML file into the stored SDB
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on SD-12345678-1 and choose Open for Edit.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on SD-12345678-1 and choose the Import flyout. From the flyout choose
Import Survey LandXML.
Browse to the project 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder and select SD-12345678.xml.
Scroll down to the LandXML Data area and confirm the coordinate zone is set to Wisconsin County Systems:
Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.

045.110 Create ad-hoc survey queries

Section updated:

4/13/2015

2:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-110-001.mp4

045.110.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-110-001-proj-dataset.zip
Clear out file of previous survey edit work
In the Quick Access toolbar select the Open command.
In the Open dialog browse to 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder and open SurveyEdits.dwg.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand SD-12345678 database.
Right-click on Figures and choose Remove from Drawing.
Right-click on Survey Points and choose Points then choose Remove from Drawing.

3:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-110-002.mp4

045.110.002

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-110-002-proj-dataset.zip
Create a survey query
Right-click on Survey Queries and choose New.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 97 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Change the name of the query to Ditch.
Under the Points, Select a Property drop down choose Description.
Make sure the Operator says Contains.
In the Value field type DTCH.
Under the Figures, Select a Property drop down choose Name.
Make sure the Operator field says Contains.
In the Value field type DTCH.
Click Preview in Drawing.
Click the Dismiss Preview button in the upper left of the drafting area.
Click Save Query. Close the Query Builder.
In the Survey Query ribbon tab click the Close X on the left panel.

Module 050 Surfaces


The first segments in this module use files found within the zip file linked to in the first section. If you want to do
the exercises in the same file as the instructor, do the following:
Download the zip file to your computer.
Extract the zip file to a local location. C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-training is a suggested loctation.
After extraction, there should be a folder called "050-exercise-files". The exercise files are located here.
The file used in a section will be in italics at the beginning of the section (e.g. Intro.dwg )
Open the file prior to the exercise to follow along with the instructor.

050.010 Surface basics

Section updated:

10/1/2012

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-exercise-files.zip
5:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-010-001.mp4

050.010.001

What is a Surface?
Civil 3D object that represents elevation information
Frequently created from points (Existing Surfaces)
or imported from LandXML
or created from a corridor design (Proposed surfaces)
or created with grading tools (Proposed surfaces)
or from other surfaces (Volume Surfaces, Composite surfaces)
Vocabulary:
TIN : triangulated irregular network; the guts of virtually all surface models.
(Each triangle forms a 3D plane. Together, all these planes form a surface.)
Boundary: A boundary is added by you, the user, to restrict triangle formation.
(i.e. outer project limits or obscure area)
Border: The line formed automatically by the outermost triangle legs.
Breakline: a line, polyline, 3D polyline, feature line or figure used to represent where triangles should line up.
Examples of breakline locations:
Bottom of a ditch
Crown of a road
Top or bottom of a retaining wall
Curb flowline
Types of Surfaces
Tin Surface
Most Common
Grid Surface
Only used when bringing in Data Elevation Model (DEM) files
Grid Volume Surface
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 98 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Rarely used, compares two surfaces to calculate the cut/fill.
TIN Volume Surface
Commonly used to find depth of cut/fill as well as surface-to-surface volume.
Notes about surfaces
Surfaces cannot contain caves or overhangs
Watch out for vertical walls

050.020 Surface creation

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Surface creation exercise files


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-020-exercise-files.zip
13:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-020-001.mp4

050.020.001

Surface Creation Basics


Add Items with Elevation to the Definition
Points
Breaklines
From file
Boundaries

050.030 Surface styles


10:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-030-001.mp4

050.030.001

Surface Display
Three Ways to Change a Surfaces Style:
1. Click the Surface in the graphic. Click Surface Properties from the Context Tab.
2. Right-click the surfaces name in prospector. Click Surface Properties.
3. Click the main Surfaces listing in Prospector. Click the Style field for the surface.

050.040 Surface creation additional

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Section updated:

10/1/2012

6:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-040-001.mp4

050.040.001

More Surface Creation


Add Items with Elevation to the Definition
Points
Breaklines
From file

050.050 Surface boundaries


12:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-050-001.mp4

050.050.001

Boundaries
Surface models with bogus triangles before breaklines and boundaries are added
Boundaries
Reign-in surface models
Help control where triangles are created
Destructive vs. Non-Destructive
A destructive boundary removes any triangles it touches. Outer boundaries are frequently destructive.
A non-destructive boundary removes portions of triangles, but creates new triangles. Hide boundaries should
be non-destructive.
Boundary Types
Outer (most Common)
Represents extents of surface model
Prevents bogus triangles from forming
Usually destructive
There can only be one outer boundary per surface
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 99 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Show (most Common)


Adds and island of surface model data inside of a hide boundary. Fairly uncommon
Hide (most Common)
Represents obscure areas, ponds, buildings
Creates a hole in the surface model
Usually non-destructive
You can have many Hide boundaries in a surface
Data Clip (very helpful)
Allows you to narrow-down the focus area of your surface
Works great when working with large surfaces to make them more manageable
Add Data-clip boundaries before adding other data

050.060 Boundary exercise

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

12:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-060-001.mp4

050.060.001

Exercise

050.070 Breaklines
27:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-070-001.mp4

050.070.001

Breaklines
A line added to a surface that represents a distinct change in slope.
Enforce triangle edges (in other words, triangle sides will never cross a breakline)
Examples: curb features, crown of road, ditch, edge of pavement, etc
Types of Breaklines
Standard
Lines, 3D polylines, feature lines or figures with elevation
Contribute vertex and endpoint elevations as surface points
Can significantly change elevations
Proximity
Any line elevations are not used
Inherit vertex and endpoint elevations from nearest surface points
Use when you have linework, but no known elevation
Wall
Start with a line with elevation
Represent cliffs, retaining walls or other abrupt elevation changes
From file (FLT)
FLT file
Frequently converted from CAiCE
Once the file is imported, it acts like a standard breakline
It does not actually draw the line
Non-destructive
Not frequently used
Does not change elevation or slope
Just changes triangles
Can be used to show saw cut lines, pavement islands without grade change
Avoiding Crossing Breaklines
Crossing Breaklines Cleanup
Before Breaklines are added to definition
OVERKILL command
TRIM command
After breaklines are already added
Crossing Breakline cleanup tool

050.080 Surface edits


24:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-080-001.mp4

050.080.001

Editing Tools
Adding / Deleting TIN lines
Modifying triangle vertices
Swap edges

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 100 of 390

Raise/Lower
Changing the order of edits
Mid-Ordinate Distance (MOD)

050.090 Masks and data clip boundaries

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Section updated:

7/1/2010

10:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-090-001.mp4

050.090.001

Surface Masks & Clip Boundaries


Mask
Used to hide a portion of surface for rendering purposes
Not frequently used
Data Clip
Used to omit extraneous surface data
EXCELLENT for working with large surfaces

050.100 Surface paste


9:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-100-001.mp4

050.100.001

Exercise

050.110 WisDOT standards surfaces


13:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-110-001.mp4

050.110.001

Surface creation and manipulation


Surfaces are 3D representations of the existing, proposed ground or some subsurface.
Surfaces as they relate to CAiCE DTMs:
CAiCE DTM = Civil 3D surface
Civil 3D surface contains all of the contours, triangles, grid model, etc. and can be viewed using different
styles.
Surface types:
TIN triangulated irregular network
Grid
Grid Volume
Tin Volume
Surfaces are shared through data shortcuts.
Build order is critical particularly with boundaries.
Working with surfaces can crash Civil 3D
Too much data
Too much graphics
WisDOT will use points, breaklines, corridors, and grading as inputs to surfaces.
Points will primarily come from:
Import PNT files created from SRV macro
Civil 3D Points
Can use AutoCad Points, but make sure they are 3D points.
Breaklines will primarily come from:
Import FLT files created from SRV macro
Civil 3D Feature Lines
AutoCad 3D Polylines
Corridors and Grading groups are results of design effort.
WisDOT Drawing File Names and File Management
Base Surfaces are created in DWG files under the project template:
N:\pds\c3d\ProjectID\BaseData\
Standard Name of files:
<Object Type>-<SomeDescriptiveName>-<comment>.DWG
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 101 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


For example, for the existing surface
Surface-Exist.DWG
Surface-Rock-4thStInt.DWG
Corridor surfaces will be contained in the ProjectID\Design\Surfaces folder.
WisDOT Standards
There will typically only be one surface per DWG file.
WisDOT10.dwt Drawing template contains:
Surface styles
Label styles
Command settings for surface creation
TIN type default
Maximum triangle length used
Allowing crossing breaklines and how to address
Layers and symbology for surfaces
Naming Surface objects:
Exist
Exist CTH B US 12
Surface creation and manipulation Need to Know!!!
Do NOT export DTM from CAiCE using LandXML. Use SRV file format and import macro.
Creating a quality surface
Adding/deleting TIN lines
Adding/deleting/modifying points
Swapping triangle edges
Modifying surface build parameters
Pasting surfaces
Order, order! All Definition objects have a build order
Surface creation and manipulation Need to Know!!!
11:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-110-002.mp4

050.110.002

Masks (hide graphics, leave data, active for calculation)


Inside and Outside
Do not have a build order
Boundaries
Outer (hide graphics outside boundary, leave data, inactive for calculation)
Hide (hide graphics inside boundary, leave data, inactive for calculation)
Show (creates an island inside a Hide)
Data clip (delete data and graphics outside boundary)
All affected by build order
Type of breaklines
Destructive vs. non-destructive

13:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-110-003.mp4

050.110.003

Dealing with large surfaces (display/performance issues)


Save, save, save, save, save, save, save, save, save, save,
Styles
Masks
Outer boundary
Data Clip boundary
Dividing surfaces
Simplifying surfaces
Surface Errors and Issues
Definition errors
Disconnection errors
Build errors
Duplicate points (same horizontal, different Z)
Workflow for Survey Data Coordinator
Surface data from Mapping (SRV file)
Create Exist Surface DWG in proper folder
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 102 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Create Exist surface object
Read SRV data from CAiCE to C3D translator
Evaluate surface
Save DWG file
Save Data Shortcut
Topography data from Mapping (DGN file)
Convert Mapping DGNs to DWGs
XREF them into Exist-Topo-Map.DWG
Save file
Surface data from CAiCE (existing or proposed surface)
Open/create Surface DWG
Read SRV data from CAiCE to C3D translator
Evaluate surface
Save DWG file
Save Data Shortcut (if needed)
Point and chain data from CAiCE
Export survey points from CAiCE using LandXML.
View survey chains to export in CAiCE.
Export chains as 2D DWG.
Create Exist-Topo-Survey.DWG using template file
2:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-110-004.mp4

050.110.004

Module 4 Workflow for Survey Data Coordinator


Surface data from Mapping (SRV file)
Create Exist Surface DWG in proper folder
Create Exist surface object
Read SRV data from CAiCE to C3D translator
Evaluate surface
Save DWG file
Save Data Shortcut
Topography data from Mapping (DGN file)
Convert Mapping DGNs to DWGs
XREF them into Exist-Topo-Map.DWG
Save file
Surface creation and manipulation Custom content
Module 4 Workflow for Survey Data Coordinator or Designer
Surface data from CAiCE (existing or proposed surface)
Open/create Surface DWG
Read SRV data from CAiCE to C3D translator
Evaluate surface
Save DWG file
Save Data Shortcut (if needed)
Surface creation and manipulation Custom content
Module 4 Workflow for Survey Data Coordinator or Designer (contd)
Point and chain data from CAiCE
Export survey points from CAiCE using LandXML.
View survey chains to export in CAiCE.
Export chains as 2D DWG. Create Exist-Topo-Survey.DWG using seed file WISDOT10ETOPOG-2004.DWG.
Open Exist-Topo-Survey.DWG in Civil 3D.
Import LandXML point file.
Save file.

050.130 Create exist surface DWG from mapping data

Section updated:

6/17/2015

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

2:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-130-001.mp4

050.130.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-130-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create the existing surface file

Page 103 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

In the Menu Browser select the New command.


From the new file dialog select the wisdot14-etopog.dwt template file.
In the Menu Browser select the Save As command.
Browse to the 12345678/BaseData folder and name the file Surf-Ex.dwg.
In the toolspace, Settings tab, right-click the name of the file (at the top).
Choose Edit Drawing Settings.
In the Units and Zone tab:
Set the coordinate zone category to USA, Wisconsin.
Set the coordinate zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.

Create the Exist surface


In the Home tab of the ribbon, Create Ground Data panel select the Surfaces drop-down and chose Create
Surface.
Name the surface Exist.
Click OK.
In the Quick Access Toolbar select Save.
4:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-130-002.mp4

050.130.002

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-130-002-proj-dataset.zip
Add the Topo-Ex file XREF to place an appropriate boundary
In the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, select the Attach icon.
In the Select Reference File dialog, browse to the project 12345678/BaseData folder and select the Topo-Ex.dwg.
In the Attach External Reference dialog:
Select the Path type of Relative
Select the Reference type of Overlay
Make sure the Scale is set to 1 (not Specify Onscreen)
Make sure the Insertion Point is X,Y,Z of 0 (not Specify Onscreen)
Make sure the Rotation is Angle 0 (not Specify Onscreen)
Click OK.

Create the polyline for the data clip boundary


Zoom to the location of where the Exist surface will be needed for the project.
Start the polyline command from the Home tab of the ribbon, Draw panel (or type PL at the command line).
Select the first point near the surface. Continue adding polyline vertices around the surface.
When this is nearly complete, type C to close the polyline shape.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 104 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Add the data clip boundary to the Exist surface definition


In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces area, and expand the Exist surface.
Under the Exist surface expand the Definition area.
Right-click on Boundaries and choose Add.
In the boundaries dialog add the name Field Survey.
From the Type drop-down choose Data Clip.
Click OK.
Select the closed polyline of the boundary.
5:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-130-003.mp4

050.130.003

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-130-003-proj-dataset.zip
Define the Exist surface from the mapping survey data
Translate SRV to PNT/FLT
In the Toolspace, Toolbox tab, expand WisDOT Toolbox, expand WisDOT Macros.
Right-click on SRV to PNT/FLT and choose Execute.
Browse to the project folder, 12345678\BaseData\Mapping and select Exist.SRV. Click Open.
Click OK to confirm file location.
[This step is not necessary, but is to confirm the files created from the SRV] In Windows Explorer, browse to the
project folder, 12345678\BaseData\Mapping and confirm The Exist.PNT, Exist.FLT, Exist-bldg.FLT and Existobsc.FLT were created. There may also be Exist-weak.FLT and Exist-ewbdy.FLT files created here, depending on
your project.
Add the survey points to the Exist surface
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand Surfaces, expand Exist, expand Definition, right-click on Point Files and
choose Add.
In the Add Point File dialog:
Select the plus sign icon in the upper right.
Browse to 12345678/BaseData/Mapping and select the Exist.SRV.pnt file. Click OK.
In the Specify Point File Format select the PENZD (space delimited) format. Click OK.

Add the figures to the Exist surface


In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand Surfaces, expand Exist, expand Definition, right-click on Breaklines and
choose Add.
In the Add Breaklines dialog change the Type to From File.
Click OK.
In the Import Breakline File dialog browse to 12345678/BaseData/Mapping and choose the Exist.SRV.flt file.
Click Open.

Create the data shortcut for the Exist surface.


In the Quick Access toolbar choose Save.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, right-click on the Data Shortcut area and choose Create Data
Shortcuts.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 105 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


In the data shortcuts dialog check mark the Exist surface. Click OK.

050.135 Create obscured areas in Exist surface

Section updated:

6/17/2015

Exercise project dataset


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-135-proj-dataset.zip
2:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-135-001.mp4

050.135.001

Create the Boundary surface


Open the Surf-Ex file
In the Quick Access toolbar select the Open icon.
Browse to the project 12345678\BaseData folder and open Surf-Ex.dwg.
Create the Boundaries surface
In the Home tab of the ribbon, Create Ground Data panel, select Surfaces Create Surface.
Select in the name field and name the surface Boundaries.
Select the Style value field, click on the ellipsis button.
From the Select Surface Style dialog click the drop-down menu and choose _No Display. Click OK.
In the Quick Access toolbar select the Save icon.

4:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-135-002.mp4

050.135.002

Add obscured area breaklines to the Boundaries surface


In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand Surfaces, expand Boundaries, expand Definition, and right-click on
Breaklines and choose Add.
Change the breakline Type to From File. Click OK.
Browse to the project 12345678\BaseData\Mapping folder and select EXIST-bldg.flt. Click Open.
Browse to the project 12345678\BaseData\Mapping folder and select EXIST-obsc.flt. Click Open.
Note: Repeat these steps for EXIST-weak.flt and EXIST-ewbdy.flt if they are present.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand Surfaces, expand Boundaries, expand Definition, and expand Breaklines.
In the Home tab of the ribbon, Layers panel, select the Layers Property icon.
In the Search bar in the upper right type E_DTM_ObscureArea.
If the layer already exists double-click it to make it the current active layer.
If that layer does not exist do the following steps:
Clear the search bar from any text so you can see all of the layer names.
In the Layers Properties Manager select the New Layer icon.
For the new Layer1, enter the name E_DTM_ObscureArea.
Close the Layer Properties Manager.
Right-click on the first breakline entry and choose Insert into Drawing.
Right-click on the second breakline entry and choose Insert into Drawing.

2:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-135-003.mp4

050.135.003

Add obscured area hide boundaries to Exist surface


In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand Surface, expand Exist, expand Definition, and right-click on the
Boundaries area and choose Add.
In the Add Boundaries dialog name the boundaries Obscured.
Change the Type to Hide.
Make sure the Non-Destructive option is turned ON. Click OK.
Select the obscured area boundaries in the project area.
Click <ENTER> to end the command.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand Surface, right-click on Exist surface and choose Rebuild.
Save and close the file.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 106 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


050.140 Create field survey exist surface DWG

Section updated:

4/13/2015

3:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-140-001.mp4

050.140.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-140-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create the field survey surface DWG file and surface
From the Menu Browser select New.
Select the wisdot14.dwt template and click OK.
From the Menu Browser select Save As.
Browse to the project 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder and save the file named Surf-Ex-Survey.dwg.
In the toolspace, Settings tab, right-click the name of the file (at the top).
Choose Edit Drawing Settings.
In the Units and Zone tab:
Set the coordinate zone category to USA, Wisconsin.
Set the coordinate zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
In the Quick Access toolbar click the Save command.
In the Home tab of the ribbon, Create Ground Data panel, select the Create Surface command.
Name the surface Exist-Survey
Click OK.

Add the surface query points and figures to the survey surface file
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on the SD-12345678, and choose Open for Edit.
Expand the survey queries area.
Drag and drop the following survey queries into the file:
Surface Figres1, Surface Figures2, Surface Points1, Surface Points2, Surface Points 3, and Centerline.
3:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-140-002.mp4

050.140.002

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-140-002-proj-dataset.zip
Create the polyline for the data clip boundary
Zoom to the location of where the Exist-Survey surface will be needed for the project.
Start the polyline command from the Home tab of the ribbon, Draw panel (or type PL at the command line).
Select the first point near the surface. Continue adding polyline vertices around the surface.
When this is nearly complete, type C to close the polyline shape.

Add the data clip boundary to the Exist-Survey surface definition


In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces area, and expand the Exist surface.
Under the Exist surface expand the Definition area.
Right-click on Boundaries and choose Add.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 107 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

In the boundaries dialog add the name Field Survey.


From the Type drop-down choose Data Clip. Click OK.
Select the closed polyline of the boundary.

Remove the Survey points and figures from the drawing


In the Toolspace, survey tab, expand the SD-12345678, right-click on Survey Points and click Points Remove
from Drawing.
Confirm by clicking Yes.
Right-click on the Figures and choose Remove from Drawing.
Confirm by clicking Yes.
4:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-140-003.mp4

050.140.003

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-140-003-proj-dataset.zip
Add the surface query points and figures as a reference to the survey surface
Create the field survey surface DWG file and surface
From the Menu Browser select New.
Select the wisdot14.dwt template and click OK.
From the Menu Browser select Save As.
Browse to the project 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder and save the file named Surf-Ex-Survey.dwg.
In the toolspace, Settings tab, right-click the name of the file (at the top).
Choose Edit Drawing Settings.
In the Units and Zone tab:
Set the coordinate zone category to USA, Wisconsin.
Set the coordinate zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.

Add the surface query points and figures as a reference to the survey surface
In the Quick Access toolbar click the Save command. In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on the
SD-12345678, and choose Open for Edit.
In the Survey ribbon tab, Modify panel, select the Survey Queries icon.
In the Survey Queries blue context ribbon, Manage panel, click the query name drop-down and choose
SurfacePoints1.
In the Survey Query ribbon tab, Query Results panel, select the Add to Surface icon.
In the Add to Surface dialog select the Add Query Results to this Surface drop-down and choose Exist-Survey.
Under Query Results choose Reference the Survey Database for Dynamic Query Results.
In the Use These Survey Queries select/check mark the following:
SurfacePoints1, SurfacePoints2, SurfacePoints3, SurfaceFigures1, SurfaceFigures2, and Centerlines.
Click OK.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 108 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Save the file.

Create a data shortcut for the field survey surface


In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, Data Shortcuts area, right-click on the data shortcuts header and choose Create
Data Shortcuts.
Select the Exist-Survey surface. Click OK.
Close the Surf-Ex-Survey surface file.

050.150 Paste field survey surface into master existing surface

Section updated:

4/13/2015

2:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-150-001.mp4

050.150.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-150-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create the data reference of the field survey surface
Open 12345678/BaseData/Surf-Ex.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, Data Shortcut area, expand the Surfaces area.
Right-click on the Exist-Survey surface and choose Create Reference.
Set the style to Ex Border. Click OK.

Paste the field survey surface into the Exist surface


In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, surfaces area, expand the Exist surface, and expand the definition area.
Right-click on the Edits area and choose Paste.
Choose the Exist-Survey surface. Click OK.
Save and close the file.

050.190 Create a drainage analysis surface from USGS data

Section updated:

3/10/2014

Exercise project dataset


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-190-proj-dataset.zip
6:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-190-001.mp4

050.190.001

Download USGS DEM Data


This segment will demonstrate how to download USGS DEM data.
Download USGS DEM data
From the USGS National Map Viewer http://viewer.nationalmap.gov, navigate to the desired location.
Click the Download Data button at the top of the screen.
Use the "Click here" link to create a bounding box of the area you need. Make the box only as large as you
need.
Check the Elevation toggle box and click Next.
*Multiple options will likely be available to you. The smaller the arc second value, the higher the point grid
density will be. Point elevation accuracy is the same. Check the desired data set. Be sure to choose the
ArcGrid format. Click Next.
The data will be added to your cart. Click Checkout. Enter your e-mail and click Place Order
You will receive and e-mail with a link to download the data.
Unzip the data to your project folder \BaseData\Other\USGS-DEM\
*Note: 1/3 arc second is typically adequate, but download the best available. Later, if you are unable to load a
denser point density, try a larger (less dense point spacing) or break the DEM into smaller pieces. This may occur
on larger areas.

18:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-190-002.mp4

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 109 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


050.190.002

***CAUTION*** This segment includes a large dataset and may take a long time to download.
Create USGS DEM Surface file
Create a new dwg file from the WisDOT template and save it as Surface-USGS-DEM_meters.dwg.
In the drawing settings set the Drawing Units to Meters. Set the Zone to USA, Wisconsin and Wisconsin
County Systems: {Your project County}, Meter. Click OK.
Import the project mapping into the drawing to provide spatial reference. Refer to 160.030 for this procedure.
Draw a closed polyline around the area where the DEM Surface is needed. Make this area as small as
possible to improve system performance.
Create a new surface called USGS-DEM
Expand the surface definition in the Toolspace-Prospector.
Right click on Boundaries and select Add....
Set the Type to Data Clip. Click OK and select the closed polyline from the screen.
In the Toolspace-Prospector, right click on DEM Files under the surface definition. Select Add...
At the top of the dialogue box, select the DEM file. The file extension is ESRI Binary Grid (*.adf). You will
see multiple .adf files in the data set downloaded. Choose the one with the largest file size.
Set the CS Code to Lat Longs, NAD83 datum, Latitude-Longitude; Degrees. (Coordinate System Code is
LL83) Click OK. Civil 3D will transform the DEM surface from Lat/Long to the coordinate system assigned to
the drawing. However, it will not transform the elevations. This is why we first bring the DEM into a metric
drawing.
Click OK to finish loading the DEM file. The surface is now viewable according to the assigned style. This
may take some time depending on the point density and area.
In the Toolspace-Prospector, right click on the surface and select Export LandXML... Make sure the surface
(only the surface) is selected in the Export to LandXML dialogue box. Click OK. Save the xml file to the
BaseData\Other\USGS-DEM\ directory. Name the file USGS-DEM_meters.
Save and Close the drawing.
Create a new dwg file from the WisDOT template and save it as Surface-USGS-DEM_USFoot.dwg.
In the Drawing Settings, set the Zone to USA, Wisconsin, Wisconsin County Systems: {Your Project County},
US Foot. Click OK.
Data shortcut reference your roadway alignment or xreference your mapping to provide spatial reference.
From the Insert Tab - Import Panel, click LandXML. Select the USGS-DEM_meters.xml file and click Open.
Click OK at the Import LandXML dialogue box. The DEM surface will now appear in your drawing according to its
assigned style. Save the drawing and create a data shortcut for the surface. The DEM surface now has elevations
in feet.

050.191 Create DEM surface using Infraworks

Section updated:

6/17/2015

Exercise project dataset


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-191-proj-dataset.zip
5:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-001.mp4

050.191.001

Introduction
Infraworks is capable of processing larger data sets. Therefore it is sometimes easier to consume DEM files,
LiDAR files, or other large sets of data in Infraworks instead of working directly in Civil 3D. Once the data is
inside Infraworks, smaller sample surfaces can be exported to Civil 3D.
Another advantage to consuming data in Infraworks is coordinate transformations. Infraworks will
automatically transform data to project specific coordinate systems. Then, when that data is exported to Civil
3D, it will appear in the correct location.
WisDOT employees can have Infraworks installed on their workstation by contacting the IT service desk.
http://dotnet/servicecatalog/procurement/pro-it-proc/index-get.htm
In this exercise, we will be using the same USGS data obtained in Module 050.190. Download the
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-190-proj-dataset.zip to follow along. Alternatively, the dem data
can be obtained from the national map viewer. http://viewer.nationalmap.gov/viewer/
In this example, we are going to download a topographic quad map and load it into the model. Aerial images
can also be used.
1. https://www.topoquest.com/find/state.php?state=WI
2. Download the Dallas and Dorrity Creek Maps

4:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-002.mp4

050.191.002

Start an Infraworks Project

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 110 of 390

Under Model, select New.

Since the Infraworks model will only be used for consuming data, we recommend that the
Infraworks project be kept on the users C-drive. Infraworks projects can grow quickly in size and
take up unnecessary server space.
Name the project the project ID and provide a descriptions such as the highway name and project
title.
It is important to define the model extents when practical. The model extents limit the Infraworks
model to the area of interest. Without model extents, the Infraworks model will include the entire
planet and performance would suffer. However, since the Infraworks engine can process large data,
the model extents can be set significantly larger than the project. There are several options for
setting the model extents:
Option 1: One way to obtain coordinate values for the model extents, is to open the
project mapping file in Civil 3D. Choose minimum coordinates representing a point
southwest of the expected area of interest. Choose maximum coordinates representing
a point northeast of the expected area of interest.
Option 2: The simplest way to set the model extents is with the data that will be
consumed. By clicking on the Load Extents From File button, you can select the data
that will be brought into Infraworks. The extents will be set automatically based on the
spatial limits of the data.
In this example, well select the .adf file from our USGS DEM download. These extents will be
much larger than what we will need. However, we can reduce the model extents later.

Under Advanced Setting, there are some options regarding coordinate systems. These can be left
as the default even if they do not match your project coordinate system. The UCS coordinate
system can be changed to the project coordinate system if you wish. This will display the project
coordinate system in the model. For our application, there is no need to change the database
coordinate system.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 111 of 390

Click Ok to create the model.

1:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-003.mp4

050.191.003

Model Navigation
To navigate the model, the hold the left mouse button down to orbit. Hold the right mouse button down to
pan. Use the wheel to zoom in and out. To return to a top view with north up, hover the cursor over the view
cube and click on the home symbol. This is the default view for the home view. The home view can be
changed if desired by click in the down arrow next to the view cube.

4:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-004.mp4

050.191.004

Load Image Data into Model and Refine Model Extents

We can now begin to load data into the model. We recommend that you load an image file (or
files) that encompasses the area of interest first. In this example, we are going to download a
topographic quad map and load it into the model. Aerial images can also be used.
1. https://www.topoquest.com/find/state.php?state=WI
2. Download the Dallas and Dorrity Creek Maps
To load the images into the model, just drag and drop the image files (one at a time) into
Infraworks.
1. Under the geolocation tab, there should not be any edits that are needed. The coordinate
system of the image should automatically load.
2. Under the Raster tab, there are no required edits. However, since in this example we are
loading a topographic quad map, we can change the classification to Topographic Map.
3. We recommend that you check the Clip to Model Extent box for all data loaded into
Infraworks.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 112 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

1. Click the Close & Refresh button


In this example, the area of interest spans 2 topographic quad maps. Repeat the previous step to
load the second map.
Now we can refine our model extents before loading our terrain data. From the Infraworks menu,
select Model Settings. Under Extent, we can interactively define the model extents with a bounding
box or polygon. Select the one that you prefer. For bounding box, first left click on one extent
corner in the model. Next, double left click on the other extent corner in the model.
Click Save and then Click Close. The model extents are now refined.

1:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-005.mp4

050.191.005

Loading Terrain Data into Model


The process for loading terrain data is the same. Drag and drop the USGS .adf file into the model.
Under the Raster Tab, it is important to check the Clip to Model Extent box for terrain data.
Click Close & Refresh

7:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-006.mp4

050.191.006

Infraworks Tools and Tips


Terrain Themes
Terrain Themes can be a very useful tool for analysis. Under the Analyze Tab, select Terrain
Themes. Click the green plus button to add a theme. You can make your own theme, or choose one
of the preset themes. To access a preset them, click the palette type drop down menu. For USGS
DEM files, the USGS National Map palette can be very useful. More than one theme can be loaded if
desired.
Once a theme is added, it can be toggle on and off or edited. A common useful edit is
transparency. This allow you to view the images loaded into the model at the same time as the
terrain theme.
Surface Layers
If more than one image is loaded and they overlap, the order can be adjusted to view one or the
other in the overlap area. In the example, the 2 topographic quads overlap. To switch which image is
on top, click the Manage Surface Layers button from the home tab. In the dialogue, the images can
be turned on and off and reordered.
Visual Effects
To adjust the visual effects, such as lighting, go to the Visual Effect tab. One common effect
modification is the Light intensity. Often, the light intensity is set too high for optimal viewing of the
topographic quad maps. Gradually slide the light intensity down until desired effect is achieved.
Terrain Exaggeration
For flatter terrain, it can be difficult to distinguish watershed boundaries. Exaggerating the terrain in
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 113 of 390

Infraworks can quickly reveal these boundaries. To exaggerate the terrain, right click on the .adf file
under the data sources. Choose configure. In the geolocation tab, set the exaggeration under the z
scale. In the example, we exaggerate by 5. Click Close & Refresh. Since the terrain has been
exaggerated in the z direction, you may need to zoom out to bring it back into view. Also note, that
new terrain themes will need to be added for the exaggerated data.
6:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-007.mp4

050.191.007

Export Infraworks Terrain to Civil 3D


IMPORTANT: You must remove any terrain exaggeration before exporting to Civil 3D.
To export the terrain to Civil 3D, go to the Infraworks menu. Select Export Export IMX
Define the area of the model that you want to export using either a bounding box or polygon. If the model
size is not large, the entire model can be exported. We recommend exporting only the area that is required.
The exported area remains dynamic with the Civil 3D surface that is create. The Civil 3D surface reads
the .imx file in its definition. Therefore, if the .imx file is updated the Civil 3D surface will update.
Set the target file/location to the Civil 3D project directory. N:\PDS\C3D\ProjectID\BaseData\Other\USGSDEM\USGS-DEM-ProjectID.imx
Click Export
Open Civil 3D. Save a new drawing called N:\PDS\C3D\ProjectID\BaseData\Other\USGS-DEM\USGS-DEMProjectID.dwg
IMPORTANT: Set the project coordinate system for the drawing in the drawing settings. This is how the
terrain will get transformed to the project coordinate system.
Insert Tab - Import Panel Import IMX. Select the IMX file.
The surface will automatically be created and named AIM_Existing_Ground. Give the surface a logical name
such as Exist-USGS-DEM
If the surface extents need to be updated, just re-export the IMX file from Infraworks with the new extents.
Overwrite the previous IMX file. The Civil 3D surface will update.

2:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-008.mp4

050.191.008

Update Surface Limits


The exported area remains dynamic with the Civil 3D surface that is creates. The Civil 3D surface reads
the .imx file in its definition. Therefore, if the .imx file is updated the Civil 3D surface will update. If it is
discovered that a larger (or smaller) area is needed for the Civil 3D surface, redefine the export extents in
Infraworks.
If the surface extents need to be updated, just re-export the IMX file from Infraworks with the new extents.
Overwrite the previous IMX file. The Civil 3D surface will update.

Module 060 Alignments


The first segments in this module use files found within the zip file linked to in the first section. If you want to do
the exercises in the same file as the instructor, do the following:
Download the zip file to your computer.
Extract the zip file to a local location. C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-training is a suggested loctation.
After extraction, there should be a folder called "060-exercise-files". The exercise files are located here.
The file used in a section will be in italics at the beginning of the section (e.g. Intro.dwg )
Open the file prior to the exercise to follow along with the instructor.

060.010 Alignment basics

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/060/060-exercise-files.zip
7:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-010-001.mp4

060.010.001

Introduction to Alignments
Many Ways to Develop an alignment:
From lines, arcs and/or polylines
From scratch
From points as best fit*
From existing edge lines as best fit*
*good as a starting point
Workflow:
All project alignments can go in one drawing
Use WisDOT naming convention
DWG File type: Alignments and Profiles
Description: Contains alignments and profiles

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Name:
Example:
Comment:

Page 114 of 390

AliProfs-<Dominant Roadway Name>-<Comment>


AliProfs-STH25BestFit.dwg
Belongs in (Proj ID)(Design)(AliProfs)

Sites
It is recommended that you do not put alignments on a Site.
Some objects need to be on a Site, but for alignments this is optional.
When alignments are together on a site, they will react to each other by forming parcels within closed areas. This
is not desirable in most cases. When alignments on separate sites form closed areas, no parcel is created.
Store in Design > AliProfs folder
All Alignments & Profile can go in the same file.
To Summarize:
Alignments are your horizontal geometry components
Represents centerline of the road in many cases
Organize your projects alignments in one or two drawings
Use <none> as your site

060.020 Alignments from objects

Section updated:

10/1/2012

9:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-020-001.mp4

060.020.001

Alignments From Lines Arcs & Polylines


alignment from lines etc.dwg
Exercise:
1. Open the file alignment from lines etc.dwg.
1. This contains a polyline to form USH 51
2. The separate segment will be Lake Kegonsa road.
2. On the home tab of the ribbon go to Create design panel > Alignment Create Alignment from objects.
3. Pick the polyline near the southeast part of the site.
1. This will force the lower station value to be in the south-east.
2. Press enter to finish.
3. Press enter if the alignment direction is correct.
4. Name the alignment USH 51 from Polyline
1. Verify the site is NONE.
2. Set the style to ALI Proposed
3. The alignment label set will be ticks 100 50 minor [desc]
4. Type-in USH51 in the description field.
5. Set the starting station to 196+08.64
6. Click OK.
5. Create design panel > Alignment Create Alignment from objects
1. Pick all the lines nd arcs that comprise Lake Kegonsa Road.
2. Press enter to confirm the direction.
3. Press enter to give the alignment a name.
4. Lake Kegonsa
5. Set the Alignment Label Set to ticks 500 major 100 minor.
6. Click OK.
6. Select the Lake Kegonsa alignment
1. In the alignment context tab, click Alignment Properties
2. Go to the Station Control tab
3. Change the station to 10+00.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Ok to the alignment warning message.
End of exercise.

060.030 Alignment creation tools

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

20:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-030-001.mp4

060.030.001

Alignment Layout Toolbar


alignment1.dwg
Exercise:

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 115 of 390

1.
2.
3.
4.

Open the file alignment1.dwg.


Select the alignment. Be sure that you see the alignment-specific grips.
Click Geometry editor.
In the Alignment Layout toolbar.
1. Verify that the name of the alignment appears at the top of the toolbar.
5. Explore the alignment layout toolbar.
1. The first icon is Draw.
Use the pulldown to find Tangent-Tangent (No curves)
1. Snap to the last endpoint in the north of the site.
2. Press enter to complete adding segments to the end the alignment.
3. Remember that missing labels indicate a gap in the alignment.
2. Use Tangent-Tangent (with curves)
1. Snap to the end of the previous line.
2. Draw a few arbitrary lines with curves for practice.
3. Go to Curve and Spiral Settings.
1. Clothoid refers to the spiral option.
2. The default circular curve type is 200. This is NOT used if the design speed is set.
3. Click OK.
4. Click Insert PI.
1. Click anywhere to add a new horizontal point of intersection.
2. Practice adding several PIs anywhere you lie.
3. Click Escape to complete the action.
5. Click Delete PI.
1. Click near one of the PIs you created in the previous steps.
2. The PI closest to your cursor will be removed.
3. Click Escape to complete the command.
6. Click Break-apart PI.
1. Click near the PI where you would like to form a gap.
2. Type in a gap distance of 50.
3. Notice that the labels have changed. The EOP label is at the end of the first segment. No
labels are at the second portion of the alignment.
7. Click Fixed Line Two-points.
1. U
2. Use object snaps to snap 2 points connecting the alignment back together.
3. This will close the gap and cause your labels to return to the northern part of the
alignment.
8. Click the curves menu
1. Free Curve Fillet (Between Two Entities, radius)
2. Zoom into an area with 2 tangent segments.
3. Click the tangent in, then click the tangent going out. Be sure to work low station to high
station.
4. Verify that the curve angle is Lessthan180.
5. Hit enter to accept the default 200 radius. If the radius you choose does not fit, you will
receive a message that says, No Solution Available at the command line.
6. Hit enter to complete the command and update the annotation.
9. Click Delete sub-entity.
1. Zoom close one of the arcs.
2. Click the arc. The arc will be removed and the geometry will revert to tangents.
3. Click a tangent segment. A gap will form where the tangent segment was removed.
10. Click the Alignment Grid View button
1. This will open a spreadsheet-like view of the alignment. Change the radius value of the
first curve to 2292.00. Note that the red highlighting in the graphic tells you which line in the
table you are working on.
2. Right click on the second curve. Select Zoom-to from the right-click Menu.
3. Change the radius value to 1440.
4. Change the radius value of the third curve to 1500.
11. Practice using the Undo/Redo commands from the alignment layout toolbar.
1. Using undo from the alignment layout toolbar will undo one step at a time from the time
you open up the toolbar.
2. Using the main undo from the Quick access toolbar will undo all actions you took while
the alignment layout toolbar was visible.
End of exercise.
8:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-030-002.mp4

060.030.002

Best Fit from Edgelines


Best Fit edgelines.dwg
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 116 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Create Best Fit Alignment from Existing Lines


Pros:
Can work from As-builts (Do not need specific CL shots.)
Cons:
Cleanup needed
Difficult to modify geometry afterwards
Exercise: Working with Edgelines
1. Start with the file Best Fit edgelines.dwg
2. Key-in NCOPY at the command line. This will allow you to copy geometry from an XREF into the
current drawing.
1. Select the edgelines that you need to create the CL.
2. Once all of the edgelines re selected from the XREF, press enter.
3. Press enter too keep the same coordinates.
4. Press enter to complete the command.
5. You will now have lines from the XREF in the current drawing.
3. Select all of the newly copied line.
4. Click the Join command from Home > Modify panel.
5. On the home tab > Create Design panel, click Alignment > Create Best fit alignment.
1. Set the input type to AutoCAD Entities
2. Click the pick in cad icon for the path1 entities.
1. Select all the lines from one edge of the road.
3. Click the pick in cad for the path 2 entities.
4. Clear the checkbox next to Create Spirals.
5. Name the alignment USH 51Best Fit Edgelines
6. Click OK
6. Examine the alignment and tke a look at any issues that may have arisin.
7. Select the alignment. From the contextual tab, click Geometry Editor.
8. Click the Alignment grid view to view the radii and other data.
9. You can also use grip-edits to modify the alignment.
1. The triangular grip that points up will allow you to relocate the PI, thereby changing the
tangents.
2. The circular grip will allow you to change a pass-through point.
3. The triangular grip that points away from the arc will change the radius of the curve at its
midpoint.
4. The circular grips at each end of an arc will allow you to change the length of curve.
10. When other alignment editing tools do not work, you may need to remove the sub-entities and
recreate them.
Save the drawing. End of exercise.

060.040 Fixed/Floating/Free

Section updated:

10/1/2012

13:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-040-001.mp4

060.040.001

Fixed Floating free.dwg


Alignment Sub-entity Terminology
Fixed segment can be modified independently and tangency is not maintained
Examples: a three point arc, a two point line that is not constrained on either end.
Floating one end is attached and constrained by the previous element (tangency is maintained)
Free segment must be attached between two existing segments (tangency is maintained)
The ends of the object are both dependent on the objects before and after them. Example: a curve created with the
free curve filet command.
Example: Fixed Floating Free
1. Open the drawing Fixed floating free.dwg. You will use the points and notes to create example curves in the
file.
2. From the Home tab > Create Design panel >Alignment> Alignment Creation Tools
1. Name the alignment Lake Kegonsa road.
2. Leave styles as default.
3. Click OK.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 117 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

3. Turn on your Node object snap by right-clicking the osnap icon from the status bar.
4. From the Alignment layout toolbar, go to the line menu, and click Fixed Line-Two points.
1. Snap to the south most point to the next point.
2. Press enter to complete the segment.
5. From the alignment layout toolbar, go to Cures > Floating curve (from entity radius through point)
1. Click the tangent segment you created in the previous steps.
2. Type in a radius of 575. Press enter.
3. Press enter to accept the default of Less Than180.
4. Use the point to set the next point. Be sure to use node snap.
6. To create the reverse curve, go to Curves menu in the Alignment layout toolbar > More Floating Curves >
Float Curve (From Entity end through point.)
1. Select the curve.
2. Click the point that is in the intersection to complete the reverse curve.
3. Press enter to complete the command.
7. To create the next reverse curve, go to Curves menu in the Alignment layout toolbar > More Floating
Curves > Float Curve (From Entity end through point.)
1. Pick the curve you created in the previous steps.
2. Press enter to complete the alignment.
8. Go to Curves menu in the Alignment layout toolbar > Fixed Curve 3-point.
1. Use the node object snap to click the three points to make a curve. The result should be a
disconnected curve which does not have labeling on it.
2. Press enter to complete the command.
9. To close the gap, use the Line > Free line between two curves from the alignment layout toolbar.
1. Click the preceeding curve, then the curve that is not connected.
2. Press enter to complete the command.
10. Click the alignment grid (panorama) view.
1. The Tangency constraints reflect the tools we used to create the segments. These can be
unlocked to force a change.
2. Unlock the fourth element ( the third curve) by clicking the lock icon.
3. Change the Tangency constraint to Constrained by Previous.
4. Change the radius to 300.
11. Unlock the third entity (the second curve).
1. Change the type to Constrained by previous (floating).
2. Change the radius to 400.
12. Close the alignment layout toolbar.
13. Select the alignment
1. Notice that you see different sets of grips depending on the way the curve was created.
2. Experiment by changing the grips. Dont worry - if you feel you have made a mistake you can
always use the undo command to go back a step.
14. Remember that the tools you use to create n alignment will change the tools you have to modify the
alignment after it is created.
15. Save the drawing.
End of exercise.

060.050 Reverse and compound curves

Section updated:

10/1/2012

13:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-050-001.mp4

060.050.001

Additional Tools:
Free Curve Fillet.dwg
Station Equations,Masking, Implied Point of Intersection (PI), Constraint Editing, Free Curve Fillet
1.
2.
3.
4.

Open the file Free Curve Fillet.dwg


Select the main USH alignment.
From the alignment contextual tab, click Alignment Properties.
Go to the Station Control tab.
1. Chnge the start station to 192+00.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Ok to the warning message that appears.
5. Click the green symbol to add a station equation.
1. Snap to the PT station near224+85.
2. Change the station head to 300+00.00.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click OK.
5. Notice the labeling now reflect the station equation values.
6. Switch to the Masking tab. Masking will allow you to hide a portion of the alignment. It is frequently used in
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 118 of 390

intersections.
1. Click Add Masking region.
2. Snap to the tick near 310+00 and click again at 312+00.
3. There now appears to be a gap in the alignment.
4. Click Add Masking region gain.
5. Snap to station 322+00. Use endpoint snaps to pick up the end of the alignment. The Lock to end
option is automatically set.
7. Switch to the Point of Intersection Tab
1. This comes into play when Civil 3D converts a line or polyline to an alignment.
2. By Change in alignment direction will calculate an overall PI for compund curves.
3. By Individual curves and curve group will create a separate PI for each curve (similar to how it
creates a PI as you draw tangents and PIs from scratch.
4. Do not display implied points of intersection will leave out PI locations. Use this option if you
want to prevent editing of the alignment using implied PI locations. You can change this option at any
time.
5. Blue PI grips are ones that are created when a curve is placed through a free curve fillet.
6. Grey PI grips are PIs that did not start out from tangents. Usually these are located where
tangency constraints have been modified or where polylines have been converted to alignments.
7. Click the grey PI and click Solve PI. This will turn the grip to a blue PI and allow you to move the
PI normally.
8. Switch to the Constraint editing tab.
1. Always perform implied tangency constraint swapping will automatically change the tangency
constraints on an alignment segment
2. Lock all parameter Constraints In the alignment grid view, you will see that this option
automatically adds a closed lock icon (meaning it is locked) to the tangency constraint.
3. These settings do affect all alignments, not just ones that are converted from
polylines/lines/arcs.
4. In all cases, tangency is maintained for all segments.
9. Close the Alignment properties.
10. Click the alignment.
11. From the Contextual tab > click the Geometry editor.
1. Click the Free Curve Fillet (between two entities, radius)
2. Click the tangent in (low station)
3. Click the tangent out (higher station)
4. Press enter to accept the default of less than 180.
5. Key-in 300
6. Press enter to complete the command & update any labeling.
12. From the Contextual tab > click the Geometry editor.
1. Click the Free Curve Fillet (between two entities, radius)
2. Click the curve (low station)
3. Click the tangent (higher station)
4. Press enter to accept the default of less than 180.
5. Type in R for reverse, then press enter.
6. Key-in 500 and press enter.
Save the drawing. End of exercise.

060.060 Editing alignments

Section updated:

10/1/2012

7:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-060-001.mp4

060.060.001

Reverse Alignment or Segment


alignment reverse.dwg
Use the following tools if the alignment was accidentally converted going the wrong direction through its entire
length or if a single segment is going in reverse. When the latter case happens, you will see the alignment behave
as if there is a gap in it.
Whenever possible, try to catch any direction errors as early as you can. The later in the design process you are
when you make these modifications, the more work you will have updating corridor stationing, station equations,
design speeds and any other design elements that are station dependent.
Exercise: Reverse Alignment and Subentity
1. Open the drawing alignment reverse.dwg This contains two alignments that were purposely created going
an undesirable direction.
2. Select the USH 51 alignment. This alignment is going the wrong direction in its entirety.
3. From the contextual tab > Click the down arrow on the modify panel.
1. Click reverse direction.
2. You receive a warning indicating that changing the alignment direction will affect ependant items
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 119 of 390

such as station equations and design speeds. Click OK.


4. Press escape to deselect the alignment.
5. Select Lake Kegonsa Road. Notice that the last segment of the alignment does not have labels on it.
Additionally, the EP label occurs just before the last segment. These are indicators that something is wrong
with the last segment. Zooming into the PI, you should observe that there is no gap, therefore the likely cause
of the problem is a reversed segment.
6. From the contextual tab > Click Geometry Editor.
1. From the Alignment layout tools, select Reverse Subentity Direction.
2. Click the last segment.
3. The sub entity is now reversed and the labels will continue to the end of the alignment.
7. Save the drawing.
8. End of exercise.
Adding on to an Alignment
The most common cause for the alignment or a single segment being reversed is incorrect conversion of lines
and arcs when adding on or converting to an alignment initially.
Always ad onto an alignment by going to the Alignment Geometry editor and select the Convert AutoCAD line
and arc. Be sure all lines and/or arcs are snapped together properly.
Convert the new lines in the direction of stationing. I.E. always work low station to high station. In some cases (like
in the video) you might get lucky and the software will fix the lines on conversion, but this is not always the case.

060.070 Alignment properties

Section updated:

10/1/2012

10:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-070-001.mp4

060.070.001

Design Violation
Design criteria.dwg
The warning symbol will appear on an alignment if:
A line-curve connection is not tangent
A curves radius is too small for the design speed
Superelevation table is out of date
Any design check is violated
Adding Design Speed to an Existing Alignment
1. Open the file Design criteria.dwg
2. Select the Lake Kegonsa alignment (the shorter one)
3. From the alignment contextual tab click Alignment Properties.
1. Switch to the Design criteria tab.
2. Place a checkmark next to Use Criteria based design.
3. Click the ellipsis button to select the _wisdot design criteria 2009.xml file. This file is part of the
WisDOT Civil 3D design files package that can be downloaded from the FTP site.
4. Set the radius table to WisDOT eMax 6% - 1lane.
5. Set the attainment method to Crowned roadway.
6. Verify that check for tangency between elements is checked ON.
7. Change the design speed to 30 mph.
8. Click add design speed (green plus sign.)
1. Set the start station of the new design speed to 25+00
2. Set the design speed to 45 mph.
9. Notice that you now have several radius warnings on the alignment.
10. To rectify the problem, you could change the design speed or increase the radius.
11. To ignore the problem and hide the warning symbol, click the LAYOFF button. And click one of
the symbols.
Adding a Design Speed as the Alignment is Created
1. Remain in the file Design criteria.dwg
2. From the Home tab of the ribbon > Create Design panel click alignment> Create Alignment from objects.
1. Select the polyline near the right end.
2. Press enter to accept the direction.
3. Name the alignment USH 51.
4. Leave all the rest of the options on the General tab as default.
5. Switch to the Design Criteria tab.
1. Type in 50 in the Starting design speed field.
2. Put a checkmark next to Use criteria based design.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 120 of 390

3. Click the ellipsis button to select the _wisdot design criteria 2009.xml file.
4. Set the radius table to WisDOT eMax 6% - 1lane.
5. Set the attainment method to Crowned roadway.
6. Leave other options as default.
6. Click OK.
3. You can view any warnings graphically or by clicking the Alignment grid view from the alignment layout
toolbar.
4. Save the file. End of exercise.

14:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-070-002.mp4

060.070.002

Superelevation
Design Criteria.dwg

To add superelevation to a design you need:


1. An alignment with a design speed
2. Use Criteria-based design turned on
3. Superelevation calculated for the alignment
4. A typical cross-section (Assembly) that can superelevate
Superelevation Terminology

Exercise: Apply Superelevation to an Alignment


1. Remain in the file Design criteria.dwg
2. Select the alignment.
3. From the contextual tab, click Alignment Properties.
1. Verify that a design speed is active for the alignment by going to Alignment Properties >
Design criteri tab.
2. Click OK
4. Click the Superelevation > Calculate / Edit Superelevation button from the alignment contextual
tab (for USH 51).
1. Click Calculate Superelevation Now.
1. In the Calculate Superelevation wizard, be sure the roadway type is set to
undivided crowned road. This will match the assembly type and the option in the
design criteria.
2. Click Next.
3. Change the lane width to 14.
4. Click Next.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 121 of 390

5. In the Shoulder control screen, set the normal shoulder width is 8 and the normal
shoulder slope is 4%.
6. Set the lowside option to Breakover removal.
7. Set the highside option to Default slopes.
8. Place a checkmark next to Maximum shoulder rollover and set the value to 8%.
9. Click next.
10. In the Attainment method area, verify that the same design criteria file is
selected by clicking the ellipsis.
11. Set the Superelevation rate table to WisDOT eMax 6%.
12. Set the transition length table to 1laneRamp, 2laneUndiv@CL
13. Set the attainment method to crowned roadway.
14. Leave all other values as default.
15. Click Finish.
5. You should now see the Superelevation table complete with stations and Superelevation stage
name.
6. This table can be used to override calculated values. You can change the length, station, and/or
lane & shoulder slopes depending on your needs.
7. Close the table by clicking the green checkmark.
8. The Superelevation table can be revisited by clicking Superelevation > View tabular editor from
the alignment contextual tab.
9. When changes to the geometry occur, you will see a warning symbol indicating that the
superelevtion needs to be recalculated.
10. From the alignment contextual tab, click superelevtion > Calculate/edit superelevation.
1. Advance through the curves by clicking Next at the top of the Superelevation curve
manager.
2. Observe the Superelevation status at the bottom of the Superelevation curve manager for
confirmation of the curve situation.
3. Click Recalculate for ny curves that report s Out of Date.
4. Click Continue to recalculate when warned that manual edits will be overwritten.
11. Save the file.
End of exercise.

060.080 Offsets and widenings

Section updated:

10/1/2012

6:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-080-001.mp4

060.080.001

Offset Alignment Use


offset alignments.dwg
Offset alignments are used to represent many different types of objects that run parallel (or mostly parallel) to your
main alignment. Their geometry depends on the main or parent alignment.
Frequent uses for offset alignments:
Edge of pavement
Sidewalk
Right of way
Grade break locations
Median locations
Create Offset Alignments
1. Use the file offset alignments.dwg.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 122 of 390

2. Select the alignment you wish to offset. From the contextual tab launch pad panel > Create Offset
Alignment.
1. Name template
2. Station range for the offset
3. Number of offsets on each side (set this to zero if you wish to omit an alignment from one of the
sides.
4. Incremental offset distance on each side - this is the distance from the centerline.
3. Grip edit the centerline and observe that the offset alignments follow.
4. Changing the type of alignment (in the alignment properties > Information tab), will disconnect the offset
from the parent alignment.
5. To make an offset of the offset, select the offset alignment and pick offset alignment again.
1. Set the number of offsets to the left to 0.
2. Set the distance to 1.5. this new offset will represent the back of curb.
3. Click OK.
6. Repeat the process for the left (north) side of the alignment.
7. Save the file.

13:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-080-002.mp4

060.080.002

Offset Alignment Widening


Offset Alignment widening can be used for:
Lane widening
Turn lanes
Acceleration lanes
Passing lanes
Sidewalks that meander away from the centerline alignment.
On-street parking areas.
Exercise Add Widening:
1. Continue working in the file offset alignments.dwg.
1. All offsets and wideing options are based off the distance from the centerline of the road.
2. Click the alignment that will recieve the wideing information. In our case, you will use the edge of pavement
alignment (the one that is 14 offset).
3. From the contextual tab, click Add Widening.
1. Press enter to take he default of No to create the wideining as a separate alignment.
2. Type in 2600 for the start station. Press enter.
3. Type in 5800 for the end station. Press enter.
4. Type in 28 for the widening offset. Press enter.
4. If you dont see Offset Alignment Parameters, click Offset parameters from the contextual tab.
1. Change the transition in length to 200.
2. Experiment with the different taper and widening options.
3. Re-set any stations that were disrupted by changing the settings.
5. Right-click the transition out category from the Offset Alignment Widening palette.
1. Select Zoom to.
2. Change the transition length to 200.
6. To add curve widening: Select an offset alignment.
1. Click Add Automatic widening.
2. Use the manual option. There are no widening parameters in the design criteria file, so you can
use the manual option to add widening along curves if desired.
7. Graphic options for changing wideing:more grips for adding taper information.
1. Clicking the plus sign grip will add a widening but no taper.
2. Click the grey circle grip to show
3. Once a taper has been added graphically, you can edit them using the Offset Alignment
parameters.
8. Offset alignments can be masked using the alignment properties.
9. Also in the alignment properties, Offset alignments can be truncated by clearing the checkbox next to Start
or End stations.
1. Note that it will not allow you to stop an offset alignment usingthese parameters if the station falls
within a taper area.
End of exercise.

060.100 WisDOT standards alignments

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

30:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-100-001.mp4

Page 123 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


060.100.001

Veritcal Alignment)
Alignments are CRITICAL to the overall Civil 3D Object Model
Alignments do not have dependencies, but have several Objects that are depend upon them.
Child Objects directly dependent upon Alignments:
Profiles
Profile Views
Sample Line Groups
Sample Lines
Section Views
Materials quantities
Objects that use Alignments and have dynamic relationship with them:
Corridors
Intersections
Pipe Networks
Alignments as they relate to CAiCE
CAiCE Geometry chain with annotation turned off = Civil 3D Alignment without labels
CAiCE Geometry chain with annotation turned on = Civil 3D Alignment with labels
Things that are WAY different than CAiCE (or any other product for that matter)
Civil 3D has dynamic relationship between Alignments and other objects that use Alignments (Corridors,
Intersections). When the Alignment changes, objects that use that Alignment can change as well.
Civil 3D is a true Object model. Child objects such as Profiles, Profile Views, Sample Lines, etc. can change
when an Alignment changes. Note: for this reason it is very important to get your Alignments location,
stationing, and equations correct before creating the Child objects.

Civil 3D Alignment Types


Four types of Alignments
Centerline
Offset
Curb Return
Miscellaneous

Centerline Alignments
Most commonly used to create Profile views, Profiles, Sample Line Groups, Sections, Section Views and
Quantities.
Used as Baselines for the Corridor Object.
Used as Main or Secondary Roads for Intersection Object.
Possibly a Parent of an Offset Alignment
Centerline Alignment properties
Name
Style, Labels
Station Control, Station Equation(s), Mask(s)
Design Speed, Design Criteria, Design check set
Superelevation

Offset Alignments
Child of Centerline or possibly some other Offset Alignment
Represent Targets such as Pavement Edges, Shoulder Edges
Can have Widenings
Most do not have Station Labels
Can have Profiles, Profile Views, Sample Line Groups
Attributes
Name
Style, Labels
Station Control, Station Equation(s), Mask(s)
Design Speed, Design Criteria, Design check set
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 124 of 390

Superelevation
Offset Parameters
Can set Update Mode to Dynamic or Static
Can lock to Geometry or stationing of Parent Alignment

Curb Return Alignments


Can have Intersection Wizard automatically create
Change Intersection layout parameters change Curb Return Alignments
Intersection parent Alignments are the Main and Secondary Roads
Curb Return Alignment shapes are generated by quadrant offsets, radii, transitions and widenings
Used as Baselines when Intersection Wizard stores Corridor
Most do not have Station Labels
Can have Profiles, Profile Views, Sample Line Groups
Attributes
Name
Style, Labels
Station Control, Station Equation(s), Mask(s)
Design Speed, Design Criteria, Design check set
Superelevation
Curb Return Parameters
Can set Update Mode to Dynamic or Static

Miscellaneous Alignments
Possibly used as Matchlines for Quantities, Pipe Alignments, Special Ditching, other Roadway Features
Does not have Design Criteria or Superelevation
Can have Profiles, Profile Views, Sample Line Groups
Attributes
Name
Style, Labels
Station Control, Station Equation(s), Mask(s)

Civil 3D Alignments and Sites


Civil 3D uses Sites as a way of segregating data. A site is a collection of :
Alignments (all types)
Child objects from Alignments
Feature Lines (VERY similar to CAiCE Survey Chains)
Grading Groups (Site Design tool in CAiCE)
Parcels (New concept all together)
Feature Lines, Grading Groups and Parcels all interact within the same site (maintain Topology)
If an Alignment is put in a Site and that Alignment completely crosses a Parcel, the Parcel will automatically
be split into two Parcels.
In order to avoid potential conflicts with other Objects Wisconsin DOT will most often use Site-less Alignments.
Workflows will indicate when an Alignment is to be placed or moved to a Site and why

Wisconsin DOT Drawing File Names and File Management


Alignments and Profiles will often be created within their own DWG file or files
One exception to this is the Intersecting (Secondary Roadways) Alignments used in a Intersection Object. To
have the Intersection Object maintain the Profile match with the Main Road these Alignments will be created in
their Corridor DWG files
Project folder - Alignments are found in
\Lan Drive\C3D\ProjectIDFolder\Design\AliProfs
File Naming
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 125 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


AliProf-<Descriptive Alignment Name>-<Comment>.DWG
Example
AliProf-STH25-BestFit.DWG

Note: we are flexible with our file naming. Not so flexible with our project folder structure. Biggest thing to
remember is to name files so others can figure out what they contain. Placing files in the proper project folder is a
great start!

Wisconsin DOT Standards


WisDOT10 drawing template (WisDOT10.DWT) contains:
Alignment styles
Label Styles
Command Settings for Alignment creation
Layers and symbology for Alignments
Alignment Object naming
Centerline Alignments <Roadway Name> <Comment>
STH25 BestFit or 4th Ave
Offset Alignments <Parent Alignment Name>-<Side>-<Offset>
STH25 BestFit-Left-12.00
Curb Return Alignments <Intersection Name>-<Quadrant Name>-Quadrant
STH25and4thAve-NW-Quadrant
Miscellaneous Alignments <Name what it is>-<Side>-<Comment>
STH25-Right-Ditch or STH25and4thAve-Right-Matchline
Design criteria use the current WisDOT Design Criteria.XML file. This contains current standard WisDOT super
rates and transitions as well as Profile k Values.
Wisconsin DOT Sharing the Alignments
For anyone who has access to the Civil 3D Project ID folder, Alignments will be shared using References to Data
Shortcuts
If sharing Alignments with outside organizations or across projects Alignments can be saved to LandXML files and
shared
Alignments Need to Know!!!
When creating an Alignment using Layout tools there are three words you will hear a LOT.
Fixed
Float
Free
It is very important to understand these concepts. The geometry you create (Lines and Curves) can be changed
based on how they were created.
Fixed line or curve has no point of tangency such as a curve through three points. These Lines or Curves maintain
their relationship to how they were originally stored regardless of how you edit them
Float(ing) line or curve has one point of tangency such as a curve at the end of a line. If the line changes the curve
is adjusted to maintain tangency
Free line or curve has two points of tangency such as a line between two curves. If one curve changes the free line
changes with it.
Be careful when creating Alignments from polylines or other CAD objects. Make sure curves fit the tangents.
Make sure Alignment stationing is correct before creating dependent objects. Changing stationing after such things
as profiles, section views, sample lines, etc are created can really mess up the model.
Do not get in the habit of exploding objects. Stock vBooks do this with an alignment to get a polyline, but it is not a
good practice and can corrupt your Drawing file.
If you have any questions about WisDOT vBooks, standards, workflows, etc, feel free to contact
support.cae@dot.wi.gov
14:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-100-002.mp4

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 126 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


060.100.002

How to use Design Criteria for Alignment Super and Minimum Curve Radii
Best Fit Alignments by Layout
Bringing stuff through Xreferences
Polyline
Create Alignment from Polyline
Alignments by Layout
Precision input
Osnaps and Otrack
Transparent Commands
Best Fit
Quick Properties
Station Equations
Get to know Alignment Layout Tools
22:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-100-003.mp4

060.100.003

Alignment practice exercise

060.110 Exercise DS0200 - Create best alignment

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/060/060-110-create-best-fit-alignment.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/060/060-110-proj-dataset.zip
4:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-001.mp4

060.110.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset

2:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-002.mp4

060.110.002

Create DWG

5:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-003.mp4

060.110.003

Import points

1:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-004.mp4

060.110.004

Create alignment

5:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-005.mp4

060.110.005

Create best fit tangents

5:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-006.mp4

060.110.006

Create best fit tangents continued

3:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-007.mp4

060.110.007

Create best fit tangents continued

6:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-008.mp4

060.110.008

Create Best Fit Curves

3:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-009.mp4

060.110.009

Edit all best fit entities

4:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-010.mp4

Page 127 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


060.110.010
2:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-011.mp4

060.110.011

Adjust stationing

4:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-012.mp4

060.110.012

Set design speed

4:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-013.mp4

060.110.013

Set superelevation

6:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-014.mp4

060.110.014

(48:52)
Apply superelevation macro

060.120 Exercise DS0400 - Create alignment by layout

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/060/060-120-create-alignment-by-layout.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/060/060-120-proj-dataset.zip
3:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-001.mp4

060.120.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset

1:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-002.mp4

060.120.002

Create DWG

3:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-003.mp4

060.120.003

Import points

2:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-004.mp4

060.120.004

Data shortcut reference alignment

4:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-005.mp4

060.120.005

Create alignment geometry

1:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-006.mp4

060.120.006

Flatten line objects to elevation = 0

5:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-007.mp4

060.120.007

Create alignment from objects

5:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-008.mp4

060.120.008

Extend alignment geometry

6:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-009.mp4

060.120.009

Finish alignment geometry

5:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-010.mp4

060.120.010

Set alignment stationing

060.130 Exercise DS0600 - Create offset geometry

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/060/060-130-create-offset-geometry.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/060/060-130-proj-dataset.zip

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 128 of 390

3:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-130-001.mp4

060.130.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset

1:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-130-002.mp4

060.130.002

Open AliProf4thAve.dwg

4:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-130-003.mp4

060.130.003

Create offset alignments

4:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-130-004.mp4

060.130.004

Mask offset alignments

4:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-130-005.mp4

060.130.005

Create data shortcuts

Module 070 Vertical profiles


The first segments in this module use files found within the zip file linked to in the first section. If you want to do
the exercises in the same file as the instructor, do the following:
Download the zip file to your computer.
Extract the zip file to a local location. C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-training is a suggested loctation.
After extraction, there should be a folder called "070-exercise-files". The exercise files are located here.
The file used in a section will be in italics at the beginning of the section (e.g. Intro.dwg )
Open the file prior to the exercise to follow along with the instructor.

070.010 Surface profiles and profile views

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Profile exercise files


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/070/070-exercise-files.zip
22:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-010-001.mp4

070.010.001
15:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-010-002.mp4

070.010.002

AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-12.dwg
Exercise

070.020 Creating proposed profiles


26:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-020-001.mp4

070.020.001

AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-13.dwg
Proposed (Layout) Profile Overview
Layout/Proposed profiles, not related to a surface
Generally for design purposes
Ties back to alignment
Layout profile toolbar
Home tab > Create Design > Profile > Profile Creation Tools
Layout Profile Creation dialog
Alignment name/Naming template
General tab
Profile Style
Profile Label Set
Design Criteria tab
Use Criteria-based toggle
Design criteria file
Design tables from that file
Design check set toggle and assignment

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 129 of 390

Layout Profile Toolbar


Vertical Curve Settings
Curve type and crest/sag settings
Draw Tangents or Draw Tangents with Curves
Create Line (Fixed Floating and Free)
Create Curves (Fixed Floating and Free)
Create curves between tangents (Free Curve Parabolic)
Insert PVIs Tabular
For profile creation without graphic interface
Enter Station and Elevation
If Curve Type is selected, Add Curve Length or Radius
Transparent Commands
Station and Elevation
Grade and Station
Grade and Length
Profile from Plan
Station and Elevation from Plan

070.030 Edit proposed profiles

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

14:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-030-001.mp4

070.030.001

AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-14.dwg
Graphical Editing of Editing Layout Profiles
Grip Editing
Fixing Design Criteria Errors
Square grips for maintaining slopes
Circular grips for adjusting curve radius/length
Triangle grips for adjusting PVI point
Triangles at angles maintain incoming or outgoing slope
Upright triangle changes both slopes while adjusting PVI
Data Editing of Layout Profiles
Edit in Table (Panorama View)
Profile Layout Tools toolbar, right side
Data grid of entire profile, curves and slopes
Some fields are informational, most can be edited
Edit in Table per curve
Add/Remove PVI points
Copy Profile
Raise/Lower Profile

070.040 Profile view properties and styles


24:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-040-001.mp4

070.040.001

AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-15.dwg
Profile View Properties
For looking at details of the view, and list of profiles that are available for display
Access to the grid parameters, stations and elevations
Band information and settings, elevation label assignments
Hatching associated in the selected view
Access to the current style
To access profile view properties
Select on the profile views grid
Context ribbon > Modify View > Profile View Properties

Page 130 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Profile View Styles


Controls the grid, major and minor station and elevation grid lines, linetypes, station and elevation labels, and
title labels
To access the Profile View Styles
The Information tab of the Profile View Properties
The Elevation tab of the profile View Properties if Split Profile is turned on
Select on the profile view, in the context ribbon choose Profile View Properties drop down > Profile View
Styles
Profile View Styles Tabs
Graph tab
Vertical scale/exaggeration set one, the others change to match
Left to Right or Right to Left grid
Grid tab
Clipping vertical or horizontal grids
Grid Padding to add extra grid lines around known data
Axis Offset, to add space between grid and the axis lines
Padding and Offset are both controlled for top, bottom, left and right separately
Title Annotation tab
Overall graph title
Text style/height
Title content template
Text location, macro and micro-location control
Titles for each axis top, bottom, left, right
Horizontal Axes
Controls top and bottom station grids and annotation
Major and Minor tick interval and related text
Horizontal geometry markers and text
Vertical Axes
Controls Left and Right elevation grids and annotation
Major and Minor tick interval and related text
Display tab controls whether the aspects of the grid are visible, no matter what previous tabs are set to

070.050 Profile view labels

Section updated:

10/1/2012

8:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-050-001.mp4

070.050.001

AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-16.dwg
Profile View Labels
Labels specific to the Profile View (grid)
Types of Labels
Station Elevation
Depth
Projection
Profile View Labels Placement
Placing labels
Select the profile view > green context ribbon > Labels panel > Add View Labels
Or Annotate tab > Add Labels > Profile View
Add Profile View Labels in fly out
Station Elevation, you will first identify the station, then the elevation
Depth, you will identify two points. The Depth will be the Y-axis measurement between the two
Adjusting labels after placement
Station Elevations have two grips
Square is for dragged state with leader
Diamond grip for moving label location
Depth label has three grips
Endpoints for adjusting depth measurements
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 131 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Midpoint for moving while maintaining depth measurement
Projection Label
Top grip lengthens label leader

070.060 Profile view data bands

Section updated:

10/1/2012

9:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-060-001.mp4

070.060.001

Profile View Bands


Provides extra data in relation to profile view
Profile Data band labels elevations for up to two surfaces at major and minor stations
Controls major and minor stationing labels separately
Elevation assignments can occur during profile view creation
Both fields could be set to the same profile
Can change surface assignments after placement
Horizontal Geometry provides alignment curve markers in relation to vertical geometry of profile
Profile View Properties Band Tab
Allows placement or removal of bands for grid
Choose the band type, the style specific to that type, then Add
Choose location, above or below grid
Assigned and type includes:
Option to change the style for the currently assigned type
Gap between profile view grid and the band
Geometry points that may receive special labels
Profile 1 & 2 columns for assigning left and right elevations
Weeding, to prevent labels from appearing to close together
Stagger, if labels are too close together they can shift
Save Band Set
Import Band Set
Arrows on right side to arrange the bands
Red X to delete band lines
Profile View Bands Styles
Band Details to set parameters for each type of label
Band Height for how much room band takes up
Text Box Width, for band title
If display is off, still affects width of overall profile view display
If display is on, displays text title of the type of band
Offset from Band, changes space between profile view grid and band display
Labels and Tick Settings
Whichever is highlighted the compose label will edit
Changes to several types requires each type to be selected and edited in turn
Full band ticks versus small ticks (at selected type of station)
Display tab to control whats turned on

11:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-060-002.mp4

070.060.002

AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-17.dwg
Exercise

070.070 Profile view projections and superimposed profiles

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

11:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-070-001.mp4

070.070.001

AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-18.dwg
Projecting Objects into Profile Views
Displays objects from plan view into the vertical geometry of profile view
Can project C3D Points, and Feature Lines
Can display at true elevations, or at an assigned elevation

Page 132 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Zoom to Source in profile view allows navigation to plan view object
Home tab > Profile & Section Views tab > Profile View pull-down > Project Objects to Profile View
Select the object(s), then select the profile view to display them
Identify the style, and the elevation options and label styles
Superimposed Profiles
Represents profile data from other profile views
Good for proportional data during design
Can be used for targeting and design
ALWAYS perpendicular from display profile views alignment!
Can appear skewed do to distance, angle, and perspective
Select the Profile in the profile view > context ribbon > Launch Pad > Superimpose Profile.
Then select the Profile View to display
Identify what station range

070.080 Quick profiles

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Section updated:

7/1/2010

8:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-080-001.mp4

070.080.001

AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-12.dwg
Quick Profiles
A profile created from non-alignment lines or polylines
Temporary profile deletes itself when you close the file
View changes as you move the line/polyline
Great for troubleshooting design issues
Home > Create Design > Profile > Quick Profile

070.090 WisDOT standards - profiles


6:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-001.mp4

070.090.001

Civil 3D profile explained


Profiles, when combined with Alignments are Three dimensional objects
Profiles are also called Vertical Profiles or Vertical Alignments
An Alignment is a Parent Object to a Profile
Profiles can be displayed in Profile Views
Profiles can be displayed in another Alignment (not the Parent Alignment) profile view. These create new profiles
called Superimposed Profiles
Profiles can be used
To create Corridor Baselines when combined with iAlignment
To represent Targets in a Corridor
Objects that use Alignments/Profiles and have dynamic relationship with them:
Corridors
Intersections
Pipe Networks
Profiles as they relate to CAiCE
CAiCE Profile = Civil 3D Profile
CAiCE Terrain Profile = Civil 3D Surface Profile
CAiCE Active Alignment = Civil 3D Profile View
CAiCE profile viewed on wrong Active Alignment approximately = to Civil 3D Superimposed Profiles (except
Superimposed profiles are intentional, correct and will not cause the Galaxy to implode and create a new black
hole).

Civil 3D 2010 Profile Types


Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 133 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Profile types in Civil 3D
Layout
Surface
Superimposed
Corridor

Layout Profiles
Most commonly used as Corridor Baselines, Corridor Targets, Main or Secondary Road Profile in an
Intersection Object
Can be Displayed in Profile View
Can be Superimposed on another Profile View
Can be edited in the using Profile Layout tools
Static as it does not change VPIs when Parent Alignment changes
Created using Profile Layout Tools
Remember Fixed, Floating, Free!
Layout Profile properties
Name
Style, Labels
Design Criteria, Design check set

Surface Profiles
Can be used as a Corridor Baseline profile
Can be used as a Corridor Target profile
Can be Displayed in Profile View
Can be Superimposed on another Profile View
Cannot be edited in the using Profile Layout tools
Created projecting Alignment onto Surface
Dynamic as it changes if Parent Alignment or Surface changes
Surface Profile properties
Name
Style, Labels

Superimposed Profiles
Can be used as a Corridor Baseline profile
Can be used as a Corridor Target profile
Can be Displayed in Profile View
Cannot be edited in the using Profile Layout tools
Created using Create Superimposed Profile
Dynamic as it changes when the Original Profile changes
Superimposed Profile properties
Name
Style, Labels

Corridor Profiles
Can be used as a Corridor Baseline profile
Can be used as a Corridor Target profile
Can be Displayed in Profile View
Can be edited in the using Profile Layout tools
Created using Create Profile from Corridor
Static as it does not change when the Corridor changes
Note: we do not have Corridor Profiles in WisDOT workflow
Corridor Profile properties
Name
Style, Labels
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 134 of 390

Profile Views
Profile Views are Dependent upon a Parent Alignment. They display
Profiles
Data bands
Grids
Pipe Networks
Points
Profile View properties
Name
Profile View Style
Station Range
Elevation Range
Split Profile View
Included Profiles
Profile View Bands
Hatching
5:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-002.mp4

070.090.002

WisDOT drawing file names and file management


Alignments and Profiles will often be created within their own DWG file or files
One exception to this is the Intersecting (Secondary Roadways) Alignments used in a Intersection Object. To
have the Intersection Object maintain the Profile match with the Main Road these Alignments will be created in
their Corridor DWG files
Project folder - Alignments are found in
\Lan Drive\C3D\ProjectIDFolder\Design\AliPRofs
File Naming
AliProf-<Descriptive Alignment Name>-<Comment>.DWG
Example
AliProf-STH25-BestFit.DWG
Note: we are flexible with our file naming. Not so flexible with our project folder structure. Biggest thing to
remember is to name files so others can figure out what they contain. Placing files in the proper project folder is a
great start!

Wisconsin DOT Standards


WisDOT10 drawing template (WisDOT10.DWT) contains:
Profile styles
Label Styles
Command Settings for Profile creation
Layers and symbology for Profiles
Profile Object naming
Layout Profiles <Parent Alignment Name> <Comment>
STH25 BestFit
Surface Profile <Parent Alignment Name>-<Surface Name>-<Comment>
4th Ave-Exist
Superimposed Profile <Source Profile Name>-Superimposed
STH25and4thAve-Superimposed-PV 4thAve
Design criteria use the current WisDOT Design Criteria.XML file. This contains current standard WisDOT super
rates and transitions as well as Profile k Values.
WisDOT Sharing the profiles
For anyone who has access to the Civil 3D Project ID folder, Profiles will be shared using References to Data
Shortcuts
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 135 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

If sharing Alignments with outside organizations or across projects Profiles can be saved to LandXML files and
shared
Profiles Need to Know!!!
When creating an Profiles using Layout tools there are three words you will hear a LOT.
Fixed
Float
Free
It is very important to understand these concepts. The geometry you create (Lines and Curves) can be changed
based on how they were created.
Fixed line or curve has no point of tangency such as a curve through three points. These Lines or Curves maintain
their relationship to how they were originally stored regardless of how you edit them
Float(ing) line or curve has one point of tangency such as a curve at the end of a line. If the line changes the curve
is adjusted to maintain tangency
Free line or curve has two points of tangency such as a line between two curves. If one curve changes the free line
changes with it.
4:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-003.mp4

070.090.003

Profiles Custom Content


How to use Design Criteria to layout Profiles with minimum K-Values
Best Fit Profiles by Layout
Profiles by Layout
Precision input
Osnaps and Otrack
Transparent Commands
Quick Properties
Station Equations effect on Profile Layout tools
Get to know Profile Layout Tools

7:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-004.mp4

070.090.004

Profile example

7:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-005.mp4

070.090.005

Profile exercise

11:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-006.mp4

070.090.006

Profile example

070.100 Exercise DS0300 - Create best fit profile

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/070/070-100-create-best-fit-profile.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/070/070-100-proj-dataset.zip
3:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-001.mp4

070.100.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset

3:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-002.mp4

070.100.002

Create profile view

2:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-003.mp4

070.100.003

Project points to profile view

1:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-004.mp4

070.100.004

Create profile

5:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-005.mp4

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 136 of 390

070.100.005
6:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-006.mp4

070.100.006

Create best fit tangents 2

2:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-007.mp4

070.100.007

Create best fit tangents 3

6:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-008.mp4

070.100.008

Create best fit vertical curves 1

3:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-009.mp4

070.100.009

Create best fit vertical curves 2

2:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-010.mp4

070.100.010

Edit best fit entities

4:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-011.mp4

070.100.011

Create exist surface profile

2:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-012.mp4

070.100.012

Create data shortcuts

070.110 Exercise DS0500 - Create profile by layout

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/070/070-110-create-profile.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/070/070-110-proj-dataset.zip
3:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-001.mp4

070.110.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset

3:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-002.mp4

070.110.002

Create profile view

1:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-003.mp4

070.110.003

Project points to profile view

1:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-004.mp4

070.110.004

Create profile

5:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-005.mp4

070.110.005

Profile layout tools 1

4:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-006.mp4

070.110.006

Profile layout tools 2

4:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-007.mp4

070.110.007

Profile layout tools 3

3:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-008.mp4

070.110.008

Profile layout tools - add vertical curves

2:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-009.mp4

070.110.009

Create exist surface profile

2:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-010.mp4

Page 137 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


070.110.010

070.120 Create Setup ETW surface

Section updated:

4/13/2015

Exercise project dataset


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/070/070-025-proj-dataset.zip
3:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-120-001.mp4

070.120.001

Creating the Lane Edge Setup Assembly


Open the AliProf-25.dwg.
Note: In your project this will be a drawing within the AliProf folder which has the baseline alignment(s) and
superelevation information for the alignment(s). The best practice is to create the setup surface in the drawing
that contains the design profile. For the primary road baseline alignment this would be in an AliProf drawing,
for the secondary roads this may be in a corridor drawing.
Verify that the primary roadway alignments and offset alignments are in this drawing.
Create an assembly that consists of two LinkWidthAndSlope subassemblies on each side. (Generic palette)
The inside LinkWidthAndSlope subassemblies will represent the lane top, and the outside subassembly will
represent the possible taper, turn lane or secondary road curb return areas. Name the assembly Setup-25ETW.
Set the right side links Use Superelevation Slope Input value to Right Outside Lane and the left side to Left
Outside Lane.
If superelevation is being used to control the turn lane and/or taper slope, set the Setup-Trans links to follow
that superelevation.

4:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-120-002.mp4

070.120.002

Creating the Lane Edge Setup Corridor


Create a new corridor called 25-Setup-ETW.
Alignment: 25
Profile: 25-PROP
Assembly: Setup-25-ETW
Surface: <none>
Set baseline and region parameters: checked
Set all Frequencies to 200. This may need to be changed after finishing the rest of this exercise.
Note: If the 200 feet frequency is the same length as the surface setting for maximum triangle length, then
these regions will not be included in the surface. This may not always be the preferred outcome if you
wish to use the surface to sample profile information outside the intersections.
Set all frequency points to yes
Target Mapping: Map the right and left ETW Offset Alignments
Setup-Lane-R to 25-R-ETW
Setup-Lane-L to 25-L-ETW
Set the Start Station and the End Station to match the project station start and end.
346+00 to 395+00.
Build corridor.
Break the corridor into regions for each intersection and the areas between the intersections. The intersection
regions should extend at least to the ends of the curb returns, turn or taper lanes, whichever is the furthest from the
intersection.
Select the corridor from the drawing. Use the Split Region tool and follow the tool directions. In this exercise
split the entire corridor into 3 regions by selecting 380+00 as the first split, and 389+00 as the second split.
Select the corridor from the drawing. Use the Edit Frequency tool to set the intersection region frequency to
2.5 feet. The regions outside the intersection areas can maintain their existing frequency of 200 feet.
Add additional frequencies at the locations where the mainline alignment and the side road alignment
intersect. If the intersection is at a skew, add frequencies where the mainline edge of travel way and the side
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 138 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


road alignment intersect.

1:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-120-003.mp4

070.120.003

Creating the Lane Edge Setup Surface


Create a new surface called Crdr-25-Setup-ETW-Top.
Surfaces tab: Add the P2 feature lines to its definition. Set the style to _No Display.
Boundaries tab: Add a boundary automatically using Corridor extents as outer boundary.
Set the corridor code set style, the corridor object style and the P2 feature line style to _No Display.

Click Ok to build the setup corridor and surface.

Save the drawing and create a data shortcut of the Crdr-25-Setup-ETW-Top surface. Note: In your surface build
options set your maximum triangle length to be shorter than your longest corridor frequency, but longer than your
shortest corridor frequency. In this case this length should be anywhere between 199 and 3. This way the triangles
would be excluded at a length of 200 and greater. This allows a surface which will only build in our particular area
of interest, the intersections, which have a frequency of 2.5.

This surface can now be used as a data reference into any drawing where you need to create an offset alignment
profile that represents the cross slope and superelevation design.

Module 080 Corridor modeling fundamentals


The first segments in this module use files found within the zip file linked to in the first section. If you want to do
the exercises in the same file as the instructor, do the following:
Download the zip file to your computer.
Extract the zip file to a local location. C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-training is a suggested loctation.
After extraction, there should be a folder called "080-exercise-files". The exercise files are located here.
The file used in a section will be in italics at the beginning of the section (e.g. Intro.dwg )
Open the file prior to the exercise to follow along with the instructor.

080.010 Subassemblies

Section updated:

10/1/2012

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-exercise-files.zip
9:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-010-001.mp4

080.010.001

Introduction to Corridors

What is a Corridor?
A corridor is a Civil 3D object that ties together your design data in an intelligent manner.
Corridors frequently represent roadways, railways, trails and even streams.
A corridor contains instructions on how your typical cross-section relates to existing surface and
where those instructions should be applied.
A 3D object that brings together:
Horizontal information: Alignment
Vertical information: Profile
Cross-section information: Assemblies
Assembly:
Contains information for cross-section geometry
Pavement widths and depths
Slope to existing surface
Behavior in cut and/or fill
Usually consist of multiple sub-assemblies
Assembly:
Contains information for cross-section geometry
Pavement widths and depths
Slope to existing surface
Behavior in cut and/or fill
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 139 of 390

Usually consist of multiple sub-assemblies


Targets
Target surfaces are used to find the slope intercept location.
Other targets allow you to change cross-section geometry without the need for an additional assembly.

General Workflow
Save the file in the Design > Corridors folder
Name the file per WisDOT naming standards
DWG File type:
Description:
Name:
Example:
Comment:

Corridors
Contains corridors
Corridor-<CorridorName>-<Comments>
Corridor-STH25-4thAve-96to114.dwg
Belongs in (Proj ID)(Design)(Corridors)

Corridors & Data Shortcuts


To Create a Corridor, reference in:
Existing surface
All alignments needed for design
Be sure the design profiles come along!
You may want to XREF in:
Basemap (optional)
ROW lines (optional)

16:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-010-002.mp4

080.010.002

Assembly = cross-section geometry

12345678\Design\Corridors\Corridor USH51 BestFit[start].dwg

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 140 of 390

Sub-assembly anatomy
Marker points: Connect between frequency stations to form feature lines
Links: lines that will be used in design surfaces
Shapes: area inside a closed group of links (used for material computation)

Exercise: Your First Subassembly


1. Open up the file Corridor USH 51 BestFit[Start].dwg
2. Go to the Home tab > Create Design Panel > Assembly > Create Assembly
1. Name the assembly, Rural 14 foot lane w Shoulders
2. Set the Assembly type to Undivided crowned Road
3. Click OK.
3. Click in the graphic to place the assembly.
4. Set the annotation scale to 1in=20 ft (optional)
5. On the home tab > Palettes Panel, click the Tool palettes icon.
6. View the WisDOT subassemblies
1. Click the Wis-Lanes and Shoulders tab.
7. Click Lane Generic. You will now see the AutoCAD Properties pop up with the Parameters listed.
1. Set the side to left if it is not already.
2. Set the Width option to 14.
3. Click the main green assembly marker.
8. Click the SelSubShld subassembly
1. Verify the side is set to left.
2. Leave all other options as default.
3. Zoom in and click on the while marker point.
9. Switch to the Wis-Daylight and Slopes tab.
1. Click the GenCFFinalLink subassembly.
2. Verify the side is set to left.
3. Keep slope and height options as default.
4. Zoom in and click on the outermost marker point.
10. Press escape on your keyboard.
11. Select all three sub-assemblies.
1. From the contextual ribbon > Modify Subassembly palette > click Mirror Subassemblies.
2. Click the main green assembly marker again. The assembly is complete.
Save the drawing.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 141 of 390

8:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-010-003.mp4

080.010.003

Exercise: Troubleshooting Common Assembly Issues


1. Continue working in the file Corridor USH 51 BestFit[Start].dwg
2. Go to the Home tab > Create Design Panel > Assembly > Create Assembly
1. Name the assembly, C&G w Sidewalk
2. Set the Assembly type to Undivided crowned Road
3. Set the Code Set Style to XS Sheets
4. Click OK.
3. Click in the graphic to place the assembly.
4. On the home tab > Palettes Panel, click the Tool palettes icon.
5. View the WisDOT subassemblies
1. Click the Wis-Lanes and Shoulders tab.
6. Click Lane Generic. You will now see the AutoCAD Properties pop up with the Parameters listed.
1. Set the side to left if it is not already.
2. Leave the default settings in the properties.
3. Click the main green assembly marker.
4. Press escape to complete the command.
The lane is placed, but because of the code set style you choose in the previous step, the links
are not visible. In the next steps, you will fix this.
7. Select the assembly marker.
1. From the contextual tb > Modify Assembly panel > click Assembly Properties.
2. Go to the Codes tab.
3. Change the active Code Set style to CRDR Proposed.
4. Click OK.
8. Keep the drawing open for the next portion of the exercise.
Code Set Styles
A Code set Style is a collection of styles which control the look of points, shapes and links. The code set
style is where labeling for lanes, daylight slope and offsets is set. Code Set styles are used in many
places. The assembly creation is the first place you encounter these. You will also see that code set
styles are used in the corridor cross section editor. Later on you will also see a code set style used in
cross section sheets. For all three instances the code set style is independent. In other words, you will
use a different code set style for assembly creation than you would for cross section sheets.
Adding Subbase to a Sidewalk Subassembly
In this example, a Generic pavement structure is used to create a subbase under a sidewalk subassembly. The
sidewalk subassembly that comes with Civil 3D does not have this material built in.
1. Continue working in the file Corridor USH 51 BestFit[Start].dwg
2. On the home tab > Palettes Panel, click the Tool palettes icon.
3. View the WisDOT subassemblies
1. Click the Wis-Barriers and Curb tab.
2. Click CGGen
3. Verify that the side is set to left
4. Click the white marker at the edge of pavement to place the curb and gutter sub-assembly.
4. Right-click the edge of the toolpalette and open the Civil Imperial Subassemblies. These are the subassemblies that come with Civil 3D out of the box
1. Switch to the Curbs tab.
2. Pick the UrbanSidewalk subassembly.
1. Change the Inside Boulevard Width (terrace) to 2
2. Set the Outside boulevard width to 4%
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 142 of 390

3. Verify that the side is set to left and click to place the subassembly to the left of the curb
and gutter subassembly. This will result in an overall terrace width of 7 because the curb
and gutter has a 5 terrace built into it.
3. Switch back to the WisDOT subassemblies and add the daylight subassembly called
GenCFFinalLink.
5. Switch to the Lanes tab.
1. Click the GenericPavementStructure subassembly.
2. Set the width to 5
3. Set the shift width to 0
4. Set the crossslope to 2%.
5. Verify that the side is left.
6. Set the depth to 0.67
7. Zoom in and click the bottom inside marker on the sidewalk. The sidewalk should now have
subbase.
6. Press Escape.
Save the drawing. End of exercise.

080.020 Subassembly catalog

Section updated:

10/1/2012

8:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-020-001.mp4

080.020.001

Sub-Assembly Tool Palette


It is a good idea to create a custom tab in your tool palette for frequently used subassemblies or full assemblies.
Assemblies and subassemblies can be dragged onto the tool palette and easily transferred to other drawings or
other projects.
Many types of items can reside on a tool palette. Frequently used Assemblies, blocks and even commands can be
added to a tool palette.
Exercise: Adding Assemblies and Subassemblies to the Tool Palette
1. Continue working in the file Corridor USH 51 BestFit[Start].dwg
2. On the home tab > Palettes Panel, click the Tool palettes icon.
3. Right-click anywhere in the tool palette and select New Palette
1. Name the palette My Project Assemblies
4. Select one of the assemblies at the main assembly marker.
1. Click on the dashed portion (not at the grip location) and hold your mouse button down.
2. Drag the assembly into the tool palette until you see a plus sign appear next to the cursor.
3. Let go of your mouse button when the plus sign appears next to your cursor.
4. After a moment your assembly will appear in the tool palette. This assembly is now available to
any drawing, even after you close out of Civil 3D.
5. Repeat this process for the remaining subassemblies in the file.
6. Select the 5:1 daylight subassembly from any of the assemblies in the drawing.
1. Click on the dashed portion of the geometry (not at the grip location) and hold your mouse button
down.
2. Drag the assembly into the tool palette until you see a plus sign appear next to the cursor.
3. Let go of your mouse button when the plus sign appears next to your cursor.
4. You now see the subassembly appear in the tool palette. Any property/parameter changes you
made to the subassembly will also be stored with the subassembly.
7. Right-click anywhere in the toolpalette and select Add Separator. This will add a horizontal line to visually
separate items on the palette.

Exercise: Add Assemblies from Content Browser


1. From the Home tab > Palettes panel flyout, click the ContentBrowser icon.
2. Click the content browser catalog that is set up for WisDOT.
1. Open the WisDOT 2012 Assemblies Blocks and Lines catalog.
2. Open the Wis-Daylight catalog.
3. Click and hold the iDrop symbol next to GenCF.
4. When you see the dropper icon fill up drag it over to the tool palette.
5. Repeat the process for any block that you can find in the content browser.
3. Click the link to Catalog Top (at the top of the content browser)
4. Change to the Corridor Modeling Catalog (Imperial, .NET)
1. Click the Bridge and Rail Subassemblies category.
2. Click and hold the iDrop symbol next to BridgeBoxGirder2.
3. When you see the dropper icon fill up drag it over to the tool palette.
To save the catalog, exit Civil 3D and come back in. This will ensure that the settings in your tool palette are saved
to your hard drive. If Civil 3D exits unexpectedly (i.e. crashes) after making tool palette changes, the tool palette
will not be saved.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

080.030 Create assembly

Page 143 of 390

Section updated:

10/1/2012

16:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-030-001.mp4

080.030.001

Special sub-assembly modify tools


Copy to Assembly
Move to Assembly
Mirror assembly
Do not use traditional move commands on subassemblies. Do not use grips to relocate subassemblies if you
accidentally place them on the wrong marker. Always use Move to Assembly to relocate subassemblies.
Exercise: Adding Assemblies and Subassemblies to the Tool Palette
1. Continue working in the file Corridor USH 51 BestFit[Start].dwg
2. On the Home tab > Modify panel > click Copy. This is the base-AutoCAD copy command.
1. Select the main assembly marker at the crown of the road.
2. Click the center again as the basepoint for the copy command.
3. Click just above the other assembly to complete the copy.
4. Press escape to exit the Copy command.
3. Click the main assembly marker.
1. From the Assembly Contextual tab, click Assembly Properties.
2. Switch to the Information tab to rename the Assembly.
3. Name the new assembly Rural 14 foot lane w shoulders w ditch
4. Click OK.
4. Select the daylight subassemblies.
1. Be sure these are the only two items selected in the file.
2. Delete both the left and right subassemblies by pressing delete on the keyboard.
5. Open the subassembly tool palette if it is not already open.
6. Switch to the Wis-Daylight tab.
7. Right-click the icon for GenCF.
1. Click Help.
2. This will open a web browser displaying the Help file for the subassembly.
3. Examine the types of information available in the Help file. In particular, the diagram near the top of
the window will describe various behavior in cut and fill.
4. Close the Help file.
8. Click the GenCF subassembly
1. Verify that the side is set to Left
2. For all other parameters, keep the default values.
3. Press Escape.
9. Select the newly placed subassembly.
1. From the subassembly contextual tab, click Mirror Subassembly
2. Click the outermost marker point.
10. Go to the Home tab > Create Design Panel > Assembly > Create Assembly
1. Name the assembly, Shoulder Right
2. Set the Assembly type to Other
3. Click OK.
4. Click to place the assembly in the graphic.
11. Select the daylight and shoulder subassemblies from the Rural 14 foot lane w shoulders w ditch
assembly.
1. From the Subassemblies contextual tab, click Copy to Assembly.
2. Click the new, empty assembly.
Editing Subassembly Properties
If a subassembly needs to be renamed or switched sides, use the subassembly properties. If geometry changes
need to take place, you can use the AutoCAD Properties instead. Using AutoCAD properties, you can edit multiple
subassemblies at once.
12. Select the daylight subassemblies on the Shoulder right and Rural 14 foot lane w shoulders w ditch
assemblies.
1. From the contextual tab (or right-click menu), click Properties.
2. You should see the traditional AutoCAD properties.
12. In the Parameters section of Properties, change the Flat Rate of Cut Slope to 5:1.
13. Change the Flat Rate of Fill Slope to 5:1.
14. Press Escape.
15. Close the AutoCAD Properties palette.
Renaming Subassemblies
All subassemblies in a drawing need to have a unique name. It is a good idea to rename your subassemblies to to
have more user friendly, more identifiable names.
17. Select the main assembly marker.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 144 of 390

1. From the contextual tab, click Assembly Properties.


2. Switch to the Construction tab.
3. Use the listing of subassemblies to rename. It is advisable to keep the names simple and to include
the side.
Save the drawing.

080.040 Create corridor

Section updated:

10/1/2012

17:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-040-001.mp4

080.040.001

Creating Your First Corridor


12345678\Design\Corridors\Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [w Assem].dwg
1. Open the file Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [w Assem].dwg
2. From the Home tab > Create Design panel > Corridor > Create Simple Corridor.
1. Keep all the defaults.
2. Click OK.
3. Press Enter (to pick alignment from list)
1. Select USH 51 Best fit from Exist.
2. Click OK.
4. Press Enter (to pick profile from list)
1. Verify that USH 51 Best Fit Profile Proposed is the design profile.
2. Click OK.
5. Press enter (to pick assembly from list)
1. Pick the Rural 14 foot lane w shoulders
2. Click OK.
6. In the Target Mapping dialog, click the <Click Here to set All> option at the top of the window. This
will set the daylight surface.
1. Select the Exist surface
2. Click OK.
7. Click OK to complete the target mapping and finish let the corridor build.
8. You should now see the corridor in the plan view.

Getting to Corridor Properties


If you use Civil 3D to design roads you will be constantly jumping in and out of the corridor properties. Get as
comfortable as possible locating corridor properties and getting to the Parameters tab. This is where the majority
of corridor editing and troubleshooting will take place.
1. Select the corridor.
2. From the Corridor contextual tab, click Corridor Properties. (You can also get to Corridor properties by rightclicking on the corridor name from Prospector.)
3. Click the Parameters tab.
1. Scroll over if necessary to locate the Frequency column.
2. Click the ellipsis in the Frequency column.
3. Set the Along Curves value to 10.
4. Click OK.
4. Click OK to allow the corridor to rebuild.
5. Observe the difference in frequencies by examining the drawing.

Adding Additional Regions


New assembly = new region
There is no such thing as more than one assembly per region.
1. Select the corridor.
1. From the Corridor contextual tab, click Corridor Properties. (You can also get to Corridor properties
by right-clicking on the corridor name from Prospector.)
2. Click the Parameters tab if you are not already there.
2. Right-click the existing region from the parameters tab. You may wish to expand the name column to see
the names belter.
1. Click the region and select Split region.
2. Type in 22900 press enter
3. Type in 24350 press enter
4. Press enter to return to the parameters tab.
5. Click OK to dismiss any warning messages.
6. You should now have three regions listed.
3. Click the Assembly column in the middle region you just created.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 145 of 390

1. Change the assembly to C&G with sidewalk.


2. Click OK.
4. Click the Set All Targets button.
1. Verify that the Daylight surface for all regions is set to Exist.
2. Click OK.
5. Click OK to complete the edits and rebuild the corridor.
6. Observe the corridor.
Save the drawing End of exercise.
4:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-040-002.mp4

080.040.002

Using a Null Assembly


A null assembly is simply an empty placeholder that can be used to prevent feature lines from jumping across a
region. This is used in bridge locations or through intersections.
1. Continue working in the file Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [w Assem].dwg
2. From the Home tab > Create Design panel, click Assembly > Create Assembly.
1. Name the assembly Null.
2. Click OK.
3. Click to place the assembly in the graphic.
3. Select the corridor.
4. From the Corridor contextual tab, click Corridor Properties. (You can also get to Corridor properties by rightclicking on the corridor name from Prospector.)
5. Click the Parameters tab.
1. Highlight the first region. Right click the region and select split region.
2. Type in 21459 press enter
3. Type in 21588 press enter
4. Press enter
5. Click OK to the 0 Station message.
6. Select the new region you just created.
1. Change the assembly to Null.
2. Click OK.
7. Click OK to allow the corridor to rebuild.
8. Observe the difference in frequencies by examining the drawing.
Save the drawing. End of exercise.

080.050 Target mapping

Section updated:

10/1/2012

11:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-050-001.mp4

080.050.001

Corridor Targets
12345678\Design\Corridors\Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [targets].dwg
A null assembly is simply an empty placeholder that can be used to prevent feature lines from jumping across a
region. This is used in bridge locations or through intersections.
1. Open the file Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [targets].dwg. Even if you have successfully completed previous
exercises, switch to this file. The example file has the subassemblies renamed on all assemblies to make
creating targets easier.
2. Select the corridor.
3. From the Corridor contextual tab, click Corridor Properties. (You can also get to Corridor properties by rightclicking on the corridor name from Prospector.)
4. Click the Parameters tab.
1. Select the first region.
2. Click the Elipsis in the target column.
3. Locate the Width target for the Lane - L (2) subassembly.
4. Click the field that currently says <None>
5. From the alignment listing, highlight the alignment called USH 51 Best Fit From Exist - Left
6. Click Add. Be sure the alignment appears in the listing below.
7. Click OK.
8. Repeat the process for the right side of the assembly.
9. Click OK to complete the target mapping.
10. Repeat the process for the second and third regions.
5. Click OK to allow the corridor to rebuild.
6. Observe the difference in frequencies by examining the drawing.
Rebuild Your Corridor
7. Select one of the offset alignments.
1. Use the triangular grip to change the offset distance. Any arbitrary change will work for this
example.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 146 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


2. Press escape to deselect the alignment.
8. Locate the Corridor in Prospector.
1. Notice that there is a yellow warning symbol next to the name of the corridor.
2. Right click the corridor name and select rebuild. (Do NOT use rebuild-automatic.)
Save the drawing. End of exercise.

080.060 Corridor surfaces

Section updated:

6/17/2015

19:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-060-001.mp4

080.060.001

Corridor Surfaces
12345678\Design\Corridors\Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [surface].dwg
** NOTE ** Since this recording, WisDOT no longer allows links in the definition of design surface models. See
http://roadwaystandards.dot.wi.gov/standards/fdm/15-05.pdf#fd15-5-7 for current design surface model
requirements and ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/wisdot-c3dhelp.pdf#Roadway_Modeling_Workflow_Tips_ for reasons why this decision was made.
You will need to add boundaries for each corridor surface separately.
Corridor surface creation options vary depending on the complexity of the corridor.
Add Automatically
Corridor Extents as Outer Boundary
Add Interactively
Building a Top Surface
1. Open the file Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [surface].dwg. Even if you have successfully completed previous
exercises, switch to this file. The example file has a completed corridor that is ready to add surfaces to.
2. Select the corridor.
3. From the Corridor contextual tab, click Corridor Properties. (You can also get to Corridor properties by rightclicking on the corridor name from Prospector.)
4. Click the Surfaces tab.
1. Click the leftmost button to create a new surface.
2. Click in the name field and rename the surface to Top-USH51.
3. From the Data Type pull down, select Feature Lines.
4. From the Specify Code menu, select Crown.
5. Click the plus sign to the right of the code.
6. Repeat steps c-e for the following feature lines:
1. Daylight
2. EPS
3. ES_Unpaved
4. ETW
5. SGSP
6. SI
If you were to click OK at this point you would have a surface created but the surface would extend beyond the
corridor.
Adding a Boundary
5. Switch to the Boundaries tab.
1. Right click on the name of the surfaces listed.
2. Select Add Automatically > Daylight.
5. Click OK.
You should now have a corridor surface that does not extend beyond any of the frequency lines. By adding the
daylight feature line as a boundary, the surface is reigned in.
Datum Surfaces
7. Select the corridor that is associated with Lake Kegonsa Road.
8. From the corridor contextual tab, Click Corridor Properties.
9. Click the Surfaces tab.
1. Click the leftmost button to create a new surface.
1. Click in the name field and rename the surface to Datum-Kegonsa.
2. Set the surface style to CRDR Datum Border
2. Verify that the Data type says Links.
3. From the Specify Code menu, select Datum.
4. Click the plus sign to the right of the code.
5. From the Data Type pull down, select Feature Lines.
6. From the Specify Code menu, select Crown_Sub.
7. Click the plus sign to the right of the code.
8. Repeat steps c-e for the following feature lines:
1. Daylight
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015

Page 147 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

6.
7.
8.
9.

2. ETW_Sub
9. Click OK.
Switch to the Boundaries tab.
1. Right click on the name of the surfaces listed.
2. Select Add Automatically > Daylight.
Click OK.
Back in plan view, click the corridor.
From the corridor contextual tab click Section Editor.
1. In the section editor contextual tab > View tools panel, click Zoom to Extents.
2. The magenta line in the view represents the datum surface.
You should see that there is a problem with how Civil 3D is interpreting the surface at the curbs
subbase. This is a common problem caused by the subbase extension beyond the back of the
concrete part of the curb. Civil 3D surfaces cannot contain caves or vertical faces. The tolerance for
being vertical is 0.001. If the geometry of the subassembly would cause a vertical surface or a cave
as the subbase extension does, the surface gets confused trying to resolve it.
This is a very common situation and is easy to correct.

Overhang Correction
14. From the Section Editor contextual tab, click Close.
15. Select the Lake Kegonsa corridor and return to corridor properties.
1. On the Surfaces tab, locate the Overhang correction column.
2. Change the overhang correction to Bottom Links.
3. Click OK and let the corridor rebuild.
10. From the corridor contextual tab click Section Editor.
1. In the section editor contextual tab > View tools panel, click Zoom to Extents.
11. The magenta line in the view represents the datum surface.
Now the datum surface is in the correct location and no longer zig zags past the back of curb.
Save the drawing. End of exercise.

080.070 Corridor section editor

Section updated:

10/1/2012

14:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-070-001.mp4

080.070.001

Section Editor
In the previous exercise section editor was used to examine the result of the corridor surface. Section editor is a
powerful tool that is capable of much more than just observation.
From section editor you can view every frequency station to view and edit the result of the corridor design.
Section editor shows the section but is NOT related to plotting cross section sheets.
Section editor is a data-driven view that is used to modify the design if necessary. From section editor you can
override subassembly geometry and force daylight slopes to tie into a specific location. Modifications can be made
both numerically (using the parameter editor) and/or graphically (grip edits).
Tips for Working in Section Editor
Be sure any surfaces you wish to view are not set to No Display styles.
Use the Station listing at in the Contextual tab to move between stations.
Perform numeric edits in the parameter editor before making graphic edits
Show both plan and section by using the viewport configuration.
Turn the UCSFOLLOW setting to 0. This will prevent the viewports from resetting every
time you switch views.
Always close the Section editor before closing the file or exiting Civil 3D.
If this cannot be avoided, reset plan view by going to the View tab and changing the view to
Top and changing the named UCS to World.

Working with Section Editor


1. Open the file Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [Section Editor].dwg. Even if you have successfully completed
previous exercises, switch to this file. The example file has a completed corridors and completed surfaces.
2. At the command line, type in UCSFOLLOW and press enter.
1. If the setting shows it is already at a value of 0, press escape.
2. If the setting shows that it is 1, type in 0 and press enter.
3. Select the corridor that is associated with USH 51.
4. From the corridor contextual tab click Section Editor.
1. In the section editor contextual tab > View tools panel, click Zoom to Extents.
2. From the section editor contextual tab, click Viewport Configuration
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 148 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Set the Layout to Two: Horizontal.


Set the Horizontal split to 30%
Set Viewport 1 to Plan.
Set Viewport 2 to Section.
Click OK.
Click Yes to turn on the Section Editor option.
Wait a moment for your screen to reconfigure.

Station Selection
5. From the Section Editor contextual tab > Station Selection Panel click the station listing pull-down.
1. Pick station 200+50 from the list.
2. If necessary, click Zoom to Extents from the Section Editor contextual tab >View Tools panel.
Parameter Editor
6. From the Section Editor contextual tab > Corridor Edit Tools , click Parameter Editor
1. Locate the parameter listing for Shoulder - R
2. Change the Paved shoulder width to 6
3. Press enter
4. Wait a moment while the graphic updates.
5. Repeat steps 6b-6d for Shoulder - L
7. Turn on your object snaps and make sure endpoint is one of the active snaps.
Graphic Edits
8. Hold down control key as you click the 4:1 daylight slope on the right side of the assembly.
1. Click the square grip on the rightmost end of the daylight link.
2. Drag the grip over so that the daylight slope is actually sloping down to the existing surface.
3. Use the endpoint snap to place the line.
9. Repeat steps 8a-8c for the left side of the subassembly.
10. Press escape to clear any remaining selections.
11. From the Section Editor contextual tab > Corridor Edit Tools, click Apply to Station Range.
1. Apply the changes you have just made to the stations 200+50 to 202+00.
2. Click OK.
12. From the Section Editor contextual tab, click Close.
Viewing/Deleting Station Overrides
13. Back in plan view, select the corridor.
14. From the Corridor contextual tab, click Corridor Properties.
1. On the parameters tab, locate the overrides column. (You may have to scroll over).
2. Click the ellipsis button in the Overrides column.
3. All stations from 200+50 to 202+00 are listed with checkmarks in both columns for the override
type.
4. If you wish to remove the overrides for any station, highlight the station and click the red X at the
bottom of the dialog box.
Click Ok.

080.080 Corridor command settings

Section updated:

10/1/2012

19:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-080-001.mp4

080.080.001

Corridor Command Settings


Every time a corridor is rebuilt, you will see the Panorama screen pop up with any Warnings, Informational
messages or errors that occur. The goal of this lesson is to get you more familiar with the often-cryptic messages
that appear in this listing. You will start to get a feel for what messages you can ignore and which messages
warrant action.
Working with Panorama
1. Open the file crummy corridor.dwg. This corridor has many common errors. You will learn to troubleshoot
and understand many of the messages that pop up when a corridor is rebuilt.
2. From Prospector, locate the corridor named Crummy Corridor.
1. Notice there is a yellow shield icon next to the name of the corridor, indicating that it needs to be
rebuilt.
2. Right-click the name of the corridor and select Rebuild.
A Word on Rebuild and Rebuild-Automatic
Do NOT use Rebuild-automatic.
When the option for rebuild automatic is enabled, the corridor will rebuild itself after all changes to upstream
objects. Changes to Existing surfaces, alignments, profiles, assemblies, target alignments or other targets will
cause the Rebuild- Automatic option to kick in. This will result in frequent periods of waiting while the corridor
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 149 of 390

rebuilds. While the corridor is rebuilding you cannot do any other tasks. It is much better to leave the option off and
rebuild when you are ready.
3. After you use the rebuild command, you will see panorama pop up and list many warnings and errors.
Notice that you have a long listing of warnings and at each station where the error occurs. You will see the
message twice at each station because of the left and right sides of the assembly.
Corridor Messages and Fixes
This is not a comprehensive list of corridor warning messages, however the warning messages listed are very
common and are easy to address.
Message: Clear zone point falls inside attachment point, probably because Offset to Measure Clear Zone From
parameter is too small or big (is it on the other side of alignment?)
Is it a big deal? No.
Meaning/Source: Your corridor will still be created, however you will not have a Clear Zone feature line
created for use in other places.
Fix: Go into the Assembly Properties and set the Offset to Measure Clear Zone to the ETW of your lanes on
both sides.
Message: Rotation point falls inside attachment point, probably because Offset to Measure. Rotation Point From
parameter is too small or big (is it on the other side of alignment?)
Is it a big deal: No
Meaning/Source: The rotation point is only used in fill situations to figure out if a single slope to the surface
is needed or two slopes. It is easier to think of it as a test point. If this test point is higher than the Max
Height (10 by default) a shallow AND a steep slope are created. The test is only used on the right side of the
baseline.
Fix: On the right side of the assembly, set the Offset to Measure Rotation Point from to the ETW of your
right lane. If you are only getting this on the left side of your assembly, you can completely ignore this.
Message:
Is it a big deal: The distance between surface and attachment point is too close, use cut situation instead of
fill situation.
Meaning/Source: No.
Fix: In places where your test point is very close to the existing surface the software automatically treats the
section as if it is in cut. Despite the wording, this has already been done and no action is needed by you.
Message: Failed. Point Outside Surface.
Is it a big deal: Yes.
Meaning/Source: Your daylight is not steep enough or you have run out of surface model.
Fix: Change the daylight slope or extend the surface model information.
Message: Intersection with target could not be computed. Cannot find intersection with surface using flat rate
slope when trying to construct final link!
Is it a big deal: Yes.
Meaning/Source: There are two main reasons for this common error:
1. Your design profile is longer than your surface profile.
2. You have run out of surface model (i.e. it is too narrow in the area of your corridor).
Fix:
1. Reign in your corridor stations.
2. a) Change your daylight slope.
b) Check surface model location.
Message: Failed. Value does not fall within the expected range.
Is it a big deal:Yes
Meaning/Source: There are three main reasons for this error:
Your design profile is longer than your surface profile.
You have run out of surface model (i.e. it is too narrow in the area of your corridor)
One of the subassembly values is bad.
Fix:
1. Reign in your corridor stations.
2. a) Change your daylight slope.
b) Check surface model location.
3. See if there are zeroed out values that Civil 3D does not like.
Message: Macro file not found at original path specified in subassembly. Updated macro file location to path
defined by AECCCONTENT_DIR environment variable.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 150 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Is it a big deal: No
Meaning/Source: This error can be outright ignored. It simply means that the assembly was originally created
on another computer whose paths are different from your computer. It could also mean or an older version of
Civil 3D and then updated.
Fix: There is no fix for this. Just ignore it.
Message: No sideslope intersect found.
Is it a big deal: Yes.
Meaning/Source: There are two main reasons for this common error:
1. Your design profile is longer than your surface profile.
2. You have run out of surface model (i.e. it is too narrow in the area of your corridor)
Fix:
1. Reign in your corridor stations.
2. a) Change your daylight slope.
b) Check surface model location.
Message: Target object not found TargetDTM.
Is it a big deal: Yes.
Meaning/Source: You probably just forgot to set the Target Surface to your existing surface.
Fix: Go back into corridor properties and set the target surface.
4. At the top of the Panorama window, click the Action Menu.
5. Click Clear All events.
Using Object Viewer as Diagnosis Tool
6. Select the corridor.
7. From the contextual tab, click Object viewer.
8. Use your left mouse button or the view cube to rotate the view into an isometric view. Observe the problems
and close the object viewer.
Reigning in the Corridor Station Range
If you look at the profile, you will see that the length of the existing ground is longer than the length of the design
profile. This is frequently the case. The fix is to change the processing range of the region where the error occurs.
9. Select the corridor and get into the corridor properties.
1. Click the Align
2. Set the start station of the region to 0+64.53.
3. Set the end station of the region to 8+50.
4. Click OK.
10. The corridor is now rebuilt. Return to the object viewer using the instructions from the previous step. You
should observe that the waterfalls are now gone.
Checking Targets & Using Section Editor
11. The cyan boundary is the surface model. There is a hide boundary interfering with the daylighting of the
surface from approximately 2+50 to 3+50.
12. Select the corridor. Go to Section editor.
1. Jump to station 2+75.
2. Open parameter editor.
3. Change the left side Daylight LEFT subassembly Flat Rate of Cut Slope to 6:1.
4. Click Apply to a station range.
1. The start station should already be 2+75
2. Set the End station to 3+00
3. Click OK.
5. Close section editor.
Checking the Assembly
13. Zoom into the assembly.
14. Select the main assembly.
15. Click Assembly Properties.
1. Go to the Construction tab
2. Highlight DAYLIGHT RIGHT. On the right side of the dialog box you will see a list of codes and input
values.
1. Place a checkmark next to Offset to Measure Clear Zone From.
2. Change the Get Value From Column to LANE RIGHT.Offset of ETW_Sub
3. Place a checkmark next to Offset to Measure Rotation point from.
4. Change the Get Value From Column to LANE RIGHT.Offset of ETW_Sub
3. Click OK.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 151 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

16. Open panorama if it is not already open. (Home tab > Palettes panel flyout and click the panorama icon.)
17. At the top of the Panorama window, click the Action Menu.
18. Click Clear All events.
19. Rebuild the corridor.
At this point you should have no errors when the corridor rebuilds.
Suppressing Panorama
Once you become VERY GOOD at creating and troubleshoot corridors, you can keep the panorama from popping
up. When you need to see panorama, at any time you can go to the Home tab > Palettes panel flyout and click the
panorama icon.
20. In the settings tab of the Toolspace locate the drawing name.
1. Right-click on the drawing name and select Edit Drawing Settings.
2. Switch to the Ambient Settings tab.
3. Expand the General category.
4. Set the Show Event Viewer option to No.
5. Click OK.
Save the drawing. End of Exercise.

080.090 Extract corridor data

Section updated:

10/1/2012

12:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-090-001.mp4

080.090.001

Extracting Corridor Data


12345678\Design\Corridors\Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [EXTRACT DATA].dwg
Items that can Be Extracted:
Feature Lines
Alignments
Profiles
Points
3D Polylines
1. Open the file Corridor USH 51 BestFit[EXTRACT DATA].dwg.
2. Highlight the corridor.
1. From the Corridor contextual tab > Launch pad panel, select Feature Lines from corridor.
1. Click in the graphic on the north edge of paved shoulder (EPS).
2. You will be prompted to clarify your selection. Highlight EPS and click OK.
2. In the Create Feature Line from corridor dialog box:
1. Place a checkmark in the Name Box
2. Name the feature line EPS - Right
3. Change the style to RDWY Shoulder Paved
4. Leave the layer and smoothing options as default.
5. Clear the checkbox next to Create Dynamic Link to corridor.
6. Click OK.
After you click OK you will still be in the command.
7. Repeat the process for the EPS - Left.
8. Press escape when complete.
3. From the Corridor contextual tab > Launch pad panel, select Alignment from corridor.
1. Click the daylight feature line (you may want to turn on selection cycling if you are having difficulty
selecting the corridor.)
2. Highlight SI.
3. Click OK.
4. In the Create Alignment from Objects dialog box, rename the alignment to Slope Intercept.
5. Leave all other options as default and click OK.
6. You should now be prompted to create a profile.
7. Change the Profile Label set to No Labels and click OK.
8. Press escape to complete the command.
4. From the Corridor contextual tab > Launch pad panel flyout, select Profile from corridor.
1. Click on the SGSP (shoulder grade slope point) feature line.
2. Highlight SGSP and click OK.
3. Change the Profile Label set to No Labels.
4. Change the Profile Style to PROF Ditch Flowline and click OK.
5. Press escape.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 152 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


1. From the home tab > Profile and Section views panel click Profile View Create the profile view in the
drawing using all of the default settings.
2. Highlight the corridor.
1. From the Corridor contextual tab > Launch pad panel flyout, select Points from corridor.
2. In the Create COGO points dialog box, name the new point group Corridor Stakeout.
3. Clear all the checkboxes except for Crown and Daylight.
4. Click OK.
5. Wait a moment while the points are generated.
3. Highlight the corridor.
1. From the Corridor contextual tab > Launch pad panel flyout, select Polyline from corridor.
2. Select any feature line.
3. Confirm the name of the feature line & click OK.
4. Press escape to complete the command.
4. To force the 3D polyline to be a 2D polyline:
1. Go to the Modify tab > Design panel flyout
2. Click Convert 3D to 2D polyline. (Do not use the flatten command - use this instead)
Save the drawing. End of Exercise.

080.100 WisDOT standards - corridors

Section updated:

7/1/2010

6:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-001.mp4

080.100.001

Corridors the application of assemblies along baselines at a given frequency


Corridors are CRITICAL to the overall Civil 3D Object Model They help bring it all together to create a corridor
model
Corridors are dependent on (Parent objects)
Alignments/Profiles
Superelevation
Assemblies
Assembly insertion Frequency
Target Surfaces
Horizontal Targets (Graphics included)
Vertical Targets (Graphics included)
Corridor dependencies (Child objects)
Corridor Point, Link and Shapes
Corridor Feature Lines
Corridor Surfaces
Corridor Surface Boundaries
Objects (Alignments, Profiles) created from Corridor
Grading Feature Lines
Can be created from Corridor Feature lines
Can maintain dynamic relationship to Corridor
Can be used to create specialized Gradings that maintains relationship to Corridor
Comparing to CAiCE
CAiCE Fragments are similar to Civil 3D Subassemblies
CAiCE Templates are similar to Civil 3D Assemblies
CAiCE Roadway Design is similar to Civil 3D Corridor Parameters for one Baseline
CAiCE Scan Line s relate to
Civil 3D Corridor Frequency for one Baseline
Alignment Sample Lines
CAiCE Fragment target alignments, profiles, surfaces is similar to Civil 3D Targets
Glaring Differences between CAiCE and Civil 3D
Civil 3D works directly on surfaces. Cross sections (Sample Line s, Section Views) created after the fact.
Civil 3D works on multiple Baselines in one Corridor
Civil 3D can model VERY complex Design situations such as Intersections, Roundabouts, Interchanges, etc
Civil 3D Targets are set when the Assembly is applied to a Baseline (Alignment) - Region (Sta Range)
combination making standardized Assemblies easier to create, maintain and distribute.
Normal Mass Ordinate Material quantities are computed between surfaces along Sample Lines.
WisDOT Drawing File Names and File Management
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 153 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Corridors will be created within their own DWG file or files


Project folder Corridors are found in
\Lan Drive\C3D\ProjectIDFolder\Design\Corridor
File Naming
Corridor-<Main Road>-<Secondary Road>-<Comment>.DWG
Example
Corridor-STH25-4thAve-Approaches.DWG
Note: we are flexible with our file naming. Not so flexible with our project folder structure. Biggest thing to
remember is to name files so others can figure out what they contain. Placing files in the proper project folder is a
great start!
12:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-002.mp4

080.100.002

WisDOT Standards
WisDOT10 drawing template (WisDOT10.DWT) contains:
Corridor styles
Code sets
Command Settings for Corridor creation
Layers and symbology for Corridors, Assemblies, Corridor Surfaces, etc
Naming Corridor Object
<Main Road>-<Secondary Road>-<Comment>
STH25-4thAve-Approaches
Naming Assembly object
<Road Descr>-<Comment>-<Comment>
STH25-PartSection-DaylightLeft
2Lane-FullSection
Curb Return
Naming Subassemblies within an Assembly
<Comment>-<Subassembly Name>-<Comment>-<Side>
LaneInsideSuper-Inside-Right
2LaneFullSection-LaneInsideSuper-Left
Naming Corridor Surfaces
<Corridor Main Road Name>-Corridor-<Surface Name>
STH25-Corridor-Datum
Corridor Frequency this is the frequency (or spacing) in which an Assembly will be dropped along a Baseline in a
given Region. WisDOT drawing template is set up for frequencies in Design speeds of >= 55 MPH:
50 ft on Tangents, Horizontal Curves and Vertical Curves
5 ft within intersections
When roadway is in horizontal and vertical tangency, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 50 for all Design Speeds
When roadway is on a horizontal curve:
Design Speed <= 30mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 10 (2 ft within intersection)
35mph <= Design Speed <= 55mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 25 (5 ft within intersection)
Design Speed >= 60 mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 50 (5 ft within intersection)
When roadway is on a vertical curve:
Design Speed <= 30mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 10
35mph <= Design Speed <= 50mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 25
Design Speed >= 55 mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 50
Add frequency lines for all horizontal geometry points, superelevation transition points, profile geometry points, and
profile high/low points.
Designer to add frequency lines at other points of interest such as change of typical section, critical drainage
location, etc.
For anyone who has access to the Civil 3D Project ID folder, Corridors are shared using Xreferences.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 154 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Only allows the ability to create Sample Lines, Sections, Section Views and Materials Quantities
Cross Project Object interaction with Corridors is available by creating Alignments, Profiles, and Surfaces
from the Corridor and sharing as Data Shortcuts
WisDOT workflow addresses this issue.
Corridors are unique and can only be shared with outside organizations if they use Civil 3D that accepts the current
version of the DWG file
Objects derived from Corridors can be shared with outside organizations using LandXML or possibly other custom
formats within Civil 3D Reports or Subscription Advantage Pack
Corridors - Need to Know!!!
Keep good project organization. Corridors are made up of several objects, changing one Object can greatly affect
the Corridor.
Corridors are used to Create Proposed surfaces. Surfaces are used for many things, including Materials Quantities
and Section Views. It is very important to get good accurate Corridor (etc) surfaces so pay close attention to the
surfaces as they are created.
Corridors can be copied within a DWG file or across a DWG file. This is NOT recommended!
Do not change a Baseline Alignments stationing after it has been used in a Corridor. It could cause problems in the
Corridor or make it obsolete. Try to ensure your Alignment stationing, station equations and location are set before
creating objects using that Alignment.
Corridors can become HUGE. Managing them is imperative:
Do not try to put a HUGE Corridor with multiple intersections in one Corridor. Break it up.
Probably a good idea to only model Roadway approaches and one intersection per Corridor object.
It is harder to manage, but with some work a user can create multiple Corridor Drawing files to make each
file more efficient. Corridors Create Surfaces which are accessible
Stock vBook content
Shows how to create Corridor surfaces using Links. WisDOT workflow promotes the use of Corridor Feature
Lines to create GOOD Corridor Surfaces.
Mentions over modeling your Corridor using closely spaced Corridor Frequencies and that the output of a
Corridor is Sections. This is not true for Wisconsin DOT. We are constructing Corridor models with the idea
they will be usable directly in Automate Machine Guidance with little or no supplemental work. Our Corridor
Frequencies are established with this in mind.
Places emphasis on making sure Baseline Alignments are set before using them as Baselines in a Corridor
Shows how to Explode objects. Do not get in the habit of exploding objects in your Drawing file.
Places emphasis on Creating styles and label styles. Do not worry about these, WisDOT has standard styles
and label styles in the drawing template, use them. If you have need for a new style or label style contact your
local support or Methods Development to get them incorporated into the standard.
Corridors Need to Know!!!
If you have any questions about WisDOT vBooks, standards, workflows, etc, feel free to contact
support.cae@dot.wi.gov

9:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-003.mp4

080.100.003

Corridor example part 1


How to use the WisDOT Palette
Inserting Assemblies and editing
Inserting Subassemblies and editing
Creating a Corridor
Baselines and Regions
Adding Regions
Inserting Regions
Splitting Regions
Removing Regions
Using Inquiry Tool
Applying Assemblies
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 155 of 390

Frequency
Targets
Turn off Regions that have already been worked on. Turn the other Baselines and Regions back on after you are
done editing
Select and Edit Regions Directly
Corridor Feature Lines
Spikes, waterfalls , gaps/transitions and other problems
Code set styles
9:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-004.mp4

080.100.004

Corridor example part 2

9:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-005.mp4

080.100.005

Corrior example part 3

9:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-006.mp4

080.100.006

Corrior example part 4

080.110 Exercise DS0700 - Create assemblies

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-110-create-assemblies.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-110-proj-dataset.zip
3:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-001.mp4

080.110.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset

1:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-002.mp4

080.110.002

Create corridor dwg

8:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-003.mp4

080.110.003

Create data shortcut references

6:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-004.mp4

080.110.004

Create exist surface mask

5:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-005.mp4

080.110.005

Create profile views

2:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-006.mp4

080.110.006

Create assembly object

4:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-007.mp4

080.110.007

Attach LnGeneric subassembly

4:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-008.mp4

080.110.008

Attach ShldConstantWidth subassembly

3:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-009.mp4

080.110.009

Attach GenCF subassembly

1:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-010.mp4

080.110.010

Mirror subassemblies

1:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-011.mp4

080.110.011

Change subassembly inputs

Page 156 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


2:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-012.mp4

080.110.012

Label assembly

3:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-013.mp4

080.110.013

Rename subassemblies

3:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-014.mp4

080.110.014

Copy subassemblies to another assembly

4:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-015.mp4

080.110.015

Another way to change subassembly inputs

2:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-016.mp4

080.110.016

Label assembly

080.120 Exercise DS0800 - Create corridor

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Section updated:

3/1/2013

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-120-create-corridor.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-120-proj-dataset.zip
2:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-001.mp4

080.120.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset

2:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-002.mp4

080.120.002

Open corridor dwg

5:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-003.mp4

080.120.003

Create corridor 1

4:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-004.mp4

080.120.004

Create corridor 2

3:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-005.mp4

080.120.005

Review corridor

6:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-006.mp4

080.120.006

Add second baseline for main road

6:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-007.mp4

080.120.007

Add baseline for side road

5:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-008.mp4

080.120.008

Add second baseline for side road

3:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-009.mp4

080.120.009

Review corridor

080.130 WisDOT subassembly explanation - superelevation

WisDOT superelevation subassembly guidance


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-130-wisdot-subassemblies-superelevation.pdf
080.130.001

The attached pdf contains guidance on using WisDOT subassemblies that are superelevation-aware. AutoDesk
subassemblies that are superelevation-aware use an alignment attribute called Axis of Rotation (AOR). WisDOT
subassemblies were created prior to the development of AOR and can work incorrectly if not used as described in
the documentation.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 157 of 390

While most WisDOT and AutoDesk subassemblies work together, the superelevation-aware subassemblies (lanes
and shoulders) should never be used together. Please read the following documentation for further information.

080.140 WisDOT subassembly explanation - Shoulders

Section updated:

3/1/2013

Section updated:

3/1/2013

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

1:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-140-001.mp4

080.140.001

WisDOT Shoulder Subassemblies

2:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-140-002.mp4

080.140.002

WisDOT Shoulders Superelevation Transition

8:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-140-003.mp4

080.140.003

ShldConstWidth - Constant Width Logic


ShoulderSAs-Discussion.dwg

7:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-140-004.mp4

080.140.004

ShldConstWidth - Rollover Logic

6:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-140-005.mp4

080.140.005

SelSubShld = ShldConstWidth + Subgrade Improvement


SelSubShldMultiPave = SelSubShld + Multiple Pavement Options
ShldBrkFrslp = ShldConstWidth - Constant Width + Additional Hinge

080.150 WisDOT subassembly explanation - GenCF


4:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-001.mp4

080.150.001

GenCF Introduction and help file basics

8:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-002.mp4

080.150.002

Cut and Fill basics, Clear Zone, and Rotation Point

1:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-003.mp4

080.150.003

Steep and Flat conditions

5:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-004.mp4

080.150.004

Ditch in Small Fill

4:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-005.mp4

080.150.005

Ditch Depth in Small Fill, Minimum Ditch Depth

5:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-006.mp4

080.150.006

Ditch Profiles

7:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-007.mp4

080.150.007

Connecting Link Purpose and Minimum Connecting Link Width

3:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-008.mp4

080.150.008

Ditch Profile Problems

5:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-009.mp4

080.150.009

Final Link Include or Omit, Final Link Slope Override

Page 158 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


080.160 Divided highway workflow

Section updated:

5/1/2012

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-160-divided-hwy-corridor-modeling-strategy.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-160-start-proj-dataset.zip
Finished project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-160-finished-proj-dataset.zip
4:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-001.mp4

080.160.001

The following exercise steps through the best practices for modeling a divided highway with independent
alignments and profiles.
Introduction

5:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-002.mp4

080.160.002

Review prepared data

2:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-003.mp4

080.160.003

Review prepared data 2

7:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-004.mp4

080.160.004

Setup subgrade shoulder point assemblies

6:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-005.mp4

080.160.005

Setup subgrade shoulder point assemblies 2

3:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-006.mp4

080.160.006

Setup subgrade shoulder point assemblies 3

6:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-007.mp4

080.160.007

Setup subgrade shoulder point corridor creation

5:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-008.mp4

080.160.008

Setup subgrade shoulder point corridor review

10:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-009.mp4

080.160.009

Setup subgrade shoulder point dynamically linked feature lines

8:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-010.mp4

080.160.010

Setup median ditch assembly

1:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-011.mp4

080.160.011

Setup median ditch assembly 2

4:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-012.mp4

080.160.012

Setup median ditch corridor creation

3:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-013.mp4

080.160.013

Setup median ditch dynamically linked feature lines

5:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-014.mp4

080.160.014

Project median feature lines to profile view

8:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-015.mp4

080.160.015

Develop median ditch profile

2:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-016.mp4

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 159 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


080.160.016
9:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-017.mp4

080.160.017

STH 25 4-lane assemblies

5:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-018.mp4

080.160.018

STH 25 4-lane assemblies 2

1:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-019.mp4

080.160.019

STH 25 4-lane assemblies 3

5:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-020.mp4

080.160.020

STH 25 4-lane assemblies 4

4:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-021.mp4

080.160.021

STH 25 4-lane assemblies 5

5:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-022.mp4

080.160.022

STH 25 4-lane assemblies 6

8:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-023.mp4

080.160.023

Create STH 25 4-lane corridor

2:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-024.mp4

080.160.024

Create STH 25 4-lane corridor 2

4:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-025.mp4

080.160.025

Create STH 25 4-lane corridor 3

2:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-026.mp4

080.160.026

Create STH 25 4-lane corridor 4

5:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-027.mp4

080.160.027

Review STH 25 4-lane corridor

4:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-028.mp4

080.160.028

Review exercise workflow

080.170 Controlling corridor daylight slopes with superelevation

Section updated:

12/9/2014

Exercise project dataset


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-170-proj-dataset.zip
6:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-001.mp4

080.170.001

Summary: This exercise demonstrates how corridor slopes can be controlled using superelevation. This workflow
enables the control of daylighting slopes without breaking the proposed corridor into separate pieces. An offset
alignment is created for each side of the roadway that requires transition controls. Superelevation data is assigned
to the alignments to control the slopes. A setup corridor is created with generic links that follow the superelevation.
These links are used to create setup surfaces for each of the slopes that need control. The proposed roadway
corridor contains LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies that follow the setup surfaces. GenCF, then parameter
references the slope of the LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies for its slope.
Prerequisites: Offset Alignments, Superimposed Profiles, Superelevation Tabular Editor, Setup Corridors,
Assembly Parameter References
080-170-001 Create Offset Alignments and Superimposed Profiles
Create Offset Alignments
Create an offset alignment of the roadway baseline. The offset should be small, say 0.01. Do this for each
side of the roadway. Example: SlopeControl-L and SlopeControl-R
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 160 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Create Profile Views for the Offset Alignments


Create a new profile view. Name the profile view as follows <Baseline>-<Side>-<SlopeControl. For
example: STH25-L-SlopeControl and STH25-R-SlopeControl
In each slope control profile view, create a superimposed profile of the proposed baseline profile.

5:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-002.mp4

080.170.002

Superelevation
Expand offset alignments in the Toolspace-Prospector. Right click on the alignment and select Edit
Superelevation. In the Superelevation Curve Manager, click the Tabular Editor button. Close the
Superelevation Curve Manager.
Click the "Plus" button in the tabular editor window. Type in the beginning station of the project. This
exercise uses GenCF for daylighting. Type in the dominate slope for slopes that need additional control. In
this example, we will control the Connecting Link Slope and the Final Link Slope. We will use the Inside Lane
superelevation to control the connecting link slope and the Outside Lane superelevation to control the final link
slope.
Note: If the alignment does not have any curves, the "Plus" button will not be available. Stations can still
be added manually by right clicking in the Superelevation Tabular Editor window.
Click the "Plus" button in the tabular editor window to add another station. Type in the ending station of the
project. Repeat the previous step of typing in the dominant slopes.
Repeat these steps for the opposite side offset alignment.

8:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-003.mp4

080.170.003

Create Setup Corridor and Surfaces


Create Setup Corridor Assemblies
From the WisDOT Assemblies Palette, choose the Setup-Slopes-L and Setup-Slopes-R assemblies and
place them in the drawing. These are the assemblies that will run along the SlopeControl offset alignments
Notice the construction of these assemblies. They consist of a LinkWidthandSlope subassembly that has a
width of 0.01 ft to account for the alignment offset. Then, they include a LinkWidthandSlope for each slope to
be controlled (one for the connecting link slope and one for the final link slope). These subassemblies follow
the superelevation of the offset alignments. The assemblies only include subassemblies for the Connecting
Link slope (Inside Lane) and Final Link slope (Outside Lane), but additional subassemblies can be added to
control other slopes.
Create Setup Corridor
Create a new corridor and name it SlopeControl-Setup. Choose one of the slope control offset alignments as
the baseline. Choose its superimposed profile. Choose the SlopeSetup assembly for that side.
Add another base line to the corridor. Choose the opposite side slope control offset alignment,
superimposed profile and assembly.
There are no targets needed for this corridor. Set the frequency to 2.5 ft. Apply the assembly at all critical
locations.
Create Setup Corridor Surfaces
In the SlopeControl-Setup corridor, go to the Surfaces tab and create two surfaces, SlopeControl-SetupConnectingLink and SlopeControl-Setup-FinalLink.
Define these to surfaces with the ConnectingLink links and the FinalLink links respectively. Check the
Add as Breakline box next to the added links in the surface definitions.
The surface styles can be set to _No Display.
In the Boundaries tab, add a Corridor Shrinkwrap boundary to each corridor surface.
Turn the display of the setup corridor off. Changing the object style to _No Display on the Information tab.
Set the code set style to _No Display on the codes tab. Change the Feature Line style to _No display for
the none style on the Feature Lines tab.

5:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-004.mp4

080.170.004

Create Proposed Corridor Assembly


From the WisDOT Assemblies Palette, choose the Lane Start Slope Control assembly and place it in the
drawing. This is the starting point for creating your proposed roadway assembly. Rename the assembly
appropriately
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 161 of 390

Notice the construction of the assembly. The assembly consists of four LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies
(two on each side). These subassemblies target the setup surfaces created earlier as indicated by their
names. The assembly also includes the left a right lanes to start with to assure the LinkOffsetOnSurface
subassemblies are assigned to the proper groups.
Finish creating the proposed roadway assembly by adding additional lanes, shoulders, curb and gutter as
needed. Add GenCF on each side to complete the assembly.
In the assembly properties Construction tab, select one of the GenCF subassemblies. Under the Input
Values, check the Use Parameter Reference button for the following:
Connecting Link Slope = Set to TARGET-ConnectingLink Surf
Steep Rate Cut Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
Flat Rate Cut Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
Steep Rate Fill Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
Flat Rate Fill Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
4:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-005.mp4

080.170.005

Create Proposed Corridor


Create the proposed corridor using the proposed corridor assembly. Set the roadway targets as needed.
Pay attention to the surface targets. Target the ConnectingLink-Setup surface and the FinalLink-Setup surface
according to the subassembly names.

7:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-006.mp4

080.170.006

Refine Slopes and Transitions with Superelevation Tabular Editor


Now that the proposed corridor is built, the slopes and transitions can be refined using the superelevation
tabular editor for the Daylight Control Alignment.
Add stations that define the beginning ending locations of the daylight slope transitions. Remember that
FDM 11-15-1.8 states that slopes should not be varied more than 1:1 in 100 ft except in unusual
circumstances.
Rebuild the setup corridor and the proposed corridor. Inspect the slopes.
This workflow can be used for many different situations. For example, the superelevation control can be used to
vary the terrace and daylight slopes in urban areas.

3:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-007.mp4

080.170.007

Recap
Since the centerline alignment superelevation is already used to control lane and shoulder slope, we made
two offset alignments that contain superelevation data used to control our GenCF slopes. Specifically, in this
example, we use them to control the connecting link and final link slopes. These are the most common slopes
that require variation.
A setup corridor was created that that uses the two offset alignments as base lines. The setup corridor
results in two setup-surfaces. One surface represents the connecting link slopes and the other surface
represents the final link slopes. These slopes vary based on the superelevation entries for the offset
alignments.
Finally, we created our proposed roadway corridor. The assembly for this corridor is like any other roadway
corridor. The difference is the addition of four LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies. These subassemblies
follow the slopes created by the setup corridor surface. GenCF then parameter references the
LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies.

080.180 Controlling corridor daylight slopes with profiles

Section updated:

4/13/2015

Exercise project dataset


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-180-proj-dataset.zip
6:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-180-001.mp4

080.180.001

Create Assembly
Summary: This exercise demonstrates how corridor slopes can be controlled using profiles. This workflow
enables the control of daylighting slopes without breaking the proposed corridor into separate pieces. The
elevation data that makes up the profile definition is used to define slope values. A profile is created to represent
the slope of any link in the corridor that varies. The elevation of the profile is equal to the inverse of the desired
slope value.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 162 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Prerequisite: Assembly Parameter References


Create Proposed Corridor Assembly
From the WisDOT Assemblies Palette, choose the Road Start Profile Slope Control assembly and place it
in the drawing. This is the starting point for creating your proposed roadway assembly. Rename the assembly
appropriately
Notice the construction of the assembly. The assembly consists of eight ProfileToParameterRef
subassemblies (four on each side). These subassemblies target the profiles that we will create later, as
indicated by their names. The assembly also includes the left a right lanes to start with to assure the
ProfileToParameterRef subassemblies are assigned to the proper groups.
Finish creating the proposed roadway assembly by adding additional lanes, shoulders, curb and gutter as
needed. Add GenCF on each side to complete the assembly.
In the assembly properties Construction tab, select one of the GenCF subassemblies. Under the Input
Values, check the Use Parameter Reference button for the following:
Connecting Link Slope = Set to TARGET-ConnectingLink Surf
Steep Rate Cut Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
Flat Rate Cut Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
Steep Rate Fill Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
Flat Rate Fill Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
There are also additional ProfileElevationToSlope subassemblies that are used for beam guard scenarios
(Shoulder Break Slope and Grading Link Slope). We will not use these for this exercise, but there is no
harm in leaving them in the assembly for possible future use.
Note: Avoid attaching the ProfileTopParameterRef subassembly to the baseline of the assembly if they
will not be used. This will cause the section editor to zoom out and the section views to be distorted.

6:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-180-002.mp4

080.180.002

Create Profiles and Profile Views


Lock in Primary Profile View
Since we will be creating profiles at very small elevations for the primary roadway baseline, we need to lock
in the profile view height. This will keep the profile view from stretching to a large elevation range. To do this,
go into the profile view properties Elevations Tab, and make sure that User Specified Height is checked.
Create First Slope Control Profile View
Create a new profile view. Name the profile view the same as the slope that will be controlled. Example:
25-L-ConnectingLink
Profile view styles is SlopeControl
Set the profile view height to -1 minimum, 1 maximum. That range works well if using profile slope control
with GenCF because GenCF takes the inverse of the profile elevations to get slope (elevations less than 1).
Other subassembly may use the elevation directly for slope. In that case, the profile elevation view range
would need to be expanded.
For Profile Display Options, uncheck the draw box for all of the profiles. We will be creating slope control
profile per profile view.
For the Data Bands, select the No Display data band set. Data bands do not offer useful information for this
application.
Create First Slope Control Profile
Create a new Profile for slope control. Name it appropriately. Example: 25-L-ConnectingLink
Profile Style is user preference.
Profile label set is SlopeControl.
Use the Profile Station From Plan transparent command to select a location along the alignment before and after
the project limits. For elevation, enter the dominant slope for the project. Example: 0.25 for for 4:1

5:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-180-003.mp4

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 163 of 390

080.180.003

Create Remaining Slope Control Profiles


Create the rest of the slope control profiles in the same profile view as the first one. By creating them initially
in the single profile view, it makes creating the remaining profile view easier.
HINT: If the dominant slope is the same for the remaining slope control profiles, you can just use object
snaps to pick the VPI locations the same as the previous profile.
Create Profile Views for Each Slope Control Profile
Select the first slope control profile view created earlier and go into the profile view properties.
In the Profiles Tab, uncheck the Draw box for each profile, except for the one designated for that profile view.
Create a new profile view. Use the same procedure as demonstrated in 080-180-002. In the Profiles Tab,
uncheck the Draw box for each profile, except for the one designated for that profile view.
Repeat this for each slope control profile.
3:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-180-004.mp4

080.180.004

Create Proposed Corridor


Create the proposed corridor using the proposed corridor assembly. Set the roadway targets as needed. Pay
attention to the Profile targets. Target the ConnectingLink and the FinalLink profiles according to the subassembly
names.

3:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-180-005.mp4

080.180.005

Refine Slopes and Transitions


Now that the proposed corridor is built, the slopes and transitions can be refined using the slope control
profiles.
Add VPI stations that define the beginning ending locations of the daylight slope transitions. Remember that
FDM 11-15-1.8 states that slopes should not be varied more than 1:1 in 100 ft except in unusual
circumstances.
Rebuild the proposed corridor. Inspect the slopes.

080.180.006

Retrofitting Existing Projects


Select the ProfileToParameterRef subassembly from the subassemblies palette.
Then, type I for Insert.
Type B for Before.
Select the lane assembly nearest to the baseline.
Repeat this process for each slope control profile that is needed.
Remember to rename the ProfileToParameterRef subassemblies for easy recognition later.
In the assembly, set up the parameter references as desired so they point to the appropriate
ProfileToParameterRef subassembly.
Create the slope control profiles and profile views as demonstrated in this module.

080.180.007

Converting a Superelevation Slope Control Project to a Profile Slope Control Project


To convert a superelevation slope control project to a profile slope control project, select the
ProfileToParameterRef subassembly from the subassemblies palette.
Type R for Replace at the command line.
Select one of the LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies used for superelevation slope control in the assembly.
Repeat the process for each LinkOffsetOnSurface subassembly used for superelevation slope control.
Remember to rename the ProfileToParameterRef subassemblies for easy recognition later.
In the assembly, set up the parameter references as desired so they point to the appropriate
ProfileToParameterRef subassembly.
Create the slope control profiles and profile views as demonstrated in this module.
The setup corridor used in the superelevation slope control workflow is no longer needed. Go into the setup
corridor properties. In the Surfaces tab, each of these surfaces can be deleted.
Once the surfaces are deleted, the setup corridor can also be deleted.
Open the tabular editor for each superelevation slope control alignment. Export the superelevation data.
Use that information for reference when creating the slope control profiles. Once the slope control profiles
have been established, the slope control alignments used in the superelevation method can be deleted.
Target the slope control profiles and rebuild the corridor.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015

Page 164 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

080.190 Roundabout modeling workflow demo

Section updated:

4/13/2015

Finished project dataset


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-190-proj-dataset-fin.zip
080.190.000

Prerequisite
Have a working knowledge of how to develop baseline alignments, offset alignments, design profiles, assemblies,
corridors with horizontal targets and vertical targets, corridor surfaces, and refinement surfaces within a WisDOT
project structure. .
Workflow
The purpose of this workflow is to create a system of setup corridors which is used to develop the profiles within a
roundabout intersection. The workflow results in profiles for all curbs within the intersection which are used to
control elevation in the design corridor. Roundabout horizontal geometry development is not taught in this training,
this training focuses on development of vertical design, and final modeling of a roundabout intersection.
Objective
In this training session the instructor will demonstrate a roundabout modeling dataset that uses a system of setup
corridors to more easily synchronize the profiles for all curbs within a roundabout intersection. The project data the
instructor uses in the videos is available for download.

3:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-001.mp4

080.190.001

Introduction
Advanced Civil 3D workflow training
Beginner Roadway Design track is a prerequisite
Workflow concept, not a demonstration
Data available
Roundabout horizontal geometry is established
No vertical geometry yet
Alignments on all curb flange lines
Workflow primary purpose profile development on all curbs

3:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-002.mp4

080.190.002

Project Data Walk Through

2:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-003.mp4

080.190.003

Hierarchy of elevation control concept

6:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-004.mp4

080.190.004

The tilted plane controls the circulatory roadway elevation


A single feature line provides elevation controls for the circulatory roadway portion of the intersection.

6:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-005.mp4

080.190.005

Circulatory roadway setup corridor


The Top surface from the circulatory roadway setup corridor give the designer the information needed to develop
the splitter island curb profile.

3:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-006.mp4

080.190.006

Setup corridor system purpose

6:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-007.mp4

080.190.007

Determining outside quadrant curb profiles


1. Approach roadway setup corridors
2. Determining outside quadrant curb profiles

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 165 of 390

7:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-008.mp4

080.190.008

Outside quadrant curb profiles come from multiple sources

6:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-009.mp4

080.190.009

Working with the setup corridor system


With the setup corridor system in place, it can be used to develop the profiles for all curb lines. The dynamic
nature of the data set gives immediate feedback to the designer of how changing one curb profile will affect the
other curb profiles in the intersection.

5:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-010.mp4

080.190.010

Elevation Control from setup corridors to design corridors


An explanation of how the setup corridor system provides the elevation control of all curbs within the roundabout
intersection.

4:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-011.mp4

080.190.011

An alternate explanation of how elevation control from setup corridors influence the design corridors

8:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-012.mp4

080.190.012

Roundabout modeling workflow concepts overview

2:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-013.mp4

080.190.013

080.200 Modeling beam guard energy absorbing terminals (BG EATs)

Section updated:

6/17/2015

Exercise project dataset


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-200-proj-dataset.zip
2:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-001.mp4

080.200.001

General exercise discussion


This exercise steps through modeling BG EATs from developing horizontal geometry to creating corridor surfaces.
Its intent is to combine many pieces of knowledge into a single, very common workflow for WisDOT projects.
Some things to keep in mind with this exercise:
This is not beginner level material.
It should not be considered a replacement for learning the fundamentals of the topics covered in this
exercise.
Common scenarios and best practices will be highlighted, but individual projects may require or benefit from
different techniques.
Four BG EATs will be modeled. Horizontal curve and superelevation will be present. Two EATs will be in full
pavement replacement. Two EATs will be added onto existing shoulders.
This subtopic starts with ProjectID\Design\Corridors\Crdr-25-000.dwg

1:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-002.mp4

080.200.002

BG EAT modeling - requirements


BG EAT geometry is based on SDD 14b44 for the Midwest Guardrail System. This is the system that this exercise
will model.
Cross sections are required for the beginning of the shoulder taper, posts 1, 5, & 9 per FDM 11-45-2.4.1.3. General
design considerations for roadside barrier design can be found in FDM 11-45-2 Roadside Barrier Design Guidance.
Design model requirements pertaining to BG EATs can be found in FDM 15-5-7

3:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-003.mp4

080.200.003

BG EAT horizontal geometry - discussion


To model the BG EAT with a corridor, the following horizontal geometry is needed:
Beam guard flare
Hinge point line
Grading line (extended vehicle runout path)
Edge of shoulder. This edge is the gravel shoulder outside of the hinge point line taper. This edge becomes a
paved shoulder at the BG EAT.
In this exercise, all geometry will be added into the corridor file. This is acceptable practice for WisDOT projects,
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 166 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

but may not be a best practice for a specific project, for specific edgeline objects.
This geometry has been built into parametric blocks for use at WisDOT. There are six of them that model the
following situations:
Left side, tangent section
Left side, left hand curve
Left side, right hand curve
Right side, tangent section
Right side, left hand curve
Right side, right hand curve
The blocks have the following characteristics:
All blocks have an insertion point at the face of beam guard at Post 9.
Left and right side are based on the location of the baseline. For example, if there was a BG EAT on the
inside of a divided highway, it would be considered left side in the cardinal direction.
Proper layer assignment and line display is set by object within the block. Left and right side designations to
certain layers have been added to make corridor targeting easier.
All blocks have been built with Post 1 being the first post that is encountered in the cardinal direction. This
means that blocks may need to be mirrored to locate properly. Left and right side blocks should always be
located on the correct side of the baseline.
All geometry is stored in polylines except for the grading lines. These lines could not be stored as polylines
and made parametric. They are line objects.
The blocks have the following parameters:
Distance from paved shoulder to total shoulder
Curved blocks have a radius of total shoulder
The taper of the paved shoulder from normal width to total width is 10:1
4:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-004.mp4

080.200.004

Place BG EAT horizontal geometry


Make the tool palette group "WisDOT Parametric Design" visible.
Click on the BG EAT block to place.
In the EXECUTETOOL command
Type R to immediately rotate the block to the correct angle.
Click two points to set the block angle.
Click to place the BG EAT at the face of the beam guard at Post 9.
Select the block. Open the Properties window. Edit the DistanceFromPavedToTotalShoulder and
TotalShoulderRadius values as necessary.

5:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-005.mp4

080.200.005

Place BG EAT horizontal geometry (cont'd)

Repeat as necessary.
Blocks added with Post 9 being first on stationing need to be mirrored.
Radius for right side curve total shoulder = 2882.784'

Radius for right side curve total shoulder = 2846.784'

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 167 of 390

3:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-006.mp4

080.200.006

Convert horiz geom into alignments for targeting


This subtopic starts with ProjectID\Design\Corridors\Crdr-25-001.dwg
Any horizontal geometry that will be used for corridor targeting and shared to another file should be turned into
alignment objects. Horizontal geometry that will not be shared can be polyline objects. In this exercise, the
following object types will be used:
Alignments
Beam guard
Total shoulder/Hinge point line
Paved shoulder
Pavement edge
Clear zone
Polylines
Grading line
Break from 4% to 10:1 cross slope for gravel shoulder
Steps
Explode BG EAT blocks by clicking on all blocks to select them and typing X, Enter at the command line to
EXPLODE them.
Select the Grading lines. Right click, on the menu click "Convert to Polyline".
Create offset alignments for pavement edges: 25-L-EP, 25-R-EP
Create offset alignments for paved shoulders: 25-L-EPS, 25-R-EPS
Add widenings through beam guard area.

3:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-007.mp4

080.200.007

Convert horiz geom into alignments for targeting (cont'd)


** TIP ** Civil 3D will allow alignment objects to have physical gaps. Never have physical gaps for alignments with
stationing or used as targets. They don't work past the first gap. Use masks for visual breaks in objects.
Create object-based alignments for gravel shoulder that follow the hinge line behind the BG EATs: 25-LEGS, 25-R-EGS

3:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-008.mp4

080.200.008

Convert horiz geom into alignments for targeting (cont'd)


Create object-based alignments for beam guard: 25-L-BG-442, 25-R-BG-442

4:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-009.mp4

080.200.009

Convert horiz geom into alignments for targeting (cont'd)


Offset edge of pavement alignments to create clear zone polylines.
Trim the Grading line polylines back to the clear zones. These will be left as polylines.
** TIP ** Create all BG EATs horizontal geometry objects prior to modeling. This will allow targeting all objects with
the same assemblies once and copying the regions to all BG EATs locations.

5:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-010.mp4

080.200.010

Add slope targeting profile views and profiles


This subtopic starts with ProjectID\Design\Corridors\Crdr-25-002.dwg
Slope Control Profiles
The slope variation through the beam guard area is controlled by profiles. See training 080-180 for an explanation
of how profiles can be used to control roadway slopes. A slope control profile is needed for the following slopes in
the beam guard assembly:
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 168 of 390

Shoulder Break Slope


Connecting Link Slope
Final Link Slope
Grading Link Slope
The PVI stations and slopes entered here will vary from project to project, but these are the key minimum locations
that are needed:
Shoulder Break Slope: 25-L-Slp-ShldBreak, 25-R-Slp-ShldBreak
Post 9 = Steep Slope
Post 5 = Clear Zone Slope
Connecting Link Slope: 25-L-Slp-ConnLink, 25-R-Slp-ConnLink
Grading Line (EVRP) @ Clear Zone = Clear Zone Slope
Steep Section Behind Beam Guard = Steep Slope. This location is not pre-determined, but rather a project
decision. A good place to start is 100 FT from the Grading Line (EVRP) @ Clear Zone.
Grading Link Slope: 25-L-Slp-Grdg, 25-R-Slp-Grdg
Grading Line (EVRP) @ Clear Zone = Steep Slope
Grading Line (EVRP) @ 8 o/s from SGSP = Clear Zone Slope (This location is determined in a later step. Add this
station to the profile definition at the end of the workflow.)
Final Link Slope: 25-L-Slp-Final, 25-R-Slp-Final
Vary as need per project
Steps
Create one profile view associated with alignment 25 with one of the profiles above. Create a start and end
point of the profile both with an elevation of 0.25 (4:1 slope for flat).
Create the rest of the profiles by snapping to the first profile in the profile view.
Turn off all the slope control profiles but one in the profile view.
Copy and paste the profile view until there is one profile view for each slope control profile. This makes
editing each profile easier.
Name each profile view appropriately and make the associated profile the only one visible for that profile
view.
3:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-011.mp4

080.200.011

Add slope targeting profile views and profiles (cont'd)


Copy profiles
Select the profile (not profile view).
Right click, click Basic Modify Tools...Copy.
At the command line, type D Enter.
Rename the profile.
Repeat for all slope control profiles

5:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-012.mp4

080.200.012

Add slope targeting profile views and profiles (cont'd)

Turn off all profiles except one in the profile view

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 169 of 390

and set the labels to SlopeControl.

Copy profile views


Select the profile view (not profile).
Click on the square grip, this is a stretch command.
Press the Space Bar to change to a Move command.
At the command line, type C for Copy.
Repeat for all profile views.
** TIP ** If setting slope control profiles for a long station range, stack all profile views in a single column
with left-most outside slope on top moving down to right-most outside slope on bottom.

4:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-013.mp4

080.200.013

This subtopic starts with ProjectID\Design\Corridors\Crdr-25-003.dwg


WisDOT BG EAT profile slope control assemblies - discussion

Use conditional subassemblies to automate the corridor modeling through the beam guard areas. There
are left and right assemblies for 2 lane full reconstruction and shoulder only BG EATs that can be found
on the WisDOT Assemblies palette. These assemblies and their subs can be used as building blocks for
custom assemblies if project conditions are different.
Key attributes of these assemblies:
All assemblies use profiles for key slope values that need to vary along the corridor. The WisDOT
sub ProfileToParameterRef is used for this purpose. WARNING: If a different Autodesk or WisDOT
profile targeting sub is used, it will likely display in cross section output and cause section views to
be extremely large. All of the values of the profile will be less than 1.0. This essentially means using
other subs will cause section views to be as tall as the elevation of the project.
All assemblies use ShldBreakFslp for the shoulder. This sub allows the shoulder to have the 10:1 slope
between the 4% top and the shoulder foreslope which varies between 4:1 and 2.5:1. One key item to
understand about ShldBreakFslp is that it is built with the break occurring outside the total shoulder
width.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 170 of 390

All assemblies use CFGen. Values for CFGen should always be verified before usage. Override
Ditch Bottom is by default set to "Profile". This is good if a ditch profile has been established.
Change this value to "No" if there is no ditch profile. Clear zone and rotation point values need to be
set correctly for the sub to work correctly for a project.
The Rehab No Lane assemblies also use the ShldBreakFslp sub, but then add a surface targeting
sub to get the start of Datum and Base layers. Design surfaces are created using these points for
corridor feature lines. Corridor links are not used in WisDOT cross sections and surfaces.

7:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-014.mp4

080.200.014

Insert and adjust WisDOT BG EAT profile slope control assemblies


Insert the assemblies into the drawing.
Civil Imperial Subassemblies... WisDOT Assemblies tool palette.
BG-L - Profile Slope Control
BG-R - Profile Slope Control
BG-L-Rehab-NoLane - Profile Slope Control
BG-R-Rehab-NoLane - Profile Slope Control
Rename them to something meaningful for the project.
25-L-BG-ShldrOnly, 25-L-FullReplace-BG, 25-R-BG-ShldOnly, 25-R-FullReplace-BG
Establish the desired parameters for pavement structure and for each GenCF subassembly. Parameter
references are preset in the assembly. Do not change the established parameter references. For this exercise,
subassembly value changes:
LnGeneric
Pavement Depth (Inside and Outside Edge) = 0.5 ft
BaseDepth = 0.0'
SubbaseDepth = 0.0'
DepthToSubGrade = 1.5'
ShldBrkFslp
Pavement Height = 0.5'
Base Depth = 0.0'
Subbase Depth = 0.0'
Depth to Subgrade = 1.5'
Paved Shoulder Width = 3.0'
Foreslope of Shoulder = 10:1
CFGen
Foreslope Slope = 6:1
Foreslope Width = 8.0'
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 171 of 390

Clear Zone Distance = 26.0'


Offset to Measure Clear Zone From = 12'
Minimum Fill Height = 1'
Optional Ditch in Small Fill Situations = Yes
Ditch Depth in Small Fill = 1.0'
Distance to Rotation Point = 26' (same as Clear Zone)
Offset to Measure Rotation Point From = 12'
Override Ditch Bottom Elevation = No
Minimum Width of Connecting Link = 0.0'
Include Daylight Link Omit Daylight Link = Include
6:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-015.mp4

080.200.015

Insert and adjust WisDOT BG EAT profile slope control assemblies (cont'd)
Follow steps above for NoLane-Rehab assemblies.

6:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-016.mp4

080.200.016

BG assembly special features discussion


Show where assembly values are using parameter references to the slope control profiles.
NoLane-Rehab assemblies have additional subs (LinkWidthAndSlope with ExtMultiOpt) to create start of surface
slopes on existing surface.
Conditional subassemblies control behavior within the limits of the grading lines and are used to display beam
guard.

6:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-017.mp4

080.200.017

Edit shoulder break slope control profiles

The PVI stations and slopes entered here will vary from project to project, but these are the key
minimum locations that are needed:
Shoulder Break Slope
Post 9 = Steep Slope
Post 5 = Clear Zone Slope
Connecting Link Slope
Steep Section Behind Beam Guard = Steep Slope
Grading Line (EVRP) @ Clear Zone = Clear Zone Slope
Grading Link Slope
Grading Line (EVRP) @ Clear Zone = Steep Slope
Grading Line (EVRP) @ 8 o/s from SGSP = Clear Zone Slope (This location is
determined in a later step. Add this station to the profile definition at the end of the
workflow.)
Final Link Slope
Vary as need per project
Add the key transition points above to each appropriate profile.
Change the view configuration to have one Top view over the BG EAT and one view on
the profile view being edited.
Use the transparent command Profile Station from Plan with the Profile Geometry Editor to snap to key
transition points.

9:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-018.mp4

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 172 of 390

080.200.018

** TIP ** This exercise leaves the assemblies as left and right and builds the corridor accordingly. There
are other ways to structure assemblies and corridors that may be better suited to a specific project.

** TIP ** Civil 3D does not allow overlapping stations on the same baseline. To use the same alignment
for overlapping left and right side assemblies, create 2 baselines with the same alignment and profile
definition: BL-25-R, BL-25-L
Create the roadway corridor 25-BG. The beam guard corridor region should extend to the end(s)
of the 15:1 taper(s). All the subassembly targets in the BG EAT assemblies are named so target
mapping is apparent.
Once target mapping is completed, build the corridor.

5:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-019.mp4

080.200.019

Create corridor, baselines, regions, set frequencies (cont'd)

7:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-020.mp4

080.200.020

Create corridor, baselines, regions, set frequencies (cont'd)


** TIP ** If the Clear_Zone or Rotation_Point feature line is not continuous in either direction at the station where
the Grading Line meets the Clear Zone, add a corridor section 0.01 ft before and 0.01 ft after that station.

5:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-021.mp4

080.200.021

Initial corridor discussion

** TIP ** If the same assembly is going to be used in multiple regions, all targets can be assigned at
once. Then copy the region by:
Click on the corridor in Modelspace to select it and right-click.
Click "Modify Region" "Copy Regions" to copy a region with targets intact. Regions can also be
copied to different baselines.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 173 of 390

7:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-022.mp4

080.200.022

Extend corridor, modify Grading Line for constructability


Build a polyline for a constructable grading link for each BG EAT
Draw a polyline that follows the subgrade shoulder point at Post 9. Set the elevation of the polyline
to 0.
Offset the polyline by 8 ft away from the centerline.
Trim the Grading Line to this polyline.
Rebuild the corridor.

3:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-023.mp4

080.200.023

Extend corridor, modify Grading Line for constructability (cont'd)

4:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-024.mp4

080.200.024

Modify slope profiles to fit new grading lines

Grading Link Slope


Grading Line (EVRP) @ Clear Zone = Steep Slope
Grading Line (EVRP) @ 8 o/s from SGSP = Clear Zone Slope (This location is
determined in a later step. Add this station to the profile definition at the end of the
workflow.)
Add the key transition points above to each appropriate profile.
Change the view configuration to have one Top view over the BG EAT and one view on
the profile view being edited.
Use the transparent command Profile Station from Plan with the Profile Geometry Editor to snap to
key transition points.

4:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-025.mp4

080.200.025

Create corridor surfaces


This subtopic starts with ProjectID\Design\Corridors\Crdr-25-004.dwg
In the corridor Properties dialog box, Feature Lines tab
Turn off the connection of the SI, SGSP, Hinge_Cut, Hinge_Fill, Hinge, Daylight_Cut, Daylight_Fill, and any
other feature lines not used for surface creation.
In the corridor Properties dialog box, Surfaces tab
Create the Crdr-Datum, Crdr-Top, and Crdr-Base surfaces. The following lists of feature lines are typical for
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 174 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


these surfaces, but may not be all inclusive:
Datum
Top
Base
Break_Point Break
Base_Start
Clear_Zone Crown
Crown_Pave1
Crown_Sub Clear_Zone ETW_Pave1
Datum_Start Daylight
EPS_Base (integral shoulder only)
Daylight
Daylight_Sub
Daylight_Sub Ditch_Point
Ditch_Point EPS
ETW_Sub
ES_Unpaved
GRDG
ETW
Rotation_Point GRDG
Rotation_Point
Top_Start
Define the corridor surface boundaries.
5:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-026.mp4

080.200.026

Verify feature lines in corridor surfaces


** TIP ** Maximum surface triangle length can be modified to remove unwanted interior triangles.

3:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-027.mp4

080.200.027

Review surfaces, final comments

This subtopic ends with ProjectID\Design\Corridors\Crdr-25-005.dwg

Use the steering wheel to analyze in 3D.

Module 090 Intersections


090.010 Intersection basics

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Intersection exercise files


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-exercise-files.zip
23:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-010-001.mp4

Page 175 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


090.010.001

Intersection Overview
The intersection tool is for:
Laying out the horizontal geometry of the corridor
Creating the vertical geometry based on the horizontal layout
Creating the assembly portion of the corridor
The result of the Intersection tool:
A complex corridor with multiple baseline alignments, regions and targets for width and profiles.
The corridor from an intersection is the same as any you create manually. It is just done more quickly,
and the computations of slopes and targets are done for you

Corridor Intersection Concepts


Series of corridor regions
Primary and Secondary alignments and profiles
Generally from centerline to outside
Use different baseline alignments in curb returns
Between 8 and 9 regions (depends on crown-match)
T-intersection Regions
Review Intersection Corridor Design
To use the intersection tool for full design you will need:
Two alignments that intersect
4-way intersections, these alignments should cross
3-way intersections, the secondary road alignment should snap to the primary alignment
A profile for both of the alignments
If you have alignments and no profiles you will only get (2D) horizontal layout of the intersection
Assemblies for the type of design
Generally 4 8 assemblies
Main road design in primary and secondary road
Through the intersection
Curb return areas
Fill areas where regions overlap
Curb return on one side and main road design on the other side
What you CAN have, but dont NEED
Alignment for lane edges
Profiles to create lane slopes
An already existing corridor to add the intersection area to
The intersection can overlap already designed regions
Warning about locked profile
Due to data shortcuts
Just select Continue to Use These Profiles

090.020 Intersection creation

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

9:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-020-001.mp4

090.020.001

Intersection Wizard
The Intersection tool is located in the Home tab > Create Design panel > Intersection
You must identify the point of intersection between the two alignments
You will need to identify which alignment is considered primary
General tab of the wizard
Intersection corridor type, all crowns or primary maintained
Geometry Details Tab
Offset Parameters
Creates offset distance alignments or targets existing
For primary and secondary roadways
Curb Return Parameters
Creates offset distance alignments around curb returns

Page 176 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Provides lane widening for incoming and outgoing for each quadrant of intersection
Lane Slope Parameters
Provides profile elevations at offset alignment location with slope calculated, or targets an existing
profile
Curb Return Profile Parameters
Calculates the elevation tie-in points around the curb return alignment
Corridor Regions tab
Can add corridor definition to new corridor or to an existing corridor
Assign a surface for daylight targets
Assembly assignments for the different design needs for the corridor through the intersection
These assignments provide schematics of typical assemblies that are appropriate
Can save the assembly assignments in an Assembly Set for import into other future projects
Warning about locked profile
Due to data shortcuts
Just select Continue to Use These Profiles
21:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-020-002.mp4

090.020.002

Intersections.dwg
Example discussion

090.030 Intersection editing

Section updated:

10/1/2012

23:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-030-001.mp4

090.030.001

Intersection Editing.dwg
Editing Intersections
Intersections create corridor objects which can be edited like any corridor (see videos on Corridor creation and
editing)
Corridor can be manually/graphically adjusted/edited
The settings chosen for the intersection during creation can also be edited
Be Aware! Manual edits will be lost if the intersection is edited and rebuilt
Editing in the Corridor Properties
Parameters tab
Often useful for changing target assignments
Changing frequency
Other indirect Corridor edits
Changing assembly parameters
Changing horizontal alignment geometry
Changing vertical profile geometry
Graphic Editing
Limited to provided grip points
Each region has arrow and diamond grips at its ends
Diamonds shift both regions together
Arrows shift only one region can create gaps
Can shift ends of intersection long corridor
Can snap to the next region or corridor
Direct Intersection Editing
Select the Intersection symbol
Green Context Ribbon > Modify panel
Edit Offsets
Edit Curb Returns
Side Road Profile *
Lane Slopes
Curb Return Profiles
Recreate Corridor Regions *
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 177 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Modify Tools
Edit Offsets/Curb Returns/Lane Slopes/Curb Return Profiles
Same dialogs as when creating the intersection
No OK/Apply changes are immediate
Selecting fields/names highlight the offset in design
Schematic at bottom to help identify what the selected field needs
Side Road Profile
Controls the automated secondary profile control
If the primary profile is adjusted the secondary should lock to it and adjust as well.
Data shortcut profile data does NOT adjust (the messages we have received)
These are the settings for that adjustment if not using data shortcuts
Recreate Corridor Regions
Same as last page of Intersection Wizard
Create new or add to exiting corridor
Daylight surface
Assemblies/assembly set
Previous changes will be lost

090.040 WisDOT standards - intersections

Section updated:

10/1/2012

4:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-040-001.mp4

090.040.001

Intersection object combines selected objects with input parameters to create the geometrics and corridor for an
intersection
The Intersection Wizard guides the user through the process of creating an Intersection
Inputs for the Intersection Wizard
Primary Road and Profile
Secondary Road and Profile
Note if the Intersection is to be used to control the Secondary Road profile within the Intersection the
Secondary Road Profile must be present in the current Drawing File (it cannot be brought into the file as a
Reference to a Data Shortcut)
Intersection type
Primary Road crown maintained
All Crowns maintained
Offsets for Lane/Pavement Edge on Main and Secondary Roads
Slope Parameters for Lane/Pavement Edge on Main Road and Secondary Road
Intersection Quadrant inputs
Curb Return parameters
Type
Radius
Transition and Widening details at Incoming Lane
Transition and Widening at Outgoing Lane
Radii
Secondary Road Profile Rules
Main Road Profile can Control the Secondary Road Profile at the Intersection
Lane Slopes
Cross Fall from Centerline for Main and Secondary Roads
Curb Return Profile parameters
Corridor (Create, append to, or do not build Corridor)
Target Surface
Assembly set
OR Select Assemblies
By Region
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 178 of 390

Intersection Wizard creates


Intersection Object
Lane Offset
Alignments
Profiles
For Main and Secondary Road
Curb Return
Alignments
Profiles
For all Quadrants
Corridor
Baseline and Regions for Intersection
Note - can add to an existing Corridor
The Intersection Object maintains the relationships between the parent objects, and the child objects using the
input parameters
Intersections will be contained in the Corridor DWG files
Project folder - Corridors are found in
\Lan Drive\C3D\ProjectIDFolder\Design\Corridor
File Naming
Corridor-<Main Road>-<Secondary Road>-<Comment>.DWG
Example
Corridor-STH25-4thAve-Approaches.DWG
Note: we are flexible with our file naming. Not so flexible with our project folder structure. Biggest thing to
remember is to name files so others can figure out what they contain. Placing files in the proper project folder is a
great start!
WisDOT10 drawing template (WisDOT10.DWT) contains:
Styles associated with Intersection
Alignments
Profiles
Assembly
Corridors
Label styles
Command Settings for Intersection creation
Layers and symbology for Intersection Objects
6:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-040-002.mp4

090.040.002

Intersection example discussion

7:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-040-003.mp4

090.040.003

Naming Intersection Object


Intersection
<Main Road> And<Secondary Road>-<Comment>
STH25And4thAve
Offset Alignments (Offset Profiles named the same)
<Parent Alignment> -<Side>-<Offset>
STH25-Right-12.00
Curb Return Alignments (Curb Return Profiles named the same as Alignments)
<Intersection Name> -<Quadrant>-Quadrant
STH25And4thAve-NE-Quadrant
Corridor Regions
RG-<Assembly Name> -<(Counter)>
RG-STH25-2Lane-Full-Section (1)

WisDOT Sharing the Intersection


Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 179 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Made up of Alignments, Profiles and Corridor(s). All of these objects can be shared in one way or another. The
Intersection Object itself cannot be shared.
Special note for Corridors
For anyone who has access to the Civil 3D Project ID folder, Corridors are shared using Xreferences.
Only allows the ability to create Sample Lines, Sections, Section Views and Materials Quantities
Cross Project Object interaction with Corridors is available by creating Alignments, Profiles, and Surfaces from
the Corridor and sharing as Data Shortcuts
WisDOT workflow addresses this issue.
Corridors are unique and can only be shared with outside organizations if they use Civil 3D that accepts the current
version of the DWG file
Objects derived from Corridors can be shared with outside organizations using LandXML or possibly other custom
formats within Civil 3D Reports or Subscription Advantage Pack
Intersections Need to Know!!!
The Intersection object is the glue that holds the Intersection parent objects, Intersection inputs and the Intersection
child objects together. This link can be broken in many ways. For example, you manually edit a Curb Return
Alignment that was Created using the Intersection Wizard. The inputs used to create the Alignment are no longer
valid. If you go back and edit the Intersection inputs to update that same Curb Return Alignment the manual edits
are no longer valid. This is one example of many. It is very important to understand how to edit an Intersection.
WisDOT workflow places the Secondary Road Alignment and Profile in the Corridor DWG file. This is done do the
Intersection object can adjust the Secondary Road Profile to match the Main Road Profile. This cannot be done if
the Secondary Road Profile is Data Referenced into the Corridor (Intersection) DWG file. It is probably easier to
have Civil 3D maintain the relationship between the two profiles than relying on us to go back and adjust them to
match if we make changes.
The Intersection wizard/object is incredibly powerful, but remember it is a start. We will most likely need to modify
the child objects after the Intersection has been created. Our workflow outlines methods to do this. More
specifically, the workflow outlines the procedures to
Add Base Course Shoulder Geometry
Check Curb Return Profiles
Add Adjusted Curb Return Profiles
Add Geometry to better represent Curb Return Alignment Tapers on the Side Road
Edit the Corridor
If you have any questions about WisDOT vBooks, standards, workflows, etc, feel free to contact
support.cae@dot.wi.gov
Intersections Custom content
Talk through the STH25 Intersection and discuss
Show Diagram of Intersection, Baselines and Regions
Quick demo on Intersection
Edit Intersection Objects
Transitions/Tapers for 4th Ave
Profile View for Curb Returns
Corridor
Targets for CABC shoulder
Targets for New Curb Return Profiles
Null Assembly through Intersection along 4th Ave

090.050 Exercise DS0900 - Move alignment source

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-050-move-alignment-source.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-050-proj-dataset.zip
3:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-001.mp4

090.050.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 180 of 390

1:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-002.mp4

090.050.002

Open corridor dwg

2:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-003.mp4

090.050.003

Promote data shortcut objects

1:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-004.mp4

090.050.004

Remove data shortcuts

0:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-005.mp4

090.050.005

Create data shortcuts

2:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-006.mp4

090.050.006

Delete original object source

090.060 Exercise DS1000 - Create intersection

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-060-create-intersection.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-060-proj-dataset.zip
3:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-001.mp4

090.060.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset

1:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-002.mp4

090.060.002

Open corridor dwg

5:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-003.mp4

090.060.003

Insert intersection assemblies 1

5:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-004.mp4

090.060.004

Insert intersection assemblies 2

4:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-005.mp4

090.060.005

Insert intersection assemblies 3

2:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-006.mp4

090.060.006

Create intersection general dialog

3:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-007.mp4

090.060.007

Intersection offset parameters dialog

8:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-008.mp4

090.060.008

Intersection curb return parameters

2:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-009.mp4

090.060.009

Intersection lane slope parameters dialog

3:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-010.mp4

090.060.010

Create intersection corridor regions dialog

6:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-011.mp4

090.060.011

Review corridor

4:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-012.mp4

090.060.012

Review exercise

Page 181 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


090.070 Exercise DS1100 - Fix intersection geometry

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-070-fix-intersection-geometry.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-070-proj-dataset.zip
4:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-001.mp4

090.070.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset

2:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-002.mp4

090.070.002

Open corridor dwg

5:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-003.mp4

090.070.003

Edit region stationing 1

10:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-004.mp4

090.070.004

Edit region stationing 2

9:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-005.mp4

090.070.005

Fix southeast quadrant curved taper 1

6:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-006.mp4

090.070.006

Fix southeast quadrant curved taper 2

4:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-007.mp4

090.070.007

Fix southeast quadrant curved taper 3

10:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-008.mp4

090.070.008

Fix northeast quadrant curved taper 1

7:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-009.mp4

090.070.009

Fix northeast quadrant curved taper 2

6:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-010.mp4

090.070.010

Fix southwest quadrant curved taper 1

6:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-011.mp4

090.070.011

Fix southwest quadrant curved taper 2

8:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-012.mp4

090.070.012

Fix northwest quadrant curved taper

3:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-013.mp4

090.070.013

Explain shoulder geometry deficiency

7:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-014.mp4

090.070.014

Fix southeast quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 1

8:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-015.mp4

090.070.015

Fix southeast quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 2

4:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-016.mp4

090.070.016

Fix southeast quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 3

8:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-017.mp4

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 182 of 390

090.070.017
5:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-018.mp4

090.070.018

Fix southeast quadrant 4th Ave shoulder geometry 1

5:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-019.mp4

090.070.019

Fix southeast quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 2

8:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-020.mp4

090.070.020

Summary

090.080 Exercise DS1100A - Fix intersection geometry ALL

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

2:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-001.mp4

090.080.001

This exercise is optional. It completes the geometry fixes to the entire intersection.
Introduction

5:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-002.mp4

090.080.002

Fix northeast quadrant 4th Ave shoulder geometry.

8:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-003.mp4

090.080.003

Fix northeast quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 1.

9:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-004.mp4

090.080.004

Fix northeast quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 2.

6:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-005.mp4

090.080.005

Fix northeast quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 3.

4:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-006.mp4

090.080.006

Fix northeast quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 4.

6:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-007.mp4

090.080.007

Fix northeast quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 5.

5:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-008.mp4

090.080.008

Inspect northeast quadrant changes.

5:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-009.mp4

090.080.009

Fix northwest quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 1.

4:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-010.mp4

090.080.010

Fix northwest quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 2.

4:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-011.mp4

090.080.011

Fix northwest quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 3.

3:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-012.mp4

090.080.012

Fix northwest quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 4.

7:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-013.mp4

090.080.013

Fix northwest quadrant 4th Ave shoulder geometry.

4:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-014.mp4

090.080.014

Fix southwest quadrant 4th Ave shoulder geometry.

Page 183 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


4:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-015.mp4

090.080.015

Fix southwest quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 1.

6:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-016.mp4

090.080.016

Fix southwest quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 2.

6:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-017.mp4

090.080.017

Fix southwest quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 3.

7:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-018.mp4

090.080.018

Fix southwest quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 4.

2:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-019.mp4

090.080.019

Review exercise.

090.090 Exercise DS1200 - More intersection refinement

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-090-more-intersection-refinement.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-090-proj-dataset.zip
3:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-001.mp4

090.090.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset.

2:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-002.mp4

090.090.002

Open corridor DWG.

2:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-003.mp4

090.090.003

Identify key station locations.

7:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-004.mp4

090.090.004

Add key stations to corridor frequencies 1.

6:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-005.mp4

090.090.005

Add key stations to corridor frequencies 2.

5:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-006.mp4

090.090.006

Explain subgrade error in curb fillet regions.

3:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-007.mp4

090.090.007

Add curb fillet correct subgrade assembly.

5:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-008.mp4

090.090.008

Add parameter reference to curb fillet correct subgrade assembly.

7:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-009.mp4

090.090.009

Apply curb fillet correct subgrade assembly to northeast quadrant 1.

4:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-010.mp4

090.090.010

Apply curb fillet correct subgrade assembly to northeast quadrant 2.

8:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-011.mp4

090.090.011

Inspect northeast quadrant subgrade.

8:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-012.mp4

090.090.012

Apply curb fillet correct subgrade assembly to all quadrants.


Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 184 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


7:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-013.mp4

090.090.013

Inspect all quadrants subgrade.

090.100 Exercise DS1300 - Refine curb profiles

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Section updated:

4/13/2015

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-100-refine-curb-profiles.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-100-proj-dataset.zip
3:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-001.mp4

090.100.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset.

1:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-002.mp4

090.100.002

Open corridor DWG.

4:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-003.mp4

090.100.003

Create curb profile views.

3:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-004.mp4

090.100.004

Explain minimum/maximum pavement slope profile concept.

4:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-005.mp4

090.100.005

Create minimum pavement slope profiles from corridor 1.

7:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-006.mp4

090.100.006

Create minimum pavement slope profiles from corridor 2.

6:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-007.mp4

090.100.007

Create maximum pavement slope profiles from corridor.

1:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-008.mp4

090.100.008

Inspect pavement slope profiles northeast quadrant.

3:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-009.mp4

090.100.009

Create proposed curb profile northeast quadrant.

5:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-010.mp4

090.100.010

Apply proposed curb profile northeast quadrant.

7:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-011.mp4

090.100.011

Create proposed curb profile southeast and southwest quadrants.

6:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-012.mp4

090.100.012

Create proposed curb profile northwest quadrant

3:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-013.mp4

090.100.013

Apply proposed curb profiles all quadrants.

6:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-014.mp4

090.100.014

Inspect proposed curb profiles in corridor.

090.110 Intersection object fundamentals


090.110.000

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-exercise-files.zip 090-110-000-Int-Obj-Rvw.dwg
It is not necessary to use either the Offset and curb returns or the Corridor Regions options to create an
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 185 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Intersection object. For the WisDOT workflow we will keep these options unchecked in the Create Intersection
Dialog.

The intersecting alignments are displayed on the top of the Geometry Details section of the Create
Intersection tool.

Here you determine the priority to how profile locking occurs for the profiles associated with the
intersection.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 186 of 390

You can change the priority of an alignment by selecting an alignment in this list and using the arrows to
the right.

By changing the alignment priority the associated profiles will change, so it is important to note that the
profile associated with the secondary alignment must always be developed in the drawing where the
intersection is being created, and it must be a design profile.

The profile associated with the primary alignment can be either a surface or design profile and may be a
data reference.

Basic Rules for creating Intersection Objects


The Primary alignments and profiles can be data references.
The secondary alignments can be a data reference.
The secondary profiles must be a design profile, and must be developed in the current drawing.
The primary profile can be either a design or surface profile.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 187 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

090.110.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-001-proj-dataset.zip
Horizontal Geometry Development in the Corridor drawing
Key Concept: Create all specific intersection geometry (curb returns, turn lanes and tapers) as alignments in
the corridor drawing where the intersection is being designed. Typical roadway offsets like ETW, EPS and
EGS have been developed as offset alignments in the AliProf dwg(s) and data shortcuts create for them in the
project
1. Open the drawing named AliProf-25.dwg
2. Review the alignment and profile objects in this drawing.
The primary and secondary stationed alignments have been created.
A proposed profile for just the primary road stationed alignment has been created.
All of the horizontal roadway geometry as offset alignments including lane edges, pavement edges, paved
shoulder, and aggregate shoulder have been created from both baseline alignments
1. Notice a design profile for the side streets are not created in this aliprof drawing.
2. Data shortcuts of all the alignments and profiles in this drawing are created.
Review: Notice the alignments in Aliprof-25.dwg represent major project edge lines of geometry outside the
intersection areas. These alignments are extended along the length of the project and will be masked when
crossing through intersections. The purpose for this masking is to facilitate these alignments to be used as part of
project line work drawings such as Pavt.dwg, which then can then be shared through XREFs. For further
information refer to methods for developing pavement drawings.

4:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-002.mp4

090.110.002

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-002.zip
Horizontal Geometry Development - Corridor drawing

Key Concept: Create the alignments for specific intersection geometry (curb returns, turn lanes and
tapers) in the corridor drawing where the intersection is being designed.
Best Practice: Do not create Data Shortcuts for any surface sampled profiles anywhere in the
project. This creates extra data shortcut clutter and creates a static profile that requires manual
synchronizing. If needed create data shortcuts of the surfaces, and then create the surface profile in
the drawing where needed.
1. Save a drawing from the wisdot14.dwt named Crdr-25-4.dwg
2. In this drawing create Data references for the following alignments and profiles:
Primary Road stationed alignment: 25 Proposed Profile: 25-Prop
Offset alignments: 25-L-ETW 25-R-ETW
25-L-EPS 25-R-EPS
25-L-EGS 25-R-EGS
Side Road stationed alignment: 4th
Offset alignments: 4th-L-ETW 4th-R-ETW
4th-L-EGS 4th-R-EGS
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 188 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

3. Create the turn lane, taper and curb return alignments following the geometry guidelines described in
the following steps. This exercise shows the alignments being created from objects, but these
could be developing using the alignment tools as well. This is a users preference and accuracy
of the geometry is the required outcome.
4. Lines, arcs, and/or polylines can be used to create the turn lane, taper and curb return geometry.
When creating the geometry, make sure the alignments overlap beyond where they first become
coincidental to the offset alignments. Later in the workflow, intersection objects will be used to lock
down the curb return profiles. These overlaps are necessary for the intersection objects to work
properly.

Create the turn lane/taper alignments to extend through the intersection and connect to the like
geometry on the other side.

5. Make sure the curb return alignments are independent. In other words, they should not be a part of
any other alignment. This is different from the intersection wizard. The intersection wizard would
combine the curb return alignments with any approaching turn lanes and/or tapers.
6. If Autocad entities were used to create the geometry, they can be converted to alignments using the
Alignments from Objects tool.
Home>Create Design>Alignment>Create Alignment from Object - Select the polylines near the
end to be the start.
The TrnLn, ETW, and EGS alignments should run in the same direction as the stationed road
alignment.
All the curb return alignments should run in the direction of travel. This will ensure we only need to
create one set of assemblies for all curb returns.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 189 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Create the following alignments as Centerline type with appropriate RDWY styles:
Int-25-L-TrnLn Int-25-R-TrnLn
Int-25-L-EGS Int-25-R-EGS
Int-4th-L-TrnLn Int-4th-R-TrnLn
Int-4th-L-EGS Int-4th-R-EGS
Int-25-4th-NW-CR Int-25-4th-NE-CR
Int-25-4th-SW-CR Int-25-4th-SE-CR
Save the drawing.

4:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-003.mp4

090.110.003

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-003.zip
Vertical Geometry Development Corridor drawing
Key Concept: Data Reference a Lane Edge Setup Surface. This surface can be used to create surface profiles
to use as targets by assemblies in the design corridor, and assign profile relationships with the intersection
object.
The dataset pre-setup:
Alignments and profile created in \\12342014\Design\AliProfs\Aliprof-25.dwg have been
added as Data Shortcuts to project 12342014. The drawing has the following
alignments and profiles:
Primary Road stationed alignment: 25
Proposed Profile: 25-Prop
Offset alignments: 25-L-ETW 25-R-ETW
25-L-EPS 25-R-EGS
25-L-EGS 25-R-EPS
Side Road stationed alignment: 4th
Offset alignments: 4th-L-ETW 4th-R-ETW
4th-L-EGS 4th-R-EGS
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 190 of 390

Alignments and profiles created in \\12342014\Design\Corridors\Crdr-25-4th.dwg are not


added as Data Shortcuts yet.
Intersection Geometry alignments:
Int-25-L-TrnLn Int-25-R-TrnLn
Int-25-L-ETW Int-25-R-ETW
Int-25-L-EGS Int-25-R-EGS
Int-4th-L-TrnLn Int-4th-R-TrnLn
Int-25-4th-NW-CR Int-25-4th-NE-CR
Int-25-4th-SW-CR Int-25-4th-SE-CR
1. Create primary road offset profiles from setup surface
Open Crdr-25-4th.dwg
Create a data reference of both the Crdr-25-Setup-ETW-Top surface (see module 070-025) and the
Exist-25-4 surface
Set the style to _No Display
Home Tab>Design Panel>Profile - Create Surface Profile
Create a surface profile of each of the primary road TrnLN and ETW alignments (there will be 4 total).
For the surface select Crdr-25-Setup-ETW-Top to create the profile from.
Set the profile styles to PROF Proposed, do not click draw in profile view
Set each then close the dialog.
In the Prospector change the names of each profile to <alignment name>-Prop
2. Create secondary road centerline profile from existing surface
Home Tab>Design Panel>Profile - Create Surface Profile.
Select the side road center line alignment.
Select the Exist-25-4 surface. Click Add.
Press Draw in Profile View. Click Create Profile View and digitize the location on the screen.
3. At this time, you may choose to rename the existing surface profile since that option is not given at the time of
creation.
4. Create the desired proposed side road profile by snapping to the Exist-25-4 surface profile at the beginning and
end of construction limits to create a single tangent profile. Do not provide any other design of the proposed side
road profile until completing the next exercise.
5. Save the Drawing.
5:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-004.mp4

090.110.004

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-004.zip
Intersection Objects to Synchronize Vertical Geometry - Secondary road profiles

1. In this section we will design the secondary road profile ( 4th ) using intersection objects to get the
PVI elevations from the main road baseline profile and ETW profiles created in the previous exercise
2. With Crdr-25-4th.dwg open go to Home Tab>Design Panel>Intersection - Create Intersection.
Select the intersection of the main road and the side road center line alignments. (25 and 4th)
When prompted at the command line, Select the 25 alignment as the primary alignment.
Name the intersection Int-25-4
Set the Intersection marker style to Standard and the Intersection label style to _No Display
Go to the Geometry Details page
Uncheck the Offset and curb return profile check box
Uncheck the Create curb return alignments check box
Uncheck the Create or specify offset alignments check box
Verify the main road alignment 25 is shown in Priority row 1
Verify the 25 profile is set to 25-Prop
Verify the side road 4th alignment is shown in the Priority row 2 and select 4th-Prop as the profile.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 191 of 390

Click Create Intersection.


3. Notice a VPI has been created on the 4th-Prop profile. Select the 4th-Prop profile and notice the lock
symbol at the VPI. This denotes that this elevation will be controlled by the intersection object where you
assigned the primary road as 25 and the controlling profile as 25-Prop.

4. Home Tab>Create Design Panel>Intersection - Create Intersection.


Select the intersection of Int-25-L-TrLn and 4th alignments.
When prompted at the command line, Select the Int-25-L-TrLn alignment as the primary
alignment.
Name the intersection Int-25-L-ETW-4
Set the Intersection marker style to Basic-WisDOT-NoPlotand the Intersection label style to _No
Display
Go to the Geometry Details page
Uncheck the Offset and curb return profile check box
Uncheck the Create curb return alignments check box
Uncheck the Create or specify offset alignments check box
Verify the main road alignment Int-25-L-TrLn is shown in Priority row 1
Verify the Int-25-L-TrLn profile is set to Int-25-L-TrLn-Prop
Verify the side road 4th alignment is shown in the Priority row 2 and select 4th-Prop as the
profile.
25-L-ETW should appear as the alignment in Priority row 3. Its profile will be set to 25-L-ETWProp.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 192 of 390

Click OK.
You will see the following message indicating that the 25-L-ETW will effectively be ignored since it
is coincident to the Int-25-L-TrLn profile. Choose the option to Create intersection with dynamic
profiles.
5. Follow the steps above to complete the intersection object for the 25-R-ETW. The 4th-Prop should
now have three VPI depicting the cross slopes across 25 from left ETW to crown to right ETW.

6. Save the drawing.

4:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-005.mp4

090.110.005

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-005.zip
Lane Edge Setup Surface - Side Roads

Follow the concepts shown in 070.025 Lane Edge Setup Surface from corridor object to create a
ETW setup surface for the 4th Avenue side road.
Create Surface profiles for the Int-4th-L-TrnLn and Int-4th-R-TrnLn using the corridor setup surface.

9:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-006.mp4

090.110.006

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-006.zip
Curb Return Setup
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 193 of 390

Create an Exist surface profile and a profile view for each of the curb return alignments.
Ensure the profile view extends beyond the beginning and end of the curb return alignment.
Rename the surface profiles if desired.
For each curb return alignment Create a design profile in the curb return profile view.
Snap to the beginning of the profile view near the existing surface and then set the end of the design profile
near the existing surface at the end of the profile view. This step ensures there is a design profile developed
for the intersection object to use to establish a VPI that will match the edge of turn lane profile
Insert the Setup-Curb-Prof assembly from the WisDOT Assemblies palette.
The assembly includes three slope possibilities derived from the LinkWidthandSlope subassembly. The three
slopes represent the maximum (MAX), minimum (MIN), and normal (NORM) cross slopes in the intersections. The
default minimum slope is 1%. The default maximum slope is 4%. The default normal slope is 2%. These slopes
can be modified to match project-specific conditions. Additional slopes can be added using the LinkWidthandSlope
subassembly if desired (superelevation conditions for example). The subassemblies are named so targeting is
easier.
Create a new Corridor and name it CurbReturn Setup
Parameters tab: Use the Curb Setup-Curb-Prof assembly in the corridor. Add a baseline for each of the
curb return alignments. Use the curb alignments' existing surface profile since a proposed profile has not been
created yet.
Parameters tab: Set the frequency to 2 feet. Change Profile Geometry Points to No. Add an additional
frequency at the intersection of the side road alignment and mainline ETW (edge of travelway) alignment.
Width of Offset Targets, for each curb return baseline region
Set the Target for Subassembly ETW Ali_Prof and Sideroad Ali_Prof to the appropriate TrnLn or ETW
alignment and side road centerline alignment. Set to Target to Nearest Offset.
Set the Target for Subassembly Max Slope TARGET Curb Return Ali to the Curb Return alignment
Slope or Elevation Targets, for each curb return baseline region
Set the Target for Subassembly ETW Ali_Prof and Sideroad Ali_Prof to the appropriate TrnLn or ETW
setup profile and the side road proposed profile. Set to Target to Nearest Offset.
Surfaces tab: Create a new surface called Curb Return-Setup-MAX. Add the MAX link to its definition. Set
the style to No Display. Check the Add as Breakline box.
Surfaces tab: Create a new surface called Curb Return-Setup-MIN. Add the MIN link to its definition. Set
the style to No Display. Check the Add as Breakline box.
Surfaces tab: Create a new surface called Curb Return-Setup-NORM. Add the NORM link to its definition.
Set the style to No Display. Check the Add as Breakline box.
Click Ok to build the setup corridor and surface.
The corridor code set style, the corridor object style and the Feature Line Styles can now be set to No Display.
Home Tab - Design Panel - Profile - Create Surface Profile. Select a curb return alignment. Select the Curb
Return Setup-MAX, Curb Return Setup - MIN, and Curb Return Setup - NORM surfaces. Click Add. Change the
surface profile style to RDWY Lane Edge.
Repeat the previous step for all curb return alignments.
The curb return profile extension on the outsides of the locked PVIs can be adjusted for visual clarity. Best practice
is to not delete these ends. This is because the intersection object is often referencing exactly at that PVI and if
horizontal geometry changes are made that cause the intersection object to reference the profile beyond the
existing PVI it will have no profile to reference. Remember the intersection object is not locking the VPI to the
alignment PC. The profile will need to be stretch and in some cases a new intersection object created.
If you wish to delete profile entities select the profile and go to the Geometry Editor, and use the Delete entity
button.
3:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-007.mp4

090.110.007

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-007.zip
Intersection Objects to Synchronize Vertical Geometry - Curb Returns
Open Corridor drawing Crdr-25-4th.dwg.
Home, Create Deign, Intersections, Create Intersection.
Select the intersection at each end of each curb return. Select the TrnLn alignment as the main road
alignment when prompted
General: Name the Intersections according to the quadrant they are in and the closes centerline, either the
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 194 of 390

secondary or primary road. (i.e. Int-NE-4 and Int-NE-25 for intersections at both ends of the curb return in the
NE quadrant)
Geometry Details: Make sure all check boxes are un-checked.
Verify the alignment priority and the Profile for each alignment is correct.
Press Create Intersection.
Repeat the previous steps for each curb return. Notice the PVIs (lock symbols) that get added to the curb
return profile as the intersections are created.
Using the Min, Normal and Max profiles created in the last step as a guide to create additional PVIs on the curb
return profiles as necessary.
4:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-008.mp4

090.110.008

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-008.zip
Add Intersection Geometry Alignments to Data Shortcuts
Open the Crdr-25-4th.dwg, ensure that masks have been added to all the intersection alignments.
Each alignment that overlaps another alignment or extends through the intersection will require adding a
mask to the alignment in these locations if the alignments are to be used for production drawings.
Each alignment should be in the Centerline Alignments or Miscellaneous Alignments group in the Prospector.
Setting the alignment type to Centerline Alignments will allow you to leverage using superelevation options
without having to make an alignment type change later.
To change the alignment type of any of the alignments so there are Centerline alignments, select the
alignment Properties and change the Type on the Information tab.
Alignments and profiles created in \\12342014\Design\Corridors\Crdr-25-4th.dwg can now be added as Data
Shortcuts.
Save the drawing and add the following alignments and profiles as Data Shortcuts;
Secondary Design Profiles
4th-Prop
Intersection Geometry alignments Design Profiles
Int-25-L-TrnLn
Int-25-R-TrnLn
Int-25-L-EGS
Int-25-R-EGS
Int-4-L-TrnLn
Int-4-R-TrnLn
Int-4-L-EGS
Int-4-R-EGS
Int-25-4th-NW-CR Int-25-4th-NW-CR-Prop
Int-25-4th-NE-CR Int-25-4th-NE-CR-Prop
Int-25-4th-SW-CR Int-25-4th-SW-CR-Prop
Int-25-4th-SE-CR Int-25-4th-SE-CR-Prop
The design profiles developed for the turn lane alignments do not need to be added as Data Shortcuts as
they are only consumed in this drawing by the intersection object and will not be used in another corridor or
other type drawing.
These alignments can be used to create a Pavt-Ultimate.dwg by use of data references and assuring adequate
alignment mask have been developed.
Notice that none of the surface profiles are added to the Data Shortcuts. Adding surface or sampled profiles is
unnecessary since the surfaces and the alignments that developed the surface profiles in this drawing are available
as data references to use in other drawings.

3:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-009.mp4

090.110.009

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-009.zip
1. Fix Broken Intersection Object

Notice some changes have been made to the data set.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 195 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Added definition to the 4th Avenue Proposed profile. Vertical curves added within pavement warp
area and curb returns.
Added definition to the Curb return profiles.
In this data set notice one of the intersection objects on the SW curb return no longer holds a locked PVI
on the proposed curb return profile.
The Intersection object appears to no longer control vertical connection. This can happen for a variety of
possible reasons, such as the profile or alignment was shortened past the intersection point, the
alignments no longer intersect, to point out a few items to watch for as you are building and manipulating
the alignments and profiles.

To fix the intersection object do the following:


Select the broken intersection object, using the right-click or ribbon select Intersection Properties.
On the Information tab highlight the name of Intersection and copy. Exit the dialog.
Delete the non-working intersection and create a new one at the same intersection, using paste to name
the new intersection the same name.
The curb return profile is now controlled by the 4 th Avenue turn lane surface profile derived from the
setup ETW surface.

Module 095 Swept path analysis


095.010 Accurate swept paths for complex OSOW vehicles

Section updated:

6/25/2013

11:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-010-001.mp4

095.010.001

Most vehicles are simplistic, consisting of a simple tractor/trailer configuration with steering at the front axle only.
With sound judgment and guidance from the FDM, these swept paths can be created with relative ease.
More complicated vehicles are appearing statewide. These vehicles include a combination of features or
restrictions that can be difficult to model.
greater than 2 parts (not difficult by itself)
steerable rear axles (either linked or independent)
Independent steerable rear axles are the most difficult because it requires the User, not the
software, to make decisions/judgments about the capability of the vehicle and what is realistic.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 196 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


ground clearance restrictions (3D modeling is required)
yaw restrictions, also known as articulation angle (not difficult by itself)
pitch and roll restrictions (3D modeling required)

Overview
Step 1: Identify the project characteristics What is the design vehicle or vehicles?
Step 2: Gather physical vehicle data dimensions, angle, etc.
Step 3: Document real-world swept paths Survey vehicle maneuvers (Vehicles with more than 1 steering axle)
Step 4: Build the vehicle model Swept path software
Step 5: Trace the real-world swept paths Calibrate your model (Vehicles with more than 1 steering axle)
Step 6: Coordinate with the trucking company Get feedback from the experts
Step 7: Make refinements Adjust based on comments
Step 1: Identify the project characteristics
Is it on the OSOW freight network?
The OSOW vehicles listed in the FDM may not be all inclusive. Include freight as a topic for your business
outreach
The project may be the last mile
Is your project en route to a large bridge?
Step 2: Gather physical vehicle data
Body dimensions
Load dimensions/position
Axle spacing
King pin locations
Steering angle(s)
Articulation angle(s)
Ground clearance
Lock to Lock Time
Step 3: Document real-world swept paths (Vehicles with rear steering)
Coordinate with trucking company
Trace the swept path (front and rear tires) through a 90 degree turn
The more of these you do, the more refined the model will be
Survey the painted swept path at the intersection
Observe and document details like rear axle rate of articulation ( steering angle/distanced traveled)
Step 4: Build the vehicle model
Input the vehicle data into the swept path software
Use Methods Development as a resource
Double check your inputs and confirm with trucking company
Step 5: Trace the real-world swept paths (Vehicles with more than 1 steering axle)
Use the survey data as a guide to drive the vehicle through the intersection
This will act as an aid for how to drive other intersections. (Calibration)
Pay close attention to the rate of articulation at the rear.
Step 6: Coordinate with the trucking company
Share your result with the trucking company. Animate the swept path. Ask them questions like:
Does this look like a realistic way to maneuver this intersection?
Are there any features that would make this intersection easier to drive?
Step 7: Make refinements
Use the feedback from the trucking company to refine the swept path
Make adjustments to the intersection geometry
Send an updated animation to the trucking company.

095.020 Beam transporter

Section updated:

6/25/2013

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Beam transporter exercise files


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/095/095-020-exercise-files.zip
11:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-020-001.mp4

Page 197 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


095.020.001

In 2007, WisDOT in cooperation with Spancrete performed a study to accurately model beam transport trucks with
swept path software. This training package has been assembled to provide guidance to designers on development
of proper swept paths for the beam transport trucks. Included with this training package are the following files:
149' Beam (Training Vehicle).vcl
This vehicle file can be imported in to AutoTURN and used to practice swept path development.
This is the vehicle that was used in the study and should only be used for training purposes. The
actual design vehicle is located in the WisDOT OSOW library and is called 165' Beam 1.
template.dwg
This drawing contains the actual surveyed path of the 149' Beam truck at two intersections (1 left
turn, and 1 right turn). There are multiple paths from multiple vehicles/drivers shown at both
intersections to represent variability.
16tdq125305_crop.tif, 16tdq125320_crop.tif, 16tdq140320_crop.tif
Cropped USGS aerial imagery to provide background reference
Beam Transporter Training.dwg
This file has the template.dwg and USGS aerial imagery xreferenced into it
This file can be used or copied to practice drawing swept paths.
This file contains two swept paths that have been drawn for the left turn and the right turn to show
what the finished swept paths should looks like.
Import the 149' Beam training vehicle into AutoTURN
-Select Vehicles from the AutoTURN menu.
-At the bottom of the Vehicles dialogue box, choose Import Vehicle.
-Select the 149' Beam (Training Vehicle).vcl file and click Open.
Helpful Hints and information for creating beam transporter swept paths:
-The rear bogie articulation is completely independent of the front steering and is controlled with hydraulics by the
driver. A typical articulation rate for the bogie over a given travel distance is dependent on the anticipated vehicle
speed. A good starting point for design purposes is to articulate the rear bogie a maximum of 4-degrees for every
17 feet of travel entering and exiting the maneuver. This is roughly the distance between the front axle and the first
king pin.
-The vehicle is capable of articulating the bogie as a stop condition. However, this is highly undesirable and is only
done is extreme circumstances. This action places elevated lateral forces on the girder and bogie, especially on
dry pavement.
-When articulating the rear bogie while entering the maneuver, try to get the bogie to follow the path of the tractor
as long as you can. This will method will help provide a smooth transition.
-Avoid articulating the bogie too earlier or too quickly causing it to swing outside of the tractor path.
-The maximum articulation angle between the jeep and tractor is 45-degrees. The maximum articulation angle
between the jeep and the beam is 45-degrees. These angles are preset in the vehicle template. Exceeding these
angles increases the risk of tipping the beam. The maximum articulation of the bogie is 20-degrees and is limited
by its mechanical capability. This is also preset in the vehicle template.
Animate Swept Path
From the AutoTURN menu, click the Run Animation button. The Run Animation button has standard controls for
play speed, stop, pause, and a slider to move to a specific position in the swept path. The animation will display
best if the aerial imagery is turned off. Watch for erratic or unrealistic movements such as swerves.
2:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-020-002.mp4

095.020.002

Video Footage
This section contains actual video footage of the beam transport truck's rear bogie and is intended to give the
audience a better idea of how the vehicle works.

13:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-020-003.mp4

095.020.003

Calibration
This is Step 5 from the Accurate Swept Paths for Complex OSOW Vehicle section of this module. Trace the actual
swept path that was surveyed in Step 3 of the Accurate Swept Paths for Complex OSOW Vehicle section of this
module. This section demonstrates how to the Beam Transporter vehicle works by creating a swept path over an
actual surveyed swept path of the vehicle.
Practice drawing swept paths using the 149' Beam training vehicle:
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 198 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

-From the AutoTURN menu, choose vehicles


-In the custom vehicle library, select the 149' Beam (Training Vehicle) in the Vehicles dialogue box and click ok.
-From the AutoTURN menu, click Generate Arc Path
-Place the vehicle on the screen so the front of the tractor roughly lines up with the surveyed point markers
-Click a point in front of the vehicle to define the start angle. Set the start angle so the rear bogie roughly lines up
with the surveyed paths
-In the SmartPath Tools dialogue box, click the Override Angle box. This controls the articulation angle of the rear
bogie. To control the angle in Autocad Civil 3D, hold the Ctrl button down while scrolling your mouse wheel.
Negative override angles are for left turns and positive override angles are for right turns.
15:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-020-004.mp4

095.020.004

Maneuvering a Roundabout
In this exercise, we will practice maneuvering the beam transport vehicle through a single lane roundabout.
Place the swept path on the proper layer. There are layers available in the wisdot templates for swept paths. They
can be located easily by using the RAB layer filter.
RAB_EB_TURN_Left
RAB_EB_TURN_Right
RAB_EB_TURN_Thru
RAB_EB_TURN_U
Remember: The 165' Beam vehicle located in the WisDOT OSOW library is to be used for design.
Create a swept path without applying an override angle to the rear bogie.
In some cases, minor modifications to the roundabout entry, truck apron, and exit can be made to make this
possible. Adding features like a truck apron to roundabout entry, expanding the central island truck apron, and
widening the roundabout exit can sometimes be done to make it easier for the vehicle. Be sure to have features
like these reviewed by a qualified roundabout designer and get WisDOT approval.
Create the swept path using the rear bogie override angle.
The through maneuver on a roundabout is an S-curve. The key is to make the S-curve as flat as possible for this
vehicle. Maneuvering an S-curve requires the bogie to articulate left, then right, and then back left again. While
doing this, it is important not to exceed the 4-degree/17 ft rule for transitioning the bogie angle. Only articulate the
bogie as much as is needed and no more.

095.030 Ground clearance analysis

Section updated:

6/25/2013

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Ground clearance exercise files


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/095/095-030-exercise-files.zip
5:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-030-001.mp4

095.030.001

Setup
Create DST Lowboy DWG File
C3D=>New=>Drawing
Use wisdot10.dwt template to create the new dwg file
Name the drawing DST Lowboy.dwg
Set working folder to c:/WisDOT/Design/c3d
Set Data Shortcuts folder to 44444444
Xref Edglines
External References Manager
Attach Pavt-RAB.dwg file in the Edgelines folder
Use relative path attachment
Data Shortcut Reference Top Roadway Model surface
Found in Data Shortcuts=>Surfaces area of the Prospector
Right-Click on RoadwayModel TOP
=> Create Reference.
View top surface in Final Top Border style
Select surface => right-click => Surface properties
Surface Properties dialog box => Information Tab

Page 199 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


6:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-030-002.mp4

095.030.002

2D Swept Path
Select and edit the DST Lowboy 1 vehicle in the WisDOT Library
AutoTURN Pro 3D or AutoTURN => Configure => Vehicles
Select the WisDOT Library
Select the DST Lowboy 1 vehicle
Click the Edit Vehicle button
Apply a point load to the DST Load 1 vehicle
Click the Define 2D Loads button
Use the white arrows to select the jeep portion of the vehicle
Set Load Type to 1 point
Point location will be at the king pin (0.00 ft left/right, 1.33 ft behind)
Click OK three times to return to the drawing
Create 2D swept path
AutoTURN Pro 3D
AutoTURN Pro 3D => 2D SmartPaths => 2D Arc Path
AutoTURN
AutoTURN => Smart Paths => Generate Arc Path
Make copy of swept path and Hide
Copy and Paste Clipboard
Click on the swept path
Clipboard => Copy with Base Point
Select a reference point location
Right Click => Clipboard => Paste
Select the same reference point location
Hide Object
Select the swept path
Right Click => Isolate Objects => Hide Selected Objects
Create Polyline Path for 3D DST Lowboy 2 part vehicle placement
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Configure => Properties
Make sure the Load is check under the Envelope properties, update the swept path is necessary,
click OK
Explode
Explode command => select swept path => Enter
Join
Home => Modify => Join
Select all of the polyline segments representing the jeep king pin (point load) path ents
Select and delete the remaing exploded swept path elements

11:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-030-003.mp4

095.030.003

3D Swept Path
Place 3D Simulation
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Configure => Vehicles
Select the DST Lowboy 2 part 1 design vehicle from the WisDOT Library
AutoTURN Pro 3D => 3D Terrain => Terrain
Select the RoadModel TOP Surface
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Place 3D => Place Simulation
Select a location near the beginning of the Polyline representing the jeep king pin path
Develop a generalized ground clearance profile
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Clearance Analysis => Vehicle Clearance
Cut a profile along the path of the jeep king pin.
Not representative of the entire vehicle envelope
Only need Ground Clearance checked for this exercise.
Choose desired scale and color scheme
Click Place Report
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 200 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Cut Cross Sections of Specific Areas of Concern
Home => Draw =>
Draw lines at locations of where you want a cross section. Can be in any direction
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Clearance Analysis => Punch Through
For each cross section, select the path first, then the line
Select the desired elements and color scheme and click OK
8:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-030-004.mp4

095.030.004

3D Simulation
Create 3D animation
Orbit
Orbit to desire point of view
Surface Properties
Choose a surface style that shows the TIN
View => Views => View Styles
Select the desired view style (Conceptual works well)
Place the vehicle at desired locations or Animate
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Visualize 3D => Place Vehicle
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Visualize 3D => Animate

7:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-030-005.mp4

095.030.005

Design Changes
Switch Surface
Data shortcut reference the revised design surface
Delete the data shortcut reference from the drawing
Regenerate Simulation
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Edits => Regerate Simulation
Select the path
Select the new terrain (surface)
Recheck Ground Clearance
Punch Through is not dynamic and need to be redone
Typical Problem Areas in Roundabouts
1. Over-tracking at the entry curve/lowboy hitting the curb head
1. Consider Curb and Gutter 4-inch Sloped Type G and a truck apron along the right side
2. Entry and exit rollover
1. Consider flattening the circulatory roadway crown in these areas
2. Avoid steep profiles entering and exiting the roundabout
3. Truck Aprons
1. Consider flattening the truck apron slope
2. See if the vehicle can track more on the circulatory roadway
1. May need to consider 1a.
3. Look at the circulatory roadway profile
1. Keep it as flat/gentle as possible and still maintain drainage
2. Locate the crest away from the area of concern.

Module 100 Viewing and editing corridor sections


100.010 Corridor section editor

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Corridor section editor exercise files


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/100/100-exercise-files.zip
17:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/100/100-010-001.mp4

100.010.001

Corridor Section Editor Overview


Viewer that shows corridor stations in a section view
View changes UCS to be in line with corridor model
Uses clipping planes to isolate the current station
Freezes some layers to clarify the view
User can navigate stations of the corridor model

Page 201 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Edits can be made in this viewer


Edits are to current station
Edits can be applied to a station range
Troubleshooting of corridor model issues

Opening the Corridor Section Editor


Toolspace > Prospector > Corridor > right-click on corridor name > Corridor Section Editor
Select on the corridor > context ribbon > Section Editor
View/Edit Options
Edit Viewport Configuration
Section Editor
select a corridor feature line it sets at first alignment station
select a frequency line it sets to the chosen station
Section View context ribbon
Close Ribbon when done(!)

Section Editor View/Navigation


The View
Blue grid with relative elevations
Corridor shape represented by Code Set Style
Alignments are marked as vertical colored lines
Surfaces represented by current style
View Configuration
Automatically divides screen into three viewports
Plan/Profile/Section view
Navigation
Section View Context ribbon > Station Selection panel
Advance one station, to next region, to last station
Pull-down menu to choose specific station
Specify Station to create your own
Context Ribbon > Zoom to Extents/Zoom to Offset and Elevation

Section Editor Parameter Editor


Section Editor Context Tab > Corridor Edit Tools > Parameter Editor
Assembly list of subassemblies at current station
Can edit the unlocked Value fields
Edited fields receive an Override TRUE
Design Field displays original setting, pre-overrides
Apply to Station Range repeats edits for current station to stations end
Clearing station overrides
Parameter Editor, change parameters for that station
Corridor properties > Parameters tab > Override column
Remove overridden stations from list
18:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/100/100-010-002.mp4

100.010.002

Corridor-STH25-4thAve-12.dwg
Section editor example

100.020 WisDOT standards - corridor section editor

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

2:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/100/100-020-001.mp4

Page 202 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


100.020.001

Corridor overrides are created when Edits are made using Corridor Section Editor
Corridor overrides are maintained in the Corridor Object until they are deleted or updated
Corridor Overrides include
Parameter overrides changes to the subassembly inputs
Geometric overrides manual changes to the Corridor Links

Comparison to CAiCE
Corridor Section Editor is similar to View/Edit Xsections

Wisconsin DOT Drawing File Names and File Management


Corridors will be created within their own DWG file or files
Project folder Corridors are found in
\Lan Drive\C3D\ProjectIDFolder\Design\Corridor
File Naming
Corridor-<Main Road>-<Secondary Road>-<Comment>.DWG
Example
Corridor-STH25-4thAve-Approaches.DWG
Note: we are flexible with our file naming. Not so flexible with our project folder structure. Biggest thing to
remember is to name files so others can figure out what they contain. Placing files in the proper project folder is a
great start!

WisDOT Standards
See Corridor Styles
Corridor Section Editor Need to Know!!!
We do not recommend doing Geometric edits to a Corridor. The Overrides are not dynamic with the Corridor
changes
Be sure Corridor Overrides are still valid if the overall Corridor is changed
DO NOT press the X (Exit) button on the upper right hand corner of the graphics window when using the Corridor
Section Editor. Use the Close button on the Editor Tab of the Ribbon.
If you have any questions about WisDOT vBooks, standards, workflows, etc, feel free to contact
support.cae@dot.wi.gov
6:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/100/100-020-002.mp4

100.020.002

Quick demo
Make parameter edit control
Make a geometric edit
Show results
Change corridor and rebuild
Show how edits are still there
Remove edits
Cover what was mentioned in need to know.
Cover what user needs to do if they get their graphics stuck in Corridor Section Editor.

Module 110 Feature lines and gradings

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 203 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


110.010 Grading basics

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Grading exercise files


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/110/110-exercise-files.zip
17:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-010-001.mp4

110.010.001

Needed for grading:


Site
Feature line
Grading criteria
Grading group and objects
Grading Feature Fundamentals
Site
Allows several objects to interact
Grading/feature lines, parcels, sometimes alignments
Objects in other sites will NOT interact
Grading groups and feature lines NEED a site to exist
Feature Line
Used for the grading footprint
Basically a 3D Polyline only smarter
Many editing options
Geometry and elevation
Can be added to surface as a breakline (separate from grading tools)
Grading Criteria
Rules for grading from footprint (feat line)
User defines two sides of right triangle
Slope and distance
Slope and elevation
Distance and elevation
Unlocked criteria prompts for user entry, makes criteria more versatile for different uses/projects
Locked criteria takes default, speeds up grading process
Grading Group
Allow separate grading objects to interact
Grading objects and feature lines in different groups will not interact
Allows balancing of site volumes
Do not need to be contiguous
Grading Feature Specifics
Have a site for the grading
Have feature line(s) in place
Have grading criteria available, plan what will be needed
Home tab > Create Design panel > Grading > Create Grading

110.020 Grading workflow

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

26:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-020-001.mp4

110.020.001

Grading Feature Workflow


Have feature line(s) in place
Have grading criteria available, plan what will be needed
Home tab > Create Design panel > Grading > Create Grading
The Grading command toolbar
Set Grading Group
Set Criteria Set, then first criteria to be used
Select Create Grading command
Creating feature lines
Create 2D polyline, convert to feature line
Will require elevation edits

Page 204 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Draw feature line natively
Requires elevation input for each vertex

Create Grading Command


Select Feature Line
Identify grading side
Will this grading object be for the entire feature line, or just part of it?
Prompts specific to the criteria
Grading Transition
Creates grading objects between areas of different slopes
Select feature line
Select point between the two gradings
Grading Infill
Grading object
Inside closed feature line shape
Can be separate feature lines, as long as its closed

110.030 Editing feature line elevations

Section updated:

10/1/2012

24:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-030-001.mp4

110.030.001

Editing Feature Line Elevations Overview


Edit Elevations ribbon panel appears in Feature Line Context tab
Select the feature line you need to edit
In the context menu toggle on the Edit Elevation button
This opens the Elevation Edits panel
All tools will focus on elevation component of the feature line

Feature Line Edit Elevations


Elevation Editor in Edit Elevations panel or right-click menu
Controls elevations of individual vertex points
Can set vertex elevations by assigning grades between vertex points
grade forward or grade back always affects the feature line segment ahead
Can set raise/lower increment to affect several vertices
Can assign several vertices to take surface elevation
Insert Elevation Point Elevation Points are a vertex that has no X/Y control, only elevation
Creates bends or elevation changes
Symbolized as circular grip point on feat. line and in panorama
Delete Elevation Point like delete PI, only for elevation points
Quick Elevation Edit allows immediate feedback of vertex elevation and feat. line slope by hovering cursor near
feat. line
Can hover near any feat line, not just one selected
Edit Elevations Provides tooltip report of elevation nearest feature line vertex or slope of nearest feature line line
segment
Left-clicking allows the nearest vertex/line slope to be edited
Will function for any feature line, not just the selected one
Set Grade/Slope between Points allows vertex elevations to be set by controlling the slope or grade of the feature
line
Can set multiple slopes at one time, along entire portion or portion of feature line
Insert High/Low Elevation Point Calculates a high or low elevation point by assigning grade forward and back
from opposite ends of a feature line
Raise/Lower by Reference Raise or lower the elevation of a feature line by reference to an object with known
elevation
Set Elevation by Reference Sets the elevation of a feature line vertex by reference to an object with known
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 205 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


elevation
Allows for relative grade/slope/difference between the object and the vertex

Adjacent Elevation by Reference Allows editing of an adjacent feature lines elevation in relation to the selected
feature line. Options are Elevation difference, Grade or Slope
Grade Extension by Reference Sets elevations by extending the grade of a segment on another feature line
Elevation from Surface Sets vertex points to surface elevations at their location
Intermediate Grade Break creates an elevation point where the feature crosses a surface triangle (entire
feature line)
Raise/Lower Feature Line specifies elevation difference to raise or lower the feature line, or set to a specific
elevation

110.040 Editing feature line geometry

Section updated:

10/1/2012

20:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-040-001.mp4

110.040.001

Editing Feature Line Geometry Overview


Allows for editing of the feature line in XY plane
Can adjust the feature line to represent a grading footprint or surface geometry more accurately
Feature lines are like 3D polylines with more intelligence for grading functions, so editing is similar to Polyline edits
Feature Lines have a measuring stick which uses stationing this is not related to alignments
Open geometry editing tools
Select on the feature line > Edit Geometry toggle > Edit Geometry panel

Feature Line Edit Geometry


Insert PI places a vertex with X/Y/Z location control
Delete PI can delete individual vertex points
Deletes whichever vertex is nearest
Break identify begin and end of gap in feat. line
Results in two separate feature lines
Trim trims feat line against an object, polyline, line, etc.
Join glues two feature lines together
Two lines must have end points that are coincident
Result in one feat line from the two
Reverse reverses direction of feat line direction
Edit Curve adjust curve radius, reports length, chord, and tangent data
Fillet inserts curve tangent to two feature line legs
User identifies the vertex
R to set Radius
A to assign curve radius to ALL vertices along selected feature lines
J for joining two separate feature lines while filleting at that join point
Fit Curve identify 3 or more line vertices and it creates an arc
Smooth automated fit curve routine. No user input
Weed to reduce number of vertices along feat. Line
Grading can hang up over too many small feature line segments
Will remove detail from feature line, user decides how much is appropriate
Stepped Offset horizontal and vertical
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 206 of 390

Assign horizontal offset distance


Indicate which side of feature line to offset to
Provide vertical offset definition
G=grade, S=Slope, D=Difference (great for 0 or flat) E=Elevation, V=Variable

110.050 WisDOT standards - feature lines and gradings

Section updated:

7/1/2010

7:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-050-001.mp4

110.050.001

Grading and Feature Lines explained


The objective of our detailed Corridor (and Intersection) modeling to produce a series of Proposed Roadway
Surfaces that are usable for: final cross section output; earthwork; and Automated Machine Guidance. The Corridor
(and Intersection) modeling tools are very powerful and will allow us to handle very complex situations. Sometimes
using the Corridor modeling tools can be inefficient. Civil 3D offers other tools (objects) to augment the creation of
the Proposed Roadway Surfaces. These tools (objects) include Feature Lines and Gradings.
A Feature Line is a line that represents some important feature in the drawing, such as a ridge line or the bottom of
a swale. A feature line can be drawn with the Draw Feature Line command, or created from 2D and 3D polylines,
lines, and arcs. You can also export feature lines from corridor models (from Civil 3D Online Help)
Feature Lines are stored in a Site. Sites maintain topological relationships between the objects stored in that Site.
Consider a Site that contains Feature Line 1 and Feature Line 2 is added to that Site. Feature Line 2 crosses
Feature Line 1 . Feature Line 2 will have an Elevation Point added at the crossing (and elevation) of Feature Line
1.
Feature Lines can be created from
CAD 2D and 3D Polylines
Feature Line Layout (manual)
Corridor Feature Line
Alignment
Feature Line properties
Name and Style

Civil 3D Gradings
You can use the grading tools to design finished graded surfaces. Gradings are objects that have their own
properties and behavior like other AutoCAD Civil 3D objects. You create a grading by selecting a base line in the
drawing, and then specifying a projection method and target, for example, grade at 3:1 to meet an existing surface.
Save time and effort by predefining such values and saving them as grading criteria.
Subsequent gradings you create will use the current criteria. You can also create named grading styles that
combine specific display properties, such as colors. In addition to using the current criteria, any grading you create
uses the current style. (from Civil 3D Help)
Gradings are stored in a Site remember that Sites maintain Topology between the Gradings. If two
Gradings that overlap are stored in the same Site, the overlaps will be resolved (this is super handy for things
like Gore areas)
Gradings are created from Feature Lines and Grading Criteria. They are stored in a Site under the Grading
Group collection.
Grading Groups
Have Descriptions
Can Automatically create Surfaces (dynamic relationship to the Grading Group)
Use Grading Criteria
Slope to Distance
Slope to Elevation
Slope to Surface
Slope to Elevation Difference
Can contain multiple Feature Lines and Gradings
1:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-050-002.mp4

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 207 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


110.050.002

CAiCE Survey Chains are similar to Civil 3D Feature Lines


CAiCE Site Design Tools are somewhat similar to Gradings
Differences between CAiCE and Civil 3D
Civil 3D Corridor Feature Lines, Feature Lines, Gradings, and Surfaces can be dynamically linked.
Grading Surfaces can be pasted into larger surfaces and the changes are automatically updated when the
grading surface changes
Surfaces can be shared by Reference to Data Shortcuts so all who have access to the Project Folder can use
the proposed surfaces.
Using a combination of Corridor Surfaces, Feature Lines and Gradings to create Proposed Roadway Models are
very powerful
Feature Lines and Gradings are found in Corridor and Corridor Refinements Drawing Files. Access these Modules
for more information on DWG file location and naming.

3:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-050-003.mp4

110.050.003

WisDOT file standards


WisDOT drawing template (WisDOT12.DWT) contains:
Feature Line Styles
Layers and symbology for Feature Lines
Grading Criteria
Naming Sites
Site - <comment>
Site STH25And4thAVe -NW Quadrant
Naming Feature Line
<What it represents>--<Comment>
NW Quadrant Terrace
Naming Grading Group
Grading-<Comment>-<Comment>
Grading-NW Quadrant
Note: we are not enforcing strict naming standards for sites, feature lines and gradings. Make sure they are named
so you can keep track of them. Equally important, name them so someone else can review your project and figure
out what the Sites, Gradings and Feature Lines represent.

WisDOT Sharing Feature Lines and Gradings


Feature lines and Gradings are created to enhance the Proposed Roadway Models. They are not shared
individually, the resulting Roadway Models are shared.
Proposed Roadway Model surfaces can be shared with anyone who has access to the Project Data shortcuts
using surface Data Shortcuts
Objects derived from Proposed Roadway Model surfaces can be shared with outside organizations using
LandXML or possibly other custom formats within Civil 3D Reports or Subscription Advantage Pack
Feature Lines and Gradings Need to Know!!!
Keep good project organization. You are beginning to see all of the files, data objects and combination of data
objects that we are dealing with. Civil 3D does a great job of setting us up successfully but the rest is up to us.
Good project organization is a must
Feature Lines and Gradings are used to enhance the Proposed Roadway Models. We can quite easily create
enhancements to details without going through lots of Corridor edits or customization
Sites are VERY important. Remember, the Feature Lines and Gradings contained in a site interact with each
other (Topology). Create separate sites if you want to separate the data.
Feature Lines can be created many different ways. WisDOT Workflow Exercise shows how to create Feature
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 208 of 390

Lines for Curb Return slope finishing. We have added an example demonstrating creation of Feature Lines and
Gradings that are dynamically linked to the Corridor and the Refined Surfaces.

Module 120 Roadway model


120.010 WisDOT standards - roadway models

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Workflow for roadway model and refinement


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-010-workflow.pdf
2:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-001.mp4

120.010.001

Introduction
Why Roadway Models???

7:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-002.mp4

120.010.002

Reduced Design Mistakes


Better Representation of design intent
More detailed design = more problems solved before construction

6:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-003.mp4

120.010.003

AMG usage reduced construction cost

5:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-004.mp4

120.010.004

WisDOT will be making the Roadway Model a design deliverable

6:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-005.mp4

120.010.005

Roadway Model Content


Roadway Models are made up of surfaces which represent 4 concepts:
Existing Ground
Datum
Base Course
Top
One Roadway Model for each Construction Stage

2:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-006.mp4

120.010.006

Design Data Progression


1. Geometric Objects
2. Corridors
3. Corridor Surfaces
4. Refinement Surfaces
5. Roadway Model Surfaces

11:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-007.mp4

120.010.007

Civil 3D roadway model development workflow diagram

4:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-008.mp4

120.010.008

Surface types
Corridor surface - Datum
Roadway model surface - Datum
Corridor surface - Top
Roadway model surface - Top

7:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-009.mp4

Page 209 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


120.010.009

Roadway model surface - Top


Refinement surface - Datum
Roadway model surface - Exist
Corridor model surface - Base course
Refinement surface - Base course
Roadway model surface - Base course
Roadway model surface - Exist

4:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-010.mp4

120.010.010

Design data progression - another look

6:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-011.mp4

120.010.011

Developing refinement top surface

3:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-012.mp4

120.010.012

Handling roadway projects that are difficult to process with limited computer hardware
Divide the project into multiple corridors and merge the resultant surfaces together.

3:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-013.mp4

120.010.013

Continued discussion on dealing with large roadway projects

5:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-014.mp4

120.010.014

Summary
Why Roadway Models?
Roadway Model Content
Design Data Progression

120.020 Exercise DS1400 - Create corridor surfaces

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-020-create-corridor-surfaces.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-020-proj-dataset.zip
3:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-001.mp4

120.020.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset

6:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-002.mp4

120.020.002

Create corridor datum surface

7:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-003.mp4

120.020.003

Add data to corridor datum surface

6:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-004.mp4

120.020.004

Create corridor top surface

4:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-005.mp4

120.020.005

Create corridor base course surface

5:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-006.mp4

120.020.006

Inspect corridor surfaces

7:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-007.mp4

Page 210 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


120.020.007
4:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-008.mp4

120.020.008

Add boundary to corridor datum surface 2

3:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-009.mp4

120.020.009

Inspect corridor datum surface

5:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-010.mp4

120.020.010

Add boundary to corridor top surface 1

5:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-011.mp4

120.020.011

Add boundary to corridor top surface 2

3:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-012.mp4

120.020.012

Add boundary to corridor base course surface 1

5:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-013.mp4

120.020.013

Add boundary to corridor base course surface 2

5:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-014.mp4

120.020.014

Inspect corridor surfaces in model space

5:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-015.mp4

120.020.015

Inspect corridor surfaces in corridor section window

4:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-016.mp4

120.020.016

Fix corridor top surface

2:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-017.mp4

120.020.017

Create data shortcuts

120.030 Exercise DS1500 - Create refinement surfaces

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-030-create-refinement-surfaces.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-030-proj-dataset.zip
2:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-001.mp4

120.030.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset

3:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-002.mp4

120.030.002

Create refinement surface DWGs

5:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-003.mp4

120.030.003

Data shortcut references to corridor surfaces

2:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-004.mp4

120.030.004

Create refinement datum surface

2:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-005.mp4

120.030.005

Add data to refinement datum surface

1:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-006.mp4

120.030.006

Create refinement top surface

5:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-007.mp4

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 211 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


120.030.007
6:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-008.mp4

120.030.008

Relationship of refinement datum and top surfaces

1:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-009.mp4

120.030.009

Create refinement base course surface

3:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-010.mp4

120.030.010

Inspect refinement surfaces together

1:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-011.mp4

120.030.011

Review

120.040 Exercise DS1600 - Refine refinement surfaces

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-040-refine-refinement-surfaces.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-040-proj-dataset.zip
3:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-001.mp4

120.040.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset

4:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-002.mp4

120.040.002

Update refinement surface references

4:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-003.mp4

120.040.003

Review southwest quadrant refinement needs

6:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-004.mp4

120.040.004

Refine southwest quadrant in corridor

7:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-005.mp4

120.040.005

Create ditch flowline feature line southwest quadrant

1:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-006.mp4

120.040.006

Add ditch flowline feature line to surface southwest quadrant

3:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-007.mp4

120.040.007

Add elevation points to ditch feature line southwest quadrant

7:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-008.mp4

120.040.008

Create clear zone feature line southwest quadrant

7:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-009.mp4

120.040.009

Create slope intercept feature line southwest quadrant

5:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-010.mp4

120.040.010

Inspect southwest quadrant. Swap edges fixes.

7:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-011.mp4

120.040.011

Create featue line breaklines for southeast quadrant

8:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-012.mp4

120.040.012

Create featue line breaklines for northeast quadrant

9:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-013.mp4

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 212 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


120.040.013
4:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-014.mp4

120.040.014

Inspect all intersection quadrants

5:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-015.mp4

120.040.015

Swap edges refinement

3:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-016.mp4

120.040.016

Extract 3D polylines from surface border

1:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-017.mp4

120.040.017

Create boundary feature line from 3D polyline

8:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-018.mp4

120.040.018

Edit boundary feature line geometry

1:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-019.mp4

120.040.019

Add boundary feature line as surface boundary

6:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-020.mp4

120.040.020

Add refined datum to refinement top surface

5:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-021.mp4

120.040.021

Swap edges on refinement top surface

120.050 Exercise DS1700 - Create roadway model surfaces

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-050-create-roadway-model-surfaces.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-050-proj-dataset.zip
2:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-001.mp4

120.050.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset

4:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-002.mp4

120.050.002

Create roadway model DWGs

7:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-003.mp4

120.050.003

Create roadway model Exist surface

4:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-004.mp4

120.050.004

Create roadway model Base course surface

3:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-005.mp4

120.050.005

Create roadway model Top surface

3:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-006.mp4

120.050.006

Create roadway model datum surface

1:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-007.mp4

120.050.007

Review

120.060 Corridor tips

Section updated:

12/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

8:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-060-001.mp4

120.060.001

Creating a cleaner corridor look 1

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 213 of 390

7:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-060-002.mp4

120.060.002

Creating a cleaner corridor look 2

120.070 Rural driveways

Section updated:

3/1/2013

Exercise project dataset 1


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-070-proj-dataset1.zip
Exercise project dataset 2
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-070-proj-dataset2.zip
3:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-001.mp4

120.070.001

Combine Refinement-Top Surface with Exist Surface


120-070-proj-dataset1.zip
Create a new drawing using the wisdot template and save the drawing with an appropriate name such as
Surface-STH25-Refinement-Top with Exist.dwg
Data shortcut reference the existing ground surface and the Refinement-Top surface.
Create a new surface named something like STH25-Refinement-Top with Exist
In Toolspace Prospector tab, right click on the surface and choose select.
From the contextual surface ribbon-modify panel, click Edit Surface-Paste Surface
Choose the Existing Surface.
Repeat the command and choose the Refinement-Top Surface.
Save the drawing and create a data shortcut for the Refinement-Top with Exist surface

5:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-002.mp4

120.070.002

Create New Drawing for Driveway Surfaces


Create a new drawing using the wisdot template and save the drawing with an appropriate name such as
STH25-Driveways.dwg
Data shortcut reference the Refinement-Top with Exist surface.
Data shortcut reference alignments for the centerline, edge of pavement, edge of paved shoulder, and edge
of gravel shoulder.
Xreference mapping dwg file(s).

14:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-003.mp4

120.070.003

Create Driveway Horizontal Geometry


Determine the approximate driveway limits (offset). This can be done in multiple ways such as using your
corridor section editor, or creating a quick profile along the driveway. The minimum extent of your driveway
limits should be at the back slope of the adjacent ditch (slope intercept). Also, determine whether you will
need more than one slope to define your driveway for added culvert clearance or rollover control.
Draw the driveway top in plan view on the P_DWY layer. Include the driveway entry radii and tapers. The
driveway can be created with line and arcs, but the driveway edges should ultimately be converted to five
polylines (left side, right side, match location, centerline, and edge of shoulder).

11:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-004.mp4

120.070.004

Determine Driveway Elevation/Grade


Create a new Site. Name the site the approximate location of the driveway. For example: 380+75 LT.
Convert the driveway match polyline into a feature line. Name the feature line appropriately (For example:
380+75 LT Match). Assign the Standard style to the feature line. The style assignment determines the
elevation hierarchy of the feature lines in the site. Assign elevation to the feature line from the Refinement-Top
with Exist surface using the Elevations from Surface command. Make sure it is included in the site created for
this driveway.
It is highly recommended that you set up two viewports. One viewport should be set to plan view and the
other should be set to an isometric view of the driveway location.
Set the isometric viewport to a rendered view style such as Conceptual. This will allow you to watch your
driveway surface take shape as you build it.
Convert the edge of shoulder polyline into a feature line. Name the feature line appropriately (For example:
380+75 LT ES). Assign the Standard style to the feature line. Assign elevation to the feature line from the
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 214 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Refinement-Top with Exist surface using the Elevations from Surface command. Make sure it is included in
the site created for this driveway.
Convert the driveway centerline polyline into a feature line. Name the feature line appropriately (For
example: 380+75 LT CL) Do not assign the feature line a style. The feature line will adopt its elevations from
the edge of shoulder and match feature lines.
Convert the driveway left and right side polylines into a feature lines. Name the feature lines appropriately
(For example: 380+75 LT LT and 380+75 LT RT). Do not assign the feature line a style. The feature line will
automatically adopt elevations from the edge of shoulder and match feature lines.
Use the Grade/Slope Between Points command to straight-line grade the left and right sides between the
edge of shoulder and the match location.
9:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-005.mp4

120.070.005

Create Gradings
Create a Grading Group in the same Site as the driveway. Name the Grading Group the driveway location.
Check Automatic Surface Creation and Use Group Name.
Set the Grading Criteria Set to "Rural Driveway". (if your drawing does not have the Rural Driveway criteria
set, use or create a slope to surface criteria)
Create 6:1 Gradings along the left and right driveway feature lines. If the roadway foreslope is steeper than
the driveway side slope, the gradings should extend from the driveway slope intercept (match location) to
approximately +/-10' short of the edge of gravel shoulder. If the roadway foreslope is the same as or flatter
than the driveway side slope, the grading can extend the full length of the feature line.
Tip: When prompted for the grading end location, it is useful to use the Length option at the command line.
The command will then notify you of the length remaining to the end of the feature line.
Create additional gradings along the left and right driveway feature lines that match the roadway foreslope if
the roadway foreslope is steeper than the driveway side slope. These gradings should extend from a point
about +/-0.01' from the end of edge of gravel shoulder to the edge of gravel shoulder.
Create Grading Transitions (only if the roadway foreslope is steeper than the driveway side slopes)
Select Create Transition from the Grading Creation Tools
Select the feature line.
Select a point between the 6:1 grading and 4:1 grading.
Save the drawing
Create Grading Infill for Driveway Top
Choose the Create Infill command from the Grading Creation Tools.
Select the regions defining the top of the driveway and hit enter.
You will see the completed driveway surface in the isometric view.
Save the file.

12:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-006.mp4

120.070.006

Driveways with skew and multiple slopes - Horizontal Geometry


All the steps outlined above apply.
Add an additional polyline representing the slope break in the driveway profile.

7:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-007.mp4

120.070.007

Driveways with skew and multiple slopes - Determine Driveway Elevation and Grade
All the steps outlined above apply.
Convert the additional polyline representing the slope break in the driveway profile to a feature line. Assign
the feature line the standard style.
Assign this feature line elevation by using the Adjacent Elevations by Reference command.

8:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-008.mp4

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 215 of 390

120.070.008

All the steps outlined above apply.

6:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-009.mp4

120.070.009

Combine Driveway Surfaces into a Single Surface


120-070-proj-dataset2.zip
Extract Driveway Surface Boundaries
Set all of the driveway surfaces to a border only display style
Modify Tab - Ground Data Panel - Surfaces
From the Surface contextual ribbon - Surface Tools Panel, select Extract Objects
Select a driveway surface
Choose Select from Drawing in the Value column. Select the driveway surface boundary. Hit Enter and
then click OK to exit the command.
Repeat this for all of the driveway surfaces to create a 3D polyline for each driveway boundary.
Create Combined Driveway Surface
Draw a poly line that encompasses all of the driveway surfaces.
Create a new surface called STH25-Driveways
Expand the STH25-Driveways surface definition in the Toolspace Prospector, right click on Edits, and choose
Paste Surface.
Select all of the individual driveway surfaces and click OK.
Right click on Boundaries in the STH-25-Driveway surface definition in the Toolspace Prospector. Choose
Add...
Name the boundary Hide and the type should be Hide. Click OK.
Select the polyline that encompasses all of the driveway surfaces.
Right click on Boundaries in the STH-25-Driveway surface definition in the Toolspace Prospector. Choose
Add...
The name should be Show and the type should be Show. Check Non-destructive breakline. Click OK.
Select all of the individual driveway boundaries (3D polylines).

120.080 Extract Design Surface Data Utility Overview

Section updated:

6/17/2015

Exercise project dataset


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-080-001-proj-dataset.zip
7:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-001.mp4

120.080.001

Introduction

The Extract Design Surface Data Utility is used to extract the breaklines that define the design surface.
The tool uses a 2 step process. During the first step, the utility systematically follows through each of
the surface definition operations and extracts the breaklines that were contributed by that operation. The
extracted breaklines are inserted into a new base AutoCAD drawing, as indicated in the Select a drawing
template input. Each breakline is assigned a layer based on its source using the template
SourceFile.SourceObject.ObjectType.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 216 of 390

Once all of the source breaklines have been extracted and consolidated into a single dwg file, the tool
proceeds with the validation phase. The tool can be setup to proceed to the validation phase
automatically, or it can be triggered manually by the user. At this stage, the breaklines are in the form of
line segments. The validation phase included four processes that analyze each line segment:
1. Duplicate removal: All line segments that are redundant with another line segment within a
specified tolerance are deleted.
2. Surface Paste: All breakline segments from contributing sources are added to the dwg file. If a
surface paste occurs in the surface definitions, any breakline segments that are within the surface
past boundary and removed and replaced with the breakline segments of the pasted surfaces. For
example: The Rfnt-Top surface has the Rfnt-Datum surface pasted into it. Then, the Crdr-Top
surface is pasted over the Rfnt-Datum surface. The utility will extract breakline segments from both
the Rfnt-Datum surface and the Crdr-Top surface. During the validation phase, the utility will
removal all line segments from the Rfnt-Datum surface that fall within the boundary of the Crdr-Top
surface.
3. Line Segment Validation: Each breakline segment is compared to the TIN edges of the design
surface. If the midpoint of a breakline segment does not fall on a TIN edge within the specified
tolerance, it is moved to a new layer with the prefix LINE_NO_MATCH. If the midpoint of the
breakline segment falls on a TIN edge, but its end vertices do not match the TIN edge vertices
within the specified tolerance, it is moved to a new layer with the prefix LINE_NO_MATCH.
4. Breakline Segment Join: The utility joins the breakline segments if their end vertices are within a
specified tolerance. The end result is a series of 3D Polylines.

7:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-002.mp4

120.080.002

Surface Breakline Extraction and Validation


1. Open the refinement surface dwg.
2. Open the utility from Toolbox WisDOT Toolbox WisDOT Macros Design Surface Data Extractor
3. Choose the refinement surface to extract data from.
4. Specify the new breakline drawing location and name. The file should typically be located in the Surfaces
directory of the Civil 3D project. Name the file starting with the refinement surface name and the words
RawData. Example: Rfnt-Top-RawData
5. Acad.dwt is the default template and is appropriate in most cases.
6. Specify the Civil 3D project folder location as the data shortcuts project folder. This is important information
that the tool needs to locate the breakline sources.
7. Set the extraction settings based on preference.
1. Sometimes it is helpful to color so they look similar to their source colors. For example, a common
color for corridor feature lines in the wisdot template is magenta. Therefore, it makes sense to
magenta as the color for breaklines originating from a corridor feature line.
2. In most cases, keep Validate New Drawing After Data Extraction checked. This will validate the
data automatically immediately following data extraction. Unchecking this can sometimes be useful
for troubleshooting.
8. Review the data validation settings. These are the tolerance values used in the validation process. Every
project is unique and these setting can vary. However, we suggest starting with the default values. If the
desired results are not achieved, these settings can be adjusted.
9. Click the extract data button
10. Depending on the size of the data, the extraction and validation process may take some time.
11. Once the process is complete the drawing will open. Take some time to review the drawing, looking for
anything unusual. There should not be a large number of breakline segments on the LINE_NO_MATCH
layers. If gradings were used to develop part of the surface definition, you will notice they are represented by
the TIN edge of the grading surface. Grading breaklines cannot be extracted from Civil 3D, so the TIN edges
will be used for the breakline deliverable in the areas created by gradings.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 217 of 390

6:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-003.mp4

120.080.003

Check Extracted Breaklines


The easiest way to verify that the extracted breaklines represent the design surface is to make a new surface from
the extracted breaklines. Then, compare the new surface with the design surface.
1. In the breakline dwg file, turn off all of the LINE_NO_MATCH layers.
2. Turn off all of the surface boundary layers, except the design surface layer.
3. Select all of the remaining objects in the drawing. Right Click Clipboard Copy
4. Open a new drawing using the wisdot14.dwt template.
5. Save the drawing in the Civil 3D Surfaces directory. Name the file starting with the refinement surface name
and the words Verification.Example name: Rfnt-Top-Verification
6. Past to original coordinates in the new dwg.
7. Data shortcut reference the refinement surface that the breaklines were extracted from. Set the surface
style to No Display.
8. Create a new surface. Example Name: Rfnt-Top-FromBreaklines
9. Turn off the surface boundary layer.
10. In the Toolspace-Prospector, expand the new surface definition. Right Click on Breaklines and choose
Add
11. Click Ok and window-select all of the breaklines on the screen.
12. Turn on all Layers.
13. Return to the Toolspace-Prospector, and right click on Boundaries in the surface definition. Choose Add
14. Type should be Outer, Non-destructive. Click Ok. Choose the 3D Polyline surface boundary.
15. From the Analyze tab Click Volumes Dashboard.
16. Create a new volume surface. Example Name: Rfnt-Top-Verification
17. Set the Style to Elevations.
18. Set the base surface to the design surface (refinement surface)
19. Set the comparison surface to the from breaklines surface.
20. Dismiss the volumes dashboard.
21. Select the volume surface on the screen and view the Surface Properties.
22. On the Analyze tab, set the analysis type to Elevation. Verify there are 2 ranges. Click the Run Analysis
button.
23. Set range 1 to be the minimum to -0.01
24. Set range 2 to 0.01 to the maximum
25. Set the two range colors to something that will catch your eye, such as red or orange.
26. Click Ok.

7:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-004.mp4

120.080.004

Results Interpretation

There will be areas that will be greater than 0.01 ft difference from the design surface. A common sense
approach must be used to evaluate these areas. Set the display style for design surface to triangles.
Set the display style for the FromBreaklines surface to triangles. Choose styles that have different
colors so you can distinguish each surface.
1. First, check for areas that are within the subgrade shoulder points. In most cases, these areas
appear based on the way the surface triangulates. To check if the breaklines produced a valid
surface, perform a swap edge command on the TIN edge of the from breaklines surface. Set the
volume surface to Rebuild-Automatic. The color from the volume surface should disappear. If it
does not, further troubleshooting of the breaklines is needed.

2. Once the areas within the subgrade shoulder points have been reviewed, view the Volume
Surface properties. Under the Statistics tab, expand General. Observe the minimum and maximum
elevation. These are the maximum deviations between the design surface and the FromBreaklines
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 218 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

surface. Do they seem reasonable for areas outside of the subgrade shoulder points?
3. If there are areas that significantly differ from the design surface, go back to the extracted
breaklines dwg file. Review any breaklines in the area that are on a LINE_NO_MATCH layer. They
can offer clues regarding the differences or why some breaklines may be different.
TIP: The Extract Design Surface Data utility includes a custom Tooltip toggle. This button will
trigger a detailed tooltip for each breakline that displays additional information about its origin.
4. You may notice areas where breaklines have gaps. If the gaps are small enough where they do
not impact surface triangulation, they are ok.
5. If for some reason, the Extract Design Surface Data utility removed a valid breakline during the
extraction process, that missing breakline can be obtained manually from the source.

6:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-005.mp4

120.080.005

Surface Modeling Best Practices & Breakline Extraction Troubleshooting

These best practices for surface model creation will make the breakline extraction much simpler. If
these best practices are not followed, the breakline extraction process will not work as intended.
Links for corridor surface definition. This is a bad practice for the deliverable that we want to
achieve. We want the surfaces to be defined by longitudinal breaklines because these are the
elements that our contractors are looking for. It is not a good idea to mix links and feature lines in
the surface definition because once you include the links, there is not a good way to know if you
have all of the required feature lines. If you have all of the required feature lines, there really isnt
any need for the links. One argument for links is that they help force desired triangulation in certain
situations. An intersection radius is an example of that. However, this can easily be resolved by
adding a single line or 3D Polyline to the refinement surface definition.

Surface edit tools. We do not want designers using the surface edit tools, except is certain
situations.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 219 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Added surface definition created by these tools cannot be extracted and delivered for
construction. In the example from the first bullet, the add line or swap edge commands are
often used to clean up the intersection triangulation. However, the proper way to address that is
by adding a line or 3D polyline as a breakline. The commands highlighted in pink should not be
needed for design surface definition. The delete line and delete point command can be used
because they take away previously created elements of the surface definition. Delete line is
often used to remove external triangulation that was not removed by a corridor boundary. Using
the delete point command will cause the points source breakline segment to be no longer valid
and will therefore be excluded from the breakline deliverable by the Design Surface Data
Extractor. Adjustments to the corridor or addition of breaklines should address situations where
the remaining surface edit commands would otherwise be used. When breaklines are extracted
from the refinement surface definition, you should be able to recreate the refinement surface
from those breaklines alone. If these surfaces edits are used, the surface created from the
extracted breaklines will not match the refinement surface. In summary, the surface edits
cannot be extracted and conveyed in the breakline file.

6:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-006.mp4

120.080.006

Surface Modeling Best Practices & Breakline Extraction Troubleshooting (continued)

Redundant Feature Lines. Avoid creating corridor surfaces with two feature lines from two
difference regions on top of each other. This problem does not become apparent until the breakline
extraction process is performed. Going back to the intersection example again, what typically
happens is we get two feature lines in the red-highlighted portions.

Along the main roadway, you get a Crown feature line from the curb return region and an ETW feature
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 220 of 390

line from the travel way region. Along the side road, you get a crown feature line from both curb return
regions. The feature lines end up competing to define the surface. Then, when you extract the
breaklines from the refinement surface definition, neither of the competing feature lines are coincident
with the triangle vertices. There are two ways that this can be addressed. The first way is to make sure
that the competing feature lines have all the same vertices. This is probably the more difficult option
because it involves adding special sections in the competing regions to get them to match. In the case
of the intersection example, the easier method is to turn the crown location parameter off in LnGeneric
for the curb return regions. That leaves only the ETW feature line for the edge of travel way portion.
However, now you dont have any feature lines for the crown along the side road. That is addressed by
adding a region along the side road with a simple assembly such as what I have shown below.

Combine Refinement Surfaces. There should be a single refinement surface for each type. In
other words, a single Refinement-Top, a single Refinement-Datum, etc. This makes the surfaces
easier to manage for the contractor. It also makes extracting the breaklines simpler because you
dont need to run the design data extraction utility on multiple surfaces and combine the data in an
additional step.

2:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-007.mp4

120.080.007

Packaging the Surface Model Breaklines for Delivery


1. In the BreaklineVerification dwg file, set all surfaces to No Display.
2. From the Civil 3D menu, Export DWG - Choose the latest version.
3. Name the file <const ID>-<surface model type>-breaklines-<const stage>.dwg. Example: 12345678-TopBreaklines.dwg
4. This dwg file will hold the breaklines and the surface boundary.

120.100 Surface exercise - Create pavement model surfaces

Section updated:

3/1/2013

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Exercise project dataset


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-100-proj-dataset.zip
Finished project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-100-proj-dataset-finished.zip
3:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-100-001.mp4

120.100.001

Create Pavement Surface Model


1. Open Corridor dwg, save as Corridor-Pavement dwg

Page 221 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


3:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-100-002.mp4

120.100.002

2. In each Assembly, remove the subassemblies that lie outside the subgrade shoulder point.

2:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-100-003.mp4

120.100.003

3. Delete all corridor surfaces except Top, Rename Top surface to Pavement

7:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-100-004.mp4

120.100.004

4. Set all Regions to a frequency matching WisDOT 3D Surface Model Standards for Pavement surfaces,
Create Data Shortcut for Corridor-Pavement surface

5:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-100-005.mp4

120.100.005

5. Create Refinement Pavement surface. Review definition of refinement Top surface, replicate edits in
Pavement surface.

0:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-100-006.mp4

120.100.006

6. Create 3D Surface Model surface files (surfaces, breaklines, boundary)

120.110 Beamguard

Section updated:

6/25/2013

Example beamguard modeling file


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-110-demo-files.zip
120.110.001

Content for this section can currently be found at ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/wisdot-c3dhelp.pdf#Modeling_Beam_Guard_End_Termina

120.120 Crossovers
120.120.001

Section updated:

6/25/2013

Content for this section can currently be found at ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/wisdot-c3dhelp.pdf#Modeling_Crossovers

120.130 Daylight grading with feature lines

Section updated:

3/10/2014

Exercise project dataset


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-130-proj-dataset.zip
9:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-130-001.mp4

120.130.001

Daylight grading ALTERNATIVE


To create a better transition between daylight slope regions
Subassembly transitions occur between frequency lines not nearly far enough apart
What components are needed?
The assembly
Two conditional subassemblies (per side)
Two GenCF daylight subassembly per conditional subassembly
One with Final Link Inserted, on Omitted
Polyline for length of transition
Identify where 4:1 to 2.5:1 transition occurs
Draw polyline from end of transition to point >100
Add conditional subassemblies and adjusted GenCF to the assembly
Set corridor targets for all conditional subassemblies
Create grading feature line from corridor
Create grading criteria for surface targeting
Grade from corridor feature line to daylight
Begin with 4:1 for 5 of feature line
End with 2.5:1 for last 5 of feature line
Use grading transition in the middle of the feature line
Create Automatic Surface from the Grading Group Properties
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 222 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Create data shortcut for grading surface
Reference this surface and paste into refinement surface.

2012 versus 2014

16:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-130-002.mp4

120.130.002

Look for Grading Transition Needs


You need to find where transition areas are too quick. If you arent certain where this might occur you can look for
telltale signs in your corridor design.
Look for a Transition Notch
The transition from 4:1 to 2.5:1 will happen from one frequency line to the next. This sudden transition will create
a notch in the edge of the corridor
Usually there will be two notches, one for the 4:1 to 2.5:1 transition and one for the 2.5:1 to 4:1 transition.
Use the Section Editor to Confirm the Sudden Transition
Select a frequency line near the sudden transition area.
Zoom in the section view to the side that is transitioning.
Select the Zoom Extents button drop-down and choose Zoom to an Offset and Elevation.
In the Section Editor Station Selection, click the single arrow icons to advance one station at a time through the
transition station.
Confirm the 4:1 slope in one station and 2.5:1 slope in the next.
Close the Section Editor
Create the Transition Area Target
You need to create a target (or trigger) for the Conditional Subassembly to begin its work.
Draw a 2D Polyline for the Correct Length
In the Home tab, Draw panel, choose the Polyline tool.
Begin drawing the target polyline at or near where the Transition area ends.
This polyline can be any distance from the corridor. You can snap to the corridor for positioning.
This polyline should be generally greater than 100, suggested closer to 110.
If there is an arc in the corridor this polyline should follow that curve.
Right-click and choose Enter to end the polyline command.
Create a Layer for the Target Polyline
Home tab, Layer panel, Click the Layer Properties Manager
In the left Filter window set the filter to All so that you can see all of the layers.
Check to see if the layer P_Daylight-Transtion already exists.
If it does, make that layer current.
Select the P_Daylight-Transition layer
At the top of the Layer Properties Manager select the green check icon to make it current.
If it does not already exist click the Create Layer icon at the top of the Layer Manager.
Name the layer P_Daylight-Transition
Make sure the Linetype is Continuous
Make sure the No Plot option is turned on.
At the top of the Layer Properties Manager select the green check icon to make it current
Select the target polyline(s)
Change the layer of the polyline to the P_Daylight-Transition layer
Update the Assembly
This is assumed that an assembly is already in place. We will be adding conditional subassemblies to that
assembly and moving the daylight subassembly to the end of the new conditional subassemblies.
Add the Conditional Subassembly to the Existing Assembly
Zoom into the GenCF subassembly that needs the conditional subassembly.
Open the tool palette to place the subassembly.
Home tab, Palettes panel, lower middle button (or <CTRL> 3)
Select the Conditional tool palette tab.
Select the Conditional Horizontal Target subassembly.
Set the side to Left
Leave the Type to Target Found
Attach this subassembly to the Shoulder subassembly. Use the Selection Cycling to properly connect the
subassembly.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 223 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

In the Properties palette change the Type to Target Not Found.


Attach this conditional subassembly to the Shoulder subassembly. Use the Selection Cycling to properly connect
the subassembly.
Move the GenCF Daylight Subassembly to the Conditional Subassemblies
Select the GenCF daylight subassembly.
Right-click and choose Move To.
Select the attachment point at the end of the Not Found conditional subassembly.
Copy the GenCF to the Found Condition Subassembly
Select the GenCF daylight subassembly.
Right-click and choose Copy To.
Select the newly placed copy of the GenCF.
Right-click and choose Subassembly Properties
Click the Parameters tab.
Rebuild the Corridor
In the Include Daylight Link Omit Daylight Link and change the setting to Omit.
In the toolspace, Prospector tab expand Corridors
Right-click the corridor name. Choose Corridor Properties
Parameters tab.
Set All Targets.
Under Surface targets click Set All Targets.
Choose the EG surface.
Find the Conditional Horizontal Targets and click in their value field.
Change the type of target to Feature Lines, Survey Figures and Polylines.
Click Select by Layer.
Check mark the correct layer (P_Daylight-Transition)
Repeat these steps for each Conditional Subassembly in the regions. This is necessary for both the Found
and Not Found conditions.
Click OK to rebuild the corridor.

13:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-130-003.mp4

120.130.003

Extract Grading Feature Line from Corridor


We need to translate a corridor feature at the edge of our design into a grading feature line that the grading tools
will recognize and be able to work with.
Extract the Feature Line
Select the feature line to extract.
From the green context ribbon, Launch Pad panel, select the Feature Line from Corridor.
In the dialog make sure these settings are set:
The Site should be unique, and not one that other grading in this file that our current work might interfere
with.
Check the Name field and name the new feature line Daylight Grading Line West.
Style checkmark and set to Standard.
For Layer set to Use Current Layer.
Make sure the Create Dynamic Link to Corridor is checked. This is the important option in this dialog!
Click OK. Then <Esc>.
Begin the Grading
We will create a grading criteria (rules for the gradings to follow) then apply them to the grading area.
Start the Grading Tools
Home tab, Create Design panel, Grading tools, select Grading Creation Tools.
Select the second icon to set the Surface. Select EG.
In the toolbar select the first icon, Grading Group.
Name the Grading Group Daylight Grading.
Click OK.
Hover over the fourth icon to check the grading criteria set.
Create and Set the Grading Criteria
Select the button just past the drop down menu and select Copy Current Selection.
On the Information tab name the criteria Daylight Grading.
In the Criteria tab
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 224 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Change the Target to Surface.
Make sure the Slope fields for Cut and Fill areas are both unlocked.
Click OK.

Create the Grading


Select the Create Grading icon.
Select the grading feature line at the edge of the notched area. From the Selection Cycling dialog it is the Auto
Corridor Feature Line.
Left click the Grading Side to the west of the feature line.
Answer NO to the Entire Length prompt.
Snap the Start Point to the beginning of the notch, the end of the daylight location.
Confirm the station location by clicking <ENTER>.
For the length type in 1103, which is ~5 from the start station.
Confirm this station as well by clicking <ENTER>.
Type 4 to set the Cut Slope at 4:1.
Type 4 to set the Fill Slope at 4:1.
Pan to the north of the grading area notch.
Select the grading feature line. In the Selection Cycling dialog this will be the Auto Corridor Feature Line.
Select to the west of the feature line for the grading side.
Click approximately 5 from the end, about where the last non-daylight frequency line is located.
Confirm the station by clicking <ENTER>.
Snap to the end of the grading by snapping to the beginning of the first daylight point.
Confirm the station by clicking on the <ENTER>.
Create the Transition Grading
From the Grading Creation toolbar select the Create Grading drop down button and choose Create Transition.
Select the grading feature line. In the Selection Cycling this will be the Auto Corridor Feature Line.
Click a point between the two gradings.
5:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-130-004.mp4

120.130.004

Clean up the Grading Area


Turning off layers so that lines that do not need to be seen, but need to be used by the grading design, do not
distract from the design work.
Turn Off the Conditional Subassemblys Target Line Layer
Home tab, Layers panel, Layer Manager pull-down menu.
Click the lightbulb to turn off the P_Daylight-Transition layer.
Set the Current Layer to something other than the off layer.
Home tab, Layers panel, Layer Manager pull-down, select the 0 layer to make it current.
Create the Surface from the Grading Area
We need to make a surface from the grading tools. This surface will be dynamic to the grading, and any changes
that occur to the corridor design.
Access the Grading Object Diamonds
If you cannot see the grading object diamond symbols:
Zoom out
Type RE to regen your screen.
Zoom in and the grading diamonds should be larger and easier to find.
Select on one of the grading object diamonds.
In the green context ribbon select Grading Group Properties.
Create the Surface from the Grading Group
On the Information tab make sure the check mark is on the Automatic Surface Creation.
In the Surface Creation dialog name the surface Surface-Daylight Grading
In the Styles field click the ellipsis button to change the surface style.
In the Surface Style selection dialog click the drop down and choose Proposed Contours 2
Major .5 Minors.
Click OK.
Create a Data Shortcut for the Grading Surface
So that this surface can be referenced into other files, specifically the refinement surface file, we need to make a
data shortcut for the grading surface.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 225 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Save the file.


In the toolspace, Data Shortcut area, right-click on the Data Shortcut area header.
Chose Create Data Shortcuts.
Checkmark the Surface-Daylight Grading surface.
Click OK.

120.140 Curb ramps

Section updated:

4/13/2015

0:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-000.mp4

120.140.000

Introduction
Goals
Curb ramp surface models
Dynamic relationship with the roadway design (vertical)
Allows for earlier design of curb ramps
Applicable to projects with dynamic roadway designs
Alternative
Non-Dynamic models using feature line/grading tools
Early design could mean re-design
Applicable to rehab projects with static roadway designs
Workflow Overview
Verify Roadway Design
Create Curb Cuts
Curb Ramp Setup Corridors/Surfaces
Link Roadway/Sidewalk Design to Curb Ramps
Create Alignments/Profiles representing Curb Ramp Break Lines
Create Curb Ramp Corridor/Surface
Grading Object for Daylight
Paste to Refinement Surface

3:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-001.mp4

120.140.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-140-001-proj-dataset.zip
Type 2 Curb Ramps. (2 sidewalks with terraces approach an intersection, tapered sides)
120-141-001-proj-dataset.zip

Establish Curb Ramp Alignments in Roadway Corridor File


Alignments are already created in the data set. Most curb ramps will require a landing where the
curb ramp meets the back of curb and gutter. This is typically the triangular area between the
detectable warning field and the back of curb and it must not exceed 1.5%. Suggesting naming: Int<[Primary Road]>-<[Secondary Road]>-<[Quadrant]>-Landing-<[Adjacent Roadway]>. Example:
Int-MainSt-FirstSt-SE-Landing-MainStAn alignment is required that follows the back of curb around
the intersection radii.

6:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-002.mp4

120.140.002

Design Checks

Check Roadway Cross Slopes At Crosswalks


Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 226 of 390

Refer to FDM 11-46-10.1.1. Verify that the roadway longitudinal slope (cross walk cross slope) at is
no more that 1.5%. If the intersection is signalized or uncontrolled, the main roadway can maintain
its profile.
Check Curb Radii Profiles
Verify that the curb radii profiles do not exceed 1.5% at the crosswalk locations. A quick way to
verify these locations is to create AutoCAD points where the crosswalk intersects the curb flange
alignments. Then, project these points to the curb radii profile views. Adjust the curb radii profiles
as needed.

5:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-003.mp4

120.140.003

Curb Cuts Explained

Notice that instead of using a standard curb and gutter subassembly, a group of generic
subassemblies were used to form the curb. These generic LinkWidthAndSlope subassemblies will
follow superelevation data assign to the curb return alignment.

4:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-004.mp4

120.140.004

Create Curb Cuts


Edit the superelevation for the curb radii alignments. Add the following critical stations to vary the gutter pan
slope and the curb head height:
Beginning of alignment
Right inside lane (gutter) = -6.25%
Right Outside Lane (face of curb) = 5000%
Right Outside Shoulder (top of curb) = 0%
End of alignment
Same as Beginning of alignment
2 before curb ramp
Same as beginning of alignment
Beginning of curb ramp
Right inside lane (gutter) = -4%
Right Outside Lane (face of curb) = 0%
Right Outside Shoulder (Top of curb = 1.5%
End of curb ramp
Same as beginning of curb ramp
2 beyond curb ramp
Same as end of alignment
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 227 of 390

Rebuild the corridor. The curb cuts will appear in the model.
5:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-005.mp4

120.140.005

Create Curb Cuts (continued)

6:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-006.mp4

120.140.006

Create the Crdr-Ultimate Surface


Create a corridor surface that represents the ultimate top. This surface is the top of finished ground of the
entire corridor. Unlike the Crdr-Top surface, the Crdr-Ultimate surface extends all the way to the slope
intercepts. This surface has been created for you in the training data set.
Create a Curb and Gutter Only Corridor and Corridor Suface
A separate setup corridor is needed that represents only the curb and gutter. The purpose of the corridor and
corridor surface is to avoid circular references. Use an assembly that consists of nothing more than the curb
and gutter generic subassemblies from earlier. Create a new corridor called Setup-BOC and a corridor surface
called Crdr-Setup-BOC.

5:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-007.mp4

120.140.007

Create Auxillary Alignments for Curb Ramp Setup Corridor

Unless the roadway intersection is a perfect 90-degree, auxiliary alignments will need to be made
for the curb ramp setup corridor base line.
Create a new miscellaneous alignment along the primary roadway that extends beyond the
intersection curb ramps, and is perpendicular to the secondary road. Name this alignment <[Primary
Road]>-Aux. For example: MainSt-Aux
Create a new miscellaneous alignment along the secondary roadway that extends beyond the
intersection curb ramps, and is perpendicular to the primary road. Name this alignment
<[Secondary Road]>-Aux. For example: FirstSt-Aux

Create an existing surface profile for both Aux alignments.

7:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-008.mp4

120.140.008

Create Curb Ramp Setup Corridors


From the WisDOT Assemblies palette, insert the Setup-CurbRamp-L and Setup-CurbRamp-R assemblies
into the drawing.
Create a new corridor called Setup-CurbRamps-<[Primary Road]>. Example: Setup-CurbRamps-MainSt
Set the baseline to the Primary Road Auxillary alignment and existing surface profile.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 228 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Choose either the Setup-CurbRamps-L or Setup-CurbRamps-R assembly, depending on the side of the road
the curb ramp is located.
Set the Target Surface to the Crdr-Setup-BOC surface.
In the Baseline parameters, set the start and end stations to the start and end of the curb ramp.
Set the targets. The targeting is described in the subassembly names and should be apparent.
Click Ok to build the corridor.
All curb ramps that are located along the primary roadway can be added to this corridor.
Create a second setup corridor called Setup-CurbRamps-<[Secondary Road]>. Example: SetupCurbRamps-FirstSt
Set the baseline to the Secondary Road Auxillary alignment and existing surface profile.
Follow the same steps as the primary road setup corridor outlined above.
All curb ramps that are located along the side road can be added to this corridor.
2:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-009.mp4

120.140.009

Create Curb Ramp Setup Corridor Surfaces


Create a corridor surface called Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps-<[Primary Road]>
The Top links can be used to define this setup corridor.
Create a second setup corridor called Setup-CurbRamps-<[Secondary Road]>. Example: SetupCurbRamps-FirstSt
The Top links can be used to define this setup corridor.

8:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-010.mp4

120.140.010

Tie Sidewalk Profiles to Curb Ramp Elevation

Determine which curb ramp is controlling. The curb ramp elevation that is controlling (primary
road or secondary road), is the one that is lower.
Create a Surface Profile for the primary roadway and secondary roadway back of sidewalk
alignments. The surface profiles should be created on the controlling curb ramp surface.
Create an intersection object to tie the primary road sidewalk profile to the secondary road back of
sidewalk surface profile created in the previous step.
Home tab, Create Design panel, Intersections-Create Intersection
Digitize the location where the primary road inside sidewalk alignment intersects the
secondary road outside sidewalk alignment.
Select the Secondary Road back of sidewalk alignment as the main road alignment.
In the Geometry Details portion of the Create Intersection Dialogue, uncheck the Create
or specify offset alignments box.
Verify that the secondary road alignment is priority 1 and the primary road alignment is
priority 2.
Verify that the curb ramp setup surface profile is chosen for the priority 1 alignment
Verify that the proposed sidewalk profile is chosen for the priority 2 alignment.
Click Create Intersection

Repeat the previous step to create an intersection object where the Secondary inside sidewalk
alignment intersects the Primary outside sidewalk alignment.
This time, the primary road outside alignment and surface profile are priority 1. The secondary
road inside alignment and proposed profile are priority 2.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 229 of 390

The proposed sidewalk profiles are now dynamically locked to the curb ramp upper landing
elevation. When the roadway elevation changes, the curb ramp elevation changes automatically
with it, and so does the proposed sidewalk profile.
Add a PVI to the proposed sidewalk profiles transition down to the curb ramp upper landing.

1:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-011.mp4

120.140.011

Save DWG and Create Data Shortcuts


Save the DWG file.
Create Data Shortcuts for the following objects:
Surfaces
Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps-[<Primary Roadway>]
Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps-[<Secondary Roadway>]
Crdr-Ultimate
Alignments
Back of Curb Alignment(s)
Curb Ramp Lower Landing Alignment(s)
Close the file

2:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-012.mp4

120.140.012

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-140-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create Curb Ramp DWG 120-140-002-proj-dataset.zip
Create a new dwg and name it Crdr-CurbRamps.dwg (This file has already been created for you in the
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 230 of 390

training data set)


Data reference the following objects (The data references have already been created in the training data set)
Primary Roadway Lower Landing alignment
Secondary Roadway Lower Landing alignment
All sidewalk alignments
Crdr-Ultimate Surface
Crdr-Setup-Curb Ramp Surfaces
Exist surface
Intersection back of curb alignments

Create Curb Ramp DWG 120-140-002-proj-dataset.zip


Create a new dwg and name it Crdr-CurbRamps.dwg (This file has already been created for you in
the training data set)
Data reference the following objects (The data references have already been created in the
training data set)
Primary Roadway Lower Landing alignment
Secondary Roadway Lower Landing alignment
All sidewalk alignments
Crdr-Ultimate Surface
Crdr-Setup-Curb Ramp Surfaces
Exist surface
Intersection back of curb alignments

4:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-013.mp4

120.140.013

Create Curb Ramp Alignments

Create the following miscellaneous alignments


Primary Roadway Ramp Alignment
Secondary Roadway Ramp Alignment
Primary Roadway Taper Alignment
Secondary Roadway Taper Alignment
Back of Sidewalk Alignment
The Ramp Alignments are made up of the following PI locations. Suggesting naming: Int<[Primary Road]>-<[Secondary Road]>-<[Quadrant]>-Ramp-<[Adjacent Roadway]>. Example: IntMainSt-FirstSt-SE-Ramp-MainSt
Intersection of the lower landing alignment and the inside sidewalk alignment
Intersection of the two inside sidewalk alignments
Intersection of the inside sidewalk alignment and the outside sidewalk alignment
Intersection of the lower landing alignment and the outside sidewalk alignment

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 231 of 390

The back of sidewalk alignment is made up of the following PI locations. Suggesting naming: Int<[Primary Road]>-<[Secondary Road]>-<[Quadrant]>-Sdwk-Out. Example: Int-MainSt-FirstSt-SESdwk-Out
Location on the outside sidewalk alignment where the curb radius ends.
Intersection of the outside sidewalk alignments
Location on the outside sidewalk alignment where the curb radius ends.

5:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-014.mp4

120.140.014

Create Curb Ramp Alignments Continued

The ramp taper alignments are made up of the following PI locations. Suggesting naming: Int<[Primary Road]>-<[Secondary Road]>-<[Quadrant]>-Taper-<[Adjacent Roadway]>. Example: IntMainSt-FirstSt-SE-Taper-MainSt
Location on the back of curb alignment, adjacent to the ramp, were the curb head is full
(top of taper).
Intersection of the inside sidewalk alignment and the outside sidewalk alignment
Location on the inside sidewalk alignment where the curb radius ends.
Hint for finding the location along the back of curb alignment: Give the Crdr-Ultimate surface
a triangles style. View the surface from a 3D Isometric perspective. Draw a polyline by
snapping to the back of curb. This will reveal the PI locations in plan view when creating the
alignment. Caution: The surface triangle vertices are not necessarily coincident with the
back of curb alignment. The PI location needs to be on the back of curb alignment, so use
the intersection snap to find the intersection of the back of curb alignment and the surface
triangle line.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 232 of 390

3:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-015.mp4

120.140.015

Create Curb Ramp Surface Profiles


Create surface profiles on the controlling curb ramp setup surface for the following alignments
Primary Road Inside Sidewalk
Primary Road Outside Sidewalk
Secondary Road Inside Sidewalk
Secondary Road Outside Sidewalk
Create surface profiles on the Crdr-Ultimate surface for the following alignments
Primary Road Inside Sidewalk
Primary Road Outside Sidewalk
Secondary Road Inside Sidewalk
Secondary Road Outside Sidewalk
Back of Curb
Create a surface profile for the curb ramp lower landing alignments. The surface profile should be created
using the curb ramp setup surface associated with that landing. In other words, the primary roadway landing
should have a surface profile for the primary roadway curb ramp setup surface. The secondary roadway
landing should have a surface profile for the secondary roadway curb ramp setup surface.

5:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-016.mp4

120.140.016

Create Curb Ramp Proposed Profiles


Create profile views for the following alignments
Primary Road Taper
Secondary Road Taper
Primary Road Ramp*
Secondary Road Ramp*
Curb Ramp Outside Sidewalk
Create proposed profiles for the alignments listed in the previous step. Pick an arbitrary VPI before the
alignment begin station and after the alignment end station. These VPIs will be deleted in a later step.
Intersection objects will create the actual VPIs for these profiles.
*The Ramp alignment that is on the controlling curb ramp does not need a proposed profile created. Instead,
create a surface profile for this alignment. The surface profile will be on the controlling Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp
surface. Label the surface profile to verify the slopes are correct.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 233 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


5:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-017.mp4

120.140.017

Create Curb Ramp Intersection Objects


Create the following intersections objects. Notice that all of the Priority 1 profiles are surface profiles and the
Priority 2 profiles are proposed profiles. Refer to the note above regarding the ramp profiles.
Priority 1 Alignment/Profile
Priority 2 Alignment/Profile
Back of Curb/Ultimate Surface
Primary Road Ramp/Proposed*
Primary Rd Inside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface
Primary Road Ramp/Proposed*
Secondary Rd Outside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Primary Road Ramp/Proposed*
Primary Rd Landing/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface
Primary Road Ramp/Proposed*
OR
Back of Curb/Ultimate Surface
Secondary Road Ramp/Proposed*
Secondary Rd Inside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Secondary Road Ramp/Proposed*
Primary Rd Outside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface
Secondary Road Ramp/Proposed*
Secondary Rd Landing/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface
Secondary Road Ramp/Proposed*
Back of Curb/Ultimate Surface
Primary Road Taper/Proposed
Primary Rd Inside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface
Primary Road Taper/Proposed
Primary Rd Inside Sidewalk/Ultimate Surface
Primary Road Taper/Proposed
Back of Curb/Ultimate Surface
Secondary Road Taper/Proposed
Secondary Rd Inside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Secondary Road Taper/Proposed
Secondary Rd Inside Sidewalk/Ultimate Surface
Secondary Road Taper/Proposed
Secondary Rd Outside Sidewalk/Ultimate Surface
Curb Ramp Outside Sidewalk/Proposed
Secondary Rd Outside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp SurfaceCurb Ramp Outside Sidewalk/Proposed
Primary Rd Outside Sidewalk/Ultimate Surface
Curb Ramp Outside Sidewalk/Proposed

For the Alignment/Profile combinations listed in Blue, there are other possible alignment/surface profile
combinations that can be used. The combinations listed in the table are one option. The important thing
is to somehow tie the proposed profile to the surface profile that will represent the curb ramp elevation.

When creating the intersection objects, this notification will be presented. Choose Create
intersection with dynamic profiles.

5:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-018.mp4

120.140.018

Create Curb Ramp Intersection Objects Continued


See 120-140-017
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 234 of 390

2:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-019.mp4

120.140.019

Clean Up Proposed Curb Ramp Profiles

If the initial profiles created earlier were put somewhere near elevation 0, the profile views may appear
very tall. The beginning and ending tangents for these profiles need to be deleted. Select the profile
and use the Delete Entity command to delete these two tangent sections.

5:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-020.mp4

120.140.020

Create Curb Ramp Corridor


Insert the CurbRamps-Basic assembly from the WisDOT-Assemblies palette. This assembly consists of the
MarkPoint and LinkWidthAndSlope generic subassemblies. The MarkPoint subassembly is the only
subassembly that will be used by the corridor. The LinkWidthAndSlope is there because the corridor will not
recognize a feature line unless there is at least one link in the assembly.
Create a new corridor called CurbRamps
Select any of the curb ramp alignments as the starting base line. The assembly is CurbRamps-Basic. There
is not a target surface.
Once in the corridor baseline and region parameters dialogue, add each of the curb ramp alignments/profile
to the definition.
Add a region for each of the baselines. The station limits for all of the regions will be the limits of the
alignment. The only exception is the back of curb alignment. Those station limits must be set to the ends of
the radius.
There are no targets to set for the corridor.
Click Ok and rebuild the corridor. Feature lines will now show up along each alignment.

2:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-021.mp4

120.140.021

Create Curb Ramp Corridor Surface

Select the CurbRamps corridor and click the Corridor Surfaces button from the contextual ribbon.
Create a new corridor surface called Crdr-CurbRamps
Add the Ramp feature code to the surface definition.
Add an Interactive Hide Boundary using the curb ramp outside sidewalk feature line. Name the
boundary something to describe what it is. For example: MainSt-FirstSt-SE-Hide
Since it is a single feature line, Civil 3D will notify you that the boundary is invalid. Click
Ok to return to the boundaries dialog.
Click on the boundary definition ellipsis.
Click the plus button and select the curb ramp outside sidewalk feature line again. Hit
Enter to return to the boundary definition.
Set the station range so it is 0+00 to 0+00.
The boundary will now be well formed.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 235 of 390

Click Ok to exit the corridor surfaces dialogue


View the surface properties definition tab.
Set the max triangle length to something just larger than the triangles in the curb ramp surface.
Say 10. This will allow you to add all of the curb ramps for the project to the same corridor/corridor
surface.

5:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-022.mp4

120.140.022

Create Curb Ramp Daylight Surface

A separate grading surface needs to be created for the slope behind the curb ramp sidewalk.
Create a new Site called CurbRamps.
Select the curb ramp corridor
Choose Feature Lines From Corridor from the contextual ribbon.
Select the curb ramp outside sidewalk feature line and hit Enter.
Put the feature line in the CurbRamps site
Give the feature line a distinguishable name. For Example: MainSt-FirstSt-SE-Sdwk-Out
Style does not matter and smoothing can be unchecked.
Make sure the Create dynamic link to corridor box is checked.
Click ok and hit enter
The grading will target the existing ground surface. However, MDU has seen on several occasions
that the grading surface will disappear when closing and reopening the drawing. The workaround for
this is to create a new existing ground surface in the drawing.
Create a new surface called Exist-GrdgTarget
Paste the data referenced existing ground surface into the Exist-GrdgTarget surface
Set the surface to rebuild automatically
Create a new grading group in the CurbRamps site. Call the grading group Grdg-CurbRampDaylight. Make sure the Automatic Surface Creation and Use Group Name boxes are checked. Set
the tessellation spacing to triangle spacing that is desired.
Open the Grading Creation Tools
Set the active site to CurbRamps. Set the active grading group to Grdg-CurbRamps-Daylight. Set
the target surface to Exist-GrdgTarget
Adjust the grading criteria to what is desired.
Place the grading on the dynamically link corridor feature line.
Hint: If you see strange triangulation like this, try increasing the frequency on the corridor baseline used
to get the dynamically linked feature line.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 236 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

3:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-023.mp4

120.140.023

Save the DWG, Create Data Shortcuts, Add Curb Ramps Surfaces to Rfnt-Top
Save the DWG.
Create data shortcuts for the Crdr-CurbRamps and the Grdg-CurbRamp-Daylight surfaces.
Data reference these surfaces in to the project Rfnt-Top dwg.
Paste the surfaces into the Rfnt-Top surface.

120.141 Curb ramps type 4B1

Section updated:

4/13/2015

2:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-001.mp4

120.141.001

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-141-001-proj-dataset.zip
Type 4B1 Curb Ramps. (1 sidewalk with terrace approaches an intersection, tapered sides)
This scenario is the same as the type 2 except an additional alignment/profile is needed to blend the sidewalk into
the roadway without a sidewalk. The data set included in this portion of the training has been completed up to the
point where additional alignment needs to be created for blending.
120-141-001-proj-dataset.zip
Establish Curb Ramp Alignments in Roadway Corridor File
Alignments are already created in the data set. In the same way as scenario 1 (Type 2 Curb Ramps), the
curb ramp landing (triangular 1.5% area) needs to be created in the roadway corridor file.
Unlike scenario 1, the ramp alignment is not created in the curb ramp corridor file. Instead, it needs to be
created in the roadway corridor file. It is put in the roadway corridor file to act as a target for the curb ramp
setup corridor because there is not a crossing sidewalk alignment to act as this target.

3:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-002.mp4

120.141.002

Add Baselines/Regions to Curb Ramp Setup Corridor


Add an additional baseline to the applicable curb ramp setup corridor. This will be a duplicate baseline that
will hold data for the opposite side of the roadway as the first baseline.
Use the CurbRamp-Setup-L (or R) assembly for the station range of the curb ramps.
Target the Crdr-Setup-BOC surface, CG-Back alignment, landing alignment, and ramp alignments

3:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-003.mp4

120.141.003

Tie Sidewalk Profiles to Curb Ramp Elevation

Create a surface profile for the ramp alignment. The surface profile is on the Crdr-SetupCurbRamps surface.
Place an intersection object on the inside sidewalk alignment at the top of the curb ramp
alignment. The priority 1 alignment/profile is the ramp alignment and surface profile.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 237 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Save DWG and Create Data Shortcuts


Save the DWG file.
Create Data Shortcuts for the following objects: (already done for you in the training data set)
Alignments
Curb Ramp Alignment(s)
Curb Ramp Lower Landing Alignment(s)
Close the file

5:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-004.mp4

120.141.004

Create Curb Ramp Taper Alignments

Create the curb ramp taper alignments in the Crdr-CurbRamps dwg file.
The inside taper alignment starts at the back of curb, continues to the top of the ramp, and
terminates on the sidewalk at the end of the radius.
The outside taper alignment starts at the back of curb and terminates at the top of the ramp.

7:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-005.mp4

120.141.005

Matching Into the Adjacent Road Slopes

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 238 of 390

roadways in the curb ramp area.


In the training example, the roadway without a sidewalk has two slopes behind the curb and gutter.
A 2 ft width at 4% and then the remaining width is 6:1 to match into existing ground.

To blend this to the single slope configuration behind the sidewalk, first create an alignment along
the edge of the 4% slope on the adjacent roadway. As long as the alignment extends beyond the
area where the blending will occur, the length does not matter.

Create the blending alignment. The blending alignment begins somewhere along the profile match
alignment (where you want to match into the adjacent roadway slopes). It follows the profile match
alignment and connects to the Outside Taper alignment. Then, it follows the Outside Taper
alignment up the ramp. It terminates on the outside sidewalk alignment at the end of the radius.

2:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-006.mp4

120.141.006

Create Curb Ramp Surface Profiles


Many of the same surface profiles created in scenario 1 are also needed in this example. Create surface
profiles on the Curb Ramp Setup Surface for the following alignments:
Landing Alignment
Ramp Alignment
Inside Sidewalk Alignment
Outside Sidewalk Alignment
Create surface profiles on the Ultimate Surface for the following alignments
Inside Sidewalk Alignment
Outside Sidewalk Alignment
Profile Match Alignment
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 239 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Back of Curb and Gutter Alignment
3:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-007.mp4

120.141.007

Create Curb Ramp Profile Views and Profiles


Create Profile Views
Create Profile Views for the following alignments
Ramp Alignment
Blend Alignment
Inside Taper Alignment
Outside Taper Alignment
Create Proposed Curb Ramp Profiles
Create an arbitrary starting profile for the following alignments. Make the profiles begin and end past the
extents of the alignment. The elevations do not matter because intersection objects will control their elevation
in a later step.
Inside Taper Alignment
Outside Taper Alignment
Blend Alignment

7:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-008.mp4

120.141.008

Create Intersection Objects

Create the following intersections objects.


Priority 1 Alignment/Profile

Priority 2 Alignment/Profile

Back of Curb/Ultimate Surface


Inside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface
Inside Sidewalk/Ultimate Surface

Inside Taper/Proposed
Inside Taper/Proposed
Inside Taper/Proposed

Back of Curb/Ultimate Surface


Outside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface

Outside Taper/Proposed*
Outside Taper/Proposed*

ProfileMatch/Ultimate Surface
Outside Taper/Proposed
Outside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface
Outside Sidewalk/Ultimate Surface

Blend/Proposed*
Blend/Proposed*
Blend/Proposed*
Blend/Proposed*

*Note that the Outside Taper Proposed profile must be created before the Blend Proposed Profile. The
Blend Proposed Profile is dependent on the Outside Taper Proposed Profile and is tied to it with an
intersection object.

If the initial profiles created earlier were put somewhere near elevation 0, the profile views may appear
very tall. The beginning and ending tangents for these profiles need to be deleted. Select the profile
and use the Delete Entity command to delete these two tangent sections.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 240 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

8:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-009.mp4

120.141.009

Add to Curb Ramp Corridor


Add the following alignments/profiles to the curb ramp corridor as baselines
Landing Alignment/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Profile
Ramp Alignment/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Profile
Inside Taper Alignment/Proposed Profile
Outside Taper Alignment/Proposed Profile (The region limits for the Outside Taper Baseline are
from the back of curb to the blend alignment.)
Blend Alignment/Proposed Profile
The remaining steps for creating the hide boundary and grading behind the sidewalk are the same as
previous sections.

120.142 Curb ramps type 1A

Section updated:

6/17/2015

Exercise project dataset


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-142-001-proj-dataset.zip
6:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-001.mp4

120.142.001

Curb Ramp Curb Cut


The key to correctly modeling the type 1A curb ramp is determining the correct critical curb cut locations. Since
the sidewalk it placed directly at the back of curb, the ramp slope is determined by the curb cut taper slopes. The
slope along the curb return alignment must be a consideration when creating the curb cut. As the slope
increases/decreases, the curb cut transitions length must be adjusted to achieve the required ramp slope.
Example: Required maximum slope for Type 1A curb ramp sides = 8.3%
Curb Height = 0.5 ft
For a flat curb return profile, ramp side slope lengths = 0.5/.083 = 6 ft
Actual curb return profile = 1%
Therefore, high side ramp side slope min length = 0.5/(.083-.01) = 6.8 ft
The low side ramp side slope remains at the minimum 6 ft length per SDD 8D5-15a
The curb cuts can be made using the same superelevation method described in the previous curb ramp training.
Sidewalk is added to the back of curb on curb return is assembly. The ultimate surface created by adding the
sidewalk to the assembly is not the final curb ramp surface. This portion of the surface will be used as a setup
surface for the curb ramp.
Create an alignment representing the back of curb. Then, create a surface profile on the using the back of curb
alignment and Crdr-Ultimate surface. Use the surface profile to verify the slopes meet standards. Adjust the curb
transition lengths as needed. We recommend that you do not set the curb transition lengths so the slopes are at
the maximum (8.3%). Provides some level of tolerance so there is flexibility for design refinement in the
intersection.

4:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-002.mp4

120.142.002

Curb Ramp Setup Corridor


The curb ramp setup corridor for the Type 1A ramp is the same concept covered in the previous curb ramp
modeling training.
Create an auxiliary alignment and surface profile for the curb ramp setup corridor baseline.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 241 of 390

The same curb ramp setup assembly can be used. However, since the curb ramp perpendicular to the curb
return, the triangular lower landing does not exist. Therefore, the additional LinkWidthAndSlope subassembly
representing that area can be removed from the assembly.
Create data shortcuts for the curb return back of curb alignments, curb return outside sidewalk alignments, CrdrUltimate surface, and Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps surface.

5:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-003.mp4

120.142.003

Curb Ramp Corridor DWG Create Curb Ramp Alignments

Open the curb ramp corridor dwg file. Data reference the curb return back of curb return alignment,
Crdr-Ultimate surface, Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps surface.
Create a new alignment representing the outside sidewalk. This can be an offset alignment to the
back of curb or it can be a centerline alignment. It should not be a miscellaneous alignment
because superelevation will be assigned in a later step.
Create a new alignment representing the curb ramp. View the Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps surface
with triangles turned on. This will allow for easy placement of the alignment Pis.

7:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-004.mp4

120.142.004

Create Curb Ramp Alignments Continued

Turn the Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps surface triangles off. Turn the Crdr-Ultimate surface triangles on.
Orbit around the surface to find the tops of the curb transistions. Mark them with polylines. Return
to Top view
Create the two alignments representing the top of the ramp sides, where the curb ramp matches
into the adjacent sidewalk. Use the polylines created in the previous step to locate the intersection
of the Crdr-Ultimate triangle edge and the back of curb alignment.

Then use the station offset transparent command to locate a second PI so the alignment is
perfectly parallel to the ramp alignment.
The PI can now be moved using the extend OSNAP and snapped to the outside sidewalk
alignment.
Since intersection objects cannot be used at the ends of an alignment, the alignment must be
extended down the back of sidewalk alignment a small distance. The resulting alignments should
look like this:
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 242 of 390

5:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-005.mp4

120.142.005

Curb Ramp Profiles

Create a surface profile for the ramp alignment. The surface profile is created on the Crdr-SetupCurbRamps surface.
Create a surface profile for the match alignments. These surface profiles are created on the CrdrUltimate surface.
Create a surface profile for the back of curb alignment. This surface profile is created on the CrdrUltimate surface.
Create a surface profile for the outside sidewalk alignment. This surface profile is created on the
Crdr-Ultimate surface.
Create a profile view for the outside sidewalk alignment. Create an arbitrary profile that extends
beyond the limits of the alignment. These elevations will be determined using intersection objects.
Create intersection objects in the following locations along the outside sidewalk alignment.
Intersections with the two match alignments
Intersections with the two ends of the ramp alignment.
Delete the end tangents from the profile.

5:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-006.mp4

120.142.006

Curb Ramp Corridor

Add the back of curb, outside sidewalk, ramp, and match alignments as base lines in the curb
ramp corridor.
Using the CurbRamp-Basic assembly, add a region for the back of curb baseline. For now, the
region extents should be to the ends of the match alignments or beyond. These extents will be
refined later.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 243 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Add three regions to the ramp alignment baseline. Using the CurbRamp-Basic assembly, the first
region should start at the back of curb and end at the outside sidewalk. Using a null assembly, the
second region should follow the portion that is coincident with the outside sidewalk alignment. Using
the CurbRamp-Basic assembly, the third region should start at the outside sidewalk and end at the
back of curb.

Using the CurbRamp-Basic assembly, add a region to each match alignment baseline. The
regions should extend from the back of curb to the outside sidewalk only.

6:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-007.mp4

120.142.007

Curb Ramp Corridor: Pedestrian Curb

Make a copy of the CurbRamp-Basic assembly. Rename the copy CurbRamp-PedCurb.


Change the LinkWidthAndSlope subassembly to a slope of 5000% and set it to use the Right Inside
Lane Superelevation. Change the point code to Top_Curb.
Add a second LinkWidthAndSlope at the end of the first LinkWidthAndSlope. Set its parameters to
slope = 0%, No Superelevation, Point Code = Back_Curb, Width = 0.5 ft.
Add the appropriate daylight subassembly to the CurbRamp-WithPedCurb assembly.
Using the CurbRamp-WithPedCurb assembly, add a region to the outside sidewalk base line. The
region should extend from one match alignment to the other. Set the frequency for this region to 1 ft.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 244 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Set the outside sidewalk alignment superelevation for controlling the pedestrian curb.
Begin alignment: Right Inside Lane = 0%
At Match Alignment 1: Right Inside Lane = 0%
At Ramp intersection 1: Right Inside Lane = 5000%
At Ramp Intersection 2: Right Inside Lane = 5000%
At Match Alignment 2: Right Inside Lane = 0%
At end of Alignment: Right Inside Lane = 0%

5:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-008.mp4

120.142.008

Pedestrian Curb Transitions

Make another copy of the CurbRamp-Basic assembly. Rename it to CurbTransition. Change the
MarkPoint subassembly point code to Top_Curb. Add the appropriate daylight subassembly to the
end of the LinkWidthAndSlope subassembly. Change the LinkWidthAndSlope subassembly point
code to Back_Curb and the width to 0.001.
Add another base line for the outside sidewalk alignment. This time, use the Crdr-Ultimate surface
profile.
Add three regions to the new outside sidewalk alignment baseline. Using the CurbTransition
assembly, the first region should start at few feet before the intersection with the match alignment.
Using a null assembly, the second region is the area between the match alignments. Using the
CurbTransition assembly, the third region should start at the intersection with the other match
alignment and extend a few feet past.

Draw a two polylines from the end of the Back_Curb feature lines to the ends of the curb transition
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 245 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


regions. Target the 2 polylines with the CurbTransition assembly.

Make sure the back of curb region limits match the ends of the curb transition regions.

3:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-009.mp4

120.142.009

Corridor Surface

Add all the necessary feature lines to define the surface.

Create a hide boundary for the concave area outside the daylight feature line.

Module 125 Pipe networks


Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


125.010 Pipe network overview

Page 246 of 390

Section updated:

3/10/2014

4:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-010-001.mp4

125.010.001

What is a Pipe Network Parts Catalog


The Pipe Network Parts Catalog is comprised of two sub part catalogs, Pipe and Structure. The parts catalog
enables the pipe network parts lists in a drawing to access content for pipe and structure shapes and configuration
parameters. Each Parts List in the WisDOT14-pipe.dwt template references WisDOT pipe and structure parts in
the USWIPipesCatalog.
WisDOT Pipe Network Parts Catalog Settings
To create and edit Pipe Network objects in any drawing created from wisdot14-pipe.dwt, wisdot14.dwt, wisdot14etopog.dwt, or wisdot14-plat.dwt the current Parts Catalog folder must be set to: C:\WisDOT\Stnd\c3d2014
\Program\Pipes Catalog
The Pipe catalog must be set to: Pipes_USWI Catalog
The Structures catalog must be set to: Structures_USWI Catalog
On WisDOT workstations, these settings will be checked and reset automatically each time the Civil 3D 2014
application is started, so there shouldnt be any need to set the catalogs manually.
Note: External users that are using the catalogs provided from the WisDOT FTP site should refer to the document
provided with the exe package WisDOT Civil 3D Startup Customization.pdf. This document covers the Pipe
Network Parts Catalog setup and paths.
How the Pipe Network Parts Catalog Affects your Drawing
Parts Catalogs' data links are independent of the drawings. The current Catalog is set by the application through
the user profile settings. Unlike Data Shortcuts, there is no way to attach a drawing to a Catalog. The Parts Catalog
and the drawing remain independent, which means the drawing will only access the active parts catalog. This also
means that there should only be one Parts Catalog per drawing.
IMPORTANT: Everyone editing a drawing that has Pipe Network parts created from the Parts Lists in the wisdot14pipe.dwt, template must have Pipes_USWI Catalog set as the active Pipe catalog and Structures_USWI Catalog
set as the active Structure catalog PRIOR to opening or creating a data reference of the drawing.
A pipe or structure is created by selecting a part from the Storm Sewer, Culvert Pipes, Non-Standard, or Full
Catalog Part Lists and then selecting the insertion location in the drawing.
Storm Sewer = WisDOT storm sewer parts
Culverts = WisDOT culvert parts
Non-Standard = WisDOT non-standard parts.
Full Catalog=All above catalogs combined with OOTB parts.
When making any design edits to the pipe network, the pipe and structure objects need to be able to access the
part list that was used when they were created and this part list in turn needs to be able to access the parts catalog
that the parts list references, as well as the pay items and rules assigned the parts. This data relationship must be
maintained in every pipe network drawing to ensure down stream workflows and dynamic capabilities stay intact.
Drawings should not be created without using the USWI Pipes Catalog
The use of the USWI catalog is part of the deliverable requirement. A copy of the Out-of-the-box catalog has been
incorporated into the USWI catalog. This will not address any customization that may have been done to the OOTB
catalog.

1:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-010-002.mp4

125.010.002

Starting a new Pipe Network drawing


To create a new pipe network drawing, start the new drawing using the wisdot14-pipe.dwt template. This is the
only template that contains the WisDOT parts lists. This template only contains the styles, labels, rules, and
setting necessary for designing a pipe network. If additional styles are desired, they can be imported using the
style importer tool. However, if the style import tool is used, be sure that the "Import Settings" box is NOT
checked.
Any drawings that utilize the pipe network (such as for plans production) should be created using the wisdot-14.dwt
template. Before the pipe network is data reference, the pipe network reference alignment(s) and surface(s) must
be data referenced. The pipe network can then be data referenced into that drawing. The pipe network will retain
the assigned styles and labels from the source drawing unless they are overridden in the data reference dialogue
box. Styles and labels may also be reassigned any time after the pipe network is data referenced.

1:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-010-003.mp4

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


125.010.003

Page 247 of 390

In WisDOTs multi-user work environment it is easy to create unwanted changes in drawings if your parts catalogs
do not have consistent contents. Because each drawing references the parts catalog at the local location unwanted
changes in the drawing can occur if a new part is created in the catalog of one computer, and then the drawing is
opened on a different computer, where a new part is not part of the local catalog.
WisDOT has addressed this issue by creating a custom Parts Catalog to be used on WisDOT projects and defined
a default location on the local drive to store the catalog.
WisDOT internal procedure
If a new part is needed or an existing part needs modifications contact Methods Development and they will work
with you to create the part needed and will update and distribute the catalog to all users. At no time should new
parts be added to the USWI_Pipe Catalog or the USWI_Structure catalog by the user. Any part that is added
locally to theses catalogs may be overwritten by the synchronization process described above.
WisDOT external procedure consultants
Consultants should contact WisDOT Methods Development team, to coordinate updates and change requests of
the USWI Parts Catalogs to maintain usability and consistency.

125.015 Introduction to Pipe Networks

Section updated:

9/23/2014

10:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-015-001.mp4

125.015.001

What pipe networks do and dont do


Do not
Perform hydrology or hydraulic analysis
Do
Provide an initial layout of the storm sewer system
Provide feedback on geometric feasibility of the system.
Automate plans production
Provide limited clash detection functionality.
The templates
The wisdot14-pipe.dwt should be used for the creation of all pipe networks.
The wisdot14.dwt should be used for all pipe network plans production via data reference.
The pipe network style names are the same in both templates. However, the styles in wisdot14pipe.dwt styles display the model and the wisdot14.dwt styles display for plans production.
Creating the pipe network
In most cases, it is best to put the entire storm sewer system into a single pipe network. .
Reasons for a single network
Easier data extraction for misc quantities tables
Easier data transfer to hydrology/hydraulics software such as Storm and Sanitary
Analysis (SSA) or Hydraflow.
There may be reasons to separate the network, perhaps so multiple designers can work on
it. If so, try to separate the network where they do not connect (each side of a high point for
example)
When you create a pipe network, you will be asked to specify a reference surface. This is important because
structures reference the surface to obtain its rim elevation. Pipes reference the surface to determine cover.
The catch is that pipes should reference the datum surface and structures should reference the top surface.
For a storm sewer pipe network it is a best practice to start by layout out all of your structures. Therefore,
choose the top surface when initially creating the pipe network. Once all of the structures are in place, change
the pipe network reference surface to datum and begin placing the pipes.
Understanding Rules
Rules are the basis for the pipe networks logic during initial layout
Account for
Pipe slope
Pipe cover
Max pipe length
Crown matching at structures
Structure sump depth
Max pipe size for structure
Rules make provide an initial layout for the system based on geometrics, not hydraulics
Once initial layout is complete, rules function as a design advisor by informing you of issues. (for
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 248 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

example: cover is too low at a given location) The catch is that you need to check the rules.
Rules can be re-applied at any time, but beware. They may change your design. I recommend using rules for
initial layout. Then, you take control of the design and use the rules for feedback on feasibility.

125.020 Placing a culvert pipe

Section updated:

3/10/2014

Project dataset at video segment 1


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/125/125-020-001-proj-dataset.zip
Project dataset at video segment 3
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/125/125-020-003-proj-dataset.zip
5:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-020-001.mp4

125.020.001

Pipe Datum Surface Creation


In the corridor drawing, create a proposed datum surface that extends to the subgrade shoulder points. The
surface can be named Crdr-{Roadway Name}-PipeDatum. This surface will be used to check for the appropriate
amount of cover over the pipe. Save the drawing and create a data shortcut for the surface.

6:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-020-002.mp4

125.020.002

Combined Surface Creation


Create Combined Surface
Create a new dwg file called Surf-Cmbn-Ex-Top.dwg.
Data shortcut reference the Existing ground surface and the Rfnt-Top surface
Create a new surface called Cmbn-Ex-Top
Right Click on the surface in the toolspace-prospector and choose select
From the contextual ribbon - Modify Panel, pick Paste Surface. Select the Exist surface.
Repeat the previous step, but now choose the Rfnt-Top surface
*Note: If the area of the existing surface does not cover the entire drainage basin for culvert, a DEM surface can be
loaded into the drawing. The DEM surface would be pasted into the Composite surface before the Exist and
Refinement-Top surfaces. Refer to 050-190-001 for creating a surface from a USGS DEM.

10:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-020-003.mp4

125.020.003

Create Pipe Network Drawing and Determine Culvert Pipe Alignment


Create Pipe Network Drawing
Create a new drawing using the WisDOT-pipe template. Save the drawing in the \Design\PipeNetworks\
folder. Name the file Pipe-Culverts.dwg
Data shortcut reference all of the project roadway reference alignments.
Data shortcut reference the Cmbn-Ex-Top surface
Data shortcut reference the Crdr-PipeDatum surface
Determine Culvert Pipe Alignment
Utilize contour styles for surfaces to determine natural channel alignment
Home tab Create Design Panel Feature Line Create Feature Line
All defaults may be accepted in the Create Feature Lines dialogue box. Click ok
Digitize first point for defining the channel/pipe alignment. Hit enter to accept a 0.000 elevation. Elevation
will be assigned at a later step. You can also set the elevation from the Cmbn-Ex-Top if you choose
Digitize the second point defining the channel/pipe alignment. Hit enter twice to exit the command.
Drape the Feature Line over the Cmbn-Ex-Top surface
Select the feature line. From the Feature Line contextual ribbon, click Edit Elevations from the Modify panel.
Click the Elevations from Surface button on the Edit Elevations Panel
Choose the Cmbn-Ex-Top surface from the pull-down menu on the Set Elevations from Surface dialogue
box. Make sure Insert intermediate grade break points is checked. Click OK.
Select the feature line on the screen. Press Enter.

13:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-020-004.mp4

125.020.004

Determine Culvert Pipe Elevation and Place Metal Culvert Pipe


Place Metal Culvert Pipe
Orbit to an isometric view. Display only what is necessary. Only the feature line is needed.
Draw a line that will define the flowline of the pipe. Snap to the ditch lines or toes of slopes depending on
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 249 of 390

your cross section.


Use the MOVE command to move the line in the z direction by the distance of the pipe diameter. At this
stage, estimate the required pipe size. Base point = 0,0,0 Second point = 0,0,[diameter]
Trim the line using the feature line as the cutting object. The line now defines the length of pipe along the
crown.
For concrete pipe, check the Apron Endwall SDDs and shorten each end of the line by the corresponding
endwall "C" dimension. See 0125-020-005 for concrete pipe.
Use the MOVE command again to move the line in the z direction by the distance of the pipe radius. Base
point 0,0,0 Second point = 0,0,[-radius] The line now defines the length of pipe along the centerline.
From the Home tab, select Pipe Network - Pipe Network Creation Tools
Name the pipe network Culverts-<design frequency>. For example: Culverts-25yr
Select the Culverts Parts List
Select the Crdr-PipeDatum surface
Select the roadway alignment
Structure and Pipe label styles can be set to <none>
From the Network Layout Tools menu, choose the pipe size and type from the pipes pull-down box. Also
choose the corresponding apron endwalls from the structure pull-down box.
Choose the Draw Pipes Only draw option. Toggle the Upslope/Downslope button for the direction that you
want to draw the pipe.
Snap to the two ends of the line. The pipe may utilize rules to set its initial elevation. If this happens, use the
grips at the ends of the pipe to snap it to the ends of the line.
You will see the following error displayed in the panorama window. This error is normal. It simply means
that the pipe rule could not located the Pipe Network surface at the ends of the pipe. This is because the CrdrPipeDatum surface only extends out to the subgrade shoulder points.
Source: AeccDbNetworkRule::runDotNetScript
Description: Unable to run macro: C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\C3D 2014\enu
\C3DPipeNetworkRules.dll:PipeNetworkRule.PipeCover::ApplyRule
Attach the Apron Endwalls
From the Network Layout Tools menu, switch to the Draw Structures only option. Click on the two ends of
the pipe to attach the endwalls.
To rotate an endwall, select it and use the circular rotation grip and snap it to the feature line.
4:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-020-005.mp4

125.020.005

Check Culvert Pipe Properties


Check Design Criteria
Select the pipe, right click, and choose Pipe Properties
In the Rules tab, you can see what the minimum and maximum cover requirements are for the pipe.
Compare those values with the actual values. Choose a different pipe type and/or configuration if these values
are not met. Your roadway profile may also need adjustment.
Pipe slope, length, and elevation data can be found under the Part Properties tab.
In the information tab, name the pipe its station location for easy reference later on. Name the apron
endwalls the station location of the pipe with the suffix In or Out. For example: 100+00-In
Determine Pipe Wall Thickness (Metal Pipe Only)
View the pipe properties. In the Rules tab, view the actual maximum and minimum fill height for the pipe.
Then, switch to the Part Properties tab and set the wall thickness according the fill height tables in the FDM.
This value has little effect on the layout of the pipe, but it can be used later on for reporting purposes.
Create Data Shortcuts for Pipe Networks
Save the drawing
Create a data shortcut for the pipe network.

12:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-020-006.mp4

125.020.006

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/wisdot-c3d-help.pdf#Pipe_Networks
Concrete Pipe with Concrete Endwalls
Same as for metal pipe except move the line defining the flowline up by the diameter plus the wall thickness.
Wall thickness can be found on the accompanying Pipe Networks Summary pdf.
The line now represents the top of the concrete pipe. Trim the line against the feature line.
If concrete endwalls are to be used, shorten the concrete pipe on each end by the C distance shown in the
Apron Endwall Standard Detail Drawing.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 250 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Concrete Pipe with Metal Sloped Apron Endwalls
Same as above, except do not shorten the pipe by the C distance on each end.
Attach the sloped apron endwalls.
Rotate the endwalls to match the pipe direction.
Select both endwalls. Use the AutoCAD Move command to move the endwalls down by the pipe wall
thickness.

125.030 Culvert design: time of concentration, catchments, peak flow HY8

Section updated:

9/23/2014

Developed in C3D14, proj-dataset1.zip in video


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/125/125-030-001-proj-dataset.zip
Developed in C3D14, proj-dataset2.zip in video
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/125/125-030-006-proj-dataset.zip
4:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-000.mp4

125.030.000

Suggested methods to design culverts


There are several applications available at WisDOT to complete culvert designs, such as CulvertMaster, HY8,
Hydraflow Express, and Storm and Sanitary Analysis (SSA). A suggested workflow is as follows:
1. Use Civil 3D to create a pipe network for your culvert pipes. This validates the pipe geometry in relation to
the physical surroundings such as cover, slope, elevation, location and length.
2. Use Civil 3D to create catchments. Catchments can be used to develop a time of concentration for the
watershed.
3. Use SSA to compute the peak runoff. Export the pipe network and catchment(s) to SSA. There, peak runoff
can be computed based on the catchment data and additional inputs done in SSA. We do not recommend
using SSA to check culvert pipe hydraulics. SSA uses EPA SWMM as its computing engine. In most cases,
HDS-5 should be used for checking culvert pipe hydraulics on WisDOT projects.. SA can replicate the results
of HDS-5, but it takes extensive knowledge of the application and drainage in general. It is a simpler workflow
to just use an application designed to follow HDS-5.
4. Use HY8 from FHWA or a similar application to analyze the culvert pipe hydraulics. The data computed in
Civil 3D and SSA can be entered in HY8 to complete the analysis.
5. Make revisions to the Civil 3D pipe network as needed to achieve the desired results in HY8.

8:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-001.mp4

125.030.001

Determine watershed boundary


Open the Pipe-Culverts drawing
In Toolspace-Prospector, right click on the Cmbn-Ex-Top surface and select properties.
On the Information Tab, change the surface style to Watersheds
In the Analysis Tab, choose Watersheds from the Analysis Type.
Click the down-arrow under Watershed parameters.
If the Range Details do not populate, go back to the Information tab and click the edit style button.
Click OK. The watersheds will be computed. Then go back to the Analysis tab and click the down arrow
under Watershed Parameters again.
Under Range details, click the Light bulb. Turn off Boundary Point and Boundary Segment
Click OK
The watershed boundaries and contours will now be visible.
Inspect the watershed boundaries and contours to determine which watersheds flow to the culvert pipe.
On the P_DRN_Catchment layer, draw a closed polyline that roughly follows the exterior of the contributing
watershed boundaries.

9:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-002.mp4

125.030.002

Determine flow path(s) and create catchment(s)


Determine the flow path from the hydraulically most distant point. On the P_DRN_Flow layer, draw a
polyline representing this flow path. The Water Drop command on the Analyze Tab - Ground Data Panel Flow Path Menu can be a useful tool for determining the flow path. Create several possible paths to determine
which has the highest time of concentration.
From the Analyze Tab - Ground Data Panel, Click Catchment - Create Catchment Group. Name the
Catchment Group the same as the corresponding culvert pipe.
From the Analyze Tab - Ground Data Panel, Click Catchment - Create Catchment From Object. Select the
Polyline representing the catchment. Then, select the upper end of the polyline representing the flow path.
In the Create Catchment from Object dialogue box, name the catchment the culvert pipe station with a
numbered suffix. 100+00(1) for example.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 251 of 390

Verify the correct catchment group is assigned


Do not choose the reference structure at this time unless there is only one possible flow path from the
hydraulically most remote point.
The runoff coefficient does not need to be assigned at this time.
Do not erase existing entities.
Click OK
Select the catchment boundary polyline again. Then, select the upper end of the polyline representing the
alternative flow path. Follow the previous steps in the Create Catchment from Object Dialogue box.
Repeat until a catchment has been created for all of the possible flow paths.
9:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-003.mp4

125.030.003

Time of concentration Adding flow segments


Select the Cmbn-Ex-Top surface and go to the surface properties. Choose a surface style with contours.
Select the flow path on the screen, right click and choose Edit Flow Segments.
The flow path will be populated with default values that need to be modified.
Use the add flow segment (plus) and delete flow segment (red X) buttons to add and delete flow segments.
Click the Plus button to add another flow segment. Digitize on the screen where they segments begin/end.
Change each flow segment to the correct flow type (Sheet flow, Shallow Concentrated Flow, or Channel
Flow).
Sheet flow should be no more than 300 ft from the start of the flow path.
You can have up to 3 segments per flow type. For shallow concentrated flow, sub-segments are determined
by significant changes in slope or ground cover. For channel flow, sub-segments are determined by significant
changes in slope, ground cover, or channel shape/size. The more detail you add, the more accurate the time of
concentration will be.
Helpful Links
Online TR-55
http://www.cpesc.org/reference/tr55.pdf
Topo Quads
http://www.topoquest.com/find/state.php?state=WI&start=A

10:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-004.mp4

125.030.004

Time of concentration Flow segment characteristics


In the Sheet Flow row, enter the 2-yr 24-hr rainfall. This value can be obtained from TR-55 Appendix B,
Figure B-3. It can also be obtained in SSA.
In the Sheet Flow row, enter the Manning's Roughness for that segment. Values can be obtained from TR-55
Table 3-1.
Set the shallow concentrated flow to either Paved or UnPaved. Note that other surface types can be selected,
but they will not transfer to SSA. If another surface type is desired, it can be selected manually in SSA.
In the Channel Flow row, enter the Manning's Roughness value.
Helpful Links
Mannings n for Channel Flow
http://www.fsl.orst.edu/geowater/FX3/help/8_Hydraulic_Reference/Mannings_n_Tables.htm
Aerial Photography
http://www.wisconsinview.org/

13:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-005.mp4

125.030.005

Time of concentration Flow segment characteristics continued


In the Channel Flow row, enter the Cross-sectional Area and Wetted Perimeter of the channel. Taking a
quick profile works well for this. Use the No Grid No Exaggeration profile view style so accurate measurements
can be made. Draw a polyline across the channel, connecting the approximate bank full width elevation on
each side. You can also use an alignment and surface profile if you want a more permanent record of the
cross section. The conventional way to cut a cross section of a channel is from left to right facing downstream.
If the slopes are not populated because the surface assignment was forgotten when the catchment was
created, Click on the Surface button. Select the Cmbn-Ex-Top surface and click OK. The Slope column will
then be populated.
Click the green check mark to dismiss Flow Segment editor.
The total Time of Concentration is then computed and assigned to the Catchment Properties.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 252 of 390

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Repeat the above steps for the various different possible flow paths. Compare the catchment flow paths and
choose the one with the highest time of concentration. The catchment labels will display the time of
concentration for each catchment.
Assign that catchment with the highest time of concentration to the culvert inlet structure. This is done in the
catchment properties.
7:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-006.mp4

125.030.006

Export to Storm and Sanitary Analysis (SSA)


In Civil 3D, move any raster images that are in the drawing to separate layers. In SSA, you can view the dwg
file in the background for reference. You can also control the display of the images by turning their layers on
and off in SSA.
Click the Edit is Storm and Sanitary Analysis button from the Analyze tab. Click OK to confirm the pipe
network export. SSA will then initialize and you'll be prompted to save the import log file. This is not necessary.

8:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-007.mp4

125.030.007

Watershed properties (TR-20)


If the program opened with the Rational Method as the active Hydrology mode. To switch to TR-20, Click
Project Options from the Design menu. In the General Tab, switch the Hydrology Method to SCS TR-20. Click
OK.
Double click on the subbasin. Notice that the time of concentration was automatically populated from Civil
3D. Go to the Curve Number Tab. The basin area can be broken down into subareas to create a composite
curve number. A good way to get the areas is by viewing an aerial image in Civil 3D and measuring the areas
of the different cover types. Enter the areas or percentages so they total 100%. Enter the corresponding Curve
Numbers (CN). You can click on the CN ellipses to select the CN. You'll need to know the Hydrologic Soil
Group of the area. This can be obtained using the USDA Web Soil Survey mapping tool.
http://websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov/app/HomePage.htm

8:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-008.mp4

125.030.008

Runoff calculation (TR-20)


Save the SSA file as <ProjectID>-TR20-<Return Period>.spf. For Example: 12345678-TR20-25yr.spf
Under Input, Click the Rain gage Ellipsis button. Click Add.
Under Data source, click the Time series Ellipsis button. Click Add and then click the Rainfall Designer...
button.
Choose the SCS Type II 24-hr Unit Intensity. Select the State (Wisconsin), the County, and the Return
Period. Obtain the Return Period from FDM 13-10-1 Attachment 1.1. The rainfall depth will automatically
populate. Click OK. Click Close to exit the Time Series dialogue. Click Assign... to assign the Rain Gage to the
sub-basin(s). Then click Close to exit the Rain Gages dialogue. Click Close to exit the Subbasins dialogue.
From the Analysis menu, click Analysis Options. Under Dates, set the End analysis on date to one day after
the Start analysis on date (24 hours).
From the Analysis menu, click Perform Analysis. You should then received notification of a successful
analysis. The results may be saved to a location that you specify.
Disregard the pipe hydraulic analysis that SSA performed. We will check pipe hydraulics using HY8.
Click Time Series Plot to view specific details about the hydrograph. Check that a smooth curve is
developed. If not, may need to adjust Time Steps under Analysis Option. The Routing Timestep is the time
increment that computations are completed. The Reporting Timestep is the increment that values are reported.

13:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-009.mp4

125.030.009

Culvert pipe runoff calculation (rational)


If you have already completed your culvert design using the TR-20 method, you can perform a Save As of
the project and name it <ProjectID>-Rational-<Return Period>.spf. For example: 12345678-Rational-25yr.spf
From the Input menu, click Project Options
On the General Tab - Hydrology runoff specification section, change the Hydrology method to Rational.
From the Input menu, select IDF Curves... Click Load... Select the IDF file for your project county.
Double click on the subbasin(s). You'll notice all of the time of concentration data imported from Civil 3D.
Notice that the time of concentration was automatically populated form Civil 3D. Go to the Runoff Coefficient
Tab. The basin area can be broken down into subareas to create a composite curve runoff coefficient. A good
way to get the areas is by viewing a aerial image in Civil 3D and measuring the areas of the different cover
types. Enter the areas or percentages so they total 100%. Enter the corresponding runoff coefficients (C). You
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 253 of 390

can click on the ellipses to select the C values. You'll need to know the Hydrologic Soil Group of the area and
the general slope of the terrain Hydrologic Soil Group can be obtained using the USDA Web Soil Survey
mapping tool and Exhibit A-1 in TR-55. http://websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov/app/HomePage.htm
Use Civil 3D to determine the slope of the terrain. Go into the surface properties and select the style called
Slope Arrows. Then, go to the Analysis tab and choose slope arrows under analysis type. Change the number
of ranges to 3 and click the Run Analysis button. Set range 1 maximum slope to 2%. Set range 2 minimum
slope to 2% and maximum slope to 6%. Set range 3 minimum slope to 6%. You can change the range colors
according to your preference or leave the defaults. Click Ok.
From the Analysis menu, click Perform Analysis. You should then received notification of a successful
analysis. The results may be saved to a location that you specify.
Click Time Series Plot to view specific details about the analysis.
When completed, save the file.
8:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-010.mp4

125.030.010

Intro to HY8 existing condition


HY8 is one option for checking culvert hydraulics. A couple others include Culvert Master and Hydraflow
Express. The key is to use HDS-5 methodology.
http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/engineering/hydraulics/pubs/12026/hif12026.pdf
IMPORTANT: The existing condition culvert must be checked. This is important because you must compare
the proposed culvert headwater to the existing. Do not increase the pipe headwater elevation.
Create new HY8 Project. Save the project as the project ID. Name each culvert crossing the same as the
pipe network pipe with a descriptor. In the case of an existing pipe it would look something like 100+00Existing
Discharge Data
Set minimum flow to 0 cfs
Set Design flow to the smaller of the two computed peak runoffs (Rational or TR-20)
Set the Max flow to the larger of the two computed peak runoffs (Rational or TR-20)
Tailwater Data
If the information is available, enter in the irregular channel data for the most accurate results. If
tailwater data is not available, tailwater conditions can be estimated by normal depth approximations.
Use Civil 3D to cut a channel cross sections approximately 1 pipe length downstream. Alignments
and Surface Profiles work well for this.
A Civil 3D surface label can be used to determine the slope along the channel.
Dont forget to enter in the Mannings n values.

5:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-011.mp4

125.030.011

Intro to HY8 Existing Condition Continued


Roadway Data
If the goal is designing to avoid roadway overtopping, a constant roadway elevation can be used. If
roadway overtopping is part of the design, consult your drainage engineer.
Assuming that roadway overtopping is to be avoided, set crest length to 1,000 ft. Set the roadway
elevation to the top roadway elevation. This may be a sag location of the roadway, or some other
feature that should not be overtopped (a driveway for example).
Set the roadway top width.
Culvert Data
Name the pipe Existing
Enter the characteristics of the existing culvert pipe. Obtain this information with a field review.
Site Data
Obtain from survey data
Click Analyze Crossing to obtain the results. Make note of the headwater elevation for reference during the
design of the proposed culvert pipe.

9:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-012.mp4

125.030.012

Intro to HY8 Proposed


IMPORTANT: The existing condition culvert must be checked. This is important because you must compare
the proposed culvert headwater to the existing. Do not increase the pipe headwater elevation. Small changes
in culvert type, size, shape, length, and slope and/or changes in roadway geometry can significantly affect the
headwater elevation.
In the same HY8 project, right click on the existing pipe crossing and choose Duplicate. This allows you to
reuse some of the data from the existing crossing so you dont need to reenter it.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 254 of 390

Rename the new crossing to something like 100+00-Alt1


Discharge Data
Discharge data is typically the same as the existing condition. TRANS 233 prohibits increased flows
to WisDOT right of way from a plat of 5 or more parcels. However, if the roadway profile is changing
enough to affect a high point location, the contributing drainage area may change and affect the peak
flow at a crossing.
Tailwater Data
May or may not be the same as the existing condition.
Roadway Data
If the goal is designing to avoid roadway overtopping, a constant roadway elevation can be used. If
roadway overtopping is part of the design, consult your drainage engineer.
Assuming that roadway overtopping is to be avoided, set crest length to 1,000 ft. Set the roadway
elevation to the maximum allowable headwater elevation. This may be the subgrade elevation of the
roadway at a nearby sag, a driveway, sideroad, or some other feature where it is undesirable to
overtop with water.
Set the roadway top width.
Culvert Data
Before entering this data, consult the Charts 1B & 2B in HDS-5. This will give you a starting point for
your design. Start on the right side with HW/D of 1.5. Connect that value with the peak flow and read
the pipe size. That will be the minimum pipe size required under inlet control.
Name the pipe what you are proposing. For example: 42-Inch CPCS
Select pipe shape, material, and diameter. Note: The pipe diameter is entered in feet.
Embedment Depth: 0 (typical)
Inlet Type: conventional (typical)
Inlet Edge Condition: Square Edge with Headwall for metal pipe, Grooved Edge with Headwall
for concrete pipe (typical)
Inlet Depression: No (typical)
Site Data
Use the Culvert Design Properties pipe network label to obtain this information from Civil 3D.
9:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-013.mp4

125.030.013

Intro to HY8 Proposed Continued


Click Analyze Crossing to obtain the results
Display the Culvert Summary Table
Compare the results to the existing condition. If the headwater elevation is increased,
select a different alternative.
If HW/D is over 1.5, select a difference alternative.
If the headwater elevation exceeds the maximum headwater (overtopping), select a
different alternative.
Check to see if the culvert is in Inlet Control or Outlet Control. Different factors affect the
culvert capacity under these conditions. See FDM 13-15-10.3 for a list of factors.
Check the outlet velocity. Refer to HEC-14 do determine energy dissipation needs.
Select the desired alternative and make the revisions to the Civil 3D pipe network.
Take the revised pipe invert elevations and length and update the HY8 project. Verify the results are still
acceptable.

125.040 Storm sewer layout using Pipe Networks

Section updated:

9/23/2014

Developed in C3D14, proj-dataset1.zip in video


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/125/125-040-001-proj-dataset.zip
8:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-001.mp4

125.040.001

Create storm sewer Pipe Network


Create a new drawing using the WisDOT-pipe template. Save the drawing in the \Design\PipeNetworks\
folder. Name the file Pipe-StormSewer.dwg
Data shortcut reference all of the project roadway reference alignments. Although not required, it can also be
useful to data reference the proposed profiles for these alignments.
If the network will span past the slope intercepts of the project, it is best to create a combination existing
ground and top surface and a combination existing ground and datum surface.
Data shortcut reference the Cmbn-Exist-Top surface
Data shortcut reference the Cmbn-Exist-Datum surface
Data shortcut reference the Crdr-Commercial-PipeDatum surface
XReference other files that may be needed for the storm sewer design. In this exercise we will xreference the
Pavt.dwg and StormSewer-Sketch.dwg files
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 255 of 390

From the Home tab, select Pipe Network - Pipe Network Creation Tools
Name the pipe network Storm-<description>. For example: Storm-Begin-To-4thAve
Select the Storm Sewer Parts List
Select the Cmbn-Exist-Top surface
Select the main roadway alignment
Structure and Pipe label styles can be set to <none>
10:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-002.mp4

125.040.002

Layout Pipe Network Structures


From the Network Layout Tools, select Draw Structures Only
Choose the desired structure type for placement. For efficiency, place all of the like structure first. Then,
switch the structure type and place that type, etc. Refer to the Storm Sewer Summary Sheet to determine
which diameter structures should be used based on your first guess at the adjoining pipe size.
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/wisdot-c3d-help.pdf#Pipe_Networks The structure sizes can be
easily swapped later if a different pipe size is chosen.
Use the Station Offset transparent command for accurate structure placement. Refer to Storm Sewer
Summary sheet in the Help Document for assistance when determining structure offsets.

3:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-003.mp4

125.040.003

Layout Pipe Network Structures Rotate and move


If needed, rotate the structure to the correct orientation using the circular grip. The station/offset transparent
command is a handy tool rotating the structures.
Use the square grip to move the structures. The station/offset command can be used in conjuction with the
move. In this example, we move an inlet structure that drain surface low points. Turn the top surface to a
contour display style to located the low point and move the structure to that location.
Defer the placement of any outlets (apron endwalls) until later.

6:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-004.mp4

125.040.004

Layout Pipe Network pipes - Laterals


Open a second viewport. Set one viewport to top view (2D wireframe style) and the other to an isometric view
(Shaded style). This will help you validate the pipe network layout.
In the Network Layout Tools, select Draw Pipes Only.
Change the network surface to Rfnt-Datum.
Place the pipe by connecting the structures. To connect to a structure, hover the crosshairs over a structure
until you see a brown symbol appear. Left click to choose the structure. Then select the other structure to
connect to. Start by placing the laterals. Then proceed to the trunk.
You may place the pipes from upstream to downstream or from downstream to upstream, but you must have
the pipe slope direction toggled correctly in the Pipe Network Layout Tools. There are advantages to always
placing the pipes from upstream to downstream, but it is not required. One advantage is that the pipe start will
always be upstream. This will make labeling the pipe inverts for storm sewer detail sheets easier later on. In
addition, the pipe and structure rules are always calculated from upstream to downstream. So, placing the
network in that direction allow the rules to work as intended.

4:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-005.mp4

125.040.005

Layout Pipe Network pipes Trunk


Similar procedure as laterals. Best practice is to start from upstream and work in the downstream direction.
Pipes elevations are automatically calculated based on the slope and cover rules.

6:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-006.mp4

125.040.006

Renaming the Pipe Network parts


To take advantage of the labeling functions for plans production, you must rename the pipe network parts. It
also is important for keep things organized when doing the hydraulic analysis. Activating the quick properties
makes renaming the parts go quickly.
To rename the trunk line structures, use the Rename Part command located in the pipe network modify
ribbon. Select the first trunk line structure that you want to rename, then select the last trunk line structure that
you want to rename.
In the command dialogue, keep Rename Structure checked, but uncheck Rename Pipes. Set the value of the
first trunk line structure. The name template should be next counter.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 256 of 390

Under Name Conflict Options, Choose Rename Existing Parts. Click Ok.
Once all of the trunk line structures are renamed, proceed to the lateral structures. Use the quick properties
to rename these structures.
When all of the structures have been renamed, use the quick properties to rename the pipes. The pipe
names should follow this format: <UpstreamStructure>-<DownstreamStructure>.
11:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-007.mp4

125.040.007

Inspect the Pipe Network Crown matching


Generally, the pipes and structures should be placed to comply with the rules automatically. There are some
cases where this will not happen.
The wisdot-pipe.dwt includes a label called Design properties. It is recommended that you label each
structure that has more than one connecting pipes. The label can help you verify that the outflow pipes have
the lowest crown elevation.
If you need to apply rules, go to the Modify tab Design panel select Pipe Networks. On the Modify fly-out
is the Apply Rules command.
The way you select the parts to apply rules is very important. Here are the key points:
Always start upstream.
Do not select lateral parts and trunk parts together.
If laterals and the trunk both need rules applied, start with laterals, and then move on to the trunk.
If the outflow pipe crown does not have the lowest elevation for a particular structure, that can be adjusted in
the structure properties. Go the structure properties Connected Pipes tab. Select the outflow pipe and the
pipe crown that it should match in the list and right click. Choose Match Crowns. Select the pipe crown to
match and click ok. Alternatively, you can manually enter the elevations.

6:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-008.mp4

125.040.008

Inspect the Pipe Network Review rules


Some pipe and structure rules do not affect the network during layout, but they provide valuable feedback to
the designer on potential issues.
In the Toolspace-Prospector, select Pipes or Structures under the Pipe network. The first column shows
each parts status. If a rule flags a potential issue, that status will have a number in it indicating the number
of issues.
The Length Check pipe rule does not control network geometry during layout. After layout, if there is an
issue, it will appear as an issue in the part status.
The Maximum Pipe Size Check structure rule does not control network geometry during layout. After layout,
if there is an issue, it will appear in the part status. IMPORTANT: This rule is set up to indicated the true
maximum pipe size for any given structure. The max pipe size for this rule is based on 180-degrees of pipe
separation at the structure. Smaller degrees of separation may require a smaller pipe and/or a larger
structure.
The status shown in the Toolspace Item View for the pipe network parts is not always accurate. If there is a
potential problem, review the pipe and/or structure properties.

10:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-009.mp4

125.040.009

Inspect the Pipe Network Pipe separation at structures


The Maximum Pipe Size Check structure rule is an aid to make sure the correct size structure is selected for
a pipe run. However, that rule only applies for pipe with 180-degrees of separation.
To check pipe connections at all angles at a structure, the Interference Check tool can be used.
IMPORTATANT: It is important to understand that the Interference Check tool looks for clashes outside of the
structure walls.
Since we check pipe separation at a structure by measuring along the inside of the structure wall, we need to
first swap the structure in question for something small to expose more of the pipe.
Select the structure in model space, and click Swap Part from the contextual menu. Choose either a 3 ft
manhole, 3 ft inlet, or 3 ft catch basin.
From the Analyze tab Design panel, choose Interference Check. Select the pipe network to check. Select it
again.
Interference style should be Pipes Separation at Structures
3D proximity check criteria should be set to distance with a distance of 0.5.
Click ok. The number of interferences will be indicated.
Zoom to the structure in question in Top view. Set OSNAPZ to 1. Use the DISTANCE command to roughly
measure from the center of the structure to the outside of the most exterior interference (shown in red).
Multiply that value by 2. That is the minimum structure size for that location.
Swap the structure for the required size.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 257 of 390

In the toolspace-prospector, under pipe networks, expand Interference checks. Right click on the interference
check and select Re-run Interference Check to double check the structure selection. The same interference
check can be re-run at any time to check pipe separation at other structures within the network.
3:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-010.mp4

125.040.010

Pipe Network rule overrides


There may be situations where you may want to override a rule. For example, all of the pipes have a
minimum slope rule of 0.3%. This is just a starting point. You may want steeper slopes for smaller pipe sizes
or flatter slopes for larger pipe sizes.
Go into the part properties Rules tab.
Uncheck the Use Values from Rules Set button
Set the rule as desired.
At this point, you can either adjust the pipe network geometry manually, or you may choose to re-run the
rules.

8:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-011.mp4

125.040.011

Outlets Compare system elevation to outfall elevation


Check the outfall ditch elevation. Compare that elevation to the invert elevation at the last structure. You may
need to adjust the system elevation to match the ditch or match the ditch to the system.
In the training example, we look for opportunities to raise the system to match the ditch elevation. The
system elevations are then adjusted manually in the part properties by checking the cover and slope values
along the pipes.

15:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-012.mp4

125.040.012

Outlets Place outlet pipe and endwall


Adding the outlet pipe is similar to the culvert pipe workflow.
View the triangles for the Cmbn-Exist-Top surface.
Draw a line representing the flow line of the outlet pipe. Snap to the bottom of the upstream pipe and to the
surface triangles at the ditch location.
Turn the surface triangles off
Set the elevation of the line at the upstream structure to the flow line elevation using ACAD properties.
Create a feature line using the feature line from object command. Use the line previously created.
Drape the feature line on the Cmbn-Exist-Top or Cmbn-Exist-Datum surface.
Move the line up in the z-direction by the pipe diameter plus wall thickness.
Trim the line against the feature line.
Move the line down in the z-direction by half the pipe diameter plus the wall thickness.
Shorten the line by the endwall c dimension.
Using the Network Layout Tools, change the reference surface to Crdr-PipeDatum
Place the outlet pipe by snapping to the last structure and the end of the line.
Verify the pipe elevations. The rules have have overridden your intentions.
Place the apron endwall on the end of the pipe and rotate appropriately.
Rename the pipe and endwall.

5:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-013.mp4

125.040.013

Reconstructing and adjusting structures


Existing storm sewer structures that will be either Reconstructed or Adjusted are placed in the pipe network
like any other proposed structure. Choose the structure/cover combination from the parts list that matches the
existing structure.
In the structure properties:
Change its display style to either Existing Inlet or Existing Manhole.
Assign the correct name (structure number)
Change the description to either Reconstruct or Adjust
Change the Rule Set to No Rule
In Part Properties, set Control Sump By: to Elevation. Then set the sump elevation to the flowline
elevation of the existing manhole.
Open the QTO Manager from the Analysis tab - QTO panel. Click the Edit Pay Items on Specified Object
button. Select the structure. Remove the pay items that no longer apply. Add the pay items for either adjusting
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 258 of 390

or reconstructing.
3:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-014.mp4

125.040.014

Inlet surface elevation adjustment


When structures are inserted, their rim elevation is coincident with the reference surface. For inlets that
elevation will typically fall somewhere in the curb and gutter pan. For consistency and reporting purposes, a
Surface Adjustment Value should be assigned to the inlets so the rim elevation is correct for the cover flange.
Refer to the Storm Sewer Summary Sheet to determine what the Surface Adjustment Value should be for
each inlet cover type.
Using the Prospector window, sort the structures, so the inlet types are grouped together. Then select like
inlet types.
In the AutoCAD properties window, the Surface Elevation Adjustment can be set for all of the like inlets at
one time.

2:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-015.mp4

125.040.015

Miscellaneous structure properties


All WisDOT inlet and manhole structures have been constructed as flat-top structures to account for the
maximum size footprint. By doing this, the cone height parameter could be repurposed. For WisDOT
structures, the cone height parameter is used for adjustment ring height. By default, this parameter is set to 6inches in each structures properties. However, depending on your project needs, this parameter can be set
from 2 up to 10 in the structures properties.
For inlets, the default placement characteristic is On Grade. For inlets that are in a sag situation, you must
set them to On Sag in the structure properties. This is important when its time to check the pipe network
hydraulics.

8:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-016.mp4

125.040.016

Manhole variable tee and manhole variable special


The Manhole Variable Tee and Manhole Variable Special structures are unique structures that require a
slightly modified workflow.
When using these structures, start by placing the structures in the desired locations. The horizontal insertion
point is the center of the lower portion of the structure where the pipes connect.
The structures default to a 48-inch pipe connection (the smallest size). Select the structures in model space,
go into the structure properties, and changed the Structure Diameter (located at the bottom) to the pipe size
desired. For the Manhole Variable Special, you also need to check the Floor Thickness value. For pipe sizes
48 84, the floor thickness is 13-inches. For pipe sizes greater than 84, the floor thickness is 15-inches. The
Manhole Variable Tee floor thickness changes automatically according to the pipe size.
After placing the structures and setting their size parameter, connect them up with the pipes.
Once the pipes have been placed, the structures can then be rotated so they are correctly oriented with the
pipe. The extension Osnap is useful for aligning the structures with the pipes.
Finally, since the manhole covers are offset from the center of the pipe, a Surface Adjustment Value must be
entered in the structure properties to the rim is coincident with the top surface. To calculate the Surface
Adjustment Value, find the Cover Center Offset in the structure properties. Multiply this value by the cross
slope from the center of pipe to the manhole cover. This is the Surface Adjustment Value.

3:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-018.mp4

125.040.018

Swap parts
There are two methods for swapping parts. Civil 3D comes with a swap parts command that swaps one part at a
time. WisDOT includes an additional tool that swaps multiple parts at one time.
To swap multiple parts, first select all of the parts that you want swapped to the same new part. This can be
done by picking them on the screen, selecting them, in the prospector window, or by using the AutoCAD quick
select tool.
Type SWAPPARTS at the command line.
In the dialogue, choose the parts list that contains the desired part.
Choose the part family for pipes if pipes are being swapped, or structures if structures are being swapped.
Finally, choose the specific part to swap to in that part family.

125.050 Pipe Network tables

Section updated:

9/23/2014

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 259 of 390

4:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-050-001.mp4

125.050.001

Pipe Network tables - Culverts


Culvert pipe quantity tables can be produced using the custom WisDOT Pipe Network Tables tool. The tool
combines QTO functionality with Pipe Network data. It is intended to be used with pipe networks created with
WisDOT custom parts. Other parts may not produce the same result.
Open the Pipe-Culvert.dwg file.
If not already done, review each of the metal culvert pipes.
Check the rules tab to see how much cover the pipe has.
Using the FDM, determine the appropriate wall thickness for the culvert pipe.
Set the wall thickness under the Part Data section of the Part Properties.
From the Toolspace-Toolbox, located the Pipe Network Tables tool under WisDOT Reports. Execute the
custom tool.
Choose All Pipes and Structures if all pipe networks in the dwg are to be included in the table. Choose
Pipe Network(s) if only certain pipe networks are to be included in the table.
Under Report Type, choose Culvert Summary
Se the file name and file locations.
Click Create Report.
The report creates an Excel spreadsheet.
The Location column populates the alignment name that the pipe references. Change location can quickly be
changed using the Find/Replace functionality in Excel. For example: Find: 25 and Replace with: STH 25
If the culvert pipe lands completely on one side of the alignment and LT/RT designator will automatically be
placed along with the station.
The wall thickness that was chosen in Civil 3D will show up on the right side of the table. These columns can
be deleted if only concrete pipe is required.
For the Culvert Pipe bid items, both the Aluminum Thickness and Steel Thickness columns will need to be
filled in.
Fill in the number of joint ties required for concrete pipe. This column can be deleted if only metal pipe is
required.

3:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-050-002.mp4

125.050.002

Pipe Network tables Storm sewer


Storm Sewer quantity tables can be produced using the custom WisDOT Pipe Network Tables tool. The tool
combines QTO functionality with Pipe Network data. It is intended to be used with pipe networks created with
WisDOT custom parts. Other parts may not produce the same result.
Open the Pipe-StormSewer.dwg file.
From the Toolspace-Toolbox, located the Pipe Network Tables tool under WisDOT Reports. Execute the
custom tool.
Choose All Pipes and Structures if all pipe networks in the dwg are to be included in the table. Choose
Pipe Network(s) if only certain pipe networks are to be included in the table.
Choose the Report Type. Storm Sewer Pipes, Storm Sewer Structures, or Both Storm Sewer Pipes and
Structures
Set the file name and file locations.
Click Create Report.
The report creates an Excel spreadsheet.
The Location column populates the alignment name that the pipe references. Change location can quickly be
changed using the Find/Replace functionality in Excel. For example: Find: 25 and Replace with: STH 25
In the Pipes Table, fill in the number of joint ties required for any outfall locations.

Module 130 Cross-sections and quantities


130.010 Sample lines, sections, and volumes

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

10:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-010-001.mp4

130.010.001

General Steps:
1. Start NEW drawing based on WisDOT12.dwt
1. Save to SheetsPlan directory
2. Use Data Shortcuts to make a reference to the alignment & profile.
3. XREF Corridor drawing
4. Create Sample Lines
5. Create Section Views and/or compute materials

Page 260 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Frequency Lines vs Sample Lines


Frequency Lines
Used to compute slope intercept and other cross section info (i.e. super elevation slope)
Corridor data can be overridden at frequency stations
Will vary in length depending on assembly or distance to slope intercept
Frequency distance depends on design situation (i.e. 5 frequency in intersections)
Sample Lines
Used in preparation to show data in section views for plotting
Needed to compute end area volumes
Best practice is to have all of your sample lines at a uniform length
No design changes can be made via sample lines

Section Views
Primarily used for plotting
Great place to verify your design
No design changes can be made from section views
Design changes must be made in the corridor drawing
Laid out on Sheets
A Sheet refers to the grid, print area and sheet border
The section view refers to the supporting information shown with the section; offset text, elevation text, and station
value.
The section refers to station-specific data that is coming in for the surfaces and corridor.

Quantities
Earthwork Quantities
All you need is:
1. An Existing Surface
2. A Final Datum surface
Other surfaces such as rock, marsh, excavation below subgrade (EBS) and embankment are optional
Material Quantities
Material quantities come from Corridor Shapes

130.020 Sample line creation

Section updated:

10/1/2012

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-020-001-proj-dataset.zip
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-020-002-proj-dataset.zip
16:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-020-001.mp4

130.020.001

Before you create sample lines:


1. Start a new drawing based on WisDOT12.dwt
Save new file to SheetsPlan folder
2. Create data shortcut reference to the centerline alignment & design profile
3. XREF corridor drawing

Data References and Cross Sections


Dont I need more data references? What about my existing surface?
Corridors do not have the ability to be shared via data shortcut.
Sample lines are unique objects that can pull data through the corridor XREF.
The corridor and any surfaces associated with it will come over automatically when you create sample lines.
Existing surface
Corridor Top
Corridor Datum
Sample Line Terminology:
Swath Width: length of one side of a sample line as measured from the centerline.
Use the default of 150 if you plan to plot at 1=20
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 261 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Use swath widths of 75 if you plan to plot at 1=10


Sampling Increment: Standard distance between sample lines
Additional Sample Controls: optional additional stations where sample lines can be automatically generated
Exercise: Create Sample Lines
1. Extract the example files to your local Civil 3D projects folder.
1. Verify that your data shortcuts path is listed as c:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\
2. Start a new drawing based on WisDOT12.dwt.
1. Save the file to C:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\SheetsPlan\090100_xs.dwg
3. From the data shortcuts area of prospector, expand Centerline alignments.
1. Expand the alignment USH 51 Best Fit from Exist
2. Expand Profile
3. Right-click Proposed Profile Final and select Create Reference.
4. Click OK to the Create Profile Reference Dialog.
5. Zoom extents to view the alignment.
Because you go for the profile, you will not have to repeat the process for the alignment. The data
for he profile is not available in the drawing but we do not need to see the profile to proceed. If
you wish, you could make the profile visible by going to Home tab > Profile & Section Views
panel and selecting Profile View > Create Profile view.
4. Open the XREF manager by keying-in XREF at the cad command line (or your preferred method if it differs)
1. Click Attach DWG
2. Browse to c:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\Design\Corridors and select Corridor-USH51 North
Segment.dwg.
3. Click Open.
1. Set the reference type to Overlay.
2. Be sure all checkboxes for Specify on screen are clear.
3. Set the Path type to relative path
4. Click OK.
4. Click the save icon from the quick access toolbar to save.
5. From the Home tab > Profile & Section Views Panel, click Sample Lines.
1. When prompted to select an alignment, press enter (to pick from a list).
2. Highlight USH 51 Best Fit from Exist (this will be the only available alignment) and click OK.
6. In the Create Sample Line Group Dialog box:
1. Expand the Data source column so you can see the full names of the data you are working with.
2. Set the style for the surface Exist to EX Ground.
3. Set the style for USH 51 Best Fit from Exist corridor to XS Sheets with Links
4. Set the Style for the corridor Top surface to Final Top
5. Set the style for the corridor Datum surface to Final Datum.
6. Click OK.
You will now see the Sample Line Tools toolbar.
8. From the Sample Line creation methods icon (pulldown) select the By Range of Stations option.
In the Create Sample Lines - By Station Range dialog box:
1. Set the Start Station to 191+00.00
2. Set the End Station to 214+00.00
3. Scroll down and change the At Superelevation critical stations to False.
4. Click OK.
5. If you receive a warning message indicating that the corridor is out of date, just close it.
6. Press Escape if needed to exit the sample line creation tools.
You should now see sample lines and labels near the southern portion of the drawing.
9. Save the drawing.
10. End of Exercise.

8:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-020-002.mp4

130.020.002

Situations where you may need to make changes to your Sample Lines:
You need to add sample line stations
You need to change the swath widths
For example to 75 from 150 (or vice versa)
More section information is available
Examples: a new corridor surface is generated; a pipe network needs to be shown
#1 Rule of Sample Lines and Cross Sections:
Always look for a way to makes changes to the group as a whole.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 262 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Exercise: Modify Sample Lines


1. If you successfully completed the previous exercise where you created sample lines, you may continue
working in that file. If not, extract the example files associated with this exercise to your local Civil 3D projects
folder.
1. Open Civil 3D 2012
2. Verify that your data shortcuts path is listed as c:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\
3. Open the file 090100_xs.dwg
Adding a Sample Line
2. On the Home tab > Profile & Section Views panel, click Sample Lines
3. Press enter to pick an alignment from the list.
4. Highlight USH 51 Best Fit from Exist and click OK.
Because a sample line group already exists for this alignment, you will not need to set styles as you did in
the previous example. Any stations you create will be added to the existing group.
5. Key-in 19753.5 and press enter. (Note: do not use station notation such as 197+53.5, as Civil 3D will not
accept this entry.)
1. Press enter to accept the swat width of 150 to the left
2. Press enter again to accept a swath width of 150 to the right.
3. Press escape to complete the command.
4. Close the panorama dialog box if you receive a corridor is out of date warning.
Changing Sample Line Lengths
6. Select any sample line in the drawing.
7. From the Sample Line contextual tab > Modify panel, click Group Properties.
8. Switch to the Sample Lines tab.
1. Highlight the first row in the listing of sample line stations.
2. Scroll to the bottom of the listing.
3. Hold down shift and select the last row of the listing.
4. Click one of the left offset values and edit the entry to 75. Press enter.
5. Click one of the right offset values and edit the entry to 75. Press enter.
At this point, all rows should read 75 for both left and right swath widths.
6. Click OK.
You should see all sample lines in your drawing become shorter.
Add More Data; Sample More Sources
To mimic the effect of more project data being added after sample lines are created, you will import a
LandXML file containing pipe information. You will then use the Sample More Sources tool to ensure that
pipes will appear as part of the sampled data.
9. Go to the Insert Tab > Import panel and click Land XML.
10. Browse to the file 130-020-002-pipes.xml and click Open.
11. Click OK to the Import land XML dialog.
1. You will receive panorama messages indicating that the part geometry was found but optional
parameters were not. Click the green checkbox to dismiss this message.
2. Click Any sample line in the drawing.
3. From the Sample Line contextual tab, select Sample More Sources.
1. Highlight the drainage item listed under Available sources.
2. Click Add.
3. Click OK.
4. Save the Drawing.
End of Exercise.

130.030 Calculate and report volumes

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-020-002-proj-dataset.zip
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-020-002-proj-dataset.zip
5:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-030-001.mp4

130.030.001

Computing Volumes
You can compute volumes as soon as you have:
Proposed Data
Datum surface

Page 263 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Corridor
Sample Lines
Sample lines must see the proposed data, so use Sample More Sources as needed.
Find Compute Materials under:
Analyze > Volumes and Materials
When computing volumes for the first time:
1. Click the Edit Style button.
2. Click OK
You will then see materials listed in the compute materials dialog box.
Never click OK with the compute materials dialog box empty! It WILL crash otherwise.

Exercise: Calculate Volumes


1. If you successfully completed the previous exercise where you created sample lines, you may continue
working in that file. If not, extract the example files associated with this exercise to your local Civil 3D projects
folder.
1. Open Civil 3D 2012
2. Verify that your data shortcuts path is listed as c:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\
3. Open the file 090100_xs.dwg
2. On the ribbon, go to the Analyze tab > Volumes and Materials panel and click Compute Materials.
3. Click the Edit Style button.
1. You do not need to make any changes.
2. Click OK.
The Compute Materials dialog will now have spots for different materials. You do not need to fill in every type of
surface, but you do need to fill in at least the Existing Surface and Datum surface.
4. Click the <Click Here to Set All> field next to the Exist surface.
1. Choose the surface named Exist.
5. Click the <Click here to set all> field next to Final Datum.
1. Choose the USH 51 Best Fit from Exist - (1) Datum.
6. Click OK.
7. You will receive a message indicating that Not all of the named surfaces or corridor shapes have been
mapped to an object in the drawing Click OK.
Graphically, no change should be apparent.
8. Save the drawing.
9. End of Exercise.

6:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-030-002.mp4

130.030.002

Volume Reports
A Volume Report creates a text file that will open in Internet Explorer.
Volume Tables& Material Volume Tables
Total Volume Table and Material Volume table place information directly into AutoCAD.
The Style sheet determines the format and what information is shown when generating a volume report.
Exercise: Report Volumes
1. If you successfully completed the previous exercise where you created sample lines, you may continue
working in that file. If not, extract the example files associated with this exercise to your local Civil 3D projects
folder.
1. Open Civil 3D 2012
2. Verify that your data shortcuts path is listed as c:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\
3. Open the file 090100_xs.dwg
2. Go to the Analyze tab > Volumes and Materials panel and click Volume Report.
3. Click the folder icon next to Select a Style sheet.
1. Select Earthwork.xsl
2. Click OK.
4. When Internet Explorer pops up, it may ask you if you would like to run scripts. Click Yes.
5. You should now see the volume report with data in most of the columns.
6. Right-click anywhere in the browser window and choose Select All.
7. Right-click again and select Copy.
8. Launch Microsoft Excel. (Keep Civil 3D and the Internet Explorer Window open.)
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 264 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


9. Right-click and paste using the Match Destination theme option.
10. Save the Excel Spreadsheet as Earthwork 11-10-2012.xls in C:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\Design
\Quantities\EWKDetailWorkbooks\
11. Close Excel.
12. Save the Civil 3D dwg.
End of Exercise.
5:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-030-003.mp4

130.030.003

Exercise: Calculate & Report Structure Volumes


1. If you successfully completed the previous exercise where you created sample lines, you may continue
working in that file. If not, extract the example files associated with this exercise to your local Civil 3D projects
folder.
1. Open Civil 3D 2012
2. Verify that your data shortcuts path is listed as c:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\
3. Open the file 090100_xs.dwg.
4. If you receive a message Corridor is out of date and may be out of sync with other objects,
dismiss panorama by clicking the green checkbox.
2. Go to the Analyze tab > Volumes and Materials panel and click Compute Materials.
1. Click OK.
Since you have already computed earthwork for this, you will see a material list showing in the Edit
Material List dialog,
3. Click Add New Material.
1. You may need to expand the listing using the + sign.
2. Rename the New Material to Asphalt.
3. Change the Quantity Type to Structures.
This step is very important. If you forget to change the type to structures, it will not allow you to add a
corridor shape to the earthwork table.
d. Change the Data Type to Corridor Shape.
e. With USH 51 Best Fit from Exist - (1) Pave 1 as the active corridor shape, click the + sign.
f. Change the Corridor shape to USH 51 Best Fit from Exist - (1) Pave1_Shoulder and click the + sign.
By adding both of these corridor shapes to the Asphalt material, they will be lumped together for one
overall asphalt volume - of course if these need to be separate pay items in real life you can make a
separate material entry for the different types of asphalt.
4. Click Add New Material again.
1. Rename the material to Base.
2. Change the Quantity Type to Structures.
3. Change the Data Type to Corridor Shape.
4. With USH 51 Best Fit from Exist - (1) Base as the active corridor shape, click the + sign.
5. Click Add New material again and name it Subbase.
1. Repeat the previous steps to make sure this is a Structure-type computation.
2. Add the subbase corridor shape to this material.
6. Click OK.
If you receive a message Corridor is out of date and may be out of sync with other objects, dismiss
panorama by clicking the green checkbox.
7. Go to the Analyze tab > Volumes and Materials panel and click Volume Report.
Click the folder icon next to the Select a Style Sheet field.
1. Click the Select Material option.
2. Click OK.
8. Click YES to the message that displays.
9. Using the same techniques as the previous exercise, select all of the information and paste it into an excel
spreadsheet.
1. Save the excel spreadsheet as Corridor.xls in C:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\Design\Quantities
\EWKDetailWorkbooks\
2. Close Excel.
10. Save the AutoCAD file.
End of Exercise.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 265 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


130.040 Modify sheet style

Section updated:

10/1/2012

6:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-040-001.mp4

130.040.001

Exercise: Modify Styles


1. For this example, use the file ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-040-xs-stylesexample.dwg. This is a self-contained example project where you will have a chance to experiment with
changing style options.
2. Select one of the section views or sheets.
3. From the Section View contextual tab, click Section View Properties menu > Edit Group Plot Style.
1. When prompted to pick a graph, the simplest thing to select is the magenta offset labels along the
bottom of any view.
2. Press enter.
4. Switch to the Array tab.
1. Change the Row spacing to 1.5 and click OK.
2. You should see that the spacing between each view has increased.
5. Go back to the Group plot Style dialog the same way you did in step 3.
1. Switch to the Display tab.
2. Click the light bulb next to Minor Horizontal Grid.
3. Click the light bulb next to Minor Vertical Grid.
4. This will hide or turn off these items.
5. Click OK.
6. Change the annotation scale of the drawing to 1IN 20 FT.
7. Select one of the sheets or views and click Update Group layout.
8. Go back to the Group plot Style dialog the same way you did in step 3.
1. Switch to the Array tab.
2. Change the Column spacing to 0.01 and click OK.
3. You should see that two columns dont quite fit on a page.
9. Feel free to experiment with some of the other settings you find in the Group plot style dialog box.
10. Hit undo in the Quick Access toolbar until all changes have been undone.
11. Save the drawing.
End of exercise.

130.050 Section view creation

Section updated:

10/1/2012

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-050-001-proj-dataset.zip
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-050-002-proj-dataset.zip
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-050-003-proj-dataset.zip
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-050-004-proj-dataset.zip
7:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-050-001.mp4

130.050.001

Section Views and Scale


When creating views it is important that all of the scales you choose agree with each other:
Annotation Scale
Section View Style
Section Template
Exercise: Create Section Views
1. If you successfully completed the previous exercise where you created sample lines, you may continue
working in that file. If not, extract the example files associated with this exercise to your local Civil 3D projects
folder.
1. Open Civil 3D 2012
2. Verify that your data shortcuts path is listed as c:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\
3. Open the file 090100_xs.dwg.
4. If you receive a message Corridor is out of date and may be out of sync with other objects,
dismiss panorama by clicking the green checkbox.
2. In the lower-right corner of the screen, change the annotation scale to 1 in:10FT.
1. Give the drawing a moment to adjust the text and any other annotative features.
2. Save the file.
3. On the Home tab > Profile & Section Views panel, click Section Views > Create Multiple Views.
4. On the General page of the wiszard, set the Section view style to Sheets 1 In 10 FT Horiz 10 FT Vert
1. Click Next.
5. On the Section Placement page of the wizard, click the ellipsis next to Template for Cross Section Sheet.
1. Click the ellipsis again to browse to the file wisdot12-09-xs.dwt.
2. This will be located in: C:\Users\<your_name>\AppData\Local\Autodesk\C3D 2012\enu\Template
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 266 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

\USWI\planproduction\xsection\
3. Pick the X-Section 1 IN 10 FT Horiz 10 FT Vert option for the layout.
4. Click OK.
6. Make sure the group plot style is set to By Page Bottom to top and click Next.
7. Verify that the offset range is set to Automatic and is listed as -75 and 75.
1. This length comes directly from the sample lines and should be left as-is.
2. Click Next.
8. Do not make any changes to the elevation range page. Click Next.
9. On the Section Display options page, clear the checkboxes next to:
1. CutCommon
2. Embankment
3. Asphalt
4. Base
5. Subbase.
6. Click Next.
10. No action is needed on the Data Bands or Section View Tables pages, so click Create section Views.
11. Click off to the side in an empty location on your drawing.
1. You should have many pages of cross sections.
12. Save the drawing.
End of exercise.
7:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-050-002.mp4

130.050.002

Adding an additional sample line


Do not graphically delete section views!
Use the Delete option from the right-click menu in prospector!
#1 Rule of Sample Lines and Cross Sections:
Always look for a way to makes changes to the group as a whole.
In other words, if you a repeating a task on multiple stations there is probably a better way!

Exercise: Add n Additional Sample Line & Add it to the section views.
1. If you successfully completed the previous exercise where you created sample lines, you may continue
working in that file. If not, extract the example files associated with this exercise to your local Civil 3D projects
folder.
1. Open Civil 3D 2012
2. Verify that your data shortcuts path is listed as c:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\
3. Open the file 090100_xs.dwg.
4. If you receive a message Corridor is out of date and may be out of sync with other objects,
dismiss panorama by clicking the green checkbox.
2. On the Home tab > Profile and Section Views panel, click sample lines.
1. Press enter to select USH 51 Best Fit from Exist and click OK.
2. When prompted to key-in a station along the alignment, type in 19155 and press enter.
3. Type in 75 for the left swath width and press enter.
4. Type 75 for the right swath width and press enter.
Feel free to experiment by adding stations on your own. Just remember to set the swath widths to
the uniform 75 for both the left and right sides. If you add a sample line where one already
exists, civil 3d will ask if you wish to delete the old one.
5. Press escape to complete the command.
3. Start the rectangle command from the Home tab > Draw panel.
1. Trace the first sheet by drawing a rectangle directly over it.
3. In Prospector, go to the alignment listing.
1. Expand USH 51 Best Fit from Exist.
2. Expand Sample Line Groups
3. Expand Section View Groups.
4. Right-click section view groups and select Delete.
4. Go back to the Home tab of the ribbon > Profile & Section Views
1. Click Section Views > Create Multiple Views.
5. On the General page of the wiszard, set the Section view style to Sheets 1 In 10 FT Horiz 10 FT Vert
1. Click Next.
6. On the Section Placement page of the wizard, click the ellipsis next to Template for Cross Section Sheet.
1. Click the ellipsis again to browse to the file wisdot12-09-xs.dwt.
2. This will be located in: C:\Users\<your_name>\AppData\Local\Autodesk\C3D 2012\enu\Template
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 267 of 390

\USWI\planproduction\xsection\
3. Pick the X-Section 1 IN 10 FT Horiz 10 FT Vert option for the layout.
4. Click OK.
7. Make sure the group plot style is set to By Page Bottom to top and click Next.
8. Verify that the offset range is set to Automatic and is listed as -75 and 75.
1. This length comes directly from the sample lines and should be left as-is.
2. Click Next.
9. Do not make any changes to the elevation range page. Click Next.
10. On the Section Display options page, clear the checkboxes next to:
1. CutCommon
2. Embankment
3. Asphalt
4. Base
5. Subbase.
6. Click Next.
11. No action is needed on the Data Bands or Section View Tables pages, so click Create section Views.
12. Using the rectangle you created earlier as a guide, place the section views in the same location by
snapping to the lower-left corner of the rectangle.
13. Save the drawing.
14. End of Exercise.

7:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-050-003.mp4

130.050.003

ROW and Utilities


The example uses Beam Guard but the technique can be used for:
Utilities
Right-of-way labels
Any item that needs to be shown in section with a unique style.
Overview of Steps
An alignment is needed for the horizontal location
A profile is needed for the elevation component
Usually developed from a surface
Use the Section View Group Properties
Add Profile Grade
Set Marker style as needed

Exercise: Showing Beam Guard in Section


1. If you successfully completed the previous exercise where you created sample lines, you may continue
working in that file. If not, extract the example files associated with this exercise to your local Civil 3D projects
folder.
1. Open Civil 3D 2012
2. Verify that your data shortcuts path is listed as c:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\
3. Open the file 090100_xs.dwg.
4. If you receive a message Corridor is out of date and may be out of sync with other objects,
dismiss panorama by clicking the green checkbox.
2. On the insert tab > Import panel, click Land XML.
1. Import the file 130-050-003-beamguard alignments.xml with all the default settings.
2. Click ok.
3. Go to the Manage tab.
1. Save the drawing.
2. On the Styles panel, click Import.
3. Browse to file Beam Guard Style.dwg in the files included with this chapter.
4. Clear all other style options except for Beam Guard Left and Beam Guard right.
5. Clear the checkbox for import Styles.
6. Click OK.
4. Click any sheet or section view.
1. From the contextual tab, click View Group Properties.
5. You should be in the Section View Group Properties dialog box looking at the Section Views tab.
1. Scroll over and find Profile Grade.
2. Click the ellipsis.
6. From the Alignment list, pick Beam Guard North.
1. Click Add.
2. Set the Marker style to Beam Guard R.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 268 of 390

7. From the Alignment list, pick Beam Guard South.


1. Click Add.
2. Set the Marker style to Beam Guard L.
8. Click OK.
9. Click OK.
You should now see beam guard at every station.
10. Save the drawing.
End of exercise.
7:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-050-004.mp4

130.050.004

The only thing to remember at this point is to add the sheets to the sheetset manager.
Click the ellipsis and browse to C:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\SheetsPlan

Exercise: Create Sheets


1. If you successfully completed the previous exercise where you created sample lines and multiple section
views, you may continue working in that file. If not, extract the example files associated with this exercise to
your local Civil 3D projects folder.
1. Open Civil 3D 2012
2. Verify that your data shortcuts path is listed as c:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\
3. Open the file 090100_xs.dwg.
4. If you receive a message Corridor is out of date and may be out of sync with other objects,
dismiss panorama by clicking the green checkbox.
2. On the Output tab > Plan Production Panel, click Create Section Sheets.
3. Under the sheet set area of the Create Section sheets dialog box, switch the radio button over to Add to
Existing Sheet set.
1. Click the ellipsis.
2. Browse to C:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\SheetsPlan\planproduction.dst
3. Click Open
4. Click Create Sheets.
5. Click OK to confirm that the drawing will be saved.
6. After a moment multiple tabs will appear for each sheet. If you do not see the new tabs right away, close the
drawing and go back in.
7. Save the drawing.
8. End of Exercise.

130.060 WisDOT standards - Section views

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

2:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-001.mp4

130.060.001

Section Views for Plan Sheets File Management


File location = {ProjID}\SheetsPlan folder

4:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-002.mp4

130.060.002

Section Views for Plan Sheets Data Referencing


Data Shortcut References:
Baseline Alignments
Roadway Model Surfaces
Utility Surface Profiles
Ultimate Right-of-Way Surface Profiles
Corridor dwg file

5:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-003.mp4

130.060.003

Section Views for Plan Sheets Graphic Content


Proposed objects are represented by the Roadway Model Surfaces
Corridors provide automated labeling

6:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-004.mp4

130.060.004

Corridor links are typically not visible


XSSheets code set style
XSSheets With Links code set style

Page 269 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

4:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-005.mp4

130.060.005

Utilities and RW markers are tied to surface profiles


Edge of lane markers

1:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-006.mp4

130.060.006

Section Views for Plan Sheets Adding Labels


Why do we need manual labels?
Because the corridor isnt always visible, so automated labeling needs to be supplemented with manual
labels.
Elevation-Offset labels
Slope-Percent labels
Slope-Ratio labels

2:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-007.mp4

130.060.007

Adding labels - elevation/offset

3:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-008.mp4

130.060.008

Adding labels - slope percent

1:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-009.mp4

130.060.009

Adding labels - slope ratio

5:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-010.mp4

130.060.010

Section Views for Plan Sheets Custom Text Markers


Single Custom Text Marker Using Block

10:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-011.mp4

130.060.011

Multiple custom text markers at common points using corridor feature lines 1

5:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-012.mp4

130.060.012

Multiple custom text markers at common points using corridor feature lines 2

4:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-013.mp4

130.060.013

Section Views for Plan Sheets Conclusion


File Management
Data Referencing
Graphic Content
Labels
Custom Text Markers

130.070 Exercise DS1800 - Create section views for plans

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-070-create-plan-production-section-views.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-070-proj-dataset.zip
2:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-001.mp4

130.070.001

Introduction/unzip project dataset

3:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-002.mp4

130.070.002

Ensure corridor surfaces are current

4:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-003.mp4

130.070.003

Ensure refinement surfaces are current

4:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-004.mp4

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 270 of 390

130.070.004
8:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-005.mp4

130.070.005

Create section view DWG. Create references

2:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-006.mp4

130.070.006

R/W object in section views explanation

6:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-007.mp4

130.070.007

Create ultimate r/w surface profiles

4:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-008.mp4

130.070.008

Data shortcut reference ultimate r/w profiles

2:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-009.mp4

130.070.009

Create utilities profiles for section views DWG

6:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-010.mp4

130.070.010

Create utility alignment from survey feature lines

4:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-011.mp4

130.070.011

Create utility surface profiles

3:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-012.mp4

130.070.012

Data shortcut reference utilities

3:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-013.mp4

130.070.013

Matchline layout explanation

7:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-014.mp4

130.070.014

Create matchline alignments

6:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-015.mp4

130.070.015

Create sample lines by range of stations 1

8:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-016.mp4

130.070.016

Create sample lines by range of stations 2

2:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-017.mp4

130.070.017

Create multiple section views

4:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-018.mp4

130.070.018

Inspect section views

6:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-019.mp4

130.070.019

Add special stations to section views

8:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-020.mp4

130.070.020

Add r/w and utilities to section views

2:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-021.mp4

130.070.021

Review

130.075 Projecting 3D objects onto cross sections

Section updated:

4/13/2015

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

8:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-075-001.mp4

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


130.075.001

Page 271 of 390

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-075-001-proj-dataset-fin.zip
** NOTE ** This method should only be used if a survey database is not available. If a survey database is
available, that provides a shorter workflow for projecting survey figures onto cross sections. That method is found
at 130.075.002.
Prerequisites
Before starting this training module users should have a working knowledge of Civil 3D corridor modeling and
cross section sheet production. The cross sections sheets drawing should have already been created before
moving on to this module
Objectives
Projection styles are used to project AutoCAD objects such as 3Dpolylines, feature lines, blocks, 3D cogo points,
survey figures and 3D solids onto profile views and section views. Objects are represented by marker styles and
label styles. Projection styles are very useful in showing locations of utilities, and ROW locations in section views.
Elevations can be assigned to the projections based on the object elevation itself or based on a surface or profile.
Projection styles are dynamically linked to the objects they reference. However, when projected objects are added
to a drawing, the markers and labels do not update until the projections command is re-run. This module will
demonstrate how to apply and update projection styles for feature lines.
Obtaining Data from Utilities File
Data found in existing conditions utilities files can be inserted into a cross section drawing for use with projection
styles.
1. Open the existing Uti-Ex.dwg file found in C:\WisDOT\design\c3d\12342014\BaseData.
Each of the utilities line work groups (electric, gas, etc.) will need to be converted to feature lines.
2. Isolate each separate utilities linework layer one at a time by picking one polyline in a group and picking the
Isolate button in the Home tab of the ribbon.
Once a utility layer is isolated go to the Home tab of the ribbon and pick Feature Line>Create Feature
Lines From Objects. Then select all visible linework.
In the Create Feature Lines dialog box, check the Style box in order to select the proper style. From the
drop-down list select the appropriate E UTL layer for each utility group.
Check the Erase existing entities box so that the old linework is replace with feature lines and there is
no redundant linework.
3. Save the Uti-Ex.dwg file, and close it. This file will be inserted into your cross sections drawing later in the
workflow.
Setting Up the Cross Section Drawing for Projections
4. Open the training cross sections drawing Crdr-25_xs.dwg
Ensure that the corridor file is an XREF in the cross section drawing.
Ensure that the following data has been referenced:
Existing Ground surface while the section data for the existing ground surface can be
obtained from the corridor XREF file, we will need the surface itself referenced from a data
shortcut in order to sample its elevations for the projection markers.
Note: All projections will use the existing ground surface to set elevations.
Proposed centerline alignment and design profile
All existing ROW alignments
Ensure that your sample line group has been created, and that your section views exist in the
drawing.
Create Feature Lines from Existing ROW Alignments
Alignments cannot be projected in Civil 3D, but feature lines can be created from the existing ROW alignments,
and these can be projected.
5. Home, Feature Line, Create Feature Line From Alignment.
Uncheck the Weed Points option
Select E RW Existing Right-Of-Way for the style, and select OK. This will need to be done for each
separate existing ROW alignment.
Insert Uti-Ex.dwg Into Cross Section Drawing
The Uti-Ex.dwg file will now need to be inserted into the cross section drawing, and the feature lines from that file
will need to be assigned to a site.
6. Go to Insert , Block, Insert.
Browse to the Uti-Ex.dwg file for the project, and make sure none of the boxes are unchecked for
Insertion Point, Scale, or Rotation.
Be sure to check the Explode option.
click OK.
7. Right-click in model space and select Quick Select.
In the Quick Select dialog box select:
Apply to: Entire drawing
Object type: Feature line
Operator: Select All
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 272 of 390

8. Select OK to create a selection set of all feature line.


9. Right-click in model space and select Move to Site
10. Choose the same site which was created for the existing ROW feature lines created from alignments and select
OK. This will ensure that all of the newly inserted feature lines are associated with a site. If this is not done, these
feature lines will not get projected.
Applying Utilities Projection Styles to Cross Sections
11. To project all feature lines to the cross section views type the command PROJECTOBJECTSTOMULTISECT.
Select either a section view or a sample line from model space.
When the dialog box appears, uncheck all object types from the list except feature lines.
Keep the Style as Use Object.
Elevation Options should be set to surface Exist.
Label Style should be set to <None>.
12. Check your section views to confirm that the markers for utilities and ROW are showing up.
Editing Projection Styles
Projection styles can be edited after being applied, and can also be removed or added.
13. Run the PROJECTOBJECTSTOMULTISECT command again.
Uncheck everything but feature lines.
Set the setting just as detailed in the last step, and click OK.
A message will appear with an option to overwrite the definition of already existing projections, or to leave them as
they are. If any feature lines were deleted in plan view, the user can choose to overwrite the definition in order to
remove the corresponding projection markers in the section views. If new feature lines were added to plan view
then these will now be added into the section views.
5:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-075-002.mp4

130.075.002

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-075-002-proj-dataset.zip
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-075-002-proj-dataset-fin.zip
Prerequisites
Before starting this training module users should have a working knowledge of Civil 3D corridor modeling and
cross section sheet production. The cross sections sheets drawing should have already been created before
moving on to this module.
Objectives
Projection styles are used to project AutoCAD objects such as 3Dpolylines, feature lines, blocks, 3D cogo points,
survey figures and 3D solids onto profile views and section views. Objects are represented by marker styles and
label styles. Projection styles are very useful in showing locations of utilities, and ROW locations in section views.
Elevations can be assigned to the projections based on the object elevation itself or based on a surface or profile.
Projection styles are dynamically linked to the objects they reference. However, when projected objects are added
to a drawing, the markers and labels do not update until the projections command is re-run. This module will
demonstrate how to apply and update projection styles for survey figures.
Obtaining Utilities Data from Survey Database
Survey figures representing existing conditions utilities found in the project survey database can be inserted into a
cross section drawing for use with projection styles.
1. Open the training cross sections drawing (Crdr-25_xs.dwg)
This dwg should already have the corridor file as an XREF within it, and the section sheets created.
The Exist surface is data referenced into the drawing.
2. Click on the Survey tab in toolspace, and right-click on Survey Databases and choose Set Working Folder.
When prompted for a working folder location, navigate to C:\WisDOT\design\c3d\12342014\BaseData
\Survey and click OK.
3. Right-click on Projection Styles Training which is under the Survey Databases heading in toolspace, and
select Open for edit. This will open the example survey database to give you access to insert data into your
current drawing.
Each of the utilities survey figure groups (electric, gas, etc.) will already have a survey query created for it. You
can choose which of these utilities groups you would like to add to your cross section drawing. These are
found under the Survey Queries heading.
4. Right-click on each query you would like to insert and select Insert into drawing.
If you would like to insert them all at once, you can right-click on the Figures heading and select Insert
into drawing.
Confirm that the survey figure have been inserted into model space in your cross sections drawing, and then
right-click on the Projection Styles Training survey database and select Close survey database.
Applying Utilities Projection Styles to Cross Sections
5. To project all survey figures to all cross sections type the command PROJECTOBJECTSTOMULTISECT.
Select either a section view or a sample line from model space.
When the dialog box appears, uncheck all object types from the list except survey figures.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 273 of 390

Keep the Style as Use Object.


Elevation Options should be set to surface Exist.
Label Style should be set to <None>. Click OK.
6. Check your section views to confirm that the markers for utilities are showing up.
Reloading Survey Figures After Survey Database Update
When inserting survey figures to a drawing from survey database, these inserted figures are not live. This means
that if there is a change to the survey figures made within the survey database, those changes will not
automatically take place within the drawing they have been inserted into.
Once notification from survey is received that the survey database has been updated, the survey database will
need to be opened for edit as was done in the original steps for inserting the survey figures. You will have to be
working in the cross sections drawing when completing the following steps.
If only one utility group was modified, just the electric lines for example, then you will only need to reload that one
query.
7. Right-click on the query for that utility group and select Remove from drawing.
8. Right-click on the query a second time and select Insert into drawing. This will effectively give you the newest
survey figures from the survey database.
9. If changes were made to many of the utility groups it will be quicker just to do the above steps on the Figures
heading in the Survey tab of toolspace. However, this will add all survey figures to the drawing so in many cases
this may not be desirable.
Updating Projection Styles
Projection styles will need to be updated if changes have been made to the survey database.
10. Run the PROJECTOBJECTSTOMULTISECT command again.
Uncheck everything but survey figures.
Set the setting just as detailed in the original steps, and click OK.
A message will appear with an option to overwrite the definition of already existing projections, or to leave them as
they are. If any feature lines were deleted in plan view, the user can choose to overwrite the definition in order to
remove the corresponding projection markers in the section views. If new feature lines were added to plan view
then these will now be added into the section views.

130.077 Managing cross section labels

Section updated:

6/17/2015

Exercise file
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-077-exercise-file.zip
2:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-001.mp4

130.077.001

Introduction
** WARNING ** Lines representing surfaces in cross-sections should NEVER be modified from the cross section
only. Changing the representation of design surfaces only in the cross sections and not in the original surface
introduces a conflict in design data provided to the contractor. The design model surfaces should always be
reflected accurately in cross sections.
Automatic and manual labels
Grade and Elevation/Offset labels either can be automatic or manual. Automatic labels are managed by the Code
Set Style and keep synchronized with changes to the corridor and section views. Manual labels keep synchronized
with the section view, but not the corridor.
Manual labels should generally be avoided and only used when necessary and it is certain there will be no more
edits to the corridor.

2:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-002.mp4

130.077.002

Code set styles

Code set styles manage many objects. For this topic, it is sufficient to know that they manage automatic
grade and elevation/offset labels. Code set styles can be applied to many different objects. They
include:
Subassemblies
Assemblies
Corridors
Section views (including the corridor section editor)
Section view groups
The wide reach of code set styles is important to understand for this topic because changes to code set
styles will be seen throughout a file, not only in the object that is currently being worked on.
Rebuild corridor to make sure corridor is up-to-date.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 274 of 390

Methods to manage automatic label sets in code set styles


Create modified code set style to apply to section view or section view group
** TIP ** It is good practice to make a copy of a standard code set style before editing it. That way, the
original code set style is always available if mistakes are made.
In Toolspace Settings Tab, code set styles are found under General Multipurpose Styles Code
Set Styles. Right-click on the code set style to copy and click "Copy".

Custom code set styles should be named either for the section view group they are being applied to or
some unique feature that they have. Some examples would be XS Sheets - Mainline stage 2, XS
Sheets - ElevOff left only.

4:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-003.mp4

130.077.003

Add, remove, change marker label styles on section view group

This method is good for making changes to specific point codes across an entire section view group or
selected section views.
Open a code set style for editing. That can either be done from:
Toolspace Settings
General... Multipurpose Styles... Code Set Styles
or from the Section View Group properties.
Right-click on the Section View Group for the cross-sections and click "Properties".
Click on the "Sections" tab and click on the Style for the referenced corridor.
Select the appropriate code set style and click the "Edit Style" button.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 275 of 390

Grade labels are associated with links. Elevation Offset labels are associated with point codes. Label
styles can be changed for any point or link codes used in the section view group.
** TIP ** View a section with point and/or link codes visible while working on code set style edits. The
standard code set styles that include these attributes are "CRDR Proposed - Point codes" and "CRDR
Proposed - Point and Link codes".
There are 2 methods to accomplish this in a typical cross sections file.
Change the code set style of one section view in a section view group, make the changes, and
then change the code set style for the one section view back to the rest of the section view group.
This can be done by selecting a section view in modelspace by clicking on the station value of the
section. Right-click and click on "Section View Properties" In the Sections tab, override the style of
the corridor section.

Create a full or partial copy of the section view group being worked with and set the code set
style to "CRDR Proposed - Point codes" or "CRDR Proposed - Point and Link
codes".
Once a code set style is created that looks correct, it can be applied to an entire section view group or
override specific section views as shown above.

3:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-004.mp4

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 276 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


130.077.004

This method is good for changing the layout of an elevation/offset label for a point code.
There are 8 point codes and associated marker label styles specifically built for elevation/offset label customization.
They are:
ElevOff000 ElevOff045 ElevOff090 ElevOff135 ElevOff180 ElevOff225 ElevOff270 ElevOff315
East
Northeast North
Northwest West
Southwest South
Southeast
The second row describes the direction from the point that the label offsets.
** INFO ** The following label styles were added to wisdot14. dwt in May 2014.
There are 4 series of label styles available to use. The XXX designates one of the eight angles above.
ElevOff-RoTxt-NoLeadXXX (Default) Rotated text, no leader
ElevOff-RoTxt-ExtLeadXXX Rotated text, extended leader
ElevOff-Txt-NoLeadXXX Top-aligned text, no leader
ElevOff-Txt-ExtLeadXXX Top-aligned text, extended leader
The marker label style of any point code can be changed to one of these styles to change the layout of an
elevation/offset label.

6:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-005.mp4

130.077.005

Add a MarkPoint sub to an assembly with an elevation/offset point code

This method is good for placing elevation/offset labels at points in assemblies that do not have point
codes assigned to them. It can also provide a method to label the same point on the left and right sides
differently.
MarkPoint is a subassembly that places a point code in an assembly at whatever location can be
snapped to. It is located on the Generic subassembly tool palette. In conjunction with the custom point
marker label styles, MarkPoint will allow placing an elevation/offset label anywhere on a section without
building unwanted corridor feature lines.
In the Toolspace Prospector, Right-click the code set style to edit XS Sheets - Mainline stage 2
In the Codes tab, change the label style of that Daylight point code to <none>.

The MarkPoint subassembly is found in Tool Palettes... Civil Imperial Subassemblies Generic
MarkPoint. Click the subassembly to select it and click the location on the assembly in the file where
the label is to be placed.

Then select the subassembly and change the Point Code of the MarkPoint subassembly to the
style of label desired. In this example, ElevOff000 for labels on the right side and ElevOff180 for
labels on the left side.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 277 of 390

Rebuild the corridor to apply the MarkPoint subassemblies.

2:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-006.mp4

130.077.006

Create and use custom marker label style in code set style

This method is good if the provided elevation/offset labels do not meet labeling needs.
Similar to creating custom code set style, custom marker label styles can be created by copying
standard marker label styles and modifying them. These styles can then be applied to point and link
codes in a custom code set style.
Label styles are found in Toolspace... Settings tab Multipurpose styles Label styles Marker.
Click a style that is very similar to what you want, right-click, click "Copy" to make a custom label
style.

4:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-007.mp4

130.077.007

Modifying individual automatic labels in a section view

This method is good if only a few labels need to be modified in a section view group. If more than 10-20
labels need to be modified in the same way, methods that can modify multiple labels at once should be
considered.
Dragging a label
A single automatic label can be selected in a section view with a Ctrl+Click. Once selected, a blue grip
will appear that can be dragged to a more visible location.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 278 of 390

** TIP ** Be careful of objects snaps (osnaps) when dragging labels. To avoid snapping to grid lines or
surface links, either turn osnaps off (F3 toggle on/off) or temporarily override osnaps with Shift+Right
Click.
Change a label style or visibility
Selecting an automatic label to change its style or visibility is different than dragging it. Click on the
entire label set to select it. Then right-click over the label to be changed.

From the Label Properties dialog box, the style, flip, and visibility of the label can be changed.
** WARNING ** Once a label is made invisible, it cannot be selected for editing. To retrieve the label:
Click the section view labels to select them
Right-click, click "Edit Corridor Section Properties"
Click the "Codes" tab and click the "Reset Labels" button. Click "OK" button.
This will reset all of the labels for the section view.

3:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-008.mp4

130.077.008

Creating manual section view labels

This method is good if only a few labels need to be modified in a section view group and the corridor is
no longer changing. If more than 10-20 labels need to be created in the same way, using the MarkPoint
sub in the corridor assemblies should be considered.
Click on the section view labels to select them. Labels can then be added from the contextual ribbon.

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 279 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Manual labels can be dragged and changed with standard grips similar to automatic labels. In addition,
manual labels can be moved. The diamond grip moves the point being labeled. The square grip drags
and rotates the label.

** WARNING ** Manual labels that are moved do not stay dynamic to the corridor.

130.080 WisDOT standards - Earthwork

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

24:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-080-001.mp4

130.080.001

Earthwork File Management


File location = {ProjID}\Design\Quantities folder
File naming
Drawing Template
Earthwork Data Referencing
Data Shortcut References:
Baseline Alignments
Roadway Model Surfaces
Subsurface
Corridor Marsh Excavation Surface
Xreferences:
Corridor dwg file

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 280 of 390

Earthwork Matchline Alignments


Why?
Matchline Layout
Matchline Alignment Naming
Earthwork Sample Line Groups and Sample Lines
Sample Line Groups
Naming
SLG - Parent Alignment Name
Surfaces
Corridors
Display Styles
Sample Lines
Naming
SL Station Value
Spacing
14:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-080-002.mp4

130.080.002

Earthwork Assign Materials List


Material List
Naming does it matter?
Surfaces
Corridor Shapes
Check out SLG - Sections
Earthwork Create Reports
File Type
XML
File Naming
EwkDetail-Alignment Name or Sample Line Group Name
Folder Management
Place in \Quantities\EWKDetailReports folder
Why?

25:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-080-003.mp4

130.080.003

Earthwork Create Earthwork Detail Excel Workbooks


File Naming
EwkDetail-Alignment Name or Sample Line Group Name
Folder Management
Place in \Quantities\EWKDetailWorkbooks folder
Why?
Earthwork Create Earthwork Summary Excel Workbooks
File Naming
EwkSummary-Alignment Name or Sample Line Group Name
Folder Management
Place in \Quantities\EWKSummaryWorkbooks folder
Why?
Earthwork Checking the Results
Surface to Surface
Why wont the numbers be exact?

6:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-080-004.mp4

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 281 of 390

130.080.004

Earthwork DWG file


Data to Xreference and Data Reference
Create Matchline Alignments
Create Sample Line Groups and Sample Lines
Assign Material Criteria to Sample Line Groups
Create Earthwork Detail XML Reports
Create Earthwork Detail Excel Workbooks
Create Earthwork Summary Excel Workbooks
Check your work

130.090 Exercise DS1900 - Create earthwork reports

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Detailed exercise instructions


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-090-earthwork-quantities.pdf
Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-090-proj-dataset.zip
14:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-001.mp4

130.090.001

Create Marsh Excavation surface

9:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-002.mp4

130.090.002

Create DWG

11:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-003.mp4

130.090.003

Create matchlines 1

7:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-004.mp4

130.090.004

Create matchlines 2

10:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-005.mp4

130.090.005

Create sample lines 1

6:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-006.mp4

130.090.006

Create sample lines 2

6:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-007.mp4

130.090.007

Create sample lines 3

8:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-008.mp4

130.090.008

Assign materials 1

1:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-009.mp4

130.090.009

Assign materials 2

7:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-010.mp4

130.090.010

Create reports

6:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-011.mp4

130.090.011

Create earthwork detail report 1

12:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-012.mp4

130.090.012

Create earthwork detail report 2

6:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-013.mp4

130.090.013

Create earthwork summary report 1

6:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-014.mp4

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 282 of 390

130.090.014
15:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-015.mp4

130.090.015

Check earthwork summary

Module 140 Parcels


The segments in this module use files found within the zip files linked to sections. If you want to do the exercises
in the same file as the instructor, do the following prior to starting the section:
Download the zip file to your computer.
Extract the zip file to the following local location. C:\WisDOT\design\c3d
After extraction, there should be a folder called "12345678". This is a Civil 3D project folder.
You will be able to create/open files in the same locations as the instructor.

140.010 Parcel basics

Section updated:

10/1/2012

14:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-010-001.mp4

140.010.001

Parcels are areas, not objects


Labels are their point of access
Parcels can share boundary lines
Closed shape is CRITICAL!
If more than one parcel or parcel line contributes to a closed shape external to an existing parcel a new
parcel will be created
Information tab
Name field not editable from here there is a renaming tool
Use Name in Template in Parcel Style
Composition Tab
Area Label selection
Parcel Statistics
Analysis Tab
Mapcheck or Inverse Analysis
Reset Point of Beginning, or turn counterclockwise
Legal Description
User Defined Properties tab
Data for labeling
Includes WisDOT custom data
Allows hatching in parcel area
Beware of pattern and scale
Fill Distance allows hatching to be observed in a set distance from the boundary
Parcel Naming Template
Parcel Segment Marker Style for displaying in sections

140.020 Parcel creation and editing

Section updated:

10/1/2012

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

21:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-020-001.mp4

140.020.001

Creating parcels works best if from objects


Use polyline (2D or 3D), Lines, Arcs (no feature lines)
Make sure to snap ends together, or C for Close
Home tab...Create Design panel...Parcel...Create Parcel from Object
Creation dialog
Site is important dont cross grading in same site
Parcel Style hatching and can lend its name to the parcel name
Area Label
Line/Curve labels
Edit Drop down is icon left of center on Parcel Creation Tools toolbar

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 283 of 390

Insert PI
Select parcel line
Identify location of added PI
Delete PI
Select parcel line
PI nearest to cursor will highlight left-click
Delete Sub-entity
Delete lines
Opens area, could destroy parcels
Parcel Union
Home...Create Design...Parcel...Parcel Creation Tools
Toolbar button just right of center
First select Destination parcel
Second select the parcel to dissolve into the destination
You may need to Delete Sub-entities to clean up leftover boundaries
Area Label
Line and Curve Labels
Single or multiple line/curve labels
Tag labels

140.030 WisDOT standards - parcels

Section updated:

7/1/2010

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

7:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-030-001.mp4

140.030.001

Civil 3D Sites
A site is a container for related data.
Parcels can only be created in sites.
There can be multiple sites in one file or project.
Sites Contain
Name
Description
Alignment (can exist outside of a site)
Feature Lines
Parcels
Parcels and alignments within the same site will affect each other.
No two parcels can occupy the same space, separate them by site or file.
Existing parcels
Proposed parcels
Easement parcels
Alignments created in a site with parcels will automatically split the parcels.
Proposed right-of-way lines in the proposed parcels site
Civil 3D Parcel Properties
Parcel Properties Include:
Name (Limited manual control)
Description
Style
Labels
Area
Segments
User Defined Properties
Civil 3D Parcel User Defined Properties

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 284 of 390

Set Manually
Parcel Number (Name and Schedule of Lands & Interests SLI)
Parcel Address
Parcel Tax ID
WisDOT Specific
Owners Name (SLI)
Volume/Page/Document Number
Utility Name
Utility Volume/Page/Document Number
Existing Right-of-way (SLI)
Interest Required (SLI)
Custom macro to copy
Civil 3D Ultimate Right-of-way
In order to display right-of-way on some sheets (such as cross sections), an ultimate right-of-way alignment must
be created and shared.
The ultimate right-of-way will follow existing and proposed right-of-way lines to make a consecutive line that
can be projected on sheets.
Not in a Site
Alignment(s) data shortcut
WisDOT Drawing File Names and File Management
Project folder (\Lan Drive\C3D\ProjectIDFolder\RW)
Standard Names (FDM 15-5-3)
Rwex.DWG
Rwpl.DWG
Rwpr.DWG
Others
Rwgis.DWG (imported GIS data)
Rwsec.DWG (section lines)
WisDOT Standards
Template WisDOT12.DWT (\Templates\USWI)
Object Styles
Label Styles
Command settings
Layers and Symbology
Site naming - name them what they are:
ROW
Easements
Parcels (automatic) parcel number
Alignments
RWLR# - Right-of-way, left or right, number = RWL4
URWLR# - Ultimate ROW, left or right, number = URWL2
Parcels Need to Know!!!
Sites! No two parcels can occupy the same space and alignments will affect parcels!
Parcels
Must be closed areas or they will not act as a parcel
Parcel areas that over lap will create a third parcel
Select parcels by the area label, the default display is parcel number
Parcels cannot be graphically split and count as one (properties split by highway)

Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 285 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


140.040 Exercise - Create existing base plat

Section updated:

3/19/2013

Exercise project dataset


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/140/140-040-proj-dataset.zip
9:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-040-001.mp4

140.040.001

Begin the Existing Base Plat File


Start a file with the wisdot12.dwt template file.
Optional: Create a shortcut in the open dialog box by dragging the Project folder into the left blue shortcut ar.
Save the new file in the projects RW folder as 81100024-ExistBasePlat.dwg

Connect to the Project


Set the Working Folder
Right-click on the Data Shortcuts area in the Toolspace, Propsector tab.
Browse to where the project folder is stored, and select the c3d folder.
Hint: This is two folders above the Projects _Shortcuts folder.

Set Data Shortcuts Project Folder


Right-click on the Data Shortcuts area in the Toolspace, Prospector tab.
Choose Set Data Shortcuts Project Folder.
Select the Project folders number.

Xref Base Data Files


Attach the Base Files by going to the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach icon.
Browse to the Projects Base Data folder Mapping folder Orig folder.
Select the Base Map.dwg
Set the Reference Type to Overlay
Set the Path Type to Relative
Set the Insertion Point XY and Z to 0s
Set the Scale to 1
Set the Rotation to 0
Zoom Extents to see the file location
Attach the Section Information file
Go to the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach icon.
Browse to the Projects Base Data folder Survey folder
Select the Section Information.dwg
Set the Reference Type to Overlay
Set the Path Type to Relative
Set the Insertion Point XY and Z to 0s
Set the Scale to 1
Set the Rotation to 0

Attach the Data Reference of the Existing ROW Reference Alignments


In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, Under Data Shortcuts, Expand Alignments, and Expand Centerline Alignmetns
Right-click on STH64-ExistingROWRefLine and choose Create Reference.
Accept the defaults unless you have a preference of label set assignment.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, under Data Shortcuts, Alignmetns, Centerline Alignments
Right-click on CTH T-ExistROWRefLine and choose Create Reference
Accept the defaults unless you have a preference of label set assignment.
To prevent accidental updates to the Base Plat File, Promote the data shortcuts into this file
Select the alignment in the file.
From the green context ribbon, Modify panel, choose Promote Data Reference
An alternative method is to select the name of the alignment in the toolspace Prospector tab, right-click
and choose Promote.

Open the Titles and Other Legal Documents


In a Windows Explore window browse to the project folder, Base Data Other folder rw plans 6424 - rwplat
Open the rwplat.pdf file.
In a Windows Explore window browse to the project folder, Base Data Other folder titles folder.
Open the title pdf files.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 286 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

8:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-040-002.mp4

140.040.002

Drawing the ROW Polylines


Turning Off the XREF Fading
Insert tab of the ribbon Reference panel pull-down menu toggle off the XREF Fading.

Set the Layer for the ROW Polylines


Home tab of the ribbon Layers panel upper left icon is Layer Property Manager.
In the left column of the Layer Property Manager, select the Right of Way layer filter.
Scroll though the layers in the right window to find the E_RW_Existing layer.

AutoCAD Editing Commands


Offset the Alignment to the ROW Width
Check the title documents and the rwplat document PDFs to find the ROW distances in the project area.
Start the Offset command
Home tab of the ribbon Modify panel Offset.
Enter 33 for the ROW distance.
Select the ROW Ref Alignment.
Click to the side of the offset.
Repeat this for the appropriate offsets on each side.

Selection Cycling
Turn in the Selection Cycling option at the right end of the status buttons.
Hover the cursor pick-box over the alignment. A blue double box glyph will appear to indicate selection cycling is
on. Left click.
A selection cycling box will open with a list of all of the objects in that selection. Click on the alignment option.

Trimming the Offset Lines


Home tab of the ribbon Modify panel Trim command.
Select the STH64 alignment as the first cutting edge. Click <ENTER>.
Click on the parts of the lines that need to be removed. Click on the offset lines south of the STH64 alignment.
Repeat this for each offset line that needs to be trimmed.
8:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-040-003.mp4

140.040.003

Drawing with Station/Offset


Start the Polyline Command
Start the polyline command.
Home tab of the ribbon Draw panel Polyline command.
The polyline command must be active for the next step, the station/offset transparent command to
begin.

Using the Station/Offset Transparent Command


With the polyline command active click on the station/offset command on the transparent commands toolbar.
Select the STH64 alignment. You may need to use the Selection Cycling to accomplish this.
Type in the first station of the polyline to be drawn. This will be 240+00.
Type in the offset for the first station of the polyline. Offsets to the right are positive and left offsets are negative.
This offset is -50.
Enter the station for where the jog begins. This is station 250+00.
Enter the offset for the beginning of the jog. This will be a straight line from the first offset, -50.
Enter the station of the jog again. This is 250+00.
Enter the jogged offset distance of -80.

Further AutoCAD Editing Tools


Fillet Two ROW Lines to Trim or Extend
Home tab of the ribbon Modify panel Fillet command.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 287 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Make sure the Radius is set to 0.00.


Select the Inside of the first line.
Select the inside of the second line.
Those two lines will be joined together at their common point, as a single polyline.
Repeat this for each corner that you need to extend/trim and that you want to paste together into a continuous
polyline.

Remove All Non-ROW Linework and References


Detach the XREFS
Insert tab of the ribbon Reference panel Options arrow (lower right corner).
Right-click on the XREFd drawings and choose Detach. Repeat this for each XREFd drawing.
Delete the Alignments
Select on the alignments and erase, or delete them.
Final Cleanup
With the references gone review all of the linework and trim/fillet where appropriate.
Save and close the file.

140.050 Exercise - Create proposed r/w geometry

Section updated:

3/19/2013

Exercise project dataset


ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/140/140-050-proj-dataset.zip
5:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-050-000.mp4

140.050.000

Updated Template File Added


Template wisdot12-plat.dwg
Located in USWI folder with other original templates.

Updates in the template


Point Creation Updates
Point Style Updates
Point Labe Style updates

Using the New Template


Start a new file with the template
In the Menu Browser (big A button) choose New.
This allows you to choose a template rather than using a default.
In the dialog open the USWI folder, select on the wisdot12-plat.dwt.
To use the updated points
In the Home tab of the ribbon, Create Ground Data panel, choose the Points flyout menu.
Choose the Point Creation Tools.
In the Point Creation toolbar click the chevron (arrow icon) on the far right of this toolbar.
Expand Default Styles
Select the default styles field, click the ellipsis button.
In the dialog click the list drop down and choose the style of point that is appropriate. There are many new
and more appropriate point styles in this list for plat production workflow.
You can leave the chevron open while you use the point creation toolbar. You can also close the chevron and
still use the point creation tools.
Special Point Styles and Label Styles
The styles with No Plot suffix will appear in the drawing file, but not appear in your plots.
Point styles that are not appropriate for plat development have been removed from this template.
Point styles that are appropriate for plat development have been added to this template. For example, point
styles P MARK Control Point, P MARK GPS Monument, P MARK NGS Monument, etc.
4:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-050-001.mp4

140.050.001

Workflow outline

Creating Proposed ROW Alignments


Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 288 of 390

Begin the Proposed ROW Alignments file


Connect to the Project
Set the Working Folder
Set Data Shortcuts Project Folder
Xref Base Data Files
Commands
XREF
Zoom Extents (double click mouse wheel)
Attach the Data Reference of the Surface
Open the Titles and Other Legal Documents
Rwplat pdf
Title pdfs
Create Proposed ROW alignments
Commands/Tools
Alignment Creation tools
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar
Transparent Command - Station Offset
Endpoint and nearest object snaps

Creating Ultimate ROW Alignments


Begin the Ultimate ROW Alignments file
Create Ultimate ROW alignments
Commands/Tools
Alignment Creation tools
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar
Transparent Command - Station Offset
End point Object Snaps
Create TLE Alignment
Commands/Tools
Alignment Creation tools
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar
Transparent Command - Station Offset
End point Object Snaps
Create Data Shortcuts of Alignments
Create TLE Alignment
Commands/Tools
Alignment Creation tools
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar
Transparent Command - Station Offset
End point Object Snaps
Create Data Shortcuts of Alignments
Creating Takings Parcels
Begin the Takings Parcels file
Connect to the Project
Set the Working Folder
Set Data Shortcuts Project Folder
Xref Base Data Files
Commands
XREF
Zoom Extents (double click mouse wheel)
Create the Takings Parcels by Object
Commands/Tools
BPOLY
Create a Site
Creating the Takings Parcels by Parcel Creation Tools
Commands/Tools
Parcel Layout Tools Toolbar
Fixed Line (Two points)
Create the TLE Parcel by Object
Commands/Tools
BPOLY
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 289 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Editing Parcel Label Styles
Editing Parcel User Defined Properties
Export Parcel Data to Excel for table creation
Commands/Tools
WisDOT Parcel Extract Macro
Create Table in Excel to bring into Civil 3D
Commands/Tools
Paste Special
SC (scale)

Creating Proposed ROW Traverse Alignment


Continue with the Takings Parcels file
Create Proposed ROW Traverse Alignment
Commands/Tools
Alignment Creation tools
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar
Transparent Command - Station Offset
Endpoint and nearest object snaps
Create Points along the Proposed ROW Traverse Alignment
Commands/Tools
Create Points Toolbar
Create Manual Points
Create Points along the TLE Alignment
Commands/Tools
Create Points Toolbar
Create Manual Points
Create Point for the Traverse project start point
Commands/Tools
Create Points Toolbar
Create Manual Points
Create Data Shortcuts of Traverse Alignment
8:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-050-002.mp4

140.050.002

Begin the Proposed ROW Alignments file


Start a file with the wisdot12.dwt template file.
Optional: Create a shortcut in the open dialog box by dragging the Project folder into the left blue shortcut area.
Save the new file in the projects RW folder as 81100024-ProposedROWAlignments.dwg

Connect to the Project


Set the Working Folder
Right-click on the Data Shortcuts area in the Toolspace, Propsector tab.
Browse to where the project folder is stored, and select the c3d folder.
Hint: This is two folders above the Projects _Shortcuts folder.
Set Data Shortcuts Project Folder
Right-click on the Data Shortcuts area in the Toolspace, Prospector tab.
Choose Set Data Shortcuts Project Folder.
Select the Project folders number.

Xref Base Data Files


Key in XREF in the command line, click attach icon on top right of external reference palette
Browse to the Projects RW folder.
Select the 81100024-ExistROWRefLines.dwg
Set the Reference Type to Overlay
Set the Path Type to Relative
Set the Insertion Point XY and Z to 0s
Set the Scale to 1
Set the Rotation to 0
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 290 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


Zoom Extents (double click mouse wheel) to see the file location
Attach the Base Files by going to the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach icon
Browse to the Projects RW folder.
Select the 81100024-ExistBasePlat.dwg
Set the Reference Type to Overlay
Set the Path Type to Relative
Set the Insertion Point XY and Z to 0s
Set the Scale to 1
Set the Rotation to 0

Attach the Data Reference of the Surface


In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, Under Data Shortcuts, Expand Surfaces
Right-click on RoadwayModel-Datum and choose Create Reference.
Change the Style to Slope Intercept.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, under Data Shortcuts, Alignments, Centerline Alignments
Right-click on STH64-ProposedROWRefLine and choose Create Reference
Accept the defaults unless you have a preference of label set assignment.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, under Data Shortcuts, Alignments, Centerline Alignments
Right-click on STH64-ProposedROWRefLine and choose Create Reference
Accept the defaults unless you have a preference of label set assignment.
Hint: Toggle off show and hide Lineweight to seethe lines as all same thickness/weight
Save the file.
20:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-050-003.mp4

140.050.003

Continue with Proposed ROW Alignments file


Continuing from the previous exercise with the 81100024-ProposedROWAlignment.dwg file

Open the Titles and Other Legal Documents


In a Windows Explore window browse to the project folder, Base Data Other folder rw plans 6424 - rwplat
Open the rwplat.pdf file.
In a Windows Explore window browse to the project folder, Base Data Other folder titles folder.
Open the title pdf files.

Create Proposed ROW Alignment Southwest


Home tab of the ribbon Create Design panel Alignment drop down Alignment Creation Tools
Create Alignment Layout dialog opens.
Name Proposed ROW RT Southwest.
Type - Miscellaneous.
Site None
Alignment Style RW Proposed
Alignment Layer P_RW-Base
Alignment Label Set - _No Labels
Click Ok
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar
Draw Tangent Tangent (No Curves)
Start the Transparent Command Station Offset
Hint: If you dont see the Transparent Command Toolbar go to the View Tab
Toolbars dropdown Civil fly out Check Transparent Commands
Select STH 64 Alignment Enter Station 260+00 offset to Existing ROW line Enter station
262+00 offset 75 station 264+50 offset 75 hit escape once to get out of the Transparent
command and escape a second time to get out of the draw tangent command Select the
Tangent Tangent (No Curves) - Select Station Offset Transparent Command again and select
CTH T for the alignment Turn object snaps on and select endpoint snap to the endpoint
where we left of in the last command snap that point a second time for the offset enter station
98+00 select nearest to Existing ROW line.

Create Proposed ROW Alignment Northwest


Home tab of the ribbon Create Design panel Alignment drop down Alignment Creation Tools
Create Alignment Layout dialog opens.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 291 of 390

Name Proposed ROW LT Northwest.


Type - Miscellaneous.
Site None
Alignment Style RW Proposed
Alignment Layer P_RW-Base
Alignment Label Set - _No Labels
Click Ok
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar
Draw Tangent Tangent (No Curves)
Start the Transparent Command Station Offset
Hint: If you dont see the Transparent Command Toolbar go to the View Tab
Toolbars dropdown Civil fly out Check Transparent Commands
Select STH 64 Alignment Enter Station 261+00 offset to Existing ROW line Enter station
262+00 offset (-100) station 264+00 offset (-100) hit escape once to get out of the
Transparent command and escape a second time to get out of the draw tangent command
Select the Tangent Tangent (No Curves) Select the endpoint of the alignment to continue,
Select Station Offset Transparent Command again and select CTH T for the alignment - enter
station 102+25 select nearest to Existing ROW line for the offset.

Create Proposed ROW Alignment Northeast


Home tab of the ribbon Create Design panel Alignment drop down Alignment Creation Tools
Create Alignment Layout dialog opens.
Name Proposed ROW LT Northeast.
Type - Miscellaneous.
Site None
Alignment Style RW Proposed
Alignment Layer P_RW-Base
Alignment Label Set - _No Labels
Click Ok
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar
Draw Tangent Tangent (No Curves)
Start the Transparent Command Station Offset
Hint: If you dont see the Transparent Command Toolbar go to the View Tab
Toolbars dropdown Civil fly out Check Transparent Commands
Select STH 64 Alignment Enter Station 102+25 offset to Existing ROW line Enter station
101+50 offset 40 hit escape once to get out of the Transparent command and escape a
second time to get out of the draw tangent command Select the Tangent Tangent (No
Curves) Select the endpoint of the alignment to continue, Select Station Offset Transparent
Command again and select STH 64 for the alignment - enter station 266+70 select nearest to
Existing ROW line for the offset.

Create Proposed ROW Alignment Southeast


Home tab of the ribbon Create Design panel Alignment drop down Alignment Creation Tools
Create Alignment Layout dialog opens.
Name Proposed ROW RT Southeast.
Type - Miscellaneous.
Site None
Alignment Style RW Proposed
Alignment Layer P_RW-Base
Alignment Label Set - _No Labels
Click Ok
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar
Draw Tangent Tangent (No Curves)
Start the Transparent Command Station Offset
Hint: If you dont see the Transparent Command Toolbar go to the View Tab
Toolbars dropdown Civil fly out Check Transparent Commands
Select STH 64 Alignment Enter Station 269+00 offset to Existing ROW line Enter station
268+00 offset 90 Enter station 266+80 offset 90 - hit escape once to get out of the
Transparent command and escape a second time to get out of the draw tangent command
Select the Tangent Tangent (No Curves) Select the endpoint of the alignment to continue,
Select Station Offset Transparent Command again and select CTH T for the alignment - enter
station 98+00 select nearest to Existing ROW line for the offset.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

Page 292 of 390

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual


7:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-050-004.mp4

140.050.004

Begin the Ultimate ROW Alignments file


Continue with the ProposedROWAlignments.dwg from the previous exercise.

Create Ultimate ROW Alignment Southwest


Home tab of the ribbon Create Design panel Alignment drop down Alignment Creation Tools
Create Alignment Layout dialog opens.
Name Ultimate ROW RT Southwest.
Type - Miscellaneous.
Site None
Alignment Style RW Ultimate
Alignment Layer P_RW-Ultimate
Alignment Label Set - _No Labels
Click Ok
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar
Draw Tangent Tangent (No Curves)
Hint: Use Endpoint Snaps to snap to each vertex.
Trace Existing ROW linework until it meets the Proposed ROW Alignment, then trace the
Proposed ROW Alignment until it meets back up with the Existing ROW linework, then trace the
existing ROW linework to the end.

Create Ultimate ROW Alignment Northwest


Home tab of the ribbon Create Design panel Alignment drop down Alignment Creation Tools
Create Alignment Layout dialog opens.
Name Ultimate ROW LT Northwest.
Type - Miscellaneous.
Site None
Alignment Style RW Ultimate
Alignment Layer P_RW-Ultimate
Alignment Label Set - _No Labels
Click Ok
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar
Draw Tangent Tangent (No Curves)
Hint: Use Endpoint Snaps to snap to each vertex.
Trace Existing ROW linework until it meets the Proposed ROW Alignment, then trace the Proposed
ROW Alignment until it meets back up with the Existing ROW linework, then trace the existing ROW
linework to the end.

Create Ultimate ROW Alignment Northeast


Home tab of the ribbon Create Design panel Alignment drop down Alignment Creation Tools
Create Alignment Layout dialog opens.
Name Ultimate ROW LT Northeast.
Type - Miscellaneous.
Site None
Alignment Style RW Ultimate
Alignment Layer P_RW-Ultimate
Alignment Label Set - _No Labels
Click Ok
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar
Draw Tangent Tangent (No Curves)
Hint: Use Endpoint Snaps to snap to each vertex.
Trace Existing ROW linework until it meets the Proposed ROW Alignment, then trace the Proposed
ROW Alignment until it meets back up with the Existing ROW linework, then trace the existing ROW
linework to the end.

Create Ultimate ROW Alignment Southeast


Home tab of the ribbon Create Design panel Alignment drop down Alignment Creation Tools
Create Alignment Layout dialog opens.
Name Ultimate ROW RT Southeast.
Manual last updated:

7/3/2015

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual

Page 293 of 390

Type - Miscellaneous.
Site None
Alignment Style RW Ultimate
Alignment Layer P_RW-Ultimate
Alignment Label Set - _No Labels
Click Ok
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar
Draw Tangent Tangent (No Curves)
Hint: Use Endpoint Snaps to snap to each vertex.
Trace Existing ROW linework until it meets the Proposed ROW Alignment, then trace the Proposed
ROW Alignment until it meets back up with the Existing ROW linework, then trace the existing ROW
linework to the end.
Save your drawing.

Create TLE Alignment


Home tab of the ribbon Create Design panel Alignment drop down Alignment Creation Tools
Create Alignment Layout dialog opens.
Name TLE 1.
Type - Miscellaneous.
Site None
Alignment Style RW Temp Limited Easement
Alignment Layer P_RW-Base
Alignment Label Set - _No Labels
Click Ok
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar
Draw Tangent Tangent (No Curves)
Start the Transparent Command Station Offset
Hint: If you dont see the Transparent Command Toolbar go to the View Tab
Toolbars dropdown Civil fly out Check Transparent Commands
Select STH 64 Alignment Enter Station 262+50 offset to 75 Enter station 262+50 offset
125 station 263+00 offset 125 station 263+00 offset 75 hit escape once to get out of the
Transparent command and select the endpoint to close the alignment

Create Data Shortcuts of Alignments


Toolspace Prospector Tab Data Shortcuts Rt. Click Select Create Data Shortcuts
Create Create Data Shortcuts Dialog opens.
Check all alignments that apply.
13:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-050-005.mp4

140.050.005

Begin the Takings Parcels file


Start a file with the wisdot12.dwt template file.
Optiona